Yamaha T-960II El manual del propietario

PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION

Owner’s Manual

Keep This Manual For Future Reference.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with

these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may

cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all

installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the

problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on

different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in

is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer

authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service

Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED

IMPORTANT

THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN

ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:

GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may

not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in

your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be

connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E

or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN and YELLOW.

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA KEMBLE

MUSIC (U.K.) LTD.

ADVARSEL!

Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig

håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri

af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte

batteri tilbage til leverandoren.

VARNING

Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd

samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som

rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.

Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens

instruktion.

VAROITUS

Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti

asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan

laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä

käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden

mukaisesti.

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol

within an equilateral triangle is intended to

alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufficient magni-

tude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilat-

eral triangle is intended to alert the user to

the presence of important operating and

maintenance (servicing) instructions in the

literature accompanying the product.

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

The above warning is located on the

rear of the unit.

NEDERLAND THE NETHERLANDS

● Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen

back-up.

● Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de

batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde

van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service

Afdeiing:

Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing

Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT

Tel. 030-2828425

● Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.

● This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory

back-up.

● For the removal of the battery at the moment of the

disposal at the end of the service life please consult your

retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows:

Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center

Address: Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL

UTRECHT

Tel: 030-2828425

● Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small

chemical waste.

Important

Read the following before oper-

ating the AW2816

■

Warnings

• Do not place a container with liquid or small

metal objects on top of this unit. Liquid or metal

objects inside this unit are a ﬁre and electrical

shock hazard.

• Do not allow water to enter this unit or allow the

unit to become wet. Fire or electrical shock may

result.

• Connect this unit’s power cord only to an AC out-

let of the type stated in this Owner’s Manual or as

marked on the unit. Failure to do so is a ﬁre and

electrical shock hazard.

• Do not scratch, bend, twist, pull, or heat the

power cord. A damaged power cord is a ﬁre and

electrical shock hazard.

• Do not place heavy objects, including this unit, on

top of the power cord. A damaged power cord is a

ﬁre and electrical shock hazard. In particular, be

careful not to place heavy objects on a power cord

covered by a carpet.

• To avoid possible electrical shock, do not install

an I/O card, hard disk, or CD-RW drive in the unit

while the power cable is connected to the AC out-

let.

• Use the ground connector on the rear panel to

securely ground the device. If the device is not

grounded, you may suffer a dangerous electrical

shock.

• If you notice any abnormality, such as smoke,

odor, or noise, or if a foreign object or liquid gets

inside the unit, turn it off immediately. Remove the

power cord from the AC outlet. Consult your

dealer for repair. Using the unit in this condition is

a ﬁre and electrical shock hazard.

• Should this unit be dropped or the cabinet be

damaged, turn the power switch off, remove the

power plug from the AC outlet, and contact your

dealer. If you continue using the unit without

heeding this instruction, ﬁre or electrical shock

may result.

• If the power cord is damaged (i.e., cut or a bare

wire is exposed), ask your dealer for a replace-

ment. Using the unit with a damaged power cord

is a ﬁre and electrical shock hazard.

• Do not modify the unit. Doing so is a ﬁre and elec-

trical shock hazard.

• Do not apply force to, disassemble, or modify the

I/O card, the PC board of the hard disk, or the con-

nectors on the unit. Otherwise, malfunction, ﬁre,

or electrical shock may result.

• If lightning begins to occur, turn off the power

switch of the unit as soon as possible, and unplug

the power cable plug from the electrical outlet.

• If there is a possibility of lightning, do not touch

the power cable plug if it is still connected. Doing

so may be an electrical shock hazard.

■

Cautions

• This unit has ventilation holes at the bottom to pre-

vent the internal temperature rising too high. Do

not block them. Blocked ventilation holes are a

ﬁre hazard.

• Hold the power cord plug when disconnecting it

from an AC outlet. Never pull the cord. A dam-

aged power cord is a potential ﬁre and electrical

shock hazard.

• Do not touch the power plug with wet hands.

Doing so is a potential electrical shock hazard.

• Always touch a well-grounded metal surface or

the like to fully discharge any static electric charge

on your body and clothing before handling an I/O

card or hard disk.

Neglecting this precaution can cause damage to

the unit from static electricity.

• Be careful not to touch the leads (metal feet) on

the rear side when handling an I/O card or hard

disk. Touching the leads can cause contact defects.

• Use only the included power supply cable for this

unit. Using other types may be a ﬁre hazard.

■

Operating Notes

• The digital circuits of this unit may induce a slight

noise into nearby radios and TVs. If noise occurs,

relocate the affected equipment.

• Using a mobile telephone near this unit may

induce noise. If noise occurs, use the telephone

away from the unit.

• XLR-type connectors are wired as follows:

pin 1: ground, pin 2: hot (+), and pin 3: cold (–).

• Insert TRS phone jacks are wired as follows:

sleeve: ground, tip: send, and ring: return.

• If the message “LOW BATTERY” appears when

you turn on this unit, contact your dealer as soon

as possible about replacing the internal data

backup battery.

We recommend that you save the data on CD-RW

drive or external SCSI device before replacing the

battery.

• The performance of components with moving

contacts, such switches, rotary controls, faders,

and connectors, deteriorates over time. The rate of

deterioration depends on the operating environ-

ment and is unavoidable. Consult your dealer

about replacing defective components.

Handling the CD-R/RW media

Please observe the following points when handling

the disk.

Failure to do so may cause problems such as the

recorded data being lost, the drive to malfunction, or

the printed label to become blurred.

• Do not place the disk in locations of direct sun-

light, high temperature, or high humidity.

• Do not touch either surface of the disk.

• Hold the disk at the edges. Gently wipe dust or

dirt off of the recording surface of the disk.

• Do not wipe the disk with chemicals or deter-

gents.

• Do not bend or drop the disk.

• Use an air duster or cleaner to remove dust. Vigor-

ously rubbing the surface of the disk with a dry

cloth may scratch the disk.

• Do not write on the disk or afﬁx labels to it.

Storing produced data

Produced data can be lost due to breakdown or mis-

taken operation. We recommend that you store all

important data on CD-R or CD-RW disks or other

external storage medium.

Responsibility for loss of data,

etc.

• Yamaha will accept no responsibility for any dam-

ages (including consequential or incidental)

incurred by the customer or any third party as a

result of loss or impairment of the data stored on

the CD-R media, regardless of whether such loss

could have been or actually was foreseen by

Yamaha.

• Nor does Yamaha guarantee the media against any

defect that may render it unusable.

Cautions for handling optional

equipment

• For inquiries concerning I/O card, hard disk, or

CD-RW drive handling, please consult your

Yamaha dealer.

• Always switch off the power for the main unit and

all peripherals, unplug the power cord for the

main unit from the outlet, then disconnect the

cables connecting the main unit with the peripher-

als before starting installation work.

• Wear thick gloves when working on this equip-

ment to avoid cutting your hands on metal ﬁttings

or the like on the main unit, I/O card, hard disk, or

CD-RW drive.

• Always touch a well-grounded metal surface or

the like to fully discharge any static electric charge

on your body and clothing before starting to work

on this equipment.

• Take extreme care to avoid touching any terminals

or board surface parts.

• In order to protect the electronic circuits of the I/O

card, hard disk, CD-RW drive, etc. from damage

due to static electricity, when handling any of this

equipment, take the most extreme care to avoid

touching IC leads or other electronic parts.

• Be careful not to drop any screws into the main

unit. If you switch the power on with a dropped

screw still in the main unit, the main unit may

malfunction or break down. If a dropped screw

can not be retrieved, consult your Yamaha dealer.

• If the hard disk or CD-RW drive breaks down, con-

tact the store where you purchased that equip-

ment.

Except for duplication for personal use or when there

is no copyright problem, the duplication or transfer of

commercially sold music/sound data without the per-

mission of the copyright holder is prohibited. When

using this equipment, please consult with a copyright

specialist.

■

Warning

The Yamaha Professional Audio Workstation is

designed to be used professionally and responsibly by

recording industry professionals. The reproduction,

distribution, or, in some instances, the public perfor-

mance, of all or a portion of a sound recording or

musical composition protected by copyright, without

having obtained a proper license from the relevant

ment and may otherwise violate copyright laws and

other laws. In addition, laws (such as the Audio Home

Recording Act and the Digital Millennium Copyright

Act in USA) contain certain restrictions and require-

ments that may apply to your use of works protected

by copyright and related information and data that

may accompany such works. Violation of such laws

may result in civil remedies and, in some cases, crim-

inal liability.

Because violations of copyright laws may be serious

offenses, you should consult a lawyer familiar with

the law of copyright, including all laws that may be

applicable to your use of the Workstation (such as the

Audio Home Recording Act and the Digital Millen-

nium Copyright Act in USA), if you have any ques-

tions regarding your intended use of all or parts of

sound recordings or musical compositions protected

by copyright.

Table of contents

—Operation section—

Before you begin.....................1

Checking the included items ...................1

Installing an internal hard disk ................2

About the internal hard disk..........................2

Installation ....................................................2

Installing a CD-RW drive.........................4

About the CD-RW drives ..............................4

CD-RW drive settings ...................................4

Installation procedure ...................................5

Removing the transport protection pad...7

Manual eject (emergency disc removal) .......7

Attaching an external SCSI device...........8

About external SCSI devices .........................8

Connection procedure..................................8

Installing I/O card .................................10

About I/O cards ..........................................10

Installation procedure .................................10

Please observe the following points.......11

Turning the power on .................................11

Setting the internal clock ............................11

Turning the power off .................................12

Chapter1

Parts and their functions

Top panel...............................................13

Analog input/output section........................13

WORK NAVIGATE section.........................14

UNIT section ..............................................14

MIXER section.............................................14

FADER MODE section................................15

MIXING LAYER section ..............................15

Fader section ..............................................16

Display section ...........................................17

REC TRACK SELECT section .......................18

RECORDER section ....................................18

AUTOMATION section..............................19

SCENE MEMORY section ...........................19

CURSOR/JOG&SHUTTLE section...............19

LOCATE section..........................................20

Transport section ........................................21

Rear panel..............................................22

Front panel ............................................24

Chapter2

Welcome to the world

of the AW2816..........25

Features of the AW2816........................25

Mixer section..............................................25

Recorder section.........................................25

CD-RW drive (option).................................26

Other features.............................................26

Signal flow within the AW2816.............27

Input patch .................................................27

Input channels 1–8 .....................................28

Return channels 1/2....................................29

Recorder input patch ..................................29

Monitor channels 1–16...............................30

Digital cascade connection.........................30

Oscillator....................................................30

Stereo output channel.................................31

Buses 1–8 ...................................................31

AUX buses 1–6 ...........................................31

Output patch ..............................................32

Internal effects 1/2 ......................................32

Monitor output/headphone output..............32

The track structure of the AW2816.......33

Audio tracks................................................33

Virtual tracks...............................................33

The stereo track ..........................................33

About the display...................................34

Cursor.........................................................34

Buttons........................................................35

Knobs/faders/numerical boxes ....................35

Tabs............................................................35

Basic operation of the AW2816 ............36

Accessing screens and pages ......................36

Switching a button on/off............................36

Editing the value of a fader/knob/numerical

box............................................................36

Using the additional function buttons.........37

Inputting text...............................................37

Selecting a channel.....................................38

Chapter3

Let’s record on the

AW2816 .................... 41

Connections and setup ..........................41

Making connections ...................................41

Creating a new song ...................................42

Word clock settings ....................................44

Recording the first track ........................46

Setting the input level .................................46

Pairing two channels...................................47

Patching input signals to recorder inputs ....48

Adjusting the monitor level.........................50

Recording ...................................................51

Recording additional tracks

(Overdubbing)......................................52

Setting the input level .................................52

Patching the input signal to the recorder input

.........................52

Adjusting the monitor level.........................54

Applying the equalizer to the input signal...54

Applying the dynamics processor to the input

signal.........................................................55

Recording ...................................................57

Mixing to the stereo track (Mixdown) ...58

Adjusting the mix balance ..........................58

Using the internal effects.............................59

Recording on the stereo track .....................60

Saving your song....................................62

Advanced techniques on the AW2816 ..63

Manually re-recording only a specific area

(Manual Punch-in/out)...............................63

Automatically re-recording only a specific area

(Auto Punch-in/out) ...................................64

Switching virtual tracks...............................66

Operating multiple faders together

(Fader Groups)...........................................67

Operating multiple [ON] keys together

(Mute Groups) ...........................................68

Using the Solo function ..............................69

Chapter4

Input/output patching

Assigning signals to input channels/return

channels (Input Patch)..........................71

Assigning signals to the recorder inputs

(Recorder Input Patch).........................73

Assigning signals to output jacks/output

channels (Output Patch) ......................74

Using the patch library ..........................76

Storing the patching settings to the library ..76

Recalling patching settings from the library 77

Inserting an external effect into a channel

.......................78

Quickly assigning input signals to tracks

(Quick Rec) ..........................................80

Chapter5

Using the internal

effects....................... 83

About the internal effects ......................83

Using AUX send/return to apply an effect

Check the patching.....................................84

Recalling an effect program from the library

Switching between pre-fader/post-fader......86

Adjusting the return level............................87

Adjusting the send level..............................87

Inserting an effect into a specific channel

...................... 88

Change the patching.................................. 88

Inserting the effect into a channel .............. 88

Recalling an effect program ....................... 89

Applying effects while you record ........ 90

Change the patching.................................. 90

Insert the effect into a channel................... 90

Start recording............................................ 91

Adjusting the effect parameters............ 92

Saving an effect program ...................... 93

Chapter6

Transport/Locate

operations.................95

Transport key functions ........................ 95

Fast forward-play/Fast reverse-play

(the Shuttle function)........................... 95

Searching for a point while you listen

(the Nudge function) ........................... 96

Searching for a point while viewing the

waveform............................................. 97

Rewinding for a specific distance

(Rollback) ............................................ 98

Repeatedly playing a specified region

(A-B Repeat) ........................................ 99

Locating to a specified point............... 100

Locating to the zero location of the counter

.................... 101

Setting the relative time zero location...... 101

Using various locate points to locate.. 102

Using markers to locate...................... 103

Editing the location of a locate point or

marker ............................................... 104

The relation between the Start point and time

code ....................................................... 105

Deleting a locate point/marker........... 106

Deleting from within the screen............... 106

Deleting by using key operations............. 106

Chapter7

Editing tracks and

virtual tracks...........107

Editing tracks and virtual tracks.......... 107

Tracks, parts, and regions ................... 108

Naming a track or region.................... 109

Editing a virtual track name ..................... 109

Editing a region name .............................. 110

Editing the audio data of tracks 1–16 . 111

Editing entire Tracks................................. 111

Editing by Part.......................................... 113

Editing by Region..................................... 114

Editing the audio data of virtual tracks

1–8..................................................... 116

Editing commands............................... 118

Commands and parameters of the TRACK

menu...................................................... 118

Commands and parameters of the PART

menu...................................................... 121

Commands and parameters of the REGION

menu...................................................... 125

Chapter8

Scene memory

operations...............127

About scene memories........................ 127

Parameters included in a scene................ 127

About scene numbers .............................. 127

Storing a scene.................................... 128

Storing a scene by operations in the screen

128

Storing a scene by key operations............ 128

Recalling a scene................................. 129

Recalling a scene by operations in the screen

...................... 129

Recalling a scene by key operations ........ 129

vii

Table of contents

Using the internal hard disk/

external storage devices

MIDI

Other functions

Managing songs

Using automix

Scene memory operations

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

Transport/Locate operations

Using the internal effects

Input/output patching

Let’s record on the AW2816

Welcome to the world of the AW2816

Parts and their functions

Before you begin

Mastering

Editing the name of a scene ................ 130

Protecting a scene............................... 131

Changing the order of scenes ............. 132

Chapter9

Using automix .........133

About automix .................................... 133

What is automix?......................................133

What can be recorded in automix?...........133

How the automix is related to the song ....133

Creating a new automix...................... 134

Recording and playing an automix ..... 135

Recording fader operations in the automix135

Playing back the automix .........................136

Recording additional fader operations of other

channels..................................................137

Recording additional mix elements .... 138

Re-recording only part of the automix

(Punch-in/out) ................................... 139

Re-recording fader operations............ 141

Editing individual automix events....... 143

Storing an automix.............................. 145

Recalling an automix .......................... 146

Chapter10

Managing songs.....147

About songs ........................................ 147

What is a song?.........................................147

Song structure...........................................147

Song recording time..................................147

Saving the current song ...................... 148

Loading a song .................................... 149

Editing the song name/comment ........ 150

Protecting a song ................................ 151

Duplicating a song.............................. 152

Deleting an unwanted song ................ 153

Deleting unused audio data from a song

(Optimize) ......................................... 154

Importing mixer data from an existing song

.................... 155

Importing tracks from an existing song156

Chapter11

Using the internal hard

disk/external storage

devices ...................159

Formatting the internal hard disk ....... 159

Formatting an external drive .............. 160

Erasing CD-RW media ........................ 161

Backing up songs ................................ 162

Selecting the backup format for a removable

drive........................................................162

Executing the backup ...............................162

Restoring backup data ........................ 164

Tidying up the data of the internal hard disk

(Defrag) ............................................. 166

Writing a track to a WAV file

(Exporting a WAV file) ...................... 167

Cautions when writing to a WAV file .......167

Checking the free space on the internal hard

disk .........................................................167

Exporting tracks to WAV files ...................168

Exporting virtual tracks to WAV files ........171

Loading a WAV file into a track

(Importing a WAV file)...................... 172

Loading CD audio into a track

(CD-DA Import) ................................ 174

Enabling CD-DA loading..........................174

Loading CD-DA data and assigning it to a track

.......................175

Playing an audio CD (CD Play)........... 177

Chapter12

Mastering...............179

About mastering ................................. 179

Stereo tracks that can be mastered..... 179

Media that can be used with the CD-RW

drive .................................................. 179

Track At Once and Disc At Once....... 180

Checking the free space on the internal

hard disk............................................ 181

Setting the mastering mode ................ 181

Executing mastering............................ 182

Finalizing a disc .................................. 185

Chapter13

MIDI....................... 187

What you can do using MIDI.............. 187

MIDI connectors and the TO HOST

connector .......................................... 188

Using the MIDI connectors to connect the

AW2816 to external devices ............. 189

Making connections .................................189

Enabling the MIDI IN connector and MIDI

OUT/THRU connector............................189

Using the TO HOST connector to connect

the AW2816 and your computer....... 190

Making connections .................................190

Enabling the TO HOST connector............190

Using MTC to synchronize the AW2816

and an external device....................... 192

Using MIDI clock to synchronize the

AW2816 and an external device ....... 194

Using MMC to control the AW2816... 196

Synchronizing two AW2816 units ...... 197

Remotely switching AW2816 scenes.. 200

Controlling AW2816 parameters from an

external device .................................. 202

Using control changes to operate parameters

.......................202

Using system exclusive to operate parameters

.......................204

Remotely controlling an external MIDI

device ................................................ 206

About the MIDI Remote function..............206

Using the default MIDI Remote settings....207

Assigning MIDI messages to faders...........208

Assigning MIDI messages to the [ON] keys

210

Sending the AW2816’s internal settings via

MIDI (Bulk Dump)............................. 212

Chapter14

Other functions..... 215

Assigning a functions to the [CTRL] key +

function keys ..................................... 215

Making fine adjustments to the pitch of an

entire song (Vari-pitch)...................... 217

Saving channel settings (Channel Library)

.................... 218

Storing channel settings in a library ..........218

Recalling channel settings from a library ..219

Editing the title of a channel library ..........219

Saving equalizer settings (EQ Library) 220

Storing EQ settings in a library..................220

Recalling EQ settings from a library..........221

Editing the title of an EQ library................221

Storing dynamics processor settings

(Dynamics Library)............................ 222

Storing dynamics processor settings in a library

.......................222

Recalling dynamics processor settings from a

library......................................................223

Editing the title of a dynamics library........223

Copying attenuator settings to all channels

.................... 224

Copying delay time/phase settings to all

channels............................................. 225

Copying pan settings to all channels... 226

Copying fade times to all channels ..... 226

Dithering digital signals ...................... 227

Using the test tone oscillator .............. 228

Using the metronome ......................... 229

Mixing and recording multiple channels

230

Pingpong-recording multiple tracks to one

or two tracks...................................... 232

Table of contents

viii

Table of contents

—Reference section—

How to read the Reference section .... 236

SONG screen........................237

Song List page ..................................... 237

Setting page......................................... 238

Song Edit page..................................... 240

Tempo Map page ................................ 241

Shut Down page.................................. 243

FILE screen...........................244

Backup page........................................ 244

Restore page........................................ 246

Disk Util. page .................................... 248

CD screen ............................250

CD Write page.................................... 250

CD Play page ...................................... 252

QUICK REC screen................254

Quick Rec page................................... 254

SETUP screen .......................256

D.in Setup page................................... 256

Monitor page ...................................... 258

Dither Out page.................................. 259

Dither TRK page.................................. 260

Solo Setup page................................... 261

UTILITY screen.....................263

Oscillator page.................................... 263

Prefer.1 page....................................... 264

Prefer. 2 page...................................... 266

Prefer. 3 page...................................... 268

CTRL Key Asgn. page .......................... 270

MIDI screen .........................272

MIDI Setup 1 page.............................. 272

MIDI Setup 2 page.............................. 275

PGM Asgn. page.................................. 276

CTL Asgn. page ................................... 277

Bulk Dump page ................................. 281

PATCH screen ......................283

Patch IN page ..................................... 283

Patch OUT page.................................. 284

Patch Lib page..................................... 286

Plug-in page ........................................ 287

VIEW screen ........................288

CH View page..................................... 288

Library page ........................................ 291

PAN/ROUTE screen..............293

Pan 1–8/Pan MONI page.................... 293

Pair page ............................................. 295

EQ/ATT/GRP screen ............296

EQ/Att page ........................................ 296

Library page ........................................ 298

Fader Grp page ................................... 300

Mute Grp page.................................... 301

DYN/DLY screen..................302

Dyn. Edit page..................................... 302

Library page........................................ 304

Dly/ø1–8/Dly/øMONI page ............... 306

AUX1–AUX4 screens............307

Pre/Pst page........................................ 307

AUX5/EFF1, AUX6/EFF2

screens ................................309

Eff. Edit page ....................................... 309

Library page........................................ 311

Pre/Pst page........................................ 313

REMOTE screen....................314

Remote A–Remote D pages ................ 314

HOME screen .......................318

IN/Rtn/MONI page............................. 318

Bus page.............................................. 319

Omni/ST page..................................... 320

Option page........................................ 321

TRACK screen ......................322

TR View page...................................... 322

V. Track page...................................... 324

Stereo page ......................................... 325

Mark Adj. page.................................... 327

EDIT screen..........................329

TR Edit page........................................ 329

V.TR Edit page..................................... 331

CD Import page .................................. 333

WavImport page................................. 335

TR Import page ................................... 337

AUTOMIX screen .................338

Main page ........................................... 338

Memory page...................................... 341

Fader Edit page ................................... 343

Event List page .................................... 344

SCENE screen .......................346

Scene Mem page................................. 346

Fade Time page................................... 348

RCL. Safe page .................................... 349

Sort page............................................. 350

METER screen ......................351

Meter 1 page....................................... 351

Meter 2 page....................................... 353

SONG screen

FILE screen

CD screen

QUICK REC screen

SETUP screen

UTILITY screen

MIDI screen

PATCH screen

VIEW screen

PAN/ROUTE screen

EQ/ATT/GRP screen

DYN/DLY screen

AUX1–AUX4 screens

AUX5/EFF1, AUX6/EFF2 screens

REMOTE screen

HOME screen

METER screen

SCENE screen

AUTOMIX screen

EDIT screen

TRACK screen

Table of contents

—Appendix—

Preset EQ Program Parameters........... 356

Preset Effects Programs....................... 360

Effects Parameters............................... 362

Dynamics Processors .......................... 377

Preset Dynamics Programs .......................377

Preset Dynamics Program Parameters 382

Troubleshooting.................................. 388

Display message list............................ 392

Messages ..................................................392

Popup messages .......................................394

Messages at power-on ..............................395

Specifications...................................... 396

General Specifications..............................396

Mixer section............................................397

Recorder section.......................................399

Controls....................................................400

Control I/O ...............................................400

Dimensions ......................................... 401

MIDI data format................................ 402

MIDI Implementation Chart ............. 414

Index....................................415

Block diagram

Appendix Index

Before you begin

Operation section

Before you begin

This chapter explains preparations you need to make before using the

AW2816, such as checking the included items and installing options.

Checking the included items

Please make sure that the package contains the fol-

lowing items. If any items are missing, please contact

your dealer.

• AW2816 mixer/recorder unit: 1

• Owner’s manual (this document): 1

• Tutorial: 1

• Power supply cable: 1

• CD-ROM: 1

• Screws for installing 2.5 inch hard disk/CD-RW

drive: 8

■ Copyright

No part of the AW2816 software or the manuals may

be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any

means without the prior written authorization of

Yamaha Corporation.

■ Trademarks

ADAT MultiChannel Optical Digital Interface is a

trademark and ADAT and Alesis are registered trade-

marks of Alesis Corporation. Apple and Macintosh are

registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Tascam

Digital Interface is a trademark and Tascam and Teac

are registered trademarks of Teac Corporation.

MS-DOS is a registered trademark and Windows is a

trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Yamaha is a

trademark of Yamaha Corporation. All other trade-

marks are the property of their respective holders and

are hereby acknowledged.

Yamaha website

<http://www.yamaha.co.jp/product/proaudio/

homeenglish/>

Before you begin

Operation section

Installing an internal hard disk

You must install a hard disk in the AW2816 before using it. If you attempt to use the

AW2816 without installing a hard disk, the recorder section and mixer section will

fail to operate correctly, and the AW2816 will be damaged as well.

About the internal hard disk

On the AW2816, all data necessary for reproducing a

composition (mixer settings, recorder settings, audio

data etc.) is stored on the hard disk as a “song.”

An internal hard disk is installed by attaching it to the

inside of the hard disk cover plate located on the bot-

tom panel of the AW2816. Hard disks with the follow-

ing speciﬁcations can be used.

• Type: IDE 2.5 inch (attachment location con-

forms to SFF-8201)

• Thickness: no particular limitation

• Capacity: no particular limitation (however, the

AW2816 can use a maximum capacity of 64 GB)

• Models known to work: consult your local

Yamaha distributor or refer to the website at the

following URL.

<http://www.aw2816.com/>

• By “models known to work,” we mean commercially

available models that Yamaha has obtained, installed

in the AW2816, and successfully tested by means of

various operational tests. However, we cannot take

into account slight differences in performance that

may occur due to the manufacturing tolerances of

each manufacturer.

• Hard disks are precision devices. Strong physical

shock, magnetism, static electricity, or excessive cur-

rent etc. can damage the data on a hard disk. You

must use media such as an external SCSI device or

CD-RW to backup your important musical data.

• Please be aware that Yamaha Corporation will

accept no responsibility for any damages, neither

direct nor indirect, resulting from the use of any of

the above hard disks.

Installation

Please read and observe the cautions on installing

optional equipment listed at the beginning of this

manual.

The following steps describe the procedure by which

the 2.5 inch IDE hard disk is attached to the hard disk

cover plate located on the bottom of the AW2816 for

installation.

• Hard disks are precision devices. Do not subject

them to physical shock or static electricity, etc.

• Do not place a hard disk nearby devices that pro-

duce a strong magnetic ﬁeld, or in locations of

extreme cold, heat, or moisture.

• Before you handle a hard disk, touch your hand to a

grounded metallic object to release any static

charge that may be present in your body or clothing.

If you fail to do so, static electricity may damage the

hard disk.

• Never attempt to disassemble a hard disk or apply

excessive force to it.

• In order to install the internal hard disk, you will

need to turn the AW2816 upside down. Please make

sure that your work surface is spacious enough.

• The AW2816 is shipped with four screws for attach-

ing a 2.5 inch hard disk, and four screws for attach-

ing a CD-RW drive, making a total of eight included

screws of the same type.

You will need the following items.

• The AW2816 itself

• A 2.5 inch IDE hard disk (sold separately) for

installation

• Four screws included with the AW2816 for

attaching the 2.5 inch hard disk

• A philips (+) screwdriver

• Work surface

Make sure that the power of the AW2816

is turned off. For safety’s sake, disconnect

the power cable from the AC outlet.

Always switch off the power for the main unit and all

peripherals, unplug the power cord for the main unit

from the outlet, then disconnect the cables connect-

ing the main unit with the peripherals before starting

installation work.

Before you begin

Operation section

Spread a soft cloth over your work surface,

and place magazines or books to support

the four corners of the AW2816 so that the

faders, keys, and other controllers on the

top panel will not be damaged. Then turn

the AW2816 face down.

From the bottom, unfasten the hard disk

cover plate to which the internal 2.5 inch

IDE hard disk will be attached.

The screws you remove will be used again to fasten

the cover plate, so be careful not to lose them.

Turn over the hard disk cover plate. As

shown in the illustration, place the hard

disk to be installed on the cover plate,

align the screw holes of the hard disk with

the holes of the cover panel, and use a

screwdriver and the included screws to fas-

ten the hard disk at four locations.

If you fail to tighten the screws all the way, the hard

disk may vibrate and fail to operate correctly.

Pull out the ﬂat cable from inside the

AW2816, and plug the ﬂat cable into the

connector of the hard disk as shown in the

illustration. Press both ends of the ﬂat

cable connector to ensure that it is ﬁrmly

plugged in all the way.

• Even if the connector is difﬁcult to insert, do not

attempt to insert it by applying excessive force.

Doing so may damage the hard disk, or you may

injure yourself.

• When inserting the connector, be careful that it is

not mis-aligned up/down or left/right.

As shown in the illustration place the cover

plate with the attached hard disk back

onto the bottom panel of the AW2816,

and fasten the cover plate to the bottom

panel using the four screws that you

removed in step 4.

• You must use the same screws that you removed in

step 4, or identical screws. Using longer screws may

damage the interior of the unit, or may cause elec-

trical shock.

• Do not turn on the power of the AW2816 until all

options have been installed.

• When you turn on the power of the AW2816 after

installing a new hard disk, formatting of the hard

disk will begin automatically (

→

P.11).

Hard disk

cover plate

Connector

Before you begin

Operation section

Installing a CD-RW drive

About the CD-RW drives

A CD-RW drive is an option that allows you to create

music CD’s, to backup/restore internal hard disk data,

to play a music CD or to read a CD-ROM. An inter-

nal-type CD-RW drive can be installed by removing

the CD-RW drive cover from the front panel. CD-RW

drives with the following speciﬁcations can be used.

• Interface: ATAPI

• Models known to work: consult your local

Yamaha distributor or refer to the website at the

following URL.

<http://www.aw2816.com/>

• CD-RW drives designed for internal installation can

be installed in the AW2816. Please be aware that

internal CD-RW drives designed for use with the

AW4416 cannot be used in the AW2816.

In the case of external SCSI-connected CD-RW

drives, a CD-RW drive usable with the AW4416 can

also be used with the AW2816.

• By “models known to work,” we mean commercially

available models that Yamaha has obtained, installed

in the AW2816, and successfully tested by means of

various operational tests. However, we cannot take

into account slight differences in performance that

may occur due to the manufacturing tolerances of

each manufacturer.

• Please be aware that Yamaha Corporation will

accept no responsibility for any damages, neither

direct nor indirect, resulting from the use of any of

the above CD-RW drives.

CD-RW drive settings

Insert the jumper (included with the CD-RW drive)

into the jumper switch on the rear panel of the CD-

RW drive to set your CD-RW drive to function as a

SLAVE unit. The AW2816 will not start up if the CD-

RW is set to a mode other than SLAVE.

• If you are installing a CD-RW drive manufac-

tured by Yamaha, it will be set to SLAVE when

shipped from the factory, so you do not need to

change the setting.

For details on this setting, refer to the manual that

came with your CD-RW drive.

* Note that the cover panel of the AW2816 cannot be

attached to a CD-RW drive with a lid-type tray. The

AW2816’s cover panel can be attached to a CD-RW

drive with a tray of the following dimensions.

CSEL

SLAVE

MASTER

Set to SLAVE

Jumper switch

Jumper

Maximum 138 mm

Before you begin

Operation section

Installation procedure

Please carefully read the cautions for installing

optional equipment given at the beginning of this

manual.

You will need the following items.

• The AW2816 itself

• Internal CD-RW drive (option)

• Four screws (included with the AW2816) for

attaching the CD-RW drive

• Philips (+) screwdriver

• Work surface

• In order to install the CD-RW drive you will need to

turn the AW2816 on its back. Make sure that you

have a sufﬁciently broad work surface.

• The AW2816 is shipped with four screws for attach-

ing the 2.5 inch hard disk, and four screws for

attaching the CD-RW drive, making a total of eight

screws of the same type.

Make sure that the power of the AW2816

is turned off. For safety’s sake, disconnect

the power cable from the AC outlet.

Always switch off the power for the main unit and all

peripherals, unplug the power cord for the main unit

from the outlet, then disconnect the cables connect-

ing the main unit with the peripherals before starting

installation work.

Spread a soft cloth over your work surface,

and place magazines or books to support

the four corners of the AW2816 so that the

faders, keys, and other controllers on the

top panel will not be damaged. Then turn

the AW2816 face down.

Remove the CD-RW drive cover from the

front panel, and remove the bottom panel.

Turn the CD-RW drive over, and insert it lit-

tle by little, stopping when the connector

end of the CD-RW drive enters the opening

in the bottom of the AW2816.

Connect the ﬂat cable (1) and CD-RW

drive power supply connector (

2) (from

inside the AW2816) to the connectors of

the CD-RW drive. Connect the ﬂat cable

ﬁrst, and then the power supply connector.

Bottom panel

CD-R/RW drive

cover panel

Power supply

connector

Flat cable

Before you begin

Operation section

Align the fastening screw-holes on the bot-

tom of the CD-RW drive with the screw-

holes in the AW2816, and using a screw-

driver and the included screws, fasten it in

four locations.

Re-attach the CD-RW drive cover and the

bottom panel that you removed in step 4.

At this time, remove the inner cover from

the CD-RW drive cover.

CD-R/RW drive

cover panel

Inner cover

Bottom panel

Before you begin

Operation section

Removing the transport protection pad

The disc tray of some CD-RW drive models contains a

transport protection pad that protects the internal

mechanism from physical shock suffered during ship-

ment. If your CD-RW drive contains this protective

pad, please remove it before use.

Be sure to save the transport protection pad for the

next time you need to transport the unit.

Manual eject (emergency disc

removal)

Manual eject allows you to remove the disc manually

in the case of an emergency such as a malfunction of

the disc tray mechanism (usually temporary) or a

power failure. Please be aware that using this method

frequently can cause the CD-RW drive to malfunc-

tion. For the location of the eject hole and the proce-

dure, refer to the manual of your CD-RW drive.

In order to perform this operation, you will need a

pin-like object 2 mm or less in diameter, such as a

straightened paper clip.

* This diagram shows a CD-RW drive manufac-

tured by Yamaha Corporation.

Eject Hall

Insert a pin-like object 2 mm

or less in diameter.

Before you begin

Operation section

Attaching an external SCSI device

About external SCSI devices

The external SCSI devices referred to here are storage

devices used to backup/restore the internal data of the

AW2816, and can be connected to the SCSI connec-

tor on the rear panel of the AW2816. The following

types of storage device can be used.

• Type of drive: MO drives (128 MB, 230 MB,

540MB, 640 MB 1.3 GB), hard disk drives, CD-

RW drives

• Interface: SCSI-2

• Models known to work: consult your local

Yamaha distributor or refer to the website at the

following URL.

<http://www.aw2816.com/>

• By “models known to work,” we mean commercially

available models that Yamaha has obtained, con-

nected to the AW2816, and successfully tested by

means of various operational tests. However, we

cannot take into account slight differences in perfor-

mance that may occur due to the manufacturing tol-

erances of each manufacturer.

• Please be aware that Yamaha Corporation will

accept no responsibility for any damages, neither

direct nor indirect, resulting from the use of any of

the above storage devices.

It is not possible to directly record or play back audio

signals in realtime on an external storage device con-

nected to the SCSI connector.

Connection procedure

Make sure that the power is turned off for

the AW2816 and for the external SCSI

device(s), and use a SCSI cable to connect

the SCSI connectors of each device.

Use only good-quality SCSI cables.

When connecting an external SCSI device, use

only high impedance SCSI cables of 100 ohms

(±10 ohms) impedance that are 1 meter or

shorter in length.

Note

• A maximum of seven SCSI devices (SCSI ID= 0–5,7)

can be connected in a daisy-chain.

• When connecting multiple SCSI devices, you must

make sure that the SCSI ID of each device does not

conﬂict with any other device. (For details on how

to set the SCSI ID, refer to the manuals for your

SCSI devices.)

• The SCSI ID of the AW2816 itself is ﬁxed at “6.”

SCSI

connector

SCSI

connector

SCSI

connector

SCSI

connector

SCSI

connector

AW2816

ID=6 (fixed)

Terminator

External SCSI device 1

External SCSI device 2

Before you begin

Operation section

Attach a terminator to the last SCSI device

in the chain.

A “terminator” is a device that terminates the

SCSI signal at the end of the chain, and is nor-

mally attached to the vacant SCSI connector of

the last device in the daisy chain. If the SCSI

device itself has a built-in terminator, turn it on.

(For details on how to turn on the internal termi-

nator, refer to the manual of your SCSI device.)

Before using an external SCSI device, you will need to

format it. For details on this procedure, refer to

page 160.

■ About terminators

“Termination” refers to the process of applying a resis-

tor appropriate for the impedance of the SCSI bus to

terminate the end of the circuit. The resistor required

for this is called the “terminator.” Normally, a termina-

tor must be installed at the beginning and end of the

SCSI bus (in the case of the example in the previous

page, this would be the AW2816 itself, and the SCSI

device connected to the end of the daisy chain).

However, this is only a general principle, and is not

an absolute. Depending on the combination of SCSI

devices, the order of connection, or on the length of

the SCSI cables, there may be cases in which better

results are obtained by terminating only one end of

the chain. If problems occur such as the AW2816 fail-

ing to start up when an external SCSI device is con-

nected, try defeating the terminator of the external

SCSI device. (The terminator inside the AW2816 is

always on, and cannot be defeated.)

■ About SCSI errors

The SCSI bus is able to transfer data in a stable man-

ner only if all connected SCSI devices are operating

correctly. If the SCSI bus of the AW2816 is connected

to a device whose operation is unstable or which pro-

duces noise, errors may occur in other devices, or the

AW2816 may fail to start up correctly. If such prob-

lems occur, check the following points.

●Check the SCSI ID

Make sure that the SCSI ID of each SCSI device

(including the AW2816) does not conﬂict with the

SCSI ID of any other device. The SCSI ID of the

AW2816 is ﬁxed at “6.”

●Check the terminator

Check the location of the terminator. Under certain

conditions, better results may be obtained by termi-

nating only one end of the SCSI chain.

●Check the SCSI cables

Since errors are often caused by low-quality SCSI

cables or unnecessarily long SCSI cables, you

should avoid using such cables. Please use double-

shielded cables that are as short as possible. It is

also important that the shield within the cable is

grounded to the connector.

●External SCSI devices with 25-pin connectors

Most SCSI cables with 25-pin connectors at both

ends do not meet SCSI speciﬁcations. For this rea-

son if the system includes a SCSI device that uses a

25-pin connector, the problems may be due to this

type of cable.

●Daisy-chain connection

Sometimes the operation of a SCSI bus will be

unstable because of daisy-chain connections. Con-

nect only the SCSI device you are using to the

AW2816.

●Power supply of SCSI devices

When using the system, turn on the power of all

connected SCSI devices. Operation of the SCSI bus

cannot be guaranteed if one of the connected

devices is not turned on.

Before you begin

Operation section

Installing I/O card

About I/O cards

I/O cards compatible with the Yamaha mini-YGDAI

format can be installed in the OPTION I/O slot

located on the rear panel of the AW2816 in order to

add input/output ports. For example by installing an

ADAT format compatible I/O card into an OPTION I/

O slot, you can transmit/receive eight channels of dig-

ital audio to/from an ADAT format digital recorder.

At present, the following types of I/O cards can be

used.

●MY8-AT

This card transmits and receives eight channels of

Alesis ADAT format digital signals.

●MY8-TD

This card transmits and receives eight channels of

TASCAM format digital signals.

●MY8-AE

This card transmits and receives eight channels of

AES/EBU format digital signals.

●MY8-AD

This is an A/D card with eight channels of analog

input jacks (balanced TRS phone jacks).

●MY4-AD

This is an A/D card with four channels of analog

input jacks (balanced XLR jacks).

●MY4-DA

This is a D/A card with four channels of analog out-

put jacks (balanced XLR jacks).

For up-to-date information on available MY cards,

contact your local Yamaha distributor or check the fol-

lowing website.

<http://www.aw2816.com/>

Installation procedure

Please carefully read the cautions for installing

optional devices, given at the beginning of this man-

ual.

Make sure that the power of the AW2816

is turned off. For safety’s sake, disconnect

the power cable from the AC outlet.

Always switch off the power for the main unit and all

peripherals, unplug the power cord for the main unit

from the outlet, then disconnect the cables connect-

ing the main unit with the peripherals before starting

installation work.

From the OPTION I/O slot located on the

rear panel of the AW2816, remove the two

screws that hold the cover in place.

Please keep the cover and screws you removed in a

safe place.

Slide the I/O card along the rails inside the

slot until it clicks into place.

Tighten the two screws included with the

I/O card to fasten the card securely.

Please note that if the screws are loose, the card may

not be grounded correctly.

Before you begin

Operation section

Please observe the following points

This section explains how to turn the power of the AW2816 on and off, and how to set

the internal clock.

Turning the power on

When turning on the power of a system that includes

the AW2816, each device must be turned on in the

following order.

1 Any storage devices connected to the SCSI

connector of the AW2816, and external tone

generators connected to the input/output

jacks

B The AW2816 itself

C The monitor system connected to the output

jacks or the AW2816

Following the opening screen, the following screen

will appear in the display of the AW2816.

• If the AW2816 is powered-on when a SCSI-con-

nected external device is turned off, it may not start

up correctly.

• Do not turn off the power of a SCSI-connected

device while the AW2816 is in use.

• Before turning the power on, check that the power

cable plug is ﬁrmly connected to the AW2816 and to

the AC outlet. If the power is accidentally discon-

nected (turned off) while the AW2816 is in use, the

AW2816 itself and/or the hard disk may be damaged.

The ﬁrst time the power is turned on after a new inter-

nal hard disk is installed in the AW2816, the display

will indicate “Format OK? [Y (Enter)/N (Any)].” If you

press the [ENTER] key at this time, the hard disk will

be formatted automatically, and the screen shown

above will appear when formatting has been com-

pleted.

Never turn off the power of the AW2816 while for-

matting is in progress. Doing so may damage the hard

disk itself.

Setting the internal clock

When the AW2816 is shipped from the factory, the

internal clock is set to Japan time. When you save a

song you created on the AW2816, the date and time

will be stored according to this internal clock.

Use the following procedure to set the date and time

of the internal clock after replacing the internal bat-

tery, or if you need to set the clock for any other rea-

son.

Press the [UTILITY] key → [F4] key.

The following screen will appear.

Use the CURSOR [ ] key to move the cur-

sor (the blinking area in the display) to the

Y (year) ﬁeld in the CLOCK area, and turn

the [DATA/JOG] dial to set the year.

The clock ﬁeld will begin blinking.

In the same way, input the M (month), D

(date), h (hour), m (minute), and s (sec-

ond) ﬁelds.

The W (weekday) ﬁeld will be set automatically

according to the date.

When you have input all of the values, use

the CURSOR keys to move the cursor to

the SET button, and press the [ENTER] key.

The CLOCK area will stop blinking, and the new

date and time will take effect. If you decide not

to change the date and time, move the cursor to

the RESET button and press the [ENTER] key.

Tip!

The internal clock continues to operate even when the

power of the AW2816 is turned off. Once you have

set the clock, you will not need to reset it unless you

change the battery.

Before you begin

Operation section

Turning the power off

When turning off the power of a system that includes

the AW2816, each device must be turned off in the

following order.

1 The monitor system connected to the output

jacks or the AW2816

B The AW2816 itself

C Any storage devices connected to the SCSI

connector of the AW2816, and external tone

generators connected to the input/output

jacks

When turning off the power of the AW2816 itself, you

must use the shutdown procedure described below.

In the WORK NAVIGATE section located on

the top panel of the AW2816, press the

[SONG] key.

Press the [F5] (SHUT DOWN) key located

below the display.

Press the [ENTER] key.

A message will ask you whether you want to save

the current song.

Use the CURSOR keys located in the right

center of the top panel to move the cursor

to the OK button, and press the [ENTER]

key.

When a message of “Now safe to turn off”

appears, turn off the [POWER] switch of

the rear panel.

• If you turn off the power of the AW2816 without

using the above shutdown procedure, the data on

the hard disk may be damaged.

• Never turn off the power while the access indicator

which indicates the access status of the internal hard

disk is lit. Doing so may damage the hard disk itself.

Parts and their functions

Chapter

Operation section

Parts and their functions

This chapter explains the functions of each part of the AW2816’s top

panel, rear panel, and front panel.

The names of controllers (keys and knobs etc.) on the top panel are enclosed in square brackets

[ ] in order to distinguish them from the software knobs and buttons that appear in the display.

Example: [SEL] key, [GAIN] control

Top panel

Analog input/output section

A [GAIN] control

These knobs adjust the input sensitivity of INPUT

jacks 1–8 over a range of +4 dB to –46 dB. They

support signals ranging from line level devices

such as synthesizers to mic inputs.

B [PEAK] indicators

A [PEAK] indicator will light red if the input signal

that has passed through the [GAIN] control

reaches a level 3 dB below the clipping point. In

order to record at the optimal level, adjust the

[GAIN] control (1) so that this indicator ﬂickers

brieﬂy when you play most loudly.

C [PHONES] (headphones) control

This knob adjusts the volume of the headphones

connected to the rear panel PHONES jack.

D [MONITOR OUT] control

This knob adjusts the level of the signal that is out-

put from the rear panel MONITOR OUT jacks.

234

Parts and their functions

Chapter

Operation section

WORK NAVIGATE section

A [SONG] key

This key accesses the SONG screen, where you

can save or load songs, or shut down the AW2816.

B [FILE] key

This key accesses the FILE screen, where you can

backup and restore songs, and format or erase an

internal/external drive.

C [CD] key

This key accesses the CD screen, where you can

use an optional CD-RW drive to create an audio

CD, or play back an audio CD.

D [QUICK REC] (Quick Record) key

This key accesses the QUICK REC screen, where

you can instantly patch input signals to tracks.

UNIT section

A [SETUP] key

This key accesses the SETUP screen, where you

can make basic settings for the AW2816 such as

word clock, dither, and solo.

B [UTILITY] key

This key accesses the UTILITY screen, where you

can operate the test tone oscillator, and make set-

tings for the operating environment of the

AW2816.

C [MID] key

This key accesses the MIDI screen, where you can

make MIDI-related settings.

D [PATCH] key

This key accesses the PATCH screen, where you

can patch external inputs/outputs to internal signal

routes.

MIXER section

A [VIEW] key

This key accesses the VIEW screen, where you can

view all mix parameters for a speciﬁed channel.

B [PAN] key

This key accesses the PAN/ROUTE screen, where

you can set pan and routing for each channel.

C EQ (Equalizer) key

This key accesses the EQ/ATT/GRP screen, where

you can set the EQ and attenuator of each chan-

nel, and make fader group and mute group set-

tings.

D [DYN] (Dynamics) key

This key accesses the DYN/DLY screen, where you

can make dynamics processor settings for a

selected channel, and set the delay and phase of

each channel.

1 2 3 4

EQ/ATT/GRP

DYN/DLY/

1 2 3 4

EQ/ATT/GRP

DYN/DLY/

Parts and their functions

Operation section

FADER MODE section

This section selects the parameters that will be con-

trolled by the top panel faders 1–8. The selected key

will light.

A [HOME] key

When this key is on, you can use faders 1–8 to

control the input levels of the channels currently

selected in the MIXING LAYER section. The dis-

play will show the HOME screen, where you can

view meters that indicate the input/output levels of

each channel.

B [AUX 5]/[AUX 6] keys

When these keys are on, you can use faders 1–8 to

adjust the send levels of the signals sent to internal

effects 1/2 from the channels currently selected in

the MIXING LAYER section. The display will show

the AUX5/EFF1 screen or AUX6/EFF2 screen,

where you can make on/off and pre/post settings

for the signals sent from each channel to internal

effects 1/2, and set effect parameters.

C [AUX 1]–[AUX 4] keys

When this key is on, you can use faders 1–8 to

control the send levels of the signals sent to AUX

buses 1–4 from the channels selected in the MIX-

ING LAYER section. The display will show the

AUX 1–AUX 4 screens, where you can make on/

off and pre/post settings for the signals sent from

each channel to AUX 1–4.

D [REMOTE] key

When this key is on, you can use faders 1–8 and

[ON] keys 1–8 to remotely control external MIDI

devices. The display will show the REMOTE

screen, where you can make settings related to

remote control.

MIXING LAYER section

A INPUT [1-8] key

B RECORDER [1-8] key

C RECORDER [9-16] key

These keys select the channels (mixing layer) that

will be operated by [SEL] keys 1–8, [ON] keys 1–

8, and faders 1–8.

The currently selected key will light. When the

respective key is selected, the [SEL] keys 1–8,

[ON] keys 1–8, and faders 1–8 will operate the

mixing layers listed below.

● When the INPUT [1-8] key is lit

Input channels 1–8

● When the RECORDER [1-8] key is lit

Monitor channels 1–8

●When the RECORDER [9-16] key is lit

Monitor channels 9–16

For details on channels and mixing layers, refer to

page 38.

1234

1 2 3

Parts and their functions

Chapter

Operation section

Fader section

A [SEL] keys (1–8/STEREO/RTN 1/RTN 2)

These keys select the channel for operation.

B [ON] keys (1–8/STEREO/RTN 1/RTN 2)

These keys turn each channel on/off.

C Faders (1–8/STEREO)

According to the settings of the FADER MODE

section and MIXING LAYER section, these moving

faders adjust either the input level of each channel

or the send level of each channel to AUX buses 1–

D [RTN 1]/[RTN 2] controls

According to the settings of the FADER MODE

section, these knobs adjust either the level of

return channels 1/2 (effect return) or the send level

from return channels 1/2 to AUX buses 1–6.

Return channel 1 does not have a send level to AUX

bus 5. Similarly, return channel 2 does not have a send

level to AUX bus 6.

E [SOLO] key (1–16/STEREO/RTN 1/RTN 2)

This key switches the Solo function on/off.

Parts and their functions

Operation section

Display section

A Display

This is a 320 x 240 pixel liquid crystal display with

backlight, that displays the mix parameter settings

and the current operating status.

When you press one of the keys in the WORK

NAVIGATE or UNIT section, the screen for the

corresponding key will appear. Most screens con-

sist of multiple “pages” (the name of the pages in

each screen are indicated by tabs at the bottom of

the screen), and you can use the [F1]–[F5] keys

(3) to access the desired page.

B [SHIFT] key

This key is used in conjunction with the function

keys (3) to execute additional functions.

C [F1]–[F5] (Function 1–5) keys

These keys select pages within the currently

selected screen. When the [SHIFT] key or [CTRL]

key is held down, these keys execute additional

functions assigned to each key.

D [CTRL] (Control) key

This key is used in conjunction with the function

keys (3) to execute user-deﬁned functions.

E Contrast

This knob adjusts the brightness of the display.

F Access indicator

This indicator indicates the access status of the

internal hard disk. When the hard disk is being

read or written, this indicator will light.

Never turn off the power of the AW2816 when the

access indicator is lit. Doing so will not only damage

the data on the internal hard disk, but may also dam-

age the hard disk itself. When you want to turn off the

power of the AW2816, you must perform the shut-

down procedure (

→

P.12).

42 3

Screen

pages

Parts and their functions

Chapter

Operation section

REC TRACK SELECT section

A [CUE] key

This key allows the output of tracks 1–16 or the

stereo track to be monitored directly from the

MONITOR OUT jacks without passing through

the monitor channel.

Use the REC TRACK SELECT keys (3) to select a

track. When you press the [CUE] key, the [CUE]

key and the REC TRACK SELECT keys will blink,

allowing you to select a track. Press a REC TRACK

SELECT key to select a track, and that key will

light.

B [METER] key

This key accesses the METER screen, where you

can view meters of the input/output level of tracks

1–16 and the output level of the stereo output

channel.

C REC TRACK SELECT [1]–[16]/[ST]

These keys select the recording track (tracks 1–16

or the stereo track).

D [ALL SAFE] key

This key cancels record-ready mode for all tracks.

If any tracks are muted, all muting will be can-

celled.

RECORDER section

A [TRACK] key

This key accesses the TRACK screen, where you

can operate the audio tracks of the recorder sec-

tion.

B [EDIT] key

This key accesses the EDIT screen, where you can

edit the audio tracks that have been recorded.

C [UNDO] key

This key cancels the most recently performed

recording or editing operation, returning to the

previous state (Undo). When the Undo function is

available, the [UNDO] key will light.

D [REDO] key

This key re-executes the recording or editing oper-

ation that was cancelled by the [UNDO] key

(Redo). When the Redo function is available, the

[REDO] key will light.

1 2 3 4

Parts and their functions

Operation section

AUTOMATION section

A [AUTOMIX] key

This key accesses the AUTOMIX screen, where

you can perform automix operations. By using

automix, operations of mix parameters such as the

faders and [ON] keys can be recorded in realtime.

B [SCENE] key

This key accesses the SCENE screen, where you

can perform scene memory operations. By using

scene memories, you can save the current state of

the mixer section and the input/output patching

state.

SCENE MEMORY section

A [STORE] key

This key saves the current state of the mixer sec-

tion and input/output patching to the scene num-

ber shown in the display.

B [ ]/[ ] keys

These keys select the store destination or recall

source scene number.

C [RECALL] key

This key recalls the scene number currently shown

in the display.

CURSOR/JOG&SHUTTLE section

A [JOG ON] key

This key is an on/off switch for the Nudge function

(a destination that repeatedly plays a speciﬁed

region before or after the current location) con-

trolled by the [DATA/JOG], [SHUTTLE] dial. When

the Nudge function is on, the [JOG ON] key will

light.

B [DATA/JOG] dial

Depending on the on/off status of the [JOG ON]

key and the [NUM LOCATE] key of the Locate sec-

tion, this dial is used to edit parameter values or to

operate the Nudge function.

C [SHUTTLE] dial

Depending on the on/off status of the [JOG ON]

key, this dial rewinds or fast-forwards the playback

(review or cue), or operates the Nudge function.

D CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys

These keys are used to move the cursor (the blink-

ing box) in the display.

E [ENTER] key

This key is used to operate a button displayed in

the screen, to ﬁnalize a numerical value that you

input, or to execute a speciﬁc function.

1 2

1 3

Parts and their functions

Chapter

Operation section

LOCATE section

A [NUM LOCATE] key

This key is used to specify a location numerically.

When this key is lit, you can use the numeric keys

or the [DATA/JOG] dial to input a location, and

press the [ENTER] key to execute the locate opera-

tion.

B MARK SEARCH [ ]/[ ] keys

These keys are used to search for markers placed

in a song. If a marker has been placed earlier than

the current location, the [ ] key will light. If a

marker has been placed after the current location,

the [ ] key will light.

C [MARK] key

This key sets a marker at the current location of the

song.

D [AUTO PUNCH] key

This key turns the auto punch-in/out function on/

off.

E LAST REC [IN/[OUT] (Last recording in/

out) key

These keys set the recording start location (In

point) and end location (Out point) for auto

punch-in/out. When these keys are lit, you can use

them as locate keys to move to the point at which

recording most recently began (In point) or ended

(Out point).

F [SET] key

This key is used in conjunction with the LAST REC

[IN]/[OUT] keys or the [A]/[B] keys to set the cur-

rent location of the song to a locate point.

G [REPEAT] key

This key is an on/off switch for the A-B Repeat

function which repeatedly plays a speciﬁed

region.

H [A]/[B] keys

These keys set the beginning (A point) and end (B

point) of the region played by the A-B Repeat func-

tion. These keys can also be used as locate keys to

specify the A point or B point as locate destina-

tions.

I [ROLL BACK] key

This key rewinds the current location by a speci-

ﬁed distance.

J [ ] key

This key locates to the absolute time zero location

(start point).

K [RTZ] (Return to zero) key

This key locates to the counter zero location

(when the counter is displaying measures, this will

be the beginning of the ﬁrst measure).

L [ ] key

This key locates to the last location at which audio

is recorded (end point).

M [CANCEL] key

In conjunction with the LAST REC [IN]/[OUT]

keys, [A]/[B] keys, and [MARK] keys, this key

erases a locate point from the song.

132

JKLM

Parts and their functions

Operation section

Transport section

A REW [ ] (Rewind) key

This key rewinds from the current location. Each

time you press this key, you will switch between

8X speed and 16X speed rewinding. To stop

rewinding, press the STOP [ ] key or PLAY [ ]

key.

B FF [ ] (Fast-forward) key

This key fast-forwards from the current location.

Each time you press this key, you will switch

between 8X speed and 16X speed fast-forwarding.

To stop fast-forwarding, press the STOP [ ] key or

PLAY [ ] key.

C STOP [ ] key

This key stops playback, recording, fast-forward,

or rewind.

D PLAY [ ] key

When the recorder is stopped, pressing this key

will begin playback. (If you hold down the REC

[ ] key and press this key, recording will begin.)

Pressing this key during rewind or fast-forward will

switch to normal-speed playback.

Pressing this key during recording will stop record-

ing and continue pressing (i.e., punch-out).

E REC [ ] (Record) key

When the recorder is stopped, holding down this

key and pressing the PLAY[ ] key will begin

recording.

During playback, holding down this key and

pressing the PLAY [ ] key will switch from play-

back to recording (i.e., punch-in).

1 2 3 4 5

Parts and their functions

Chapter

Operation section

Rear panel

A [PHANTOM +48V ON/OFF] switch

This switch supplies +48 V phantom power to the

INPUT (XLR) 1/2 jacks (2). Turn this switch ON

when condenser mics that require an external

power supply are connected to the INPUT 1/2

(XLR) jacks.

• This switch must be turned off if devices not requir-

ing an external power supply are connected to the

INPUT 1/2 (XLR) jacks.

• If the phantom power supply is turned on, power will

be supplied to both the INPUT (XLR) 1 and 2 jacks.

B INPUT 1/2 (XLR) jacks

These are XLR-3-31 type input jacks for connect-

ing balanced condenser mics or line level devices.

The nominal input level is +4 dB to –46 dB. The

pin wiring is as follows.

C INPUT 1/2 (TRS phone) jacks

These are balanced TRS phone input jacks.

Devices with unbalanced output, such as synthe-

sizers, can also be connected. The nominal input

level is –46 dB – +4 dB. The pin wiring is as fol-

lows.

• If plugs are inserted into both the XLR jack and TRS

phone jack of INPUT 1/2, the TRS phone jack will

take priority.

• Phantom power is not supplied from the INPUT 1/2

(TRS phone) jack.

D INPUT 3–8 (TRS phone) jacks

These are balanced TRS phone input jacks. The

speciﬁcations of these jacks are the same as for the

INPUT 1/2 (phone) jacks.

E INPUT 8 (Hi-Z) jack

This is a high-impedance unbalanced phone input

jack. Instruments with a high output impedance

such as passive-type electric guitars can be con-

nected directly to this jack. The nominal input

level is –46 dB to +4 dB.

If plugs are inserted into both the TRS phone jack and

the Hi-Z jack for INPUT 8, the Hi-Z jack will take pri-

ority.

F OPTION I/O slot

An optional I/O card can be installed in this slot.

Tip!

For details on installing an I/O card, refer to page 10.

G STEREO OUT jacks

These unbalanced RCA phono jacks are analog

outputs for the signal selected in the PATCH

screen Patch OUT page (→P.284). The nominal

output level is –10 dBV.

H MONITOR OUT jacks

These balanced TRS phone jacks are analog out-

puts for monitoring the stereo bus, internal metro-

nome, solo signal, or direct output of recorder

tracks 1–16. The nominal output level is +4 dB.

15JN M L K

OPQR786T SU

432

Male XLR connector

1 (ground)

3 (cold)

2 (hot)

1/4" TRS phone plug

Tip (hot)

Ring (cold)

Sleeve (ground)

Parts and their functions

Operation section

I OMNI OUT jacks

These unbalanced phone jacks are analog outputs

for the signals selected in the PATCH screen Patch

OUT page (→P.284). The nominal output level is

0 dB.

J PHONES jack

A set of stereo headphones can be connected to

this jack. This jack will always output the same sig-

nal as the MONITOR OUT jacks.

K DIGITAL STEREO IN jack

This is a coaxial jack for digital input of a stereo

signal. It supports the IEC 958 consumer format.

L DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack

This is a coaxial jack for digital output of the signal

selected in the PATCH screen Patch OUT page

(→P.284). It supports the IEC 958 consumer for-

mat.

M SCSI connector

This is a D-sub half-pitch 50 pin SCSI connector

compatible with the SCSI-2 speciﬁcation. External

SCSI-2 devices such as CD-RW drives or MOD

drives can be connected here.

• To connect an external device, use only a high

impedance SCSI cable with impedance of 100 ohms

(±10 ohms) and a length of 1 meter or less.

• External devices connected to the SCSI connector are

used mainly to back up song data. It is not possible to

record a song using an external SCSI device instead

of the internal hard disk.

N TO HOST connector

This is an 8-pin mini-DIN connector that can be

connected directly to the serial port of a PC or

Macintosh for use with MIDI application pro-

grams.

O FOOT SW jack

An optional foot switch (Yamaha FC5) can be con-

nected to this jack. You can use the foot switch to

perform transport operations such as playback/

stop, and to control manual punch-in/out.

Foot switches other than the Yamaha FC5 (or equiva-

lent) may not operate correctly.

P MIDI IN connector

Q MIDI OUT/THRU connector

R MTC OUT connector

These connectors can be connected to external

MIDI devices to exchange MIDI messages.

The MIDI IN connector is for reception only.

The MIDI OUT/THRU connector can be switched

internally to function either as a MIDI OUT con-

nector (to transmit the AW2816’s own MIDI mes-

sages) or as a MIDI THRU connector (to re-

transmit received messages without change).

The MTC OUT connector is dedicated to transmit-

ting MTC (MIDI Time Code).

S POWER switch

This switch turns the power on/off.

To turn the power on/off, you must use the proce-

dures described in “Turning the power on” and

“Turning the power off,” pages 11–12.

T AC INLET connector

The included power cable is inserted into this con-

nector to supply power. Use only the included

cable.

U Grounding terminal

This terminal is used when grounding the chassis

of the AW2816. To prevent electrical shock, you

must make this connection before plugging the

power cable into the AC outlet. This connection

will also help prevent hum and other noise.

Parts and their functions

Chapter

Operation section

Front panel

A CD-RW drive cover

This covers the installation bay for the optional

CD-RW drive.

Tip!

For details on installing a CD-RW drive, refer to

page 4.

Welcome to the world of the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Welcome to the world of

the AW2816

This chapter explains the features and signal ﬂow of the AW2816,

and covers basic operation.

Features of the AW2816

The AW2816 is an audio workstation that combines a

digital mixer, hard disk recorder, and multi-effect unit.

It allows you to carry out the entire music production

process — multi-track recording, mixing, audio edit-

ing, effect processing, and CD production

(*1)

— with-

out needing any other equipment. This section

explains the features of each section of the AW2816.

*1:A separately sold internal or external CD-RW

drive is required.

Mixer section

• Maximum 28 channel input/18 bus conﬁguration

A total of 28 input channels are provided: 8 input

channels to which analog inputs, digital stereo

inputs, or OPTION I/O slot inputs can be freely

assigned, 16 recorder monitor channels, and 2

return channels (stereo). There are a total of 18 out-

put buses: 8 group buses, 6 AUX buses, stereo bus

and the SOLO bus (stereo).

• 4-band EQ and dynamics processors on all chan-

nels

Each channel including the stereo output has 4-

band full-parametric EQ and a dynamics processor

(except for the two return channels).

• Two high-quality multi-effect units are built-in

The two multi-effect units provide spatial effects,

modulation effects, guitar effects, and more. The

effect units can be used via AUX bus send/return, or

can be inserted into any desired channel.

• Scene/library functionality

Mix parameters and effect settings can be saved as a

“scene,” and recalled by operating the keys of the

top panel or by transmitting program change mes-

sages from an external MIDI device. Up to 96

scenes can be used for each song. The AW2816 also

provides various libraries in which EQ, dynamics

processor, channel, and patching settings can be

stored independently.

• Full-automated mixing

The AW2816 features nine 60 mm motor-drive fad-

ers. Fully automated mixing allows time-axis

recording of not only scene memory and library

recall operations, but also fader movements, pan

operations, and EQ operations.

Recorder section

• Efﬁcient data management

The audio data, scene memories, libraries, and

automix data used by a single composition is saved

together on the internal hard disk as a “song.” The

desired song can be recalled at any time. Songs can

also be backed up on external media such an MO

disk or CD-R/RW disc.

• Support for large hard disks up to 64 GB

Separately sold hard disks for internal installation

(2.5 inch IDE type) up to 64 GB (maximum 6.4 GB

per song) are supported. An internal hard disk can

store up to 30,000 songs.

• 16 x 8 virtual tracks + stereo track

The track structure of a song consists of 16 tracks x

8 virtual tracks + stereo track (total 130 tracks). For

each song, you can select the quantization word

length (16 bits/24 bits) and sampling frequency

(44.1 kHz/48 kHz). Simultaneous playback of 16

tracks or simultaneous recording of 8 tracks is sup-

ported (for a 16 bit song), making the AW2816 ideal

for live recording or pingpong recording. The 16

tracks can be mixed down directly to a stereo track

within the AW2816. This allows uniﬁed manage-

ment of the multi-track material and the two-track

stereo mix.

• Versatile editing functions

Editing can be performed at any level: song, track,

part, or region. Editing functions include “Time

Compression” that compresses or expands the time

in a range of 50%–200%, and a “Pitch Change”

command that shifts the pitch up or down in a range

of one octave. Undo/Redo functions are also pro-

vided, and you can retrace your editing as far as 15

previous operations.

Welcome to the world of the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

CD-RW drive (option)

• CD-RW drive can be installed internally

Stereo tracks on the hard disk can be used to pro-

duce an audio CD off-line. The CD-RW drive can

also be used to store recorded data for backup.

Playback of audio CD’s and loading from CD-ROM

is also supported.

Other features

• Simple panel layout and efﬁcient operation

A large backlit LCD screen provides excellent visi-

bility. The AW2816 is designed with a graphical

user interface for easy and intuitive operation.

• Option I/O card slot

A wide variety of input/output formats including

ADAT, TASCAM, AES/EBU, and analog are sup-

ported. The AW2816’s open architecture ensures

excellent expandability.

• Import/export audio data

WAV ﬁles can be loaded from CD-ROM or MO

disk, and audio from tracks recorded on the

AW2816 can be converted and written as a WAV

ﬁle. This allows audio ﬁles to be exchanged with

waveform editing software running on your com-

puter. Track audio data and some song data is com-

patible with the AW4416, allowing AW4416 data to

be imported from external media.

• Rich array of MIDI functionality

MIDI messages such as control changes and param-

eter changes can be used to record AW2816 opera-

tions on an external device, and to remotely control

the AW2816 from an external device. In addition,

desired MIDI messages can be assigned to the fad-

ers and [ON] keys so that the controllers of the

AW2816 can control external MIDI devices.

Welcome to the world of the AW2816

Operation section

Signal ﬂow within the AW2816

The following diagram shows the general signal ﬂow

within the AW2816. As you can see from this dia-

gram, the AW2816 is divided into input patch, output

patch, mixer, recorder, and CD-RW drive (option) sec-

tions.

Input patch

Input Patch is the section where input signals are

assigned to input channels 1–8 and return channels 1/

2. The following types of input signals can be

selected.

• MIC/LINE INPUT

Input signals from analog INPUT jacks 1–8.

• OPTION IN

Input signals from an I/O card installed in the rear

panel OPTION I/O slot. A maximum of 8 channels

of signals can be input simultaneously.

• EFFECT 1/2

Return signals from internal effects 1/2.

• DIGITAL STEREO IN

Input signal from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack.

• METRONOME

Playback sound of the internal metronome.

The following input signals can be assigned to each

channel.

Input channels 1–8

Monitor channels 1–16

Return channels 1/2

Buses 1–8

AUX buses 1–6

STEREO bus

SOLO bus

Channel insert I/O

OPTION I/O

slot

Mixer section

AW2816

Recorder section

Internal effects

CD-RW drive

×2

×8

CD Write

CD Play

DATA

Back Up/Restore

Import/Export

×16 ×16×2

×2

OPTION I/O

slot

×4

×2

×8

INPUT jacks 1–8

OMNI OUT jacks 1-4

STEREO OUT jacks

DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack

MONITOR OUT jacks

PHONES jack

DIGITAL STEREO

IN jack

I/O

card

I/O card

Stereo output channel

Internal effects

Effect 1

Metronome

Effect 2

Effect 1

Effect 2

Recorder

input patch

Input patch

Output patch

Effect patch

Input

channels 1–

8 (mono)

Return

channel 1

(stereo)

Return

channel 2

(stereo)

MIC/LINE

INPUT

OPTION IN

EFFECT 1

EFFECT 2

DIGITAL STE-

REO IN

METRO-

NOME

Welcome to the world of the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Input channels 1–8

These are monaural input channels used mainly for

inputting mics or line-level instruments. The signals

that are input to input channels 1–8 pass through an

attenuator, phase, 4-band EQ, dynamics processor,

and delay, and are sent to buses 1–8, the stereo bus,

and AUX buses 1–6. Input channels 1–8 also have a

direct output (DIRECT OUT), which allows them to be

sent directly from various output jacks or to the

recorder section.

+48V

SLOT IN

EFFECT1

EFFECT2

DIGITAL STEREO IN

Hi-z

INPUT 8

ONLY

METRONOME

INPUT PATCH

MIC/LINE INPUT

OPTION I/O SLOT

INPUT

1-2

INPUT

3-8

PEAK

INPUT1-24

PHANTOM

LINE MIC

COAXIAL

INPUT1-24

SELECTED INSERT RETURNS

INPUT 1(...8)

BUS 1

BUS 2

BUS 3

BUS 4

BUS 5

BUS 6

BUS 7

BUS 8

STEREO L

STEREO R

SOLO L

SOLO R

AUX 1

AUX 4

AUX 5(EFF1)

AUX 6(EFF2)

SOLO

AUX

PAN

LEVEL

PRE/POST ON

Mono in X 8

CH DIRECT OUT

PREFADER LISTEN/

AFTER PAN

INPUT SELECT

4BAND EQ

(Gain Reduction)

(EQ)

INSERT

METER

ATT

METER

INPUT

DELAY

DY-

NAMICS

...

Welcome to the world of the AW2816

Operation section

Return channels 1/2

These are stereo input channels used mainly for input-

ting the return signal from internal effects 1/2. How-

ever, the input signal assignment can be changed in

the input patch section, allowing these to be used as

additional input channels.

Each of these channels is structured the same as the

input channels except for the following differences:

1 Stereo

B No dynamics processor

C No direct output

D No send level from return channel 1 to AUX

bus 5

E No send level from return channel 2 to AUX

bus 6

Tip!

Since return channels 1/2 are stereo, adjacent odd-

numbered/even-numbered signals will be assigned to

them when MIC/LINE INPUT or OPTION IN are

selected as the input signal. Also, if DIGITAL STEREO

IN is selected, both L and R signals will be assigned.

• Return channel 1 has no AUX bus 5 send level, and

return channel 2 has no AUX bus 6 send level. This is

so that the signal returned from an internal effect to

a return channel will not be sent to the same effect,

producing a loop.

• Even if other input signals are assigned to return

channels 1/2, the send level to the corresponding

AUX bus will not be available.

Recorder input patch

This section assigns input signals to the tracks of the

recorder. The following signals can be selected for

tracks 1–16.

• BUS 1–8

The output signals of buses 1–8.

• DIRECT OUT 1–8

The direct output signals of input channels 1–8.

When recording on the stereo track, the output sig-

nal of the stereo bus that has passed through the ste-

reo output channel (STEREO) will be input.

RETURN 1(...2)

INPUT

DELAY

PAN

SOLO

PAN

SOLO

RETURN1 can not be assigned to AUX5(EFF1)

RETURN2 can not be assigned to AUX6(EFF2)

LEVEL

Stereo in X 2

INPUT SELECT

PREFADER LISTEN/

AFTER PAN

4BAND EQ

(EQ)

INSERT

METER

ATT

PRE/POST ON AUX

METER

INPUT

DELAY

INSERT

BUS 1

BUS 2

BUS 3

BUS 4

BUS 5

BUS 6

BUS 7

BUS 8

STEREO L

STEREO R

SOLO L

SOLO R

AUX 1

AUX 4

AUX 5(EFF1)

AUX 6(EFF2)

...

RECORDER INPUT

1(...16)

CH DIRECT OUT1~8

BUS 1~8

STEREO

DITHER

RECORER INPUT 1~16

SELECT

Welcome to the world of the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Monitor channels 1–16

These are monaural channels assigned to the output

of tracks 1–16 of the recorder section. Depending on

the input monitor setting and the state of the transport,

these will input either the signals that are currently

being input to tracks 1–16 or the playback signals of

tracks 1–16.

Only when you are playing back the stereo track

included in the song, the output of the stereo track is

patched to monitor channels 1/2, and tracks 1–16 will

be forcibly muted during this time.

Each of these channels is structured the same as the

input channels except for the fact that the direct out-

put is ﬁxed at a location immediately before the atten-

uator.

Digital cascade connection

The input signal from the rear panel DIGITAL STEREO

IN connector can be cascade-connected directly to

the stereo bus, instead of being routed through the

input patch section and patched to an input channel.

This is convenient when you want to link an external

digital mixer or similar device with the mixer section

of the AW2816. Cascade connection settings are

made in the SETUP screen D.in Setup page.

Oscillator

The AW2816 contains an oscillator that allows you to

select either sine wave (100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz) or

white noise. The oscillator signal can be sent to buses

1–8, AUX buses 1–6, or the stereo bus. Oscillator set-

tings are made in the UTILITY screen Oscillator page.

SOLO

AUX

PAN

LEVEL

PRE/POST ON

Mono in X 16

ATT

RECORDER INPUT1-16

INPUT

MONITOR

RECORDER MONI 1(...16)

RECORDER

REPRO1-16

PREFADER LISTEN/

AFTER PAN

RECORDER

4BAND EQ

(EQ)

RECORDER

ST Trk L/R

INPUT PATCH

INSERT

RECORDER

DIRECT OUT

METER

METER METER

METERMETER

DY-

NAMICS

INPUT

DELAY

(Gain Reduction)

BUS 1

BUS 2

BUS 3

BUS 4

BUS 5

BUS 6

BUS 7

BUS 8

STEREO L

STEREO R

SOLO L

SOLO R

AUX 1

AUX 4

AUX 5(EFF1)

AUX 6(EFF2)

...

OSC

DIGITAL STEREO IN R

DIGITAL STEREO IN L

ATT

ENABLE

(BUS CASCADE)

LEVELON

BUS 1

BUS 2

BUS 3

BUS 4

BUS 5

BUS 6

BUS 7

BUS 8

STEREO L

STEREO R

SOLO L

SOLO R

AUX 1

AUX 4

AUX 5(EFF1)

AUX 6(EFF2)

...

Welcome to the world of the AW2816

Operation section

Stereo output channel

This is a stereo output channel that processes the sig-

nals sent from each channel to the stereo bus. It pro-

vides a 4-band EQ and dynamics processor identical

to those provided on the input channels. The output

signal of the stereo output channel is sent via the out-

put patch section to the various output jacks, and is

also simultaneously output to the MONITOR OUT

jacks and PHONES jack.

When you use an internal or external CD-RW drive to

play back an audio CD, the CD audio signal is

patched to the pre-fader location of the stereo output

channel.

Buses 1–8

The signals sent from each channel to buses 1–8 pass

through a master level, and are sent to the output

patch section. The master level of buses 1–8 is con-

trolled in the HOME screen Bus page.

AUX buses 1–6

The signals sent from each channel to AUX buses 1–6

pass through a master level, and are sent to the output

patch section. The master level of AUX buses 1–6 is

controlled in the HOME screen Bus page.

Tip!

With the AW2816’s default settings, the output of

AUX buses 5/6 is sent to the output patch section, and

also assigned to the input of internal effects 1/2.

STEREO

ATT

INSERT

4BAND EQ

CD PLAY mode

CD-RW DRIVE

LEVEL

CD PlayBack

ON BAL

METER

DY-

NAMICS

DY-

NAMICS

(EQ)

(EQ) (Gain Reduction)

STEREO L

STEREO R

SOLO L

SOLO R

AUX 1

AUX 4

AUX 5(EFF1)

AUX 6(EFF2)

...

OUTPUT PATCH

BUS 1(...8)

AUX1(...6)

LEVEL

METER

BUS 1

BUS 2

BUS 3

BUS 4

BUS 5

BUS 6

BUS 7

BUS 8

STEREO L

STEREO R

SOLO L

SOLO R

AUX 1

AUX 4

AUX 5(EFF1)

AUX 6(EFF2)

...

OUTPUT PATCH

Welcome to the world of the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Output patch

This section assigns output signals to OMNI OUT

jacks 1–4, the STEREO OUT jacks, DIGITAL STEREO

OUT jack, and an I/O card installed in the OPTION I/

O slot. The following output signals can be selected.

• STEREO

The output signal of the stereo bus routed through

the stereo output channel.

• BUS 1–8

The output signals of buses 1–8.

• AUX 1–6

The output signals of AUX buses 1–6.

• CH DIRECT OUT 1–8

The direct output of input channels 1–8.

• INSERT SEND

Insertion outputs for inserting internal effects into

each channel.

• RECORDER DIRECT OUT 1–16

The direct output of tracks 1–16 of the recorder sec-

tion.

Tip!

In general, these output signals can be assigned to any

output jack or output channel. For the STEREO OUT

jacks and DIGITAL STEREO OUT jacks, two adjacent

odd-numbered

→

even-numbered signals will always

be assigned.

Internal effects 1/2

With the AW2816’s default settings, the outputs of

AUX buses 5/6 are patched to the inputs of internal

effects 1/2 respectively. Also, the outputs of effects 1/2

are assigned to return channels 1/2.

If desired, you may defeat these assignments and

insert internal effects 1/2 into desired channels, or use

AUX buses 5/6 and return channels 1/2 for other pur-

poses.

Monitor output/headphone out-

put

For monitoring purposes, the AW2816 provides

MONITOR OUT jacks and a PHONES jack. The type

of signal that is output from these jack will change as

follows, depending on the state of the AW2816.

1 When the AW2816 is in the default state

The signal of the stereo output channel will be out-

put directly to the MONITOR OUT jacks/PHONES

jack.

B When the [SOLO] key is on

The signal of the channel selected by the [ON] key

will be sent to the SOLO bus, and will be output

from the MONITOR OUT jacks/PHONES jack.

During this time, other signals will be muted.

C When the [CUE] key is on

The direct output signal of the track selected by

the REC TRACK SELECT [1]–[16]/[ST] keys will be

output from the MONITOR OUT jacks/PHONES

jack. During this time, other signals will be muted.

D When the internal metronome is on

The metronome signal will be mixed into the out-

put signals of (1)–(3).

Tip!

• The MONITOR OUT jacks and PHONES jack always

output the same signal. However, the level adjust-

ment is independent: the output level of the MONI-

TOR OUT jacks is adjusted by the [MONITOR

OUT] control, and the output level of the PHONES

jack is adjusted by the [PHONES] control.

• If both the [SOLO] key and the [CUE] key are turned

on, only the [CUE] key will be valid.

OMNI OUT

DIGITAL STEREO

OUT

DITHER

STEREO OUT

–10dBV

RECORDER DIRECT

OUT 1~16

CH DIRECT OUT1~8

STEREO

BUS1~8

AUX1~6

INSERT SEND

X 4

0dB

SLOT OUT

OPTION I/O SLOT

METER

COAXIAL

DITHER

OUTPUT PATCH

EFFECT

X 2

EFFECT

EFFECT1/2

SELECT

AUX5(EFF1),

AUX6(EFF2)

INSERT SEND

(EEF)

METER

SOLO R

MIXER

SOLO Logic

RECORDER

TRACK CUE

Logic

SOLO L

RECORDER

DIRECT OUT 1

RECORDER

DIRECT OUT 16

+4dB

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

PHONES

METRONOME

ATTON

STEREO L

STEREO R

RECORDER ST Trk

DIRECT OUT L

RECORDER ST Trk

DIRECT OUT R

SELECT

Welcome to the world of the AW2816

Operation section

The track structure of the AW2816

This section explains the track structure of the

AW2816. The recorder section of the AW2816 han-

dles three types of tracks: audio tracks, virtual tracks,

and the stereo track.

Audio tracks

These are the physical tracks on which recording and

playback is performed, and are also referred to simply

as “tracks.” When the AW2816 is in the default state,

the outputs of buses 1–8 are patched to the inputs of

tracks 1–8/9–16, and the outputs of tracks 1–16 are

patched to monitor channels 1–16, allowing up to six-

teen tracks to be recorded simultaneously. (However

since there are only eight mixer input channels, only

eight input signals can normally be recorded indepen-

dently.)

However, the number of tracks that can be played

back simultaneously is affected by the number of

tracks that are being recorded simultaneously. If you

increase the number of tracks for simultaneous

recording, tracks will automatically be muted accord-

ingly.

The following tables show the number of tracks that

can be simultaneously recorded and simultaneously

played back, and the number of tracks that will be

muted in each case, for 16 bit and 24 bit songs.

• 16 bit song

• 24 bit song

For example with a 24 bit song, if you set four tracks

to record-ready mode, four tracks will automatically

be muted. (Unrecorded tracks will be muted ﬁrst.)

Note that for either a 16 bit or a 24 bit song, setting

nine or more tracks to record-ready mode will cause

all tracks to be muted, so that it will no longer be pos-

sible to monitor the track playback.

In either case, simply defeating record-ready mode

will not defeat track muting. To defeat muting, you

must access the METER screen (→P.351) and turn off

muting for each track, or use the [ALL SAFE] key. (If

you use the [ALL SAFE] key, muting and record-ready

mode will be defeated simultaneously for all tracks.)

Virtual tracks

These are virtual tracks that can be selected. On the

AW2816, one virtual track 1–8 can be selected for

each audio track 1–16, and used for recording/play-

back.

The following illustration is a conceptual diagram of

virtual tracks. The horizontal rows correspond to

audio tracks 1–16, and the vertical columns to virtual

tracks 1–8. The shaded areas are virtual tracks that are

currently selected for recording/playback.

For example if you are recording a solo part on a

track, you can switch virtual tracks while recording

multiple takes, and select the best take later.

The stereo track

The “stereo track” is independent from the “audio

tracks.” It is used mainly as a master track for creating

an audio CD. The AW2816 provides one stereo track

for each song.

The input of the stereo track is always connected

internally to the output of the stereo output channel.

You can record the stereo bus signal simply by putting

the stereo track in record mode.

While the stereo track is being recorded, audio tracks

1–16 can only be played back, and cannot be

recorded. When the stereo track is played back, the

stereo track output is automatically assigned to moni-

tor channels 1/2. During this time, audio tracks 1–16

are forcibly muted, and cannot be unmuted.

Number of

tracks recorded

simultaneously

Number of

tracks played

back

simultaneously

Number of

tracks muted

0–816 0

9–16 0 16

Number of

tracks recorded

simultaneously

Number of

tracks played

back

simultaneously

Number of

tracks muted

0160

1–214 2

3–412 4

5–88 8

9–16 0 16

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Audio tracks

Virtual tracks

Welcome to the world of the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

About the display

This section explains what you will see in the LCD

display of the top panel. The display shows the follow-

ing information.

A Screen name

This is the name of the currently selected screen.

B Page name/channel

The information appearing here will depend on

the screen, and will be either the name of the page

selected within that screen, or the channel that is

selected for operation.

C Song name

This is the name of the currently selected song.

D Counter

This counter shows the current location of the

song. The counter display units can be selected

from the following. (→P.238).

•Time display (SECOND)

............................... Hours: Minutes: Seconds.

Milliseconds

•Time code display (TIME CODE)

............................... Hours: Minutes: Seconds:

Frames. Sub-frames

•Measure display (MEASURE)

............................... Measures. Beats. Ticks (1/960

of a quarter note)

Tip!

In the TRACK screen TR View page, you can hold

down the [SHIFT] key and press the [F1] key to make

the counter indicate the remaining time for record-

ing.

E Scene number

This is the scene number of the currently selected

scene (the current scene). If the mix parameters of

the last stored/recalled scene have been edited, an

“E” symbol will be displayed at the lower right.

F Level meters L/R

These level meters show the output level of the

stereo output channel (the signal after passing

through EQ and the dynamics processor).

G RTN 1/2 knobs

These knobs indicate the input levels of return

channels 1/2, or the send level from return chan-

nel 1 to AUX bus 6 (the send level from return

channel 2 to AUX bus 5). The knob will be high-

lighted at the –∞ dB, 0 dB, and +6 dB positions.

Tip!

When the AW2816 is in the default state, the name

(scene name) of the selected scene and the current

tempo/time signature information will be brieﬂy dis-

played in the

and

areas when you press the [ ]/

[ ] keys of the SCENE MEMORY section.

H Main screen

The information displayed in this area will depend

on the key that was pressed last. The main screen

area uses the following user interface conventions.

Cursor

The blinking frame within the display is called the

“cursor.” When an item in the screen is enclosed by

the cursor, this indicates that the corresponding item

is selected for editing or operations.

35 764

Cursor

Welcome to the world of the AW2816

Operation section

Buttons

Buttons in the display are used to switch a parameter

on/off, or to select one of multiple choices. Currently-

on buttons are highlighted as white text on a black

background, and currently-off buttons are displayed

as black text on a white background.

Knobs/faders/numerical boxes

Knobs/faders/numerical boxes in the display are used

to edit the value of the corresponding parameter. The

value of a knob or fader is displayed below or at the

right of it.

Tabs

If a screen contains multiple pages, the name of each

page will appear at the bottom of the display. The area

in which each name is displayed is called a “tab.”

Tabs are used to switch between pages within a

screen.

For some screens, additional tabs or buttons can be

accessed in this area. Such screens are indicated by a

symbol at the lower left of the display.

Off

• Knob • Fader • Numerical box

Welcome to the world of the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Basic operation of the AW2816

This section explains basic operations of the AW2816,

such as screen operations and selecting channels.

Accessing screens and pages

When you want to operate a mix parameter or edit an

internal setting of the AW2816, you must ﬁrst recall

the desired screen in the display. if a screen is divided

into multiple pages, select the desired page after

recalling the screen.

Press the key for the desired screen.

When you press a key in the top panel WORK

NAVIGATE, UNIT, MIXER, FADER MODE,

RECORDER, or AUTOMATION sections or the

[METER] key, the corresponding screen will

appear. For example, the following illustration

shows the PATCH screen that will appear when

you press the [PATCH] key of the UNIT section.

Tip!

If the screen contains multiple pages, the most-

recently operated page of that screen will appear.

To select another page within that screen,

press the function key ([F1]–[F5]) that cor-

responds to the desired page.

The tabs displayed at the bottom of the screen

correspond to the function keys ([F1]–[F5]) as

shown in the following illustration. For example

if you want to access the Patch OUT page of the

PATCH screen, press the [F2] key.

Tip!

• You can also move successively between the pages

of a screen by repeatedly pressing the same key in

step 1.

• In this manual, consecutive key operations are listed

as “[PATCH] key

→

[F2] key” (press the [PATCH] key

and then press the [F2] key).

Switching a button on/off

A button displayed in the screen can be switched on/

off as follows.

Use the CURSOR keys to move

the cursor to the desired button.

Press the [ENTER] key.

The button will be switched on/off. A

highlighted button is currently “on.”

Editing the value of a fader/

knob/numerical box

The value of a fader/knob/numerical box displayed in

the screen can be edited as follows.

Use the CURSOR keys to move the cursor

to the desired fader/knob/numerical box.

Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to edit the value.

Welcome to the world of the AW2816

Operation section

Using the additional function

buttons

When a symbol is shown in the lower left of the

display, you can press and hold the [SHIFT] key to

access new buttons in the bottom of the display, and

use various additional functions.

In a screen that displays a symbol in the

lower left, press and hold the [SHIFT] key.

While the [SHIFT] key is held, new function but-

tons will be displayed in the tab area at the bot-

tom of the display.

Continue to hold the [SHIFT] key, and press

the function key ([F1]–[F5] key) corre-

sponding to the desired button.

The function assigned to the corresponding but-

ton will be executed.

Tip!

In this manual, key operations such as the above

where one key is held down while another is pressed

are given as “[SHIFT] key + [F3] key” (hold down the

[SHIFT] key and press the [F3] key).

Inputting text

When you create a new song, or when you save a

scene memory or library, a popup window will

appear, allowing you to assign a name to the song or

settings. Text can be input in a popup window as fol-

lows.

Perform a scene or library Save operation,

or create a new song.

When you save a scene or library, a TITLE EDIT

popup window will appear, allowing you to

assign a name to the scene or library.

When you create a new song, a NAME EDIT

popup window will appear, allowing you to

assign a name to the song.

The popup window contains the following areas and

functions.

1 Text input box

Characters, numerals, and symbols you input are

displayed in this box. When you store a library or

scene for the ﬁrst time, a default name will be dis-

played here. The highlighted area indicates the

character that can now be edited.

B SHIFT LOCK button

This switches the type of character that will be

input from the character palette (5).

C [///] buttons

These buttons move the highlighted area within

the text input box. The / buttons are used

only in a popup window that allows more than 16

characters to be input.

D INS button/DEL button

The INS button inserts a space at the highlighted

area of the text input box. Subsequent characters

will be moved backward.

The DEL button deletes the highlighted character

in the text input box. Subsequent characters will

be moved forward.

E Character palette

Here you can select the character that will be

input into the text input box (1). In conjunction

with the on/off state of the SHIFT LOCK button,

the following characters/symbols/numerals can be

input.

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z

spc (space) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 , . ! " # & / * - + < > : ;

Welcome to the world of the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Use the [CURSOR] keys to move the cursor

within the character palette to the button

for the character you want to input, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The corresponding character/symbol/numeral

will be input, and the highlighted area in the text

input box will move to the right.

Use the same procedure to input the

remaining characters.

Tip!

• Instead of the / buttons, you can also use the

[DATA/JOG] dial to move the highlighted area left

or right.

• If you want to correct a character that you input by

mistake, use the

/ buttons or the [DATA/JOG]

dial to specify the location of that character, and use

the text palette to select a new character.

When you are ﬁnished inputting the name,

move the cursor to the OK button, and

press the [ENTER] key.

If you are saving a scene or library, the new name

will be conﬁrmed at this stage, and the TITLE

EDIT popup window will close.

If you are creating a new song, the NAME EDIT

window will close, and a COMMENT EDIT win-

dow will appear, allowing you to assign a com-

ment to the song. Operations in this window are

the same as in the NAME EDIT window.

Tip!

• If you decide to cancel the operation, move the cur-

sor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER]

key. The name you input will be discarded, and the

previous screen will reappear.

• A scene or library can be given a name of up to 16

characters, and a song name and comment can be

up to 64 characters long.

Selecting a channel

In order to operate the mix parameters of a channel

on the AW2816, you must ﬁrst select the channel that

you want to operate. Here’s how to select a channel.

Use the keys of the MIXING LAYER section

to select the mixing layer that you want to

operate.

In the AW2816, the controls for the monaural

channels in the top panel ([SEL] keys 1–8, [ON]

keys 1–8, faders 1–8) are shared between input

channels 1–8 and monitor channels 1–16. For

this reason, you must ﬁrst select the mixing layer

(group of eight channels) that contains the chan-

nel you want to operate.

According to the key you select in the MIXING

LAYER section, the channels operated by the

fader section will change as follows.

Tip!

The [SEL] keys, [ON] keys, and faders (controls) of the

stereo output channel and return channels 1/2 are not

affected by operations of the MIXING LAYER section

keys.

If you want to operate the faders, use the

[HOME] key and [AUX 1]–[AUX 6] keys of

the FADER MODE section to select the

fader mode.

Faders 1–8 are used to adjust the input levels of

the currently selected mixing layer or the send

levels to AUX 1–6. To select the parameters that

will be controlled by faders 1–8, use the keys of

the FADER MODE section.

Input channels 1–8

Monitor channels 1–8

Monitor channels 9–16

Return channel 2

Return channel 1

Stereo output

channel

Welcome to the world of the AW2816

Operation section

The following table shows how the parameters con-

trolled by faders 1–8 will change depending on the

fader mode.

To operate the mix parameters of a speciﬁc

channel, access the corresponding screen/

page, and press the [SEL] key of the desired

channel.

To set mix parameters such as pan, EQ, and

dynamics, access the screen/page for that param-

eter, and press the [SEL] key for the desired chan-

nel to select it. (Alternatively, you can select the

channel before you access the screen/page.)

The [SEL] key of the corresponding channel will

light. Also, that channel will be selected in the

display as the object of operations.

Fader

mode

Faders 1–8

MIXING LAYER : INPUT [1–8]

MIXING LAYER : RECORDER [1–8]

MIXING LAYER : RECORDER [9–16]

HOME

Input levels of input channels 1–8

Input levels of monitor channels

1–8

Input levels of monitor channels

9–16

AUX 1

Send levels from input channels 1–8

to AUX bus 1

Send levels from monitor channels

1–8 to AUX bus 1

Send levels from monitor channels

9–16 to AUX bus 1

AUX 2

Send levels from input channels 1–8

to AUX bus 2

Send levels from monitor channels

1–8 to AUX bus 2

Send levels from monitor channels

9–16 to AUX bus 2

AUX 3

Send levels from input channels 1–8

to AUX bus 3

Send levels from monitor channels

1–8 to AUX bus 3

Send levels from monitor channels

9–16 to AUX bus 3

AUX 4

Send levels from input channels 1–8

to AUX bus 4

Send levels from monitor channels

1–8 to AUX bus 4

Send levels from monitor channels

9–16 to AUX bus 4

AUX 5

Send levels from input channels 1–8

to AUX bus 5 (effect 1)

Send levels from monitor channels

1–8 to AUX bus 5 (effect 1)

Send levels from monitor channels

9–16 to AUX bus 5 (effect 1)

AUX 6

Send levels from input channels 1–8

to AUX bus 6 (effect 2)

Send levels from monitor channels

1–8 to AUX bus 6 (effect 2)

Send levels from monitor channels

9–16 to AUX bus 6 (effect 2)

Fader

mode

STEREO fader [RTN 1] control [RTN 2] control

HOME

Output level of the stereo output

channel

Level of return channel 1 Level of return channel 2

AUX 1

Send level from return channel 1 to

AUX bus 1

Send level from return channel 2 to

AUX bus 1

AUX 2

Send level from return channel 1 to

AUX bus 2

Send level from return channel 2 to

AUX bus 2

AUX 3

Send level from return channel 1 to

AUX bus 3

Send level from return channel 2 to

AUX bus 3

AUX 4

Send level from return channel 1 to

AUX bus 4

Send level from return channel 2 to

AUX bus 4

AUX 5

—

Send level from return channel 1 to

AUX bus 5 (effect 1)

AUX 6

Send level from return channel 1 to

AUX bus 6 (effect 2)

—

Let’s record on the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Let’s record on the AW2816

As a way to explain the basic operations of multi-track recording and

mixdown on the AW2816, this chapter describes how you can suc-

cessively record instruments such as rhythm machine (drums), bass,

guitar, and keyboard to create a song. You will also learn more

advanced techniques that you will ﬁnd convenient.

Connections and setup

This section explains connections to external devices,

creating a new song, word clock settings, and other

things that you need to do before you begin record-

ing.

Making connections

The following diagram shows common examples of

audio signal connections. Refer to this diagram and

connect the mics, instruments, or external devices

that you will use.

MONITOR system

Headphones

MONITOR OUT

INPUT 1 2 3–8

INPUT 8

(HI-Z)

PHONES

Rhythm machine

Synthesizer

Mics for

recording drums

Electric guitar/

electric bass

AW2816

OPTION

SLOT

DIGITAL

STEREO OUT

DIGITAL

STEREO IN

DAT

00.00.00.00

DAT recorder

Digital MTR

I/O card

VOL VOL

Let’s record on the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

• Connect line-level instruments (rhythm machines

and synthesizers) to the INPUT 1–8 (phone)

jacks.

• If you use mics, connect them to the INPUT 1–8

(phone) jacks or the INPUT 1/2 (XLR) jacks.

• If you use condenser mics that require phantom

power, connect them to the INPUT 1/2 (XLR)

jacks, and turn the rear panel [PHANTOM +48V

ON/OFF] switch on.

• If you are connecting an electric guitar or electric

bass via a direct box or pre-amp, connect it to an

INPUT 1/2 (XLR) jack or INPUT 1–8 (phone)

jack, depending on the type of output connector.

• If you are directly connecting a high impedance

instrument such as an electric guitar or electric

bass with passive pickups, connect it to the

INPUT 8 (HI-Z) jack.

Creating a new song

On the AW2816, all information needed to reproduce

a song (mixer settings, recorder settings, audio data,

etc.) is managed as a “song.” When you want to begin

a new recording, you must start by creating a new

song.

Tip!

When you format the internal hard disk, a new

44.1 kHz/16 bit song will be created, and will be

loaded the next time the AW2816 is powered-on. If

you want to use this song, the following procedure is

not necessary.

Turn on the power in the following order:

external devices connected to the AW2816

→ the AW2816 itself → your monitor sys-

tem.

When you turn on the power of the AW2816, the

song that was used most recently will be loaded

automatically.

If SCSI devices are connected to the AW2816, the

AW2816 may not start up correctly if its power is

turned on when the connected SCSI devices are still

powered-off. SCSI devices must be turned on before

the AW2816.

Press the [SONG] key → [F1] key.

The SONG screen Song List page will appear. In

this page you can create a new song, and save/

load existing songs.

Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys

to move the cursor to the NEW SONG but-

ton in the lower right of the screen, and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will appear, asking you

whether you want to save the song currently

being operated (referred to as the “current

song”).

Move the cursor to the YES button if you

want to save the current song, or to the

NO button if you do not want to save it,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The NEW SONG SETTING popup window will

appear.

In this popup window you can specify the

attributes of the new song.

1 Fs

This selects the sampling frequency (44.1 kHz/

48 kHz) of the audio data that will be recorded on

the hard disk. Move the cursor to either the 44.1

kHz button or the 48 kHz button, and press the

[ENTER] key.

B Recbit

This selects the number of quantization bits

(16 bit/24 bit) of the audio data that will be

recorded on the hard disk. Move the cursor to the

16 BIT button or the 24 BIT button, and press the

[ENTER] key.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Operation section

Use the Fs and Recbit buttons to select the

sampling frequency and number of quanti-

zation bits for the newly created song.

• It is not possible to change the sampling frequency

or quantization after creating the song.

• The quantization you select here will affect the

number of tracks that can be played back simulta-

neously while multiple tracks are being recorded

simultaneously. If you need 8 tracks of simultaneous

recording and 16 tracks of simultaneous playback,

you must select 16 bit (

→

P.33).

• If you intend to write the song to an audio CD, you

must select 44.1 kHz as the sampling frequency. It is

not possible to create an audio CD from a song

whose sampling frequency is 48 kHz.

Move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The MIXER DATA IMPORT popup window will

appear. In this popup window you can choose to

import (load) various settings such as mixer data

(not audio data) from the current song into the

newly created song. For this example, you do not

need to make any selection here.

Tip!

• If you select 48 kHz as the sampling frequency, a

popup window will appear following step 5, inform-

ing you that it will not be possible to create a CD

from this song. Move the cursor to the OK button

and press the [ENTER] key.

• Mixer data can be imported even after a new song is

created (

→

P.155).

Move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A NAME EDIT popup window will appear,

allowing you to assign a name to the new song.

Use the character palette to input a song

name of up to 64 characters. (For details

on inputting characters, refer to page 37.)

When you are ﬁnished, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

A COMMENT EDIT popup window will appear,

allowing you to assign a comment to the new

song.

As desired, input a comment in the same

way as you input the song name. Then

move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The new song will be created.

Tip!

• The song name and comment can be modiﬁed even

after the new song is created (

→

P.150).

• In steps 5–8, you can cancel creation of a new song

by moving the cursor to the CANCEL button and

pressing the [ENTER] key.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Word clock settings

“Word clock” is clock data that acts as the timing ref-

erence for digitally processing the audio data. If digi-

tal audio data is being transmitted or received

between the AW2816 and an external digital audio

device, each device must be using the same word

clock. Speciﬁcally, one device must be set to operate

as the “word clock master” (the device that transmits

word clock data), and the remaining devices must be

set to operate as “word clock slaves” (devices that fol-

low the word clock provided by the master).

If you are digitally connecting an external device such

as a digital MTR or sampler to the AW2816, select the

word clock master as described below.

• Be aware that if your system contains an unsynchro-

nized device, dropouts and click noise will occur.

• Even if an external device is not digitally connected,

a message of “WRONG WORD CLOCK!” will

appear if the word clock setting is inappropriate,

and it will not be possible to record correctly. Please

check the word clock settings as explained in the fol-

lowing procedure.

Press the [SETUP] key → [F1] key.

The SETUP screen D.in Setup page will appear,

in which you can make word clock settings.

In the WORD CLOCK SOURCE area of this page,

you can select one of the following word clock

sources to which the AW2816 will synchronize.

• SLOT 1/2–7/8

The clock data included in the input signal of the

digital I/O card will be used as the word clock

source. You can select one pair of input channels

(1/2–7/8) from the digital I/O card, and the

AW2816 will synchronize to the clock data

included in that input signal.

• D.ST IN

The clock data included in the input signal of the

DIGITAL STEREO IN connector will be used as

the word clock source.

• INT

Use the internal clock of the AW2816.

A button will be highlighted to indicate

that it has been selected as the current

word clock source.

An X superimposed on a button indi-

cates that no digital audio signal is

being input to the corresponding slot or

jack.

A diagonal line/superimposed on a but-

ton indicates that a digital audio signal

is being input to the corresponding slot

or jack, but is not synchronized to the

internal clock of the AW2816.

Buttons without an X or/indicate that a

digital audio signal is being input to the

corresponding slot or jack, and is syn-

chronized to the internal clock of the

AW2816.

In the WORD CLOCK SOURCE area, select

the desired clock source, and move the

cursor to the corresponding button.

The clock source you should select will depend

on the system in which you are using the

AW2816. Several typical examples are described

below.

• Using the AW2816 as the word clock master

If no digital audio device is connected to the

AW2816, or if you want the AW2816 to be the

word clock master that the other external devices

(e.g., digital MTR) will follow, turn on the INT

button. You should also use this setting when

recording from the AW2816’s DIGITAL STEREO

OUT jack to a DAT recorder or MD recorder.

Set the digital MTR so that it will use the word

clock included in the input signal from the

AW2816.

AW2816

(word clock master)

WORD CLOCK SOURCE

= INT

OPTION

I/O SLOT

Digital MTR

(word clock slave)

Digital I/O card

Word clock

Let’s record on the AW2816

Operation section

• Using the digital MTR as the word clock master

In this case, the digital MTR will be the word

clock master, and the AW2816 will follow the

word clock included in the input signal from the

digital I/O card. Turn on one of the SLOT 1/2–7/8

buttons.

Set the digital MTR so that it will operate using its

own internal clock.

• Using a DAT recorder or MD recorder as the

word clock master

If you want to record the signal from a DAT

recorder or MD recorder into the AW2816 via

the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack, turn on the D.ST

IN button.

Most consumer DAT recorders and MD recorders are

designed to forcibly lock to the word clock of the

input signal during recording. Such DAT recorders

can be used as a word clock master only during play-

back.

After selecting the appropriate button,

press the [ENTER] key.

The AW2816 will switch to the speciﬁed clock

source. The sampling frequency of the signal cur-

rently selected as the clock source will be indi-

cated by the Fs (sampling frequency) ﬁeld in the

upper left of the display.

• If you are using the internal clock of the AW2816 as

the clock source, the sampling frequency selected

when you created the current song will be the sam-

pling frequency of the entire system.

• If you want the AW2816 to follow an external clock

source, you must make sure that the sampling fre-

quency of the song matches the value displayed in

the Fs ﬁeld. If these values are different, the pitch

may change when you set the clock source back to

“INT” (internal clock).

• A certain amount of time may be required for the

AW2816 to switch clock sources, and there may be

silence during this time.

• After switching the clock source, verify that an X or/

symbol is not superimposed on the button you

selected in step 3. If an X or/symbol is displayed, or

if an error message is displayed, check whether the

clock setting and connections of the external device

is appropriate.

AW2816

(word clock slave)

WORD CLOCK SOURCE

= SLOT 1/2–7/8

OPTION

I/O SLOT

Digital MTR

(word clock master)

Digital I/O card

Word clock

AW2816

(word clock slave)

WORD CLOCK SOURCE

= D.ST IN

DAT recorder

(word clock master)

Word clock

DIGITAL

STEREO IN

jack

DIGITAL

STEREO OUT

jack

DAT

00.00.00.00

Let’s record on the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Recording the ﬁrst track

This section explains the procedure for recording the

ﬁrst track. As an example, we will assume that you

want a rhythm machine (or drum mics) connected to

INPUT jacks 1/2 to be recorded on tracks 1/2.

The procedure described below assumes that the

AW2816 is in the default state. If internal settings

have already been modiﬁed, recall scene number 00

from scene memory to return the internal settings of

the AW2816 to the default state (

→

P.129).

Setting the input level

While producing sound on the instrument

connected to the INPUT 1/2 jacks, adjust

[GAIN] controls 1/2 so that PEAK indicators

1/2 ﬂicker faintly at the loudest volume lev-

els.

Tip!

The [GAIN] controls adjust the sensitivity of the ana-

log inputs. In order to record with the widest dynamic

range and least noise, set the [GAIN] controls as high

as possible without allowing clipping to occur.

Press the [HOME] key → [F1] key.

The HOME screen IN/Rtn/MON page will

appear. This page displays meters that show the

input levels of the input channels, return chan-

nels, and monitor channels.

In the MIXING LAYER section, press the

INPUT [1-8] key to select input channels 1–

8 as the mixing layer.

The INPUT [1-8] key will light, and now you can

use [SEL] keys 1–8, [ON] keys 1–8, and faders 1–

8 to control input channels 1–8.

Tip!

• “Mixing layer” refers to the group of channels that

is being controlled by the panel controls ([SEL] keys

1–8, [ON] keys 1–8, and faders 1–8) (

→

P.38).

• Even when you switch to a different mixing group,

the fader locations and [ON] key status of the previ-

ous mixing layer are remembered, and the faders

and keys will return to their previous status when

you recall that mixing layer once again.

In the lower left of the IN/Rtn/MON page,

make sure that the POST FADER button is

turned on.

If another button (PRE EQ/POST EQ) is on, move

the cursor to the POST FADER button and press

the [ENTER] key. Now the meters will indicate

the post-fader input levels.

Tip!

The pre-EQ input levels will be displayed if the PRE

EQ button is on, and the post-EQ pre-fader input lev-

els will be displayed if the POST EQ button is on.

Make sure that [ON] keys 1/2 are on (lit),

and raise faders 1/2 to the 0 dB position.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Operation section

While producing sound on your instru-

ment, watch the level meters in the screen

to see the input levels for input channels 1/

When the AW2816 is in the default state, the

input signals of the INPUT 1–8 jacks are assigned

to input channels 1–8 respectively, as shown in

the following diagram. This means that the sig-

nals from the rhythm machine (drum recording

mics) connected to the INPUT 1/2 jacks are con-

nected to input channels 1/2.

For this example, raise the faders of input chan-

nels 1/2 to the 0 dB position, and watch the

meters in the HOME screen IN/Rtn/MON page to

verify that the signals are being input.

Tip!

• If the level meters for input channels 1/2 reach the

“OVER” position, check whether faders 1/2 are at

the 0 dB position, and then lower [GAIN] controls

1/2.

• The type of signal assigned to input channels 1–8

can be changed if necessary. For details refer to

page 71.

Pairing two channels

The AW2816 allows adjacent odd-numbered → even-

numbered input channels or monitor channels to be

speciﬁed as a stereo pair. When two channels are

paired, their mix parameters will be linked, with the

exception of phase, pan, and effect insert. When

inputting a stereo source, it is convenient to pair the

input channels.

To assign input channels 1/2 as a stereo

pair, hold down [SEL] key 1 and press [SEL]

key 2.

When you simultaneously press two adjacent

odd-numbered → even-numbered [SEL] keys, a

CHANNEL PAIRING popup window will appear,

allowing you to specify how pairing will occur.

Move the cursor to one of the following

buttons.

• INPUT x→y (x=odd number, y=even number)

The parameters of the odd-numbered channel

will be copied to the even-numbered channel.

• INPUT y→x (x=odd number, y=even number)

The parameters of the even-numbered channel

will be copied to the odd-numbered channel.

• RESET BOTH

The parameters of both channels will be reset to

the default values.

When you have selected the pairing

method, press the [ENTER] key.

The two channels will be paired.

Tip!

• If you select RESET BOTH, faders 1/2 will move

down to the -inﬁnity position. Raise them back to

0 dB.

• To cancel pairing, hold down one of the [SEL] keys

and press the other [SEL] key to display a popup

window that will ask whether you really want to

cancel pairing. Move the cursor to the OK button

and press the [ENTER] key.

• Pairing can also be set/cancelled in the PAN screen

Pair page (

→

P.295).

When channels are paired, you must operate only one

of the faders of the pair. If you attempt to move both

faders simultaneously, the motors will be strained,

causing malfunctions.

Input channel 1

Input channel 2

Input channel 3

Mixer section

INPUT jack 1

INPUT jack 2

INPUT jack 3

INPUT jack 8

Input channel 8

Input

patch

Let’s record on the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Patching input signals to

recorder inputs

When recording on the AW2816, you can either send

the signals of each input channel directly to the

recorder inputs (tracks), or send them via buses 1–8 to

the recorder inputs. In this example, we will change

the internal settings as shown in the following dia-

gram, so that the signals from the rhythm machine

(drum recording mics) connected to input channels 1/

2 are sent directly to the inputs of tracks 1/2.

Tip!

If you want to mix multiple input channels and record

them on one or two tracks, it is convenient to route

them through buses 1–8 and send them to the

recorder tracks. This method of recording is explained

in chapter 14, “Mixing and recording multiple chan-

nels” (

→

P.230).

Press the [PAN] key → [F1] key.

The PAN/ROUTE screen Pan 1-8 page will

appear. In this page you can set the pan (or bal-

ance) of each channel, and assign it to buses.

Move the cursor to the ST button of input

channel 1, and press the [ENTER] key to

turn it off.

Now the input signal of input channels 1/2 will

no longer be sent to the stereo bus. In this exam-

ple, input channels 1/2 have been paired, so that

when you operated the ST button of input chan-

nel 1, input channel 2 followed the setting.

Tip!

When the AW2816 is in the default state, input chan-

nels 1–8 are assigned to the stereo bus, and can be

monitored from the MONITOR OUT jacks/PHONES

jack. However in this example we want to send the

input signals directly to the recorder tracks and moni-

tor via the monitor channels for those tracks, and this

is why we defeated the assignment from the input

channels to the stereo bus.

Press the [PATCH] key → [F1] key.

The PATCH screen Patch IN page will appear. In

this page you can select the signals that will be

assigned (patched) to the input of each channel

and to the inputs of the recorder.

Mixer section Recorder section

Track 1

Track 2

Input channel 1

Input channel 2

Mixer section

INPUT jack 1

INPUT jack 2

Stereo bus

Monitor channel 1

Monitor channel 2

Let’s record on the AW2816

Operation section

When the AW2816 is in the default state, the

outputs of buses 1–8 (BUS 1–BUS 8) are assigned

to recorder inputs 1–8/9–16 as shown in the dia-

gram below.

Move the cursor to the RECORDER TRACK

INPUT ASSIGN area. Change the recorder

input 1 setting to “DIR 1,” and the

recorder input 2 setting to “DIR 2.”

The DIR 1–DIR 8 settings indicate the direct out-

put (with the initial settings, the post-fader input

signal) of input channels 1–8. As shown in the

diagram below, patching “DIR 1” and “DIR 2” to

recorder inputs 1/2 will cause the input signal of

input channels 1/2 to be sent directly to tracks 1/

Press the REC TRACK SELECT [1]/[2] keys.

The REC TRACK SELECT [1]/[2] keys will begin

blinking, and tracks 1/2 will be in record-ready

mode.

Press the [METER] key.

The METER screen will appear, displaying meters

that indicate the input/output levels of tracks 1–

16.

Tip!

The METER screen has two pages, Meter 1 and Meter

2, and you can switch between these by using the

[F1]/[F2] keys or by repeatedly pressing the [METER]

key. The functions of the meter area are the same for

both pages.

In the INPUT MONITOR area, make sure

that the AUTO button is on.

The three buttons in the INPUT MONITOR area

located in the lower right of the METER screen

are used to select the input metering mode (the

way in which input metering of each track is

switched). When the AUTO button is on, the sig-

nal being monitored for record-ready tracks will

change automatically depending on the running

mode, as shown in the following table.

While playing sounds on the instrument

connected to the INPUT 1/2 jacks, check

level meters 1/2.

The level of the signals input to tracks 1/2 will be

displayed in level meters 1/2. (However at this

stage, they will not yet be output to the MONI-

TOR OUT jacks/PHONE jack.) If the level meters

reach the OVER position, check whether the

fader 1/2 (input level of input channels 1/2) set-

tings are appropriate.

Tip!

You can use the Quick Rec screen to make the settings

of steps 1–6 in a single operation. For details on the

Quick Rec function, refer to page 80.

Buses 1–8

Mixer section Recorder section

Recorder

input patch

×8

Tracks 1–8

Tracks 9–16

Running mode Monitored signal

Stopped Track input source

Playing Track playback

Recording Track input source

Let’s record on the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Adjusting the monitor level

Now we will send the signal of the rhythm machine

(drum recording mics) via monitor channels 1/2 to the

stereo bus, and monitor it from the MONITOR OUT

jacks or PHONES jack.

Press the RECORDER [1-8] key.

Monitor channels 1–8 are selected as the mixing

layer that will be controlled by the panel control-

lers.

Set monitor channels 1/2 as a stereo pair.

By simultaneously pressing adjacent odd-num-

bered → even-numbered [SEL] keys, you can pair

monitor channels in the same way as input chan-

nels.

Press the [PAN] key → [F2] key.

The PAN/ROUTE screen Pan MONI page will

appear. In this page you can make pan settings

and bus assignments for monitor channels 1–16.

In the monitor channel 1/2 area, make sure

that the ST buttons are on and the 1–8

buttons are off.

The signal of the rhythm machine (drum record-

ing mics) will be sent via monitor channels 1/2 to

the stereo bus.

Move the cursor to the PAN knob of moni-

tor channel 1, and turn the [DATA/JOG]

dial to set the pan value to “L16” (far left).

In the same way, set the PAN knob of mon-

itor channel 2 to “R16” (far right).

Tip!

Even when channels are paired, the PAN knob, phase,

and effect insert settings will not be linked.

Make sure that [ON] keys 1/2 and the STE-

REO [ON] key are turned on.

Press the [METER] key to display the METER

screen.

While playing sounds on your instrument,

raise faders 1/2 and the STEREO fader. Also

use the [MONITOR OUT] control/

[PHONES] control to adjust the monitor

level.

The signal of the stereo bus can be monitored

through your monitor system or headphones. If

the L/R level meters reach the OVER location,

lower the STEREO fader.

Tip!

The monitor channels affect the signal after it has

passed through the recorder. This means that operat-

ing the pan, fader, and [ON] keys of the monitor

channels will not affect the signal recorded on the

recorder.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Operation section

Recording

Now we will record the signal of the rhythm machine

(drum recording mics) on tracks 1/2.

Press the [METER] key → [F2] key to display

the METER screen Meter 2 page.

The METER screen Meter 2 page will display the

input/output levels of tracks 1–16 and the output

level of the stereo output channel, as well as a

counter in large numerals.

Press the [RTZ] key of the Locate section.

The counter in the display will rewind to zero

(00:00:00.000).

Tip!

When the song is in the initial state, the counter will

indicate the current location in units of “hours: min-

utes: seconds. millisecond” units. If desired, you can

change this to time code display (hours: minutes: sec-

onds: frames. subframes) or measure display (mea-

sures: beats. ticks) (

→

P.238).

If the [SONG], [FILE], [CD], or [EDIT] keys have been

pressed, the keys of the Locate section and Transport

section will not be valid (or their function may

change). Select other keys before you continue.

To begin recording, press the REC [ ] key

of the Transport section, and then press

the PLAY [ ] key.

The REC [ ] key and PLAY [ ] key will light,

and recording on tracks 1/2 will begin. During

recording, the REC TRACK SELECT [1]/[2] keys

will light.

Begin performing on your instrument.

Tip!

When recording a live performance such as drums or

guitar on the ﬁrst track, you may wish to monitor the

click of the internal metronome as you record. Metro-

nome operation is explained in chapter 14, “Using the

metronome” (

→

P.229).

When you are ﬁnished playing, press the

STOP [ ] key.

The REC [ ] key and PLAY [ ] key will go dark,

and recording will end.

To hear the recorded content, press the

[ ] key of the Locate section, and then

press the PLAY [ ] key.

When you press the PLAY [ ] key, you will be

able to monitor the playback of the recorded

tracks. If you decide to re-record, stop the song,

press the [UNDO] key to cancel the previous

recording, and repeat steps 2–5.

Tip!

By pressing the [IN] key of the Locate section you can

instantly return to the location where recording was

last begun.

Be aware that if a button other than AUTO (i.e.,

INDI./ALL) is turned on in the INPUT MONITOR

area of the METER screen, it may not be possible to

monitor the playback sound unless you cancel record-

ready mode for the tracks.

If you are satisﬁed with the content that

was recorded, press the STOP [ ] key to

stop the song.

Press the REC TRACK SELECT [1]/[2] keys

to cancel record-ready mode for tracks 1/

• By using the [ALL SAFE] key in the REC TRACK

SELECT section, you can cancel record-ready mode

for all tracks in a single operation.

• If you want to take a break at this point, we recom-

mend that you save the song (

→

P.62).

Let’s record on the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Recording additional tracks (Overdubbing)

This section explains how you can listen to the rhythm

machine (drums) recorded on tracks 1/2 while you

overdub an electric bass connected to the INPUT 8

(HI-Z) jack onto track 3.

Setting the input level

While playing the bass connected to the

INPUT 8 (HI-Z) jack, adjust [GAIN] control

8 so that PEAK indicator 8 ﬂickers faintly

when you play the loudest.

Tip!

• The INPUT 8 (HI-Z) jack is for directly connecting

instruments with a high output impedance, such as

an electric guitar or electric bass with passive pick-

ups.

• It is not possible to use the INPUT 8 TRS phone jack

and HI-Z jack simultaneously. If plugs are inserted

into both, the HI-Z jack will take priority.

Press the [HOME] key → [F1] key.

The HOME screen IN/Rtn/MON page will

appear. In the lower left of the screen, make sure

that the POST FADER button is turned on.

Press the INPUT [1-8] key to select input

channels 1–8 as the mixing layer.

Make sure that [ON] key 8 is turned on,

and raise fader 8 to the 0 dB position.

While producing sound on your instru-

ment, watch the level meters in the screen

and check the input level of input channel

When the AW2816 is in the default state, the

input signal of INPUT jack 8 is patched to input

channel 8. If the input channel 8 level meter

reaches the “OVER” position, make sure that

fader 8 is in the 0 dB position, and lower [GAIN]

control 8.

Patching the input signal to the

recorder input

Now we will change the internal settings so that the

bass signal that is being input to input channels 8 will

be sent to the input of track 3.

Press the [VIEW] key → [F1] key.

The VIEW screen CH View page will appear. This

page displays all mix parameters of the currently

selected channel. (Here you can also edit the

main parameters of the channel.) It is convenient

to use this page when you want to edit the mix

parameters of a speciﬁc channel.

In “Recording the ﬁrst track,” we used the PAN/

ROUTE screen to defeat the stereo bus assign-

ment, but here we will use the VIEW screen CH

View page to perform the same operation.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Operation section

Press the INPUT [1-8] key → [SEL] key 8.

On the AW2816, you specify the channel that

you want to operate by ﬁrst selecting the mixing

layer in the MIXING LAYER section, and then

using a [SEL] key to select the desired channel.

(The [SEL] key of the selected channel will light.)

In the CH View page, the currently selected

channel is shown in the upper left of the display.

Move the cursor to the ST button in the

PAN/ROUT area, and press the [ENTER] key

to switch it off.

Now the input signal of input channel 8 will no

longer be sent to the stereo bus.

Press the [PATCH] key → [F1] key.

The PATCH screen Patch IN page will appear.

Move the cursor to the RECORDER TRACK

INPUT ASSIGN area, and change the set-

ting of recorder input 3 to “DIR 8.”

Now the input signal of input channel 8 (bass)

will be sent directly to track 3.

Press the REC TRACK SELECT [3] key.

The REC TRACK SELECT [3] key will begin blink-

ing, and track 3 will be in record-ready mode.

Press the [METER] key.

The METER screen will appear. In the INPUT

MONITOR area, make sure that the AUTO but-

ton is turned on.

While playing the bass connected to INPUT

(HI-Z) jack 8, watch level meter 3.

The level of the signal sent to the input of track 3

will be displayed in level meter 3. If the level

meter reaches the OVER position, check whether

fader 8 (input level of input channel 8) is set

appropriately.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Adjusting the monitor level

Next we will send the bass signal via monitor channel

3 to the stereo bus, mix it with the signal of the previ-

ously-recorded tracks 1/2, and monitor it from the

MONITOR OUT jacks or PHONES jack.

Press the RECORDER [1-8] key → [SEL] key

[SEL] key 3 will light, and monitor channel 3 will

be selected for operations.

Press the [VIEW] key → [F1] key

The VIEW screen CH View page will display the

mix parameters of monitor channel 3.

Make sure that the ST button is turned on

in the PAN/ROUT area.

The signal of monitor channel 3 will be sent to

the stereo bus.

Move the cursor to the PAN knob, and set

the bass to a stereo location that is most

comfortable for monitoring.

Tip!

If you move the cursor to the PAN knob and press the

[ENTER] key, the knob will be reset to the center.

Make sure that [ON] key 3 is turned on.

Then while you play on your bass, raise

fader 3 to a volume that is comfortable for

monitoring.

Applying the equalizer to the

input signal

The AW2816 provides 4-band full-parametric EQ on

all channels. Here’s how to use the input channel EQ

to process the signal before it is recorded on the track.

Press the INPUT [1-8] key → [SEL] key 8.

[SEL] key 8 will light, and input channel 8 will be

selected for operations.

Press the [EQ] key → [F1] key.

The EQ screen EQ/Att page will appear, in which

you can edit the EQ for input channel 8.

Make sure that the ON/OFF button in the

upper left of the display is turned ON.

The ON/OFF button switches the EQ on/off. If it

is turned OFF, press the [ENTER] key to switch it

ON.

Tip!

When the EQ/Att page is displayed, you can simply

press the [ENTER] key (regardless of the cursor loca-

tion) to switch the ON/OFF button.

While playing sounds on your instrument,

adjust the EQ parameters.

To adjust the EQ parameters, move the cursor in

the lower part of the display, and use the [DATA/

JOG] dial to edit the values. For each of the

LOW, L-MID, H-MID, and HIGH bands, you can

edit the following parameters.

• Q knob

This knob speciﬁes the steepness at which the

region of the center frequency speciﬁed by the F

knob will be boosted/cut. The range is 10–0.10,

and the curve will become steeper as this value

decreases. For the LOW/HIGH bands, this knob

is also used to switch the equalizer type.

• F (Frequency) knob

This knob speciﬁes the center frequency at which

the boost/cut will occur. The range is 21 Hz–

20.1 kHz for each band.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Operation section

• G (Gain) knob

This knob sets the amount of boost/cut over a

range of -18.0 dB– +18 dB. When “HPF” is

selected for the LOW band EQ, or when “LPF” is

selected for the HIGH band EQ, this knob also

switches the ﬁlter on/off.

Tip!

• The LOW band EQ will change to “L.SHELF” (low

shelving) if the Q knob is turned fully clockwise, and

to “HPF” (high pass ﬁlter) if the Q knob is turned

fully counter-clockwise.

• The HIGH band EQ will change to “H.SHELF” (high

shelving) if the Q knob is turned fully clockwise, and

to “LPF” (low pass ﬁlter) if the Q knob is turned

fully counter-clockwise.

• With the default settings, “L.SHELF” is selected for

the LOW band, and “H.SHELF” is selected for the

HIGH band.

The signal level after passing through the EQ is shown

in the upper right of the display. If this meter reaches

the “OVER” position, use the ATT. knob located in the

upper left of the display to lower the level of the sig-

nal that is input to the EQ.

Tip!

• It is also possible to apply EQ to the signal of the

monitor channel instead of to the input channel. By

using this method, you can process only the signal

being monitored, without affecting the signal that is

recorded on the recorder.

• The EQ library (special memory for storing EQ set-

tings) contains preset EQ settings (programs) suit-

able for many types of instruments, which you may

ﬁnd convenient to use.

Applying the dynamics proces-

sor to the input signal

All channels of the AW2816 (except for return chan-

nels 1/2) provide a dynamics processor that can be

used as a compressor, limiter, or gate. This section

explains how to use the dynamics processor of the

input channel to process the bass sound before it is

recorded on the track.

Press the INPUT [1-8] key → [SEL] key 8.

[SEL] key 8 will light, and input channel 8 will be

selected for operations.

Press the [DYN] key → [F2] key.

The DYN/DLY screen Library page will appear. In

this page you can save dynamics processor set-

tings (programs) in a special memory area (the

dynamics library), or load previously-saved pro-

grams. Dynamics library numbers 001–040 con-

tain preset programs suitable for many types of

instruments, which you may ﬁnd convenient to

use.

Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll the list,

and select the program that you want to

load.

The row enclosed by a dotted frame in the list is

the currently selected program. For this example,

let’s select a program named “E.B. Finger.”

Let’s record on the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Move the cursor to the RECALL button at

the left of the library list, and press the

[ENTER] key.

A CONFIRMATION popup window will appear,

asking you whether you really want to recall the

data.

Move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The “E.B. Finger” program will be loaded into the

dynamics processor of input channel 8.

Press the [F1] key.

The DYN/DLY screen Dyn.Edit page will appear.

In this page you can edit the parameters of the

dynamics processor.

Press the [ENTER] key to turn on the ON/

OFF button located in the lower left of the

display.

The ON/OFF button switches the dynamics pro-

cessor on/off. This enables the dynamics proces-

sor of input channel 8.

Tip!

In the Dyn.Edit page, you can press the [ENTER] key

to switch the ON/OFF button regardless of the loca-

tion of the cursor.

While playing your instrument, edit the

dynamics processor parameters as desired.

To adjust the parameters, move the cursor to the

PARAMETER area in the lower right of the dis-

play, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to edit the

value.

The upper right of the display contains a meter that

indicates the signal level after passing through the

dynamics processor. Be careful that this meter does

not reach the “OVER” level.

Tip!

• The dynamics processor provides ﬁve types: CMP

(compressor), EXP (expander), GAT (gate), CPS

(compander soft), and CPH (compander hard). Each

of these types has different parameters. (refer to

page 382 for the parameters of each type.)

• In the Dyn.Edit page, it is not possible to switch the

dynamics processor type. If you want to use a spe-

ciﬁc type, you must start by loading a dynamics

library program that uses that type, and then edit

the parameters as desired.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Operation section

Recording

Now we will record the bass sound on track 3.

In the Locate section, press the [ ] key.

The counter in the display will rewind to the zero

location (00:00:00.000).

To begin recording, hold down the REC

[ ] key and press the PLAY [ ] key.

The REC [ ] key and PLAY [ ] key will light,

and recording will begin.

While listening to the rhythm machine

(drums) you previously recorded on tracks

1/2, play your bass.

If you want to change the monitor balance

between the rhythm machine (drums) and bass,

press the RECORDER [1-8] key of the MIXING

LAYER section, and adjust faders 1–3.

When you are ﬁnished playing, press the

STOP [ ] key.

The REC [ ] key and PLAY [ ] key will go dark,

and recording will stop.

To listen to the recorded content, press the

[ ] key, and then press the PLAY [ ]

key.

If you decide to re-do the recording, stop the

song, press the [UNDO] key to cancel the previ-

ous recording, and then repeat steps 1–4.

Tip!

You can press the [IN] key of the Locate section to

return instantly to the location at which recording

was last begun.

If you are satisﬁed with your recording,

press the REC TRACK SELECT [3] key to dis-

able record-ready mode.

Tip!

• You can also re-record from the middle of the song.

If you are repeatedly re-recording the same region,

it is convenient to set a marker or a locate point at

that location for quick access (

→

P.102), or to use the

auto punch-in/out function (

→

P.64).

• The basic procedure described above also applies

when you want to record additional instruments on

the remaining tracks. Go ahead and record the

remaining instruments for your song in the same

way.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Mixing to the stereo track (Mixdown)

This section explains how to mix the signals recorded

on tracks 1–16 down to a stereo signal, use the inter-

nal effect processors to add effects, and record the

result on the stereo track.

Adjusting the mix balance

Here’s how to set the mix balance of the signals

recorded on tracks 1–16, and use the EQ and dynam-

ics processors to process the sounds.

Make sure that record-ready mode is

defeated for all tracks 1–16, and that the

REC TRACK SELECT [1]–[16] keys are dark.

Also make sure that the input channel 1–8

[ON] keys are all dark.

Tip!

If necessary, you can mix down the input signals from

input channels 1–8 in addition to the signals of tracks

1–16. In this case, turn on the [ON] keys for the input

channels that you want to use.

Press the [PAN] key → [F2] key.

The PAN/ROUTE screen Pan MONI page will

appear. In this page you can make pan settings

and bus assignments for monitor channels 1–16.

For monitor channels 1–16, turn on the ST

button and turn off the bus assign 1–8 but-

tons.

With these settings, the signals of monitor chan-

nels 1–16 will be sent to the stereo bus.

Tip!

The input of the stereo track is always patched to the

output of the stereo output channel. For this reason,

sending the signals of monitor channels 1–16 to the

stereo bus allows them to be recorded via the stereo

output channel onto the stereo track.

Use the PAN knobs of monitor channels 1–

16 to adjust the stereo position of each

track.

Raise the STEREO fader to the 0 dB posi-

tion. Make sure that the [ON] keys and

STEREO [ON] keys of monitor channels 1–

16 are lit.

Press the [METER] key.

The METER screen will appear.

Play back the song from the beginning,

and set the mix balance of the tracks.

To set the mix balance, operate the faders while

using the RECORDER [1-8] key and [9-16] key of

the MIXING LAYER section to switch mixing lay-

ers. If the output level of the stereo output chan-

nel (L/R) reaches OVER in the METER screen,

lower the STEREO fader.

If you want to use EQ to process a speciﬁc

track, press its [SEL] key to select the moni-

tor channel, and press the [EQ] key → [F1]

key.

The EQ screen EQ/Att page will appear. Edit the

EQ parameters (→P.54).

If you want to use the dynamics processor

to process a speciﬁc track, press its [SEL]

key to select the monitor channel, and

press the [DYN] key → [F2] key.

The DYN/DLY screen Library page will appear.

Load the desired dynamics program (→P.55). To

edit the dynamics processor parameters, press

the [DYN] key → [F1] key to display the DYN/

DLY screen Dyn.Edit page.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Operation section

Using the internal effects

The AW2816 contains two multi-effect units (effect 1/

2). These internal effects can be used either via AUX

send/return or by insertion into a desired channel. In

this section we will explain how to use an AUX bus to

apply reverb to the signal of each track.

Press the [PATCH] key → [F1] key.

The PATCH screen Patch IN page will appear,

allowing you to patch an input signal to each

channel.

Make sure that in the EFFECT PATCH area EFF 1

is set to “AUX 5,” and that in the MIXER CHAN-

NEL INPUT ASSIGN area RTN1 is set to “EFF1 L/

R.”

With these settings, the signal of each channel

will be routed through AUX bus 5 and sent to the

input of effect 1. Also, the output signal of effect

1 will be sent to return channel 1.

Tip!

• If these parameters are set differently, move the cur-

sor to the corresponding ﬁeld and turn the [DATA/

JOG] dial to change the setting.

• With the default settings of an AW2816 song, the

output of AUX buses 5/6 is patched to the input of

internal effects 1/2, and the output of internal

effects 1/2 is patched to the input of return channels

1/2. Thus, if you are using the default settings, it will

not be necessary to change the patching.

Press the [PAN] key → [F1] key.

The PAN/ROUTE screen Pan 1-8 page will

appear.

Make sure that in the RTN1 (return channel 1)

area the ST button is turned on, and that the two

PAN knobs are spread apart to left and right.

With these settings, the return signal from effect 1

will be sent to the stereo bus, and mixed with the

signals of the monitor channels.

Press the [AUX 5] key → [F2] key.

The [AUX 5] key will light, and the AUX5/EFF 1

screen Library page will appear. In this page,

effect library programs can be loaded/saved for

internal effect 1. The display will show a list of

the saved programs.

Move the cursor to the library list, and turn

the [DATA/JOG] dial to display “002.

Reverb Room” at the cursor location.

In this example we will load a room reverb pro-

gram.

Move the cursor to the RECALL button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will appear, asking you to con-

ﬁrm that you want to load the effect program.

Move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The “Reverb Room” effect program will be

loaded into internal effect 1.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Press the [AUX 5] key → [F3] key.

The AUX5/EFF1 screen Pre/Post page will appear.

In this page, the signal sent from each channel to

AUX bus 5 can be switched on/off, and you can

select the location from which the signal will be

sent (pre-fader or post-fader).

Make sure that in the REC MONITOR (monitor

channel) area, the POST/PRE switch of each

channel is set to “POST,” and the ON/OFF button

is turned “ON.”

Tip!

By using the GBL (Global) buttons located in the right

of the destination, you can switch all channels to PRE

(pre-fader) or POST (post-fader) at one touch.

While you play back the song from the

beginning, operate the faders to adjust the

send levels of the signals that are sent from

monitor channels 1–16 to AUX bus 5.

When the [AUX 5] key is lit, faders 1–8 will

adjust the send levels from each channel to AUX

bus 5. While using the RECORDER [1-8]/[9-16]

keys to switch the mixing layer, adjust the send

level of the signals that are sent from monitor

channels 1–16 to AUX bus 5.

If you want to adjust the return level from

effect 1, press the [HOME] key and adjust

the [RTN1] control.

The [RTN 1] control is not valid while the [AUX

5] key is lit. If you want to adjust the return level

of effect 1 (the level of return channel 1), press a

FADER MODE section key other than [AUX 5]

(such as the [HOME] key), and then press the

[RTN1] control.

Tip!

Settings for effect 2 can be made in essentially the

same way, with the difference that AUX bus 6 is used

instead of AUX bus 5, and that return channel 2 is

used instead of return channel 1.

Recording on the stereo track

The AW2816 has a stereo track that is independent of

audio tracks 1–16, and is used as a master track to

create a ﬁnal mix. When using a CD-RW drive to cre-

ate an audio CD, this stereo track is what will be writ-

ten to the CD. (However, only the stereo track of

songs with a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz can be

written to an audio CD.)

Once you have decided on the mix balance and effect

amounts for tracks 1–16, you are ready to mix down

to the stereo track and create the ﬁnal song.

Press the REC TRACK SELECT [ST] key.

The stereo track will be in record-ready mode.

Press the [METER] key.

The METER screen will appear.

Play back the song from the beginning,

and watch the level in the L/R meter.

The input of the stereo track is always internally

connected to the stereo output channel of the

mixer. Thus, you can use the L/R meter of the

METER screen to monitor the input levels of the

stereo track. If the L/R meter reaches OVER,

lower the STEREO fader.

If you want to use EQ to process the input

signal of the stereo track, press the STEREO

[SEL] key to select the stereo output chan-

nel, and press the [EQ] key → [F1] key.

The EQ screen EQ/Att page will appear. Make the

desired settings for the EQ parameters (→P.54).

Tip!

EQ library numbers 30–32 contain presets that can be

used for overall EQ, and you may ﬁnd it convenient to

use these. (For details on using the EQ library, refer to

page 220.)

If you want to use the dynamics processor

to process the input signal of the stereo

track, press the STEREO [SEL] key to select

the stereo output channel, and press the

[DYN] key → [F2] key.

The DYN/DLY screen Library page will appear.

Load the desired dynamics program (→P.55). If

you want to edit the dynamics processor parame-

ters, press the [DYN] key → [F1] key to access the

DYN/DLY screen Dyn.Edit page.

Tip!

Dynamics library numbers 36–40 contain preset pro-

grams for limiters for two-track mixdown and overall

compression.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Operation section

Rewind to the beginning of the song. Then

hold down the REC [ ] key of the trans-

port section and press the PLAY [ ] key.

Recording on the stereo track will begin.

When recording ends, press the STOP [ ]

key.

To hear the stereo track that was recorded,

press the RECORDER section keys [TRACK]

→ [F3].

The TRACK screen Stereo page will appear, in

which you can play back or erase the stereo

track. With the default settings of the AW2816,

the M (Mute) button in the upper left of the

screen is turned on, so that the stereo track is

muted.

Move the cursor to the M (Mute) button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

Muting of the stereo track will be disabled, and it

can now be played.

At this time, the stereo track will automatically

be assigned to monitor channels 1/2, and the

other monitor channels will be muted. If you play

back the song now, you can monitor the stereo

track via monitor channels 1/2 → stereo bus.

However if you play back with the AW2816 in

this state, the playback sound will be affected by

the settings (pan, EQ, dynamics processor) of

monitor channels 1/2 and the stereo output chan-

nel, meaning that you may not be monitoring the

“ﬂat” sound. For this reason, we will monitor the

stereo track by sending it directly to the MONI-

TOR OUT jacks/PHONES jack.

In the level meter/counter section, turn on

the TRACK [CUE] key.

The TRACK [CUE] key is used to send the signal

of the desired track directly to the MONITOR

OUT jacks/PHONES jack.

Tip!

If you press the TRACK [CUE] button when stereo

track muting is disabled, the TRACK [CUE] key will

blink and the REC TRACK SELECT [ST] key will blink

red. This indicates that only the stereo track can be

selected as the signal for monitoring.

Press the REC TRACK SELECT [ST] key.

The blinking TRACK [CUE] key and REC TRACK

SELECT [ST] key will now be steadily lit, and the

stereo track has been selected as the signal for

monitoring.

When you use the TRACK [CUE] key, the signal will be

sent directly to the MONITOR OUT jacks/PHONES

jack (i.e., without passing through a channel), mean-

ing that it will not be possible to use a fader to adjust

the level. Lower the [MONITOR OUT] control/

[PHONES] control so that a high volume is not pro-

duced suddenly from your monitor speakers/head-

phones.

Press the Locate section [RTZ] key, and

then press the Transport section PLAY [ ]

key.

The “ﬂat” (unprocessed) signal of the stereo track

can now be monitored directly from the MONI-

TOR OUT jacks/PHONES jack.

Tip!

As an alternative way to monitor the ﬂat signal of the

stereo track, you can save a scene in which monitor

channels 1/2 and the stereo output channel are set to

their default settings, and recall this scene when you

want to play back the stereo track.

If you are satisﬁed with the recorded result,

turn off the TRACK [CUE] key.

The REC TRACK SELECT [ST] key will go dark at

the same time. To defeat muting of audio tracks

1–16, access the TRACK screen Stereo page and

turn the M (Mute) button on once again.

Tip!

Each song has only one stereo track. If you perform

the mixdown again, it will be overwrite the previous

stereo track. However even in this case, you can use

the [UNDO]/[REDO] keys to compare the previous

and most recent versions.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Saving your song

On the AW2816, all data required for reproducing a

completed composition (mixer, settings, recorder set-

tings, audio data, etc.) is saved on the internal hard

disk as a “song.”

If you accidentally turn off the power of the AW2816

before saving the song, the audio track and stereo

track data as well as the mixer settings will be lost.

When you have ﬁnished creating your song, you must

use the following procedure to save it.

• If you turn off the power of the AW2816 without

saving the current song, any changes you made to

the settings within the current song will be lost.

• To turn off the power of the AW2816, you must use

the Shutdown procedure (

→

P.12).

Press the [SONG] key → [F1] key.

The SONG screen Song List page will appear.

Move the cursor to the SAVE button in the

bottom of the window, and press the

[ENTER] key.

A CONFIRMATION popup window will appear,

asking you to conﬁrm that you want to save the

song.

Tip!

Instead of pressing the [SONG] key in step 1, you can

hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [SONG] key

to access the Song list page, and the cursor will auto-

matically move to the SAVE button. This method can

be used as a shortcut to save the current song.

Move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The song will be saved.

Tip!

• In actuality, performing certain operations (such as

Shutdown) will automatically save the current song.

However as a precaution against the power being

accidentally turned off during editing, we strongly

recommend that you save the song regularly, not

just after mixdown is completed.

• For details on how to load a song that was saved,

refer to page 149.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Operation section

Advanced techniques on the AW2816

This section introduces more advanced recording and

mixing techniques that you will ﬁnd useful.

Manually re-recording only a spe-

ciﬁc area (Manual Punch-in/out)

If you make a mistake while recording a performance,

you can re-record just the portion of the track that

contains the mistake. This section will explain how to

use the transport keys or a foot switch (Yamaha FC-5)

to manually punch-in/out.

Locate the song to a point ahead of where

you will punch-in.

Tip!

• If you want to use a foot switch (Yamaha FC-5) to

perform manual punch-in/out, connect the foot

switch to the rear panel FOOT SW jack before you

continue.

• For details on Locate operations, refer to “Chapter

6. Transport/Locate operations.”

Press the [REC TRACK SELECT] key for the

track that you want to record.

The [REC TRACK SELECT] key will blink, and it

will be in record-ready mode.

Press the [TRACK] key → [F1] key.

In the INPUT MONITOR area, make sure that the

AUTO button is turned on. If it is not turned on,

move the cursor to the AUTO button and press

the [ENTER] key.

Tip!

When using punch-in/out, select AUTO (auto input)

as the input monitor mode. This mode lets you moni-

tor the track playback of record-ready tracks before

you punch-in, and the input source after you punch-

in.

Press the PLAY [ ] key. (Alternatively,

press the foot switch.)

Song playback will begin.

Operation may not be correct if you use a foot switch

other than the Yamaha FC-5.

At the location that you want to punch-in,

press the REC [ ] key + PLAY [ ] key (or

press the foot switch).

The REC [ ] key will light, and recording will

begin on the track you selected in step 2.

At the location that you want to punch-

out, press the PLAY [ ] key (or press the

foot switch).

The REC [ ] key will go dark, and you will

return to normal playback mode.

To stop the song, press the STOP [ ] key

(or press the foot switch).

The song will stop.

To listen to the recorded result, locate to

the location of step 1, and press the PLAY

[ ] key.

Tip!

If you made a mistake during recording, press the

[UNDO] key while stopped to automatically cancel

the previous recording operation.

The following diagram shows the procedure for man-

ual punch-in/out.

Recording PlaybackPlayback

Punch-in Punch-out

REC TRACK

SELECT

Let’s record on the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Automatically re-recording only a

speciﬁc area (Auto Punch-in/out)

It is also possible to automatically punch-in/out when

you come to a pre-speciﬁed point. This is called “auto

punch-in/out.” This section explains the procedure for

auto punch-in/out.

Locate the song to the point where you

want to punch-in. Then hold down the

[SET] key and press the LAST REC [IN] key.

In order to use the auto punch-in/out function,

you must ﬁrst specify the punch-in and punch-

out points. Use the two locate buttons In point

and Out point to specify these points.

When you hold down the [SET] key and press the

LAST REC [IN] key, the LAST REC [IN] key will

light, indicating that this location has been

assigned as the In point.

Tip!

Unless you specify otherwise, the locations at which

recording most recently began and ended will be

assigned as the In point and Out point respectively.

Locate the song to the point where you

want to punch-out. Then hold down the

[SET] key and press the LAST REC [OUT]

key.

The LAST REC [OUT] key will light, indicating

that this location has been assigned as the Out

point.

Be aware that auto punch-in/out cannot be executed

if the Out point is set earlier than the In point, or if

the In point and Out point are too close (less than

approximately 100 msec).

Tip!

Fine adjustments can be made to the in/out point

locations in millisecond units or sub-frame units, as

necessary. For details refer to page 104.

Press the [REC TRACK SELECT] key of the

track that you want to re-record.

The [REC TRACK SELECT] key will blink, and it

will be in record-ready mode.

Press the [TRACK] key → [F1] key.

In the INPUT MONITOR area, make sure that the

AUTO button is turned on. If it is not on, move

the cursor to the AUTO button and press the

[ENTER] key.

In the Locate section, make sure that the

LAST REC [IN]/[OUT] keys are lit, and press

the [AUTO PUNCH] key.

The [AUTO PUNCH] key will light, and you will

locate to a point a certain time ahead of the

punch-in point (the pre-roll time).

Tip!

• When executing auto punch-in/out, you can specify

a ﬁxed length of playback that will occur immedi-

ately before punch-in and immediately after punch-

out. The length of playback before the punch-in

time is called the “pre-roll time,” and the length of

playback after the punch-out time is called the

“post-roll time.”

• With the factory settings, the pre-roll/post-roll times

are set to 5 seconds respectively, but you may

change these settings if desired (

→

P.266).

• The point at which pre-roll begins is called the “pre-

roll point,” and the point at which post-roll ends is

called the “post-roll point.”

While the [AUTO PUNCH] key is lit, Transport/Locate

operations other than the STOP [ ]/PLAY [ ]/REC

[ ] keys are disabled.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Operation section

To rehearse auto punch-in/out, press the

PLAY [ ] key.

A The PLAY [ ] key will light, and playback

will begin from the pre-roll point.

B When you reach the auto punch-in point, the

REC [ ] key will begin blinking, and the sig-

nal being monitored for the track you

selected in step 3 will switch from the track

playback sound to the input signal (the

recording source). However, recording will

not actually occur.

C When you reach the auto punch-out point,

the REC [ ] key will go dark, and the signal

being monitored will switch back to the track

playback sound.

D When you reach the post-roll point, the trans-

port will return to the pre-roll point and stop.

If you want to rehearse again, press the

PLAY [ ] once again while stopped.

Tip!

If you press the [REPEAT] key before or during

rehearsal, operations

–

of step 6 will be repeated.

(The A-B Repeat function will be disabled during this

time.) If you want to stop repeating rehearsal, press

the [REPEAT] key once again or press the STOP [ ]

key.

To actually perform auto punch-in/out,

make sure that the transport is stopped,

and hold down the REC [ ] key and press

the PLAY [ ] key.

A The PLAY [ ] key will light, the REC [ ]

will blink, and playback will begin from the

pre-roll point.

B When you reach the auto punch-in point, the

REC [ ] key will change from blinking to

steadily lit, and recording will begin on the

track you selected in step 1 (punch-in).

C When you reach the auto punch-out point,

the REC [ ] key will resume blinking,

recording will be defeated, and you will

return to playback mode (punch-out).

D When you reach the post-roll point, the trans-

port will return to the pre-roll point and stop.

If you want to listen to the recorded result,

press the [AUTO PUNCH] key to make it go

dark, and then press the PLAY [ ] key.

Tip!

If you make a mistake while recording with auto

punch-in/out, press the [UNDO] key while stopped.

The previous recording operation will be cancelled,

and the state before recording will be recovered.

The following diagram shows the auto punch-in/out

procedure.

Rehearsal

Actual

recording

PlaybackPlayback

Recording PlaybackPlayback

Locate

Auto

punch-in

point

Pre-roll

point

Post-roll

point

Auto

punch-out

point

REC TRACK

SELECT

Let’s record on the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Switching virtual tracks

On the AW2816, you can select and record or play-

back one of eight virtual tracks 1–8 for each of the

audio tracks 1–16.

For example when you are recording a solo part on

one of the tracks, you can switch virtual tracks to

record several takes, and later select the virtual track

that contains the best take. In this section we will

explain how to switch the virtual track that will be

used by a track.

Press the [TRACK] key → [F2] key.

The display will show the TRACK screen V.Track

page.

This page contains the following information.

A Track number

This is the track number 1–16.

B Track name

This is the name assigned to the virtual track that

is selected for each track. Virtual tracks that have

already been recorded will be assigned a default

name of “V.Tr x-y” (“x” is the track number 1–16,

and “y” is the virtual track number 1–8).

This name can be changed later if desired

(→P.109). Virtual tracks that have not yet been

recorded will be displayed as “-NO REC-”.

C Virtual track

The highlighted number is the virtual track that is

currently selected for each track 1–16. In the

illustration above, virtual track 1 is assigned to all

tracks 1–16 (this is the default state).

Of the virtual tracks that are not currently

selected, the track numbers that have been

recorded will be displayed with a frame; e.g., .

Move the cursor to the number of the vir-

tual track that you want to assign to the

track, and press the [ENTER] key.

The selected virtual track number will be high-

lighted. Now you can record or playback using

the newly selected virtual track.

If you want to specify pairing between

tracks, move the cursor to the heart sym-

bol ( ) for the corresponding tracks, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The heart symbol will be joined, and the two

tracks will be paired. To cancel pairing, move the

cursor to the heart symbol once again, and press

the [ENTER] key.

Tip!

Adjacent odd-numbered

→

even-numbered tracks

(tracks 1/2, 3/4, ... tracks 15/16) can be paired in the

same way as channels. Paired tracks will operate in

tandem when selected for track editing operations or

when switching virtual tracks.

1 2 3

Let’s record on the AW2816

Operation section

Operating multiple faders

together (Fader Groups)

“Fader grouping” is a function that lets you operate

the faders of multiple channels as a group. Channels

that are registered in the same fader group can be

controlled together by operating just one of the faders.

Press the [EQ] key → [F3] key.

The EQ screen FaderGrp page will appear. In this

page you can assign input channels 1–8/monitor

channels 1–16 to fader groups A–D. The row

where the cursor is located is the currently

selected fader group.

Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to select a

fader group A–D.

Use the keys of the MIXING LAYER section

to select a mixing layer, and use the [SEL]

keys to select the channels that you want

to assign to that fader group.

When a channel is assigned to a fader group, a

“ ” symbol will be displayed in the A–D rows.

To cancel an assignment, press the same [SEL]

key once again.

Tip!

While this page is displayed, the lit/dark status of the

[SEL] keys will indicate whether each channel is

assigned to the fader group.

Repeat steps 2–3 to make assignments for

the other fader groups.

Make sure that the A–D ENABLE buttons

are on (highlighted).

The A–D ENABLE buttons switch the correspond-

ing fader group on/off. To turn a button on, move

the cursor to that button and press the [ENTER]

key.

Operate the fader of a channel assigned to

a fader group.

The faders of all channels belonging to that fader

group will move.

Tip!

• If you want to adjust the position of a channel fader

after that channel has already been assigned to a

fader group, turn the ENABLE button off to tempo-

rarily defeat that fader group.

• When screens other than the FaderGrp page are dis-

played, you can press and hold a [SEL] key to tempo-

rarily exclude that channel from the fader group. By

holding down the [SEL] key of a channel and operat-

ing its fader, you can operate the desired channel

independently of its fader group.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

Operating multiple [ON] keys

together (Mute Groups)

“Mute grouping” is a function that lets you operate the

[ON] of multiple channels as a group. Channels that

are registered in the same mute group can be turned

on/off together by operating just one of the [ON] keys.

Press the [EQ] key → [F4] key.

The EQ screen MuteGrp page will appear. In this

page you can assign input channels 1–8/monitor

channels 1–16 to mute groups E–H. The row

where the cursor is located is the currently

selected mute group.

Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to select a

mute group E–H.

Use the keys of the MIXING LAYER section

to select a mixing layer, and use the [SEL]

keys to select the channels that you want

to assign to that mute group.

When a channel is assigned to a mute group, a

“ ” symbol will be displayed in the E–H rows.

To cancel an assignment, press the same [SEL]

key once again.

Tip!

While this page is displayed, the lit/dark status of the

[SEL] keys will indicate whether each channel is

assigned to the mute group.

Repeat steps 2–3 to make assignments for

the other mute groups.

Make sure that the E–H ENABLE buttons

are on (highlighted).

The E–H ENABLE buttons switch the correspond-

ing mute group on/off. To turn a button on, move

the cursor to that button and press the [ENTER]

key.

Operate the [ON] key of a channel

assigned to a mute group.

The on/off status will be switched for the [ON]

keys of all channels belonging to that mute

group.

Tip!

• On/off settings of the [ON] keys may be mixed

within the same mute group. This is convenient

when you want to switch between two channels dur-

ing playback.

• If you want to change the setting of an [ON] key

after that channel has already been assigned to a

mute group, turn the ENABLE button off to tempo-

rarily defeat that mute group.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Operation section

Using the Solo function

The AW2816 contains a very ﬂexible Solo function.

By pressing the [SOLO] key on the top panel and then

pressing the [ON] key for a desired channel, you can

monitor that channel by itself.

Press the [SETUP] key → [F5] key.

The SET UP screen Solo Setup page will appear.

In this page you can make various settings for the

Solo function.

Move the cursor to the STATUS area, and

select one of the following two modes to

specify how the Solo function will operate.

• RECORDING SOLO

In this mode, the signal of the channel being

soloed will be routed through a dedicated SOLO

bus and output from the MONITOR OUT jacks/

PHONES jack. The signals being output to the

stereo bus or buses 1–8 will not be affected. This

method also lets you monitor a channel that is

not assigned to the stereo bus or buses 1–8, or

even a channel whose [ON] key is turned off.

This solo mode is convenient when you want to

monitor a speciﬁc input source during multi-

track recording without affecting the signals that

are being recorded on the tracks.

• MIXDOWN SOLO

In this mode, only the signal of the channel being

soloed will be routed through the stereo bus and

output from the MONITOR OUT jacks/PHONES

jack. Other channels will be muted. With this

method, it is not possible to monitor a channel

that is not assigned to the stereo bus, or a chan-

nel whose [ON] key is turned off.

This solo mode is convenient when you are mix-

ing down, and want to send only a speciﬁc track

to the stereo bus while muting all other tracks.

Move the cursor to the SEL MODE area,

and select one of the following two modes

to specify how the Solo function will oper-

ate.

• LAST SOLO

While the [SOLO] key is on, only the channel

that was last selected by its [ON] key will be

monitored.

• MIX SOLO

While the [SOLO] key is on, all channels that are

selected by their [ON] keys will be monitored.

If you selected RECORDING SOLO in the

STATUS area, move the cursor to the SEL

MODE area, and select one of the follow-

ing two choices to specify the location

from which the signal will be sent to the

SOLO bus.

• PRE FADER

The pre-fader signal will be sent to the SOLO

bus. In this case, the pan and fader settings of the

channel will be ignored, and the signal sent to

the MONITOR OUT jacks/PHONES jack will be

monaural.

• AFTER PAN

The post-fader/pan signal will be sent to the

SOLO bus, In this case, the pan and fader set-

tings of the channel will affect the signal sent to

the MONITOR OUT jacks/PHONES jack.

If you selected MIXDOWN SOLO in the

STATUS area, move the cursor to the SOLO

SAFE CHANNEL area, and select the chan-

nels that you want to set to Solo Safe.

Solo Safe is a function that excludes speciﬁed

channels from Solo operations when MIXDOWN

SOLO is selected. In the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL

area, move the cursor to the buttons of channels

that you want to set to Solo Safe, and press the

[ENTER] key. (You may select more than one

channel.)

Tip!

For example if you turn on the RTN1/RTN2 buttons in

the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL area, the soloed channels

will be monitored with reverb or other effect applied.

Let’s record on the AW2816

Chapter

Operation section

To enable the Solo function, press the

[SOLO] key.

The [SOLO] key and [ON] keys 1–8 will blink.

Use the keys of the MIXING LAYER section

to select the desired mixing layer, and use

the [ON] keys to select the channel that

you want to solo.

The corresponding channel will be soloed, and

all other [ON] keys will go dark.

Operation while the Solo function is enabled will

depend on the settings of the SETUP screen Solo

Setup page.

To defeat the Solo function, press the

[SOLO] key once again.

Input/output patching

Chapter

Operation section

Input/output patching

This chapter explains how input/output signals and input/output

jacks can be assigned to the various signal routes within the

AW2816.

Assigning signals to input channels/

return channels (Input Patch)

In the Input Patch section, input signals such as signals

received at the input jacks, the output from the inter-

nal effects, and the output of the internal metronome

can be assigned to input channels 1–8 and return

channels 1/2.

With the default settings of an AW2816 song, the

input signals shown in the following diagram are

assigned to input channels 1–8 and return channels 1/

Tip!

To return the input patch section to its default state,

recall scene number 00 or patch library number 00.

To change the patching shown above, use the follow-

ing procedure.

Press the [PATCH] key → [F1] (Patch IN)

key.

The PATCH screen Patch IN page will appear,

where you can patch input channels and

recorder inputs. The MIXER CHANNEL INPUT

ASSIGN area of this page displays the signals that

are assigned to input channels 1–8 and return

channels 1/2

A Signals assigned to input channels 1–8

B Signals assigned to return channels 1/2

Input channel 1

Input channel 2

Input channel 3

Return channel 1

Return channel 2

OPTION I/O

slot

Mixer section

×2

×8

INPUT

jacks

DIGITAL STEREO

IN jack

I/O card

Input Patch

×1

Input channel 8

Effect 1

Effect 2

Metronome

Input/output patching

Chapter

Operation section

Move the cursor to the channel whose

patching you want to change, and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial to select the desired sig-

nal.

The following signals can be assigned to each

channel.

• Input channels 1–8

• Return channels 1/2

For example if you change input channel 2 to

“AD 1” (INPUT jack 1) from the default setting,

the input signal of INPUT jack 1 will be sent to

both input channels 1 and 2, as shown in the dia-

gram below.

Tip!

• You can use the patch library to save the edited

patching status. For details refer to page 76.

• Return channels 1/2 can also be used as input chan-

nels.

Display Signal type

AD 1–AD 8 INPUT jacks 1–8

SLT-1–SLT-8 INPUT 1–8 of an I/O card

DIN L/DIN R

L or R channel of the DIGITAL

STEREO INPUT jack

MET Internal metronome

Display Signal type

EFF1 L/R Return from internal effect 1

(*1)

*1. Only return 1 can be selected

EFF2 L/R Return from internal effect 2

(*2)

*2. Only return 2 can be selected

AD 1/2–AD 7/8 INPUT jacks 1/2–7/8

SLT-1/2–SLT-7/8 INPUT 1/2–7/8 of an I/O card

DIN L/R

DIGITAL STEREO INPUT jack

(stereo)

Input channel 1

Input channel 2

Input channel 3

Mixer section

1 (AD 1)

INPUT

jacks

2 (AD 2)

3 (AD 3)

8 (AD 8)

Input channel 8

INPUT patch

Input/output patching

Operation section

Assigning signals to the recorder inputs

(Recorder Input Patch)

In the Recorder Input Patch section you can assign the

output signals of buses 1–8 and the direct outputs of

input channels 1–8 to the inputs of recorder tracks 1–

16 (recorder inputs 1–16).

With the default settings of an AW2816 song, the bus

1–8 signals are assigned to recorder inputs 1–16 as

shown in the diagram below.

To change the patching shown above, use the follow-

ing procedure.

Press the [PATCH] key → [F1] (Patch IN) key

to access the PATCH screen Patch IN page.

The RECORDER CHANNEL INPUT ASSIGN area

of this page displays the signals that are assigned

to recorder inputs 1–16.

Move the cursor to the recorder input

whose patching you want to change, and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

desired signal.

The following types of signal can be assigned to

the input of each track.

When you change recorder inputs 1–8 to “DIR

1”–”DIR 8,” the signals of input channels 1–8

will be sent (without passing through buses 1–8)

to tracks 1–8 as shown in the diagram below. This

method is useful when you want to record the

sounds of individual instruments directly on

tracks without mixing them with other instru-

ments.

Tip!

If you have selected “DIR 1”–”DIR 8,” you can choose

either the pre-EQ signal or the pre-fader signal as the

signal that will be sent to the recorder input. This

selection is made in the UTILITY screen Prefer.1 page

(

→

P.264).

Buses 1–8

Mixer section Recorder section

Direct output of

input channels 1–8

Recorder input

patch

×8

Track 1–8

Track 9–16

Display Signal type

BUS 1–BUS 8 Buses 1–8

DIR 1–DIR 8

Direct output of input chan-

nels 1–8

Mixer section

Recorder

section

Recorder

input patch

Track 1

Track 8

Track 2

Track 3

Input channel 1 (DIR 1)

Input channel 2 (DIR 2)

Input channel 3 (DIR 3)

INPUT

jacks

Input channel 8 (DIR 8)

Input/output patching

Chapter

Operation section

Assigning signals to output jacks/

output channels (Output Patch)

In the Output Patch section, signals such as buses 1–8,

AUX buses 1–6, the stereo bus, and direct outputs

from the recorder can be assigned to output jacks

such as the STEREO OUT jacks and OMNI OUT jacks

1–4, or output channels of the OPTION I/O slot.

With the default settings of the AW2816, the follow-

ing signals are assigned to the various output jacks

and output channels.

To change the patching shown above, use the follow-

ing procedure.

Press the [PATCH] key → [F2] (Patch OUT)

key.

The PATCH screen Patch OUT page will appear.

The various areas of the display show the patch-

ing status for each input jack.

A OMNI OUT jacks 1–4

B DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack

C STEREO OUT jacks

D Output channels 1–8 of an I/O card (OPTION

I/O slot)

Move the cursor to the output jack whose

patching you want to change, and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial to select the signal that

you want to assign.

The following types of signals can be assigned to

each output jack.

• OMNI OUT jacks 1–4

AUX buses 1–4

AUX buses 5/6

Buses 1–8

Stereo output channel

Mixer section

Recorder section

Output

Patch

×4

×8

×2

×16

×8

×30

×2

OMNI OUT jacks 1–4

DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack

STEREO OUT jacks

I/O card

OPTION I/O

slot

Channel insert send

Direct output of

input channels 1–8

Direct output of tracks 1–16

Display Signal type

ST L/ST R L/R stereo output channels

BUS 1–BUS 8 Buses 1–8

DIR 1–DIR 8

Direct output of input chan-

nels 1–8

AUX 1–AUX 6 AUX buses 1–6

RDR 1–RDR 16 Direct output of tracks 1–16

Input/output patching

Operation section

• DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack

• STEREO OUT jacks

• OUTPUT 1–8 of an I/O card (OPTION I/O slot)

• In the various areas of the Patch OUT page, you may

see indications such as “I-I8” or “I-M16.” These indi-

cate that the insert send of an input channel (if the

indication starts with “I-I”) or the insert send of a

monitor channel (if the indication starts with “I-M”)

has been patched to that output jack.

• When the above selections are grayed, this indicates

that the corresponding insert send is invalid. Be

aware that in this case, no signal will be output from

that jack. (For details on patching a channel insert

send to an output jack, refer to page 78.)

Display Signal type

ST L/R Stereo output channel (L/R)

BUS 1/2–7/8 Buses 1/2–7/8

DIR 1/2–DIR 7/8

Direct output of input chan-

nels 1/2–7/8

AUX 1/2–AUX 5/6 AUX buses 1/2–5/6

RDR 1/2–RDR15/

Direct output of tracks 1/2–15/

Display Signal type

ST L/ST R L/R stereo output channels

BUS 1–BUS 8 Buses 1–8

DIR 1–DIR 8

Direct output of input chan-

nels 1–8

AUX 1–AUX 6 AUX buses 1–6

RDR 1–RDR 16 Direct output of tracks 1–16

Input/output patching

Chapter

Operation section

Using the patch library

Up to 20 different patching settings you make in the

PATCH screen Patch IN page and Patch OUT page

can be stored in an area of internal memory called the

“patch library.” The contents of the patch library are

saved on the internal hard disk as part of the song.

Here we will explain how to perform patch library

operations.

Storing the patching settings to

the library

Here’s how to assign a name to the patching settings,

and store them in the patch library.

Press the [PATCH] key → [F3] (Patch Lib.)

key.

The PATCH screen Patch Lib page will appear.

The list in the lower part of screen shows the

contents of the patch library.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the patch

library number (01–20) into which you will

store.

Tip!

Library number 00 contains a recall-only preset that

resets all patching settings to their default state. Thus,

it is not possible to store to number 00.

Move the cursor to the STORE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A TITLE EDIT popup window will appear, allow-

ing you to assign a name to the patching settings.

Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys

and the [ENTER] key to assign a name to

the patching settings.

For details on inputting characters, refer to

page 37.

Tip!

You can also omit inputting a name, and save directly

to the library. To do so, go to the UTILITY screen Pre-

fer. 1 page ([UTILITY] key

→

[F2] key) and turn off the

STORE CONFIRMATION setting. In this state if you

execute step 3, the settings will be saved in the library

with a name of “New Data.”

To execute the Store operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

To abort the Store operation, move the cursor to

the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

When the Store operation is executed, the patch-

ing settings stored in the list will be displayed.

Input/output patching

Operation section

Recalling patching settings from

the library

Here’s how to recall (load) patching settings that were

saved to the library.

Press [PATCH] key → [F3] (Patch Lib.) key

to display the PATCH screen Patch Lib

page.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

patching settings that you want to recall.

Move the cursor to the RECALL button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will appear, asking you to con-

ﬁrm the recall operation.

To execute the Recall operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

To abort the Recall operation, move the cursor to

the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

Tip!

• You can also cause the patching settings to be

recalled immediately, without having to see the con-

ﬁrmation popup window. To do so, access the UTIL-

ITY screen Prefer.1 page ([UTILITY] key

→

[F2] key),

and turn off the RECALL CONFIRMATION setting.

• By using automix, you can automatically recall a

patch library at the desired point in a song. For

details on automix, refer to page 133.

Input/output patching

Chapter

Operation section

Inserting an external effect into a channel

You can patch input/output jacks into an insert I/O

point of a desired channel, and insert an external

effect. For example this method can be used when

you want to apply a studio chorus effect while record-

ing a guitar, or when you want to apply an external

compressor/limiter on the stereo bus signal during

mixdown.

Use the keys of the MIXING LAYER section

and the [SEL] keys to select the desired

channel.

Press the [VIEW] key → [F1] (CH View) key.

The VIEW screen CH View page will appear. In

this example, we have selected monitor channel

Move the cursor to the ASSIGN button of

the EFFECT INSERT area, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The EFF.INSERT SETTING popup window will

appear. This window lets you insert an internal

effect or external effect into the selected channel.

Move the cursor to the EXTERNAL button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The SEND area and RTN. area of the popup win-

dow will show the type of input/output jack or

input/output channel that is patched.

Tip!

By using the INT.EFF 1 button or INT.EFF 2 button of

the EFF.INSERT SETTING popup window, you can

insert internal effect 1/2 into that channel. For details

refer to page 88.

Move the cursor to the SEND area, and use

the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the output

jack or output channel that you want to

assign as the insert send.

The following types of jack can be selected.

• If an input channel 1–8 or a monitor channel 1–

16 is selected

• If a return channel 1/2 or the stereo output

channel is selected

Display Content

OMNI 1–OMNI 4 OMNI OUT 1–4 jacks

SLT 1–SLT 8

Output channels 1–8 of the

OPTION I/O slot

D STO L/D STO R

L or R channel of the DIGITAL

STEREO OUT jack

STOUT L/STOUT

L or R channel of the STEREO

OUT jacks

Display Content

OMNI 1/2–OMNI

3/4

OMNI OUT 1/2–3/4 jacks

SLT 1/2–SLT 7/8

Output channels 1/2–7/8 of the

OPTION I/O slot

D STOUT DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack (L/R)

STOUT STEREO OUT jacks (L/R)

Input/output patching

Operation section

Move the cursor to the RTN. area, and use

the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the input jack

or input channel that you want to assign as

the insert return.

The following types of jack can be selected.

• If an input channel 1–8 or a monitor channel 1–

16 is selected

• If return channel 1/2 or the stereo output chan-

nel is selected

When you have ﬁnished making patching

settings, move the cursor to the OK button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The EFFECT INSERT area will indicate “ON

(EXTERNAL),” and the input/output jacks/input/

output channels will be assigned to the insert I/O

point.

For example if you have selected “OMNI 1” as

the insert send of the monitor channel 1, and

selected “AD 1” as the insert return, the signal

ﬂow will be as follows.

In this state if you access the PATCH screen Patch

OUT page, the OMNI OUT ASSIGN 1 area will

indicate “I-M 1.” This indication means that the

insert send of monitor channel 1 has been

assigned to OMNI OUT jack 1.

If you change the “I-M 1” setting, the insert I/O

point patching will be defeated. If you do so, be

aware that you will need to make the settings

once again, starting with step 1.

Tip!

• External effects can be patched for multiple chan-

nels. However, it is not possible for multiple insert

sends to use the same output jack or output channel.

• If you want to save the insert I/O patching settings

you make here, store the current state as a scene

memory. Insert I/O point information cannot be

stored in a patch library or channel library.

Display Content

AD 1–AD 8 INPUT jacks 1–8

SLT 1–SLT 8

INPUT 1–8 of an I/O card

(OPTION I/O slot)

D STIN L/D STIN

L or R channel of the DIGITAL

STEREO OUT jack

Display Content

AD 1/2–AD 7/8 INPUT jacks 1/2–7/8

SLT 1/2–SLT 7/8

Input channels 1/2–7/8 of the

OPTION I/O slot

DSTI L/R DIGITAL STEREO IN jacks (L/R)

External effect

Monitor channel 1

OMNI OUT jack 1 INPUT jack 1

INPUT OUTPUT

EQ DYNAT T

INPUT

PATCH

Input/output patching

Chapter

Operation section

Quickly assigning input signals to tracks

(Quick Rec)

Quick Rec is a function that lets you quickly switch

the patching so that the desired input signal can be

recorded on the desired track, while you view the

routing in a special screen. By using this function, you

can quickly record each instrument on its own track

without changing the INPUT jack connections.

Press the [QUICK REC] key.

The QUICK REC screen will appear. This screen

displays the following information.

1 MIX. CH

This area shows the type of input signals that are

assigned to input channels 1–8 (CH 1–CH 8). The

(jack) symbols displayed at the right of the box

indicate the direct output of each input channel.

B REC. TR

This area shows tracks 1–16 (TR 1–TR 16) of the

recorder section. The (jack) symbols displayed

at the left of the box indicate the inputs of each

track (recorder inputs 1–16).

If you want to change the input signal of a

patch source input channel, move the cur-

sor to the numerical box of that channel,

and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial.

In the MIX. CH area, move the cursor to

the input channel jack for the desired

patch source, and press the [ENTER] key.

The selected input channel will be highlighted.

In the following illustration, input channel 7 has

been selected.

Tip!

If you move the cursor to the jack of a highlighted

input channel and press the [ENTER] key once again,

the selection will be cancelled.

Move the cursor to a jack symbol in the

REC. TR area, then move the cursor to the

recorder input (1–16) for the desired patch

destination, and press the [ENTER] key.

A patch cable will connect the patch source

direct output to the patch destination recorder

input.

Tip!

• Steps 3 and 4 can be performed in the opposite

order.

• The direct output of a channel can be patched to

multiple recorder inputs. However, it is not possible

to patch multiple direct outputs to one recorder

input.

1 2

Input/output patching

Operation section

In the same way, use patch cables to con-

nect other direct outputs and recorder

inputs.

Tip!

• To cancel an individual patch cable, move the cursor

to the CLEAR button located at the right of the REC.

TR area, and press the [ENTER] key.

• To cancel all patch cables, move the cursor to the

ALL CLEAR button located in the upper right of the

display, and press the [ENTER] key.

A maximum of eight patch cables can be connected.

After all eight have been connected, it will not be pos-

sible to change the connections unless you cancel one

of the patch cables.

If you want the patch source channel to

return to the default state when you

change the patching, turn on the FLAT

button in the lower left of the display.

If the FLAT button is on (highlighted), channel

library number 01 will be recalled to input chan-

nels to which a patch cable is connected when

you execute Quick Rec, and the mix parameters

will be initialized.

When you have ﬁnished making all neces-

sary patch cable connections, move the

cursor to the EXECUTE button in the lower

right of the display, and press the [ENTER]

key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm execu-

tion of Quick Rec.

To execute Quick Rec, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

To abort the operation, move the cursor to the

CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

When you execute Quick Rec, the internal set-

tings of the AW2816 will change as follows.

• Input patch and recorder input patch settings will

change according to the selected input signals

and patch cable connections.

• Assignments to the stereo bus will be forcibly

defeated for input channels to which patch cable

are connected.

• If the FLAT button is on, mix parameters of patch

source input channels will be initialized.

• Channel library number 01 will be recalled for

track monitor channels to which a patch cable is

connected, initializing their mix parameters.

Hold down the REC [ ] key and press the

PLAY [ ] key.

When you execute Quick Rec, all tracks to

which a patch cable is connected will be set to

record-ready mode. Thus, you can simply hold

down the REC [ ] key and press the PLAY [ ]

key to begin recording on the corresponding

tracks.

Chapter

Using the internal effects

Operation section

Using the internal effects

This chapter explains how to use the two effects built into the

AW2816.

About the internal effects

The AW2816 contains two multi-effect units, called

“effect 1” and “effect 2.” These internal effects can be

used in the following two ways.

■ Using an effect via AUX send/

return

In this method, the input signal from each channel is

sent via an AUX bus to the input of internal effect 1/2,

and the output signal of effect 1/2 is returned to the

stereo bus or bus 1–8 and mixed with other signals.

This method is used when you want several channels

to share an effect such as reverb or delay.

With the default settings of the AW2816, the inputs of

effects 1/2 are patched to AUX buses 5/6 respectively,

and the output of effects 1/2 are patched to return

channels 1/2.

The signals sent from input channels 1–8 and monitor

channels 1–16 to AUX buses 5/6 are input to effects 1/

2 respectively. You can adjust the AUX 5/6 send levels

for each channel, and switch between pre-fader and

post-fader send.

The signals that are output from effects 1/2 are sent to

return channels 1/2. By assigning return channels 1/2

to buses 1–8 or the stereo bus, you can mix them with

the original (unprocessed) sound of the input or moni-

tor channel.

■ Inserting an effect into a speciﬁc

channel

In this method, the internal effect is released from its

assignment to the AUX bus or return channel, and

inserted into a speciﬁc channel. Use this method

when you want to apply the effect only to a speciﬁc

channel.

An effect can be inserted into the following channels.

• Input channels 1–8

• Monitor channels 1–16

• Return channels 1/2

• Stereo output channel

Tip!

The location at which the effect is inserted (insert I/O

point) will be immediately after the attenuator (for an

input channel, monitor channel, or return channel) or

immediately after the dynamics processor (for the ste-

reo output channel). For details refer to page 27,

“Signal ﬂow within the AW2816.”

An internal effect that has been inserted into a chan-

nel cannot be used via AUX send/return or inserted

into another channel.

Input channels 1–8

Monitor channels 1–16

Return channel 1

Return channel 2

Mixer section

AUX bus 5

AUX bus 6

Effect 1

Effect 2

Effect 1

Effect 2

Effect 1

Input channel

EQ DYNAT T

INPUT

PATCH

Using the internal effects

Chapter

Operation section

Using AUX send/return to apply an effect

This section describes the example of using effect 1

via AUX bus 5 in a send/return conﬁguration.

Check the patching

First we will check whether the AUX send/return

patching for effect 1 is set appropriately.

Press the [PATCH] key → [F1] key.

The PATCH screen Patch IN page will appear.

In the EFFECT PATCH area, make sure that

EFF1 is set to “AUX 5.”

In the EFFECT PATCH area of the Patch IN page,

you can select whether effect 1/2 will be used via

an AUX bus or inserted into a speciﬁc channel.

With the default settings of the AW2816, AUX 5

(AUX bus 5) is assigned to EFF 1 (effect 1), and

AUX 6 (AUX bus 6) is assigned to EFF 2 (effect 2),

as shown in the illustration above.

Tip!

If EFF1 is set to “INSERT,” move the cursor to the set-

ting and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial. In the popup win-

dow that appears, move the cursor to the OK button,

and press the [ENTER] key to switch EFF1 to the “AUX

5” setting.

In the MIXER CHANNEL INPUT ASSIGN

area, make sure that RTN 1 is set to “EFF1

L/R.”

In the MIXER CHANNEL INPUT ASSIGN area of

the Patch IN page, you can select the signal that

will be assigned to the input channels/return

channels of the mixer. With the default settings,

“EFF1 L/R” (L/R outputs of effect 1) is assigned to

RTN1 (return channel 1).

Tip!

If RTN1 is set differently, move the cursor to the set-

ting and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to change it to

“EFF1 L/R.”

Recalling an effect program from

the library

The internal effects of the AW2816 allow you to use

41 different effect types, such as REVERB HALL, GATE

REVERB, and STEREO DELAY. With the factory set-

tings, 41 effect programs using these effect types are

preset in an area of internal memory called the “effect

library.” Here’s how to recall an effect program into

effect 1.

Press the [AUX 5] key → [F2] key.

The AUX5/EFF1 screen Library page will appear,

in which you can store or recall effect programs.

A list of the effect programs is shown in the lower

part of the display.

Tip!

Effect library numbers 001–041 contain read-only

effect programs using each effect type.

The AW2816’s effect library can be used by both

effect 1 and effect 2. However, effect programs that

use “HQ-Pitch” (library number 19) can be used only

by effect 2.

Using the internal effects

Operation section

Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the pro-

gram that you want to recall.

The row enclosed by the dotted frame is the cur-

rently selected effect program. When you select

an effect program, the effect type used by that

program will be displayed at the right of the list.

For this example, let’s select the “Reverb Room”

program which uses the REVERB ROOM effect

type.

Tip!

When this page is displayed, you can use the [DATA/

JOG] dial to select a program regardless of the loca-

tion of the cursor.

Move the cursor to the RECALL button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will appear, asking you to con-

ﬁrm the effect program recall operation.

Tip!

It is also possible to recall an effect program directly,

without displaying the above popup window. To do

so, access the UTILITY screen Prefer.1 page ([UTIL-

ITY] key

→

[F2] key), and turn the RECALL CONFIR-

MATION setting OFF.

To recall the effect program, move the cur-

sor to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key.

The selected effect program will be recalled to

effect 1, and its name will be displayed in the

CURRENT EFFECT NAME area at the upper left

of the display.

If you decide not to recall the effect program,

move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press

the [ENTER] key.

Press the [F1] key.

The Eff.Edit page will appear, allowing you to

edit the parameters of the effect.

In the lower right of the display, make sure

that the MIX BAL knob is set to 100%.

The Eff.Edit page displays the effect parameters

for the currently-used effect type. For any effect

type, the MIX BAL knob (which adjusts the bal-

ance between the original sound and effect

sound) will be located at the lower right.

If you are using the effect via AUX send/return,

you will need to set the MIX BAL parameter to

100% (so that only the effect sound will be out-

put). To change this setting, move the cursor to

the MIX BAL knob, and turn the [DATA/JOG]

dial.

Tip!

• For the preset programs in library numbers 001–

041, the MIX BAL knob is set to 100% by default.

• For details on the type and function of the effect

parameters for each effect type, refer to the “Effect

parameter list” at the end of this manual.

Using the internal effects

Chapter

Operation section

Switching between pre-fader/

post-fader

Here’s how to select the output position (pre-fader/

post-fader) from which the signal will be sent from

each channel to AUX bus 5.

Press the [AUX 5] key → [F3] key.

The AUX5/EFF1 screen Pre/Post page will appear.

Here you can select either pre-fader or post-fader

as the point from which the signal will be output

from each channel to AUX bus 5 and sent to

effect 1.

A Input channels

B Monitor channels

C Return channel

D PRE/POST button

E ON/OFF button

To switch between pre-fader and post-

fader, move the cursor to the PRE/POST

button of the corresponding channel, and

press the [ENTER] key.

Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the display

will alternate between PRE (pre-fader) and POST

(post-fader). (With the default settings of the

song, all channels will be set to POST.)

If PRE (pre-fader) is selected, the signal can be

sent to AUX bus 5/effect 1 without regard to the

position of the channel faders. If POST (post-

fader) is selected, the signal that has passed

through the faders will be sent to AUX bus 5/

effect 1. (This means that no effect will be

applied to a channel whose fader is turned

down.)

Tip!

• If you move the cursor to the PRE button or POST

button in the GBL area at the right of the display

and press the [ENTER] key, all channels will switch

to pre-fader or post-fader.

• It is not possible to send the signal from return

channel 1 to effect 1 (AUX bus 5), or from return

channel 2 to effect 2 (AUX bus 6). This is to prevent

a loop from occurring between the return channel

and the effect.

• Because of the reason described above, return chan-

nel 1 (return channel 2) is not displayed in the

AUX5/EFF1 screen (AUX6/EFF2 screen) Pre/Post

page.

Make sure that the ON/OFF button is

turned ON for each channel to which you

want to apply the effect.

The ON/OFF buttons are used to switch the AUX

send on/off for each channel. If a button is turned

OFF, move the cursor to that button and press the

[ENTER] key.

Using the internal effects

Operation section

Adjusting the return level

Here’s how to adjust the level of return channel 1 (the

level of the effect sound returned from effect 1), and

send it to the stereo bus.

Make sure that the [ON] key of return

channel 1 is on (lit).

If it is off, press the [ON] key to turn it on.

Press the [SEL] key of return channel 1.

Return channel 1 will be selected.

Press the [VIEW] key → [F1] key.

The VIEW screen CH View page will appear.

In the PAN/ROUT area, make sure that the

ST button is turned on.

If the ST button is off, move the cursor to the but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key. Now the return

signal from effect 1 will be sent to the stereo bus,

and mixed with the signals from the other chan-

nels.

Turn the [RTN 1] control to adjust the level

of return channel 1 (the level of the effect

sound returned from effect 1).

The current level is shown by the FADER in the

lower part of the CH View page, and by the RTN

1 knob in the upper right. With the default set-

tings of the AW2816, the level of return channels

1/2 is set to nominal level (0 dB).

Tip!

The RTN 1/2 knobs in the upper right of the screen

are always displayed, regardless of the currently

selected screen. The knob will be highlighted when

the level is -inﬁnity, 0 dB, or +6 dB.

Adjusting the send level

Here’s how to adjust the send level of the channel(s)

that will use effect 1.

Press the [AUX 5] key.

The AUX5/EFF1 screen will appear. When this

screen is displayed, you can use faders 1–8 to

adjust the send level from each channel to AUX

bus 5 (effect 1).

Tip!

The AUX5/EFF1 screen contains three pages: the

Eff.Edit page, Library page, and Pre/Post page. How-

ever, the above operations can be performed when

any of these pages are displayed. The Pre/Post page is

convenient when you want to view the numerical

value of the send levels for each channel.

Use the keys of the MIXING LAYER section

to select a mixing layer.

If you want to apply the effect to input channels

1–8, press the INPUT [1-8] key. If you want to

apply the effect to monitor channels 1–8/9–16,

press the RECORDER [1-8]/[9-16] key.

Use faders 1–8 to adjust the send level of

each channel.

If you are applying the effect to the monitor

channels, play back the song while you adjust

the send level of each channel.

Use the [RTN 1] control to readjust the

return level as necessary.

Using the internal effects

Chapter

Operation section

Inserting an effect into a speciﬁc channel

The internal effects of the AW2816 can also be

inserted into a speciﬁc channel. This is convenient

when you want to apply an internal effect to an input

source while recording it, or when you want to apply

an effect only to a speciﬁc track (monitor channel)

during mixdown. As an example, here’s how to insert

effect 2 into monitor channel 1.

Change the patching

With the default settings of the AW2816, AUX bus 6 is

patched to the input of effect 2, and the output of

effect 2 is patched to return channel 2. In order to

insert effect 2 into a speciﬁc channel, you must ﬁrst

defeat this patching.

Press the [PATCH] key → [F1] key.

The PATCH screen Patch IN page will appear.

Move the cursor to the EFFECT PATCH area

EFF2 parameter, and turn the [DATA/JOG]

dial.

A popup window will appear, asking you

whether you really want to use effect 2 for inser-

tion.

Move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

In the EFFECT PATCH area, the EFF2 setting will

change to “INSERT.” Now effect 2 can be

inserted into the desired channel.

Effect 2 cannot be used via AUX send/return unless

you change the EFFECT PATCH area EFF2 parameter

from “INSERT” back to “AUX 6.”

Tip!

When you make the above setting, the Patch IN page

RTN 2 area will change to an indication of “––”. This

indicates that the effect 2 output which had been

patched to return channel 2 has been cancelled, and

that no signal is currently assigned.

Inserting the effect into a chan-

nel

Now that we have speciﬁed effect 2 for insertion,

here’s how to insert it into monitor channel 1.

Press the RECORDER [1-8] key → [SEL] key

Monitor channel 1 will be selected.

Press the [VIEW] key → [F1] key.

The VIEW screen CH View page will appear. This

shows the mix settings of monitor channel 1.

Using the internal effects

Operation section

Move the cursor to the ASSIGN button of

the EFFECT INSERT area, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The EFF.INSERT SETTING popup window will

appear. In this popup window you can use the

following four buttons to select the to insert

effect.

• OFF................... Cancel effect insertion.

• INT.EFF1 ........... Insert effect 1.

• INT.EFF2 ........... Insert effect 2.

• EXTERNAL......... Insert an external effect.

To insert effect 2, move the cursor to the

INT.EFF2 button, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The SEND area in the popup window will

change to “EFF2,” and the RTN. area will change

to “EFF 2L.” This indicates that the input of effect

2 is patched to the insert send of monitor channel

1, and the L output of effect 2 is patched to the

insert return.

Tip!

• By moving the cursor to the RTN. area and turning

the [DATA/JOG] dial, you can switch between “EFF

2L” and “EFF 2R.”

• If you insert an effect into a stereo channel (return

channel 1/2 or the stereo output channel), the L/R

outputs of the effect will be returned to the L/R

inputs of the channel.

When you have ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The popup window will close, and the EFFECT

INSERT area will indicate “ON [INT.EFF2].” This

means that that effect 2 is inserted into the corre-

sponding channel (in this example, monitor

channel 1).

Tip!

To cancel the insertion, turn on the OFF button in the

EFF.INSERT SETTING popup window. Also, a popup

window asking you to conﬁrm cancellation of the

insertion will appear if you insert effect 2 into

another channel.

Recalling an effect program

Here’s how to recall an effect program for use by

effect 2.

Press the [AUX 6] key → [F2] key.

The AUX6/EFF2 screen Library page will appear.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the effect

program that you want to recall.

Move the cursor to the RECALL button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The selected program will be recalled to effect 2.

Press the [F1] key.

The Eff.Edit page will appear.

Move the cursor to the MIX BAL. knob,

and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to adjust the

balance between the original sound and

the effect sound.

When you insert an internal effect into a speciﬁc

channel, use the Eff.Edit page MIX BAL. knob to

adjust the balance between the original sound

and the effect sound. Adjust this setting to an

appropriate level as necessary.

Using the internal effects

Chapter

Operation section

Applying effects while you record

If you have inserted an internal effect into an input

channel, the input source processed by the effect can

be recorded on a track. Here we will explain how to

insert effect 1 into input channel 1, and record the

processed sound directly onto track 3.

Change the patching

First we will change the patching of effect 1, input

channel 1, and track 3.

Press the [PATCH] key → [F1] key.

The PATCH screen Patch IN page will appear.

Move the cursor to the EFFECT PATCH

area, and change the EFF1 setting to

“INSERT.”

Now effect 1 can be inserted into the desired

channel.

Move the cursor to the MIXER CHANNEL

INPUT ASSIGN area, and select the input

source that you want to assign to input

channel 1.

For example if you want the input signal of

INPUT jack 1 to be assigned to input channel 1,

select “AD 1.”

Move the cursor to the RECORDER TRACK

INPUT ASSIGN area, and change the

recorder input 3 setting to “DIR 1” (direct

output of input channel 1).

Now the input signal of input channel 1 will be

sent directly to track 3.

Insert the effect into a channel

Here’s how to insert effect 1 into input channel 1.

Press the INPUT [1-8] key → [SEL] key 1.

Input channel 1 will be selected.

Press the [VIEW] key → [F1] key.

The VIEW screen CH View page will appear.

Move the cursor to the ASSIGN button of

the EFFECT INSERT area, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The EFF.INSERT SETTING popup window will

appear.

Move the cursor to the INT.EFF 1 button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The SEND setting in the popup window will

change to “EFF1,” and the RTN. setting will

change to “EFF 1L.”

Using the internal effects

Operation section

Move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The CH View page EFFECT INSERT area will dis-

play “ON [INT.EFF1],” indicating that effect 1 has

been inserted into input channel 1.

Turn off the ST button in the PAN/ROUT

area.

In generally, you will monitor the signal that is

sent to the stereo bus via monitor channel 3

when the recording. For this reason, you need to

turn off the ST button of input channel 1, so that

the input signal of input channel 1 will not be

sent directly to the stereo bus, duplicating the

signal.

Press the [AUX 5] key → [F2] key, and recall

the effect program that you want to use for

effect 1.

For details on recalling an effect program, refer to

page 84.

Start recording

Press the [VIEW] key → [F1] key to display

the VIEW screen CH View page.

Press the RECORDER [1-8] key → [SEL] key

Monitor channel 3 will be selected.

Turn the ST button in the PAN/ROUT area.

The input signal of monitor channel 3 (the signal

recorded on track 3) will be sent to the stereo

bus.

Raise the STEREO fader and fader 3 to the

0 dB position.

Press the REC TRACK SELECT [3] key to put

track 3 in record-ready mode.

Now the input signal of input channel 1 can be

monitored from the MONITOR OUT jacks.

Press the [METER] key.

The METER screen will appear, where you can

view input/output level meters for tracks 1–16.

Press the INPUT [1-8] key, and while play-

ing the instrument connected to the

INPUT jack 1, use fader 1 to adjust the

recording level.

Press the REC [ ] key + PLAY [ ] key to

start recording.

Using the internal effects

Chapter

Operation section

Adjusting the effect parameters

You can freely edit the parameters of the effect pro-

grams built into the AW2816 to create the sound you

want. You can also save an edited program in the

effect library. As an example, here’s how to edit the

effect program of effect 2.

Press the [AUX 6] key → [F2] key.

The AUX6/EFF2 screen Library page will appear,

in which you can perform effect library opera-

tions.

From library numbers 001–041, select the

effect program that you want to edit, and

recall it.

It is not possible to change the effect type of the

effect program that you recall. Thus, even if you want

to create an effect program from scratch, you must

start by recalling a program that uses the desired

effect type from the effect library.

Press the [F1] key.

The Eff.Edit page will appear, where you can edit

the recalled effect program. The lower part of the

screen will show knobs for the parameters that

can be edited.

Move the cursor to the knob of the effect

parameter that you want to edit, and use

the [DATA/JOG] dial to edit the value.

Tip!

For details on the parameters and functions of each

effect type, refer to the “Effect parameter list” at the

end of this manual.

Using the internal effects

Operation section

Saving an effect program

Up to 86 different effect programs that you edited can

be stored (saved) in vacant locations of the effect

library, and recalled later. Here’s how the effect pro-

gram you edited for effect 2 can be stored in the

library.

Tip!

• Programs stored in the effect library are saved on

the hard disk as part of the song data.

• By using the MIDI Bulk Dump function, speciﬁc

effect programs that you stored in the effect library

can be backed up on a MIDI sequencer or other

external MIDI device. For details on Bulk Dump,

refer to page 212.

Press the [AUX 6] key → [F2] key.

The AUX6/EFF2 screen Library page will appear.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the store

destination library number (042–128).

Library numbers 001–041 are recall-only. They can-

not be stored.

Move the cursor to the STORE button, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear,

allowing you to input a name (library title) for the

effect program.

Use the character palette to input a name.

For details on inputting characters, refer to

page 37.

To store the program, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

To cancel without storing, move the cursor to the

CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

Tip!

You can also store directly without inputting the

library title. To do so, go to the UTILITY screen Pre-

fer.1 page ([UTILITY] key

→

[F2] key), and turn the

STORE CONFIRMATION parameter OFF.

Chapter

Transport/Locate operations

Operation section

Transport/Locate operations

This chapter explains transport and locate operations on the AW2816.

Transport key functions

Transport operations for the recorder are performed

using the ﬁve keys of the Transport section (the trans-

port keys). The function of each transport key will

change depending on the current state (running

mode) of the transport. The following chart shows the

function of each transport key in each running mode.

* : Recording will be executed only if one or more of the REC TRACK SELECT [1]–[16]/[ST] keys are blinking.

– : Key does nothing.

Transport operations and Locate operations cannot be

performed when the SONG, FILE, CD, or EDIT

screens are shown in the display.

Fast forward-play/Fast reverse-play

(the Shuttle function)

While the transport is stopped or playing, you can

operate the [SHUTTLE] dial to play fast-forward (cue)

or play in reverse (review). This is referred as the

“Shuttle function.”

The speed of cue or review will change according to

the angle of the [SHUTTLE] dial, as shown in the illus-

tration at right. When the [SHUTTLE] dial is returned

to the center, the Shuttle function is defeated, and the

transport will return to the previous state (stopped or

playing).

Running mode

Transport key

Stopped Playing Rewinding

Review

(rewind-play)

Fast-

forward

Cue

(play-fast-forward)

Recording

— Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop

Play back — Play back Play back Play back Play back

Play back

(punch-out)

Rewind

(8x speed)

Review

(8x speed)

Switch

rewind speed

(8x ⇔ 16x)

Switch review

speed

(8x ⇔ 16x)

Rewind

(8x speed)

Review

(8x speed)

—

Fast-forward

(8x speed)

Cue

(8x speed)

Fast-forward

(8x speed)

Cue

(8x speed)

Switch fast-

forward speed

(8x ⇔ 16x)

Switch cue

speed

(8x ⇔ 16x)

—

Record*

(punch-in)

Play back Play back Play back Play back —

Forward

Stop

+16

–8

–4

–2

+1(normal speed)

–1

+1/2–1/2

+1/4–1/4

Backward

–16

Transport/Locate operations

Chapter

Operation section

Searching for a point while you listen

(the Nudge function)

“Nudge” is a function that repeatedly plays back a

short region before or after the current location. By

using this function, you can listen as you move the

current location in small steps to ﬁnd a desired point.

This is convenient when you need to specify a loca-

tion accurately, such as when specifying the auto

punch-in/out points, or when specifying a range for

track editing.

Use the transport or the shuttle function to

locate to the approximate point you want

to ﬁnd.

With the transport stopped, press the [JOG

ON] key.

The [JOG ON] key will light, and the Nudge

function will be turned on. The audio will be

played back repeatedly, starting at the current

location and continuing for a speciﬁed length of

time (100 msec by default).

To move the current location forward, turn

the [DATA/JOG] dial toward the right. To

move it backward, turn the [DATA/JOG]

dial toward the left.

The current location will move in millisecond

units if time display is selected as the counter dis-

play method, or in sub-frame units if timecode

display is selected. You can also use the [SHUT-

TLE] dial to move the current location rapidly.

If measure display is selected as the counter display

method, the current location will move in steps of one

beat when the [DATA/JOG] dial is turned.

To defeat the Nudge function, press the

[JOG ON] key or the transport section

STOP [ ] key.

The [JOG ON] key will go dark, and the Nudge

function will be defeated.

To change the playback time or playback

direction of the Nudge function, press the

[UTILITY] key → [F3] key.

The UTILITY screen Prefer.2 page will appear. In

the NUDGE area of this page, you can change

the nudge time (the duration of the repeated

playback) and play mode (playback direction).

To adjust the nudge time, move the cursor

to the TIME ﬁeld of the NUDGE area, and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial to set the nudge

time.

The nudge time can be speciﬁed in the range of

25 ms–800 ms (default= 100 ms).

To change the play mode, move the cursor

to the PLAY MODE button in the NUDGE

area, and press the [ENTER] key to switch

between the following two play modes.

• AFTER

Playback will repeat over an area corresponding

to the nudge time and starting at the current loca-

tion (default setting).

• BEFORE

Playback will repeat over an area corresponding

to the nudge time and ending at the current loca-

tion.

Nudge time

Current

location

Song

track

[DATA/JOG] dial moves

in smallest steps

Larger movement

according to the angle

of the [SHUTTLE] dial

Current location

PLAY MODE BEFORE PLAY MODE AFTER

Transport/Locate operations

Operation section

Searching for a point while viewing

the waveform

The AW2816 lets you view the recorded contents of a

track as a waveform while you search for a desired

location or set marker or locate points.

Use the Transport or Shuttle function to

move to the approximate location that you

want to ﬁnd.

Press the [TRACK] key → [F1] key.

The TRACK screen TR View page will appear.

Move the cursor to the track whose wave-

form you want to view.

With the transport stopped, hold down the

[SHIFT] key and press the [F2] key.

The WAVE DISPLAY popup window will appear,

displaying the audio waveform of the selected

track.

The audio data recorded on the track cannot be

played back while the WAVE DISPLAY popup window

is displayed.

As necessary, use the following buttons to

adjust the magniﬁcation of the level (verti-

cal axis) and time (horizontal axis).

• AMP. / buttons

Change the magniﬁcation of the vertical axis in

the range of x1–x16.

• TIME / buttons

Change the magniﬁcation of the horizontal axis

in the range of x1–x4096.

If you want to move the pointer location,

turn the [DATA/JOG] dial.

Turning the dial toward the right will move the

pointer forward, and turning the dial toward the

left will move the pointer backward. This opera-

tion merely moves the pointer location, and does

not affect the counter location.

To set the current counter location to the

pointer displayed in the WAVE DISPLAY

popup window, move the cursor to the

LOCATE button and press the [ENTER] key.

The song will move to the pointer location, and

the popup window will close.

To close the WAVE DISPLAY popup window

without changing the current location,

move the cursor to the EXIT button and

press the [ENTER] key.

Tip!

While the WAVE DISPLAY popup window is displayed,

you can use the locate buttons and markers to move

the pointer to the desired location. You can also set a

locate point or marker to the current location of the

pointer. (For details on setting locate points or mark-

ers, refer to page 102)

Cursor

PointerPointer location

Transport/Locate operations

Chapter

Operation section

Rewinding for a speciﬁc distance (Rollback)

When the transport is stopped or playing, you can

press the [ROLL BACK] key of the locate section to

rewind for a speciﬁc distance. (This is called the Roll-

back function.) This is convenient when you would

like to record from a point slightly earlier than the cur-

rent location, or when you want to hear a passage

once again during playback. The distance that is

rewound by the Rollback function (“rollback time”) is

5 seconds by default, but this can be changed as

desired.

Press the [UTILITY] key → [F3] key.

The UTILITY screen Prefer.2 page will appear.

The rollback time can be speciﬁed in the ROLL-

BACK TIME area of this page.

Move the cursor to the ROLLBACK TIME

area, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to set

the rollback time.

The rollback time can be set in millisecond units

over a range of 0–30 seconds.

When the song is stopped or playing, press

the [ROLL BACK] key.

The transport will rewind by the distance you

speciﬁed in step 2.

Transport/Locate operations

Operation section

Repeatedly playing a speciﬁed region

(A-B Repeat)

“A-B Repeat” is a function that repeatedly plays back

between the A point and B point you specify. For

example this is convenient when you want to repeat-

edly play back a certain region of the song while you

adjust the mix.

■ Setting the A/B points

Move the song to the location at which

you want to begin repeated playback.

Hold down the [SET] key and press the [A]

key.

The [A] key will light, indicating that the A point

(the beginning of repeat playback) has been set.

Move the song to the location at which

you want to end repeated playback.

Hold down the [SET] key and press the [B]

key.

The [B] key will light, indicating that the B point

(the end of repeat playback) has been set.

Tip!

• The A point and B point can be set even while the

song is playing.

• If you set the B point earlier than the A point, play-

back will repeat between B

→

The A and B points must be at least 1 second apart.

Repeat playback will not occur if the points are closer

than this.

■ Performing A-B Repeat playback

When the transport is stopped, press the

[REPEAT] key.

The [REPEAT] key will light, and the A-B Repeat

function will be turned on. The song will auto-

matically locate to the A point.

To begin repeated playback, press the PLAY

[ ] key.

Playback will begin from the A point. When the

B point is reached, the song will automatically

return to the A point and resume playback.

Tip!

If you press the [REPEAT] key while the song is play-

ing, repeated playback between the A/B points will

begin automatically, regardless of the current loca-

tion.

To stop playback, press the STOP [ ] key.

Playback will stop, but the A-B Repeat function

will stay on.

When the A-B Repeat function is on, pressing the

PLAY [ ] key will immediately resume repeated

playback, regardless of the current location.

To cancel repeated playback, press the

[REPEAT] key.

The [REPEAT] key will go dark, and the A-B

Repeat function will be cancelled. If you cancel

the A-B Repeat playback during repeated play-

back, normal playback will occur from that loca-

tion.

Tip!

• If you perform a recording operation when the A-B

Repeat function is on, the A-B Repeat function will

be cancelled automatically.

• The A-B Repeat function will stop automatically

after 100 repetitions.

Transport/Locate operations

100

Chapter

Operation section

Locating to a speciﬁed point

You can specify a locate point numerically, and locate

to that point.

With the transport stopped, press the

[NUM LOCATE] key.

The [NUM LOCATE] key will blink, and the cur-

sor will move to the counter in the upper part of

the display.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the numeric

keys to specify a locate point.

A locate point can be speciﬁed using either of

the following two methods.

• Using the [DATA/JOG] dial

With this method you can move the cursor left or

right to specify the unit that you want to change,

and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to change the

value. When the counter is displaying time, you

can specify hours/minutes/seconds/milliseconds.

When it is displaying time code, you can specify

hours/minutes/seconds/frames/sub-frames. When

it is displaying measures, you can specify mea-

sures/beats.

• Using the numeric keys to directly input a value

With this method you can use the [0]–[9] keys of

the Locate section to directly input a numerical

value. When time display is selected for the

counter, pressing

[1]→[5]→[2]→[3]→[0]→[0]→[0] will input

“00:15:23.000”.

You can also move the cursor to the left and

input only the upper places. In this case, the val-

ues to the right of the cursor will be set to 0.

For example if the counter is displaying time, you

can move the cursor to the seconds unit and

press [1]→[5]→[2]→[3] to input “00:15:23.000”.

Tip!

If you want to locate to a negative location, use the

[ ] key to specify the minus sign. Each time you

press the [ ] key, the minus sign will alternately

turn on/off.

To locate to the speciﬁed location, press

the [ENTER] key.

The song will move to the speciﬁed location. If

you want to cancel your input and return to the

previous value, press the [CANCEL] key.

Cursor

Transport/Locate operations

101

Operation section

Locating to the zero location of the counter

When the song is stopped or playing, you can press

the [RTZ] key to locate to the zero location of the

counter (in the case of measure display, this will be

the beginning of the ﬁrst measure).

The point to which the [RTZ] key will locate will

depend on the counter display unit (time, time code,

measures) or display method (absolute time or relative

time), as shown in the following table.

If measure display (MEASURE) is selected as the

counter display method, the absolute time zero loca-

tion will always be the start point. For this reason,

pressing the [RTZ] key will always return to the start

point (0001.01.0000) location.

Tip!

The counter display method can be changed in the

DISPLAY area of the SONG screen Setting page

([SONG] key

→

[F2] key).

Setting the relative time zero

location

The relative time (REL) zero location can be set as fol-

lows.

Locate to the point that you want to spec-

ify as relative time zero.

Tip!

The relative time zero location can also be set while

the song is playing.

Hold down the [SET] key and press the

[RTZ] key.

The counter display will automatically switch to

relative time, and will be reset to relative time

zero (time display = 00:00:00.000/time code dis-

play = 00:00:00:00.00).

Tip!

• If you want to return the counter display to absolute

time (ABS), access the METER screen Meter 2 page,

move the cursor to the ABS button in the upper left

of the display, and press the [ENTER] key.

• The speciﬁed relative time zero location is saved on

the hard disk as part of the current song.

ABS REL

Time display

Absolute time zero

location (start point)

Relative time zero

location

Time code

display

00:00:00:00.00

location

Relative time zero

location

Measure

display

Absolute time zero location (start point)

Start point Relative time zero location

Transport/Locate operations

102

Chapter

Operation section

Using various locate points to locate

The AW2816 lets you specify locate points at desired

locations in a song, and press a key to locate (change

the current time location) instantly to those points.

You can set the following locate points.

●In point/Out point

These are locate points used to specify the range for

auto punch-in/out (→P.64). Normally, the locations

at which recording most recently began and ended

will automatically be set as the In and Out points.

As necessary, the location of these points can be

edited in the screen.

●A/B points

These are locate points used to specify the range of

the A-B Repeat function (→P.99). The A point and B

point can be set at any point in the song, either by

using the keys or by editing the settings in the

screen.

●Start point/End point

These locate points normally correspond to the

beginning and end of the song. When a new song is

created, the Start point will be initially set as abso-

lute time 00:00:00.000. When you record or edit

the song, the last location in the song will automati-

cally be set as the End point. As necessary, the loca-

tion of these points can be edited in the screen.

The procedure for using the keys to set a locate

point and then to locate to that point is as follows.

■ Setting a locate point

Use the transport or the Shuttle function to

move the song to the location at which

you want to set a locate point.

A locate point can be speciﬁed when the song is

playing or stopped.

Hold down the [SET] key and press the key

for the locate point you want to set.

The following keys correspond to the various

locate points.

• In point ............. LAST REC [IN] key

• Out point .......... LAST REC [OUT] key

• A point .............. [A] key

• B point .............. [B] key

If you want to edit the location of the Start point or

End point, do so in the TRACK screen MARK Adj.

page.

When a locate point has been set, the corre-

sponding key will light.

■ Locating to a speciﬁed point

To locate to a locate point that has been

set, press the corresponding key while the

song is stopped or playing.

Press the [ ] key to locate to the Start

point, or the [ ] key to locate to the End

point.

The various locate points that have been set in a

song are displayed as follows in the TRACK

screen TR View page ([TRACK] key → [F1] key).

Tip!

• Locate point settings are saved on the internal hard

disk as part of the song.

• The position of a locate point can be edited as

desired (

→

P.104). You can also delete locate points

other than the Start point and End point (

→

P.106).

Start

point

In/Out

points

A/B

points

End

point

Transport/Locate operations

103

Operation section

Using markers to locate

The AW2816 allows you to assign up to 99 markers at

desired points in a song. You can use the [ ]/[ ]

keys to locate to these markers. Here’s how to assign

and use markers.

■ Setting a marker

Move the song to the point where you

want to set a marker.

Markers can be set when the song is during

recording and playing or stopped.

Press the [MARK] key.

A message of “MARK SET” will appear for a time

in the lower part of the display, indicating that a

marker has been set. A new marker will be added

each time you press the [MARK] key.

Tip!

• Marker settings are saved on the internal hard disk

as part of the song.

• You can delete a marker (

→

P.106) or edit its location

(

→

P.104).

Press the [ ] key to locate to the marker

that precedes the current location, or press

the [ ] to locate to the marker that fol-

lows the current location.

The [ ] key will light if a marker exists before

the current location, and the [ ] key will light if

a marker exists after the current location.

Markers that you set are displayed as follows in

the TRACK screen TR View page ([TRACK] key →

[F1] key).

As shown in the diagram above, markers are

automatically numbered from 1–99 starting at

the beginning of the song. If you set a new

marker between two existing markers, subse-

quent markers will be renumbered.

Markers

Set a marker

Transport/Locate operations

104

Chapter

Operation section

Editing the location of a locate point

or marker

The location of the Start point, End point, A/B points,

In/Out points, or Markers can be edited if desired.

Press the [TRACK] key → [F4] key.

The TRACK screen MARK Adj. page will appear.

The LOCATOR POSITION area in the upper part

of the screen shows the location of each cur-

rently-set locate point. The MARKER POSITION

area in the lower part of the screen lists the cur-

rently-set markers.

Tip!

The numeric boxes will indicate “–” for locate points

that have not been set.

Move the cursor to the desired locate

point.

Tip!

• The Start point and End point will always use time

code display, regardless of the currently selected

display method.

• The numerical position of locate points other than

the Start point and End point will depend on the

currently selected counter display method (hours/

time code/measures).

Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to select

the unit that you want to edit, and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial to edit the value.

If the counter is set to time display you can edit

“hours/minutes/seconds/milliseconds.” If it is set

to time code display you can edit “hours/min-

utes/seconds/frames/sub-frames.” If it is set to

measure display you can edit “measures/beats.”

To adjust the location of a marker, move

the cursor to the numeric box in the left of

the MARKER POSITION area, and turn the

[DATA/JOG] dial to select the desired

marker number.

Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to select

the unit that you want to edit, and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial to edit the value.

When editing the location of a marker, it is not possi-

ble to move the marker past the preceding or follow-

ing marker.

A point B point

Markers

Start point

In point Out point

End point

Transport/Locate operations

105

Operation section

The relation between the Start

point and time code

In the TRACK screen MARK Adj. page, the Start point

and End point are always displayed as time code. This

is because the absolute time zero location of the time

display is determined by the time code value that has

been speciﬁed as the Start point.

For example when the song is in the default state, the

Start point is set to 00:00:00:00.00 (time code), and

matches the beginning of the song. However if the

Start point is changed to 00:00:05:00.00 (time code),

the Start point (absolute time zero in the time display)

will be ﬁve seconds after the beginning of the song.

Tip!

If the counter is set to Measure display, the location

that is set for the Start point will be the ﬁrst beat of

the ﬁrst measure.

On the AW2816, you can change the time code that

corresponds to the beginning of the song (Time Code

Top). This is convenient when you need to align the

beginning of the song to a speciﬁc location of the time

code (MTC) being received from an external.

In this case, changing the Time Code Top will also

affect the time code that is set as the Start point. For

example if you change the Time Code Top from

00:0000:00.00 to 00:00:03:00.00, the Start point will

correspondingly move three seconds later.

Tip!

The Time Code Top setting can be edited in the SONG

screen Setting page ([SONG] key

→

[F2] key).

• It is not possible to set the Start point earlier than

the Time Code Top.

• The AW2816’s automix operates according to the

absolute time of a song. Thus if you change the Start

point after automix events have been recorded, be

aware that the song and the automix will no longer

be synchronized.

Time display

(ABS)

Time code

display (ABS)

00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00

00:00:00:000 00:00:05:000

00:00:10:00.00

00:00:10:000

Start point = 00:00:00:00.00

Time display

(ABS)

Time code

display (ABS)

00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00

–00:00:05:000 00:00:00:000

00:00:10:00.00

00:00:05:000

Start point = 00:00:05:00.00

Song

Start point = 00:00:05:00.00

Time code top = 00:00:00:00.00

00:00:03:00.00 00:00:08:00.00

–00:00:05:000 00:00:00:000

00:00:13:00.00

00:00:05:000

Start point = 00:00:08:00.00

Time code top = 00:00:

03:00.00

00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00

–00:00:05:000 00:00:00:000

00:00:10:00.00

00:00:05:000

Time display

(ABS)

Time code

display (ABS)

Time display

(ABS)

Time code

display (ABS)

Song

Transport/Locate operations

106

Chapter

Operation section

Deleting a locate point/marker

Locate points (other than the Start and End points) and

markers can be deleted. A locate point or marker can

be deleted either in the screen or by using key opera-

tions.

• It is not possible to delete the Start or End points.

• A locate point or marker that has been deleted can-

not be recovered.

Deleting from within the screen

Press the [TRACK] key → [F4] key.

The TRACK screen MARK Adj. page will appear.

Select the locate point or marker that you

want to delete, move the cursor to the but-

ton located at the left side of the display,

and press the [ENTER] key.

A “D” character will be displayed in the button.

This indicates that the corresponding locate point

or marker has been selected for deletion.

Tip!

Multiple locate points can be selected simultaneously

for deletion. However in the case of markers, only

one can be selected for deletion.

Move the cursor to the DELETE button in

the lower right of the display, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The locate point(s) or marker selected in step 2

will be deleted. If an In/Out point or A/B point

was deleted, the corresponding key (LAST REC

[IN]/[OUT] key or [A]/[B] key) will go dark.

Deleting by using key operations

To delete a locate point, hold down the

[CANCEL] key and press the corresponding

key (LAST REC [IN]/[OUT] key, or [A]/[B]

key).

The locate point will be deleted, and the corre-

sponding key will go dark.

Tip!

A locate point can be deleted using key operations

even during playback.

To delete a marker, use the [ ]/[ ] keys

to locate to the marker you want to delete.

Then hold down the [CANCEL] key and

press the [MARK] key.

A message of MARK ERASE will appear in the

bottom of the display, and the selected marker

will be deleted.

Tip!

A marker can be deleted using key operations only

while the song is stopped.

107

Chapter

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

Operation section

Editing tracks and virtual

tracks

This chapter explains how to name a recorded virtual track, and how

to edit a recorded audio track.

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

Audio data recorded on the AW2816 can be edited in

a variety of ways by copying between tracks, moving

data to a different location within the same track, or

by changing its pitch. Audio track data can be edited

in the TR Edit page or in the V.TR Edit page.

In the TR Edit page, editing operations are performed

on the virtual track currently selected for each track

1–16. You can use these operations (for example) to

copy audio data between tracks 1–16, or erase/delete

an entire speciﬁed region of a song.

— the TR Edit page —

●Editing in the TR Edit page

In the V.TR Edit page, on the other hand, editing oper-

ations are performed on virtual tracks 1–8 of the spec-

iﬁed track. You can use these operations to (for

example) combine takes that were recorded on sepa-

rate virtual tracks into a single part.

— the V.TR Edit page —

●Editing in the V.TR Edit page

• Even after you have ﬁnished editing, you can use the

[UNDO] key to revert to the state preceding as

many as the 15 most recent operations, but no states

earlier than this can be recovered.

• Be aware that when you execute the Song Optimize

(

→

P.154) operation, all the Undo data will be

erased, and that it will be impossible to use the

[UNDO] key to revert to an earlier state.

Tracks 1–16

Virtual tracks 1–8

Virtual tracks affected by editing

Virtual track selected for each

track 1–16

Virtual tracks affected by editing

Virtual track selected for each

track 1–16

Tracks 1–16

Virtual tracks 1–8

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

108

Chapter

Operation section

Tracks, parts, and regions

When editing audio data in the TR Edit page or the

V.TR Edit page, you can select one of three units by

which the data will be edited.

●Tracks

The entire selected track (1–16) or virtual track (1–8)

will be the object of editing.

●Parts

Only the speciﬁed portion (“Part”) of the selected

track (1–16) or virtual track (1–8) will be the object

of editing.

●Region

A length of audio that was recorded on a track in a

single operation (referred to as a “region”) will be

the object of editing. Track areas that contain no

data cannot be selected.

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Regions

Part

= continuous audio data

Tracks

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

109

Operation section

Naming a track or region

When something is recorded on a track, a default

name is assigned to that virtual track and region as fol-

lows.

• Default virtual track name

............... V.Tr x-y (x= track number, y=

virtual track number)

• Default region name

............... VTxy (x= track number, y=

virtual track number)

Tip!

If multiple regions exist in the same track (i.e., if you

recorded more than one time), each region will have

the same name.

These track names and virtual track names can be

edited as follows.

Editing a virtual track name

Press the [EDIT] key → [F1] (TR Edit) key.

The EDIT screen TR Edit page will appear.

This page displays the following information.

1 Track numbers

These are the track numbers 1–16.

B Track names

These are the names assigned to each virtual

track.

C TRACK/PART/REGION menu

These buttons let you select commands for edit-

ing tracks, parts, or regions. Use the TRACK

menu to edit a track name, or use the REGION

menu to edit a region name.

D Parameter settings

This area displays the parameters needed to exe-

cute the editing command.

Move the cursor to the TRACK menu, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The editing commands in the TRACK menu will

be listed.

Move the cursor to the NAME command

and press the [ENTER] key.

A button for setting the parameters of the NAME

command will appear.

Move the cursor to the TRACK parameter

button, and press the [ENTER] key.

The cursor will move to the parameter setting

area in the lower right of the display.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the track,

and press the [ENTER] key.

Move the cursor to the NAME parameter,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear,

allowing you to input the track name.

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

110

Chapter

Operation section

Use the character palette to input the new

track name.

A track name of up to sixteen characters can be

input. For details on inputting characters, refer to

page 37.

Tip!

The TRACK page displays the ﬁrst eight characters of

the track name.

To conﬁrm the new track name, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

To cancel the change, move the cursor to the

CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

Editing a region name

Press [EDIT] key → [F1] (TR Edit) key.

The EDIT screen TR Edit page will appear.

Move the cursor to the REGION menu and

press the [ENTER] key.

The editing commands in the REGION menu will

be listed.

Move the cursor to the NAME command

button and press the [ENTER] key.

A button for setting the parameters of the NAME

command will appear.

Move the cursor to the REGION parameter

button and press the [ENTER] key.

The name of the currently selected region

(NAME) and the start and end locations of the

region (FROM/TO) will be displayed in the

parameter area at the lower right of the display.

Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys

to select a region, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear,

allowing you to assign a name to the region.

Move the cursor to the NAME parameter

button, and press the [ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear,

allowing you to assign a name to the region.

Use the character palette to input the new

region name.

A region name of up to eight characters can be

input. For details on inputting characters, refer to

page 37.

To conﬁrm the new region name, move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

To cancel the change, move the cursor to the

CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

111

Operation section

Editing the audio data of tracks 1–16

This section explains how to use the TR Edit page to

edit the audio of tracks 1–16 in units of entire tracks,

or in units of individual parts or regions.

Editing entire Tracks

Press the [EDIT] key → [F1] (TR Edit) key.

The EDIT screen TR Edit page will appear. In this

page, your editing operations will affect the vir-

tual tracks that are selected for each track 1–16.

This page shows the following information.

1 Track numbers

These are the track numbers 1–16.

B Pairing

This column indicates the pairing status of adja-

cent odd-numbered → even-numbered tracks.

Pairing can also be enabled/disabled from this

page.

Tip!

If you use an editing command to edit in track units,

two paired tracks will generally be processed simulta-

neously by one command. It is convenient to pair two

tracks that were used to record a stereo source.

C Track names

These are the names assigned to each virtual

track.

D Track view

For each track, this area displays a bar graph to

indicate the presence of audio data. Vertical lines

within this area indicate the speciﬁed range of

editing. The symbols displayed below this area

indicate locate points and markers that have

been set in the corresponding locations.

E TRACK/PART/REGION menu

These buttons let you select commands for edit-

ing entire tracks, or individual parts or regions.

Move the cursor to the desired menu and press

the [ENTER] key to display a list of the com-

mands for that menu.

F Parameter settings

This area displays the parameters needed to exe-

cute the editing command. The type of parame-

ters displayed here will differ depending on the

currently selected editing command.

All transport operations are disabled when the EDIT

menu is displayed.

Move the cursor to the TRACK menu, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The editing commands in the TRACK menu will

be listed.

Tip!

If you move the cursor to the TRACK menu displayed

at the top of the list and press the [ENTER] key, you

will return to the previous menu.

2 3 4

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

112

Chapter

Operation section

Move the cursor to the desired editing

command and press the [ENTER] key.

According to the editing command that you

selected, various buttons for setting the parame-

ters of that command will appear. Also, the

parameter setting area in the lower part of the

display will show the settings of the parameter

currently selected by the cursor. The following

illustration shows the example of when the

TRACK menu ERASE button is selected.

Tip!

If you want to change your selection of an editing

command, move the cursor to the highlighted editing

command button, and press the [ENTER] key.

To edit the parameter settings, move the

cursor to the corresponding button and

press the [ENTER] key.

When you move the cursor to a button, the lower

part of the display will show the setting values of

that parameter. If you now press the [ENTER] key,

the cursor will move to the parameter setting

area, and you can edit the setting.

Tip!

For some editing commands, you will set the FR.

TRACK and TO TRACK parameters to specify the edit

source and edit destination tracks.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to edit the param-

eter settings.

Tip!

Parameters that specify a track 1–16 can also be set

by using the REC TRACK SELECT [1]–[16] keys instead

of the [DATA/JOG] dial.

The way in which a value is edited will depend on the

type of command or parameter. In some cases you

will use a controller other than the [DATA/JOG] dial.

For details refer to page 118 ,“Editing commands.”

Press the [ENTER] key.

The parameter value will be ﬁnalized, and you

will return to step 3 (selecting the parameter).

Repeat steps 4–6 as necessary to edit other

parameters.

Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm execu-

tion of the editing operation.

To execute the operation, move the cursor

to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key.

The editing command you selected in step 3 will

be executed. When processing is completed, you

will return to step 1.

Tip!

To cancel execution, move the cursor to the OK but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key.

With the exception of the NAME command and

EXPORT command, you can press the [UNDO]

key immediately after execution to cancel the

result of the operation.

Parameter

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

113

Operation section

Editing by Part

Press the [EDIT] key → [F1] (TR Edit) key.

The EDIT screen TR Edit page will appear, where

you can perform track editing operations.

Move the cursor to the PART menu, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The editing commands of the PART menu will be

listed.

Move the cursor to the desired editing

command, and press the [ENTER] key.

According to the editing command you selected,

buttons to set the execution parameters will be

displayed. The parameter setting area in the

lower part of the screen will show the settings of

the parameter currently selected by the cursor.

Move the cursor to the TRACK parameter

button, and press the [ENTER] key.

The TRACK parameter speciﬁes the track (1–16)

that will be the object of the editing operation.

Move the cursor to the button and press the

[ENTER] key, and the cursor will move to the

parameter setting area.

Tip!

For some editing commands, you will set the FR.

TRACK and TO TRACK parameters to specify the edit

source and edit destination tracks.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the track,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The parameter setting will be ﬁnalized, and you

will return to step 4 (parameter selection).

Move the cursor to the START parameter

button, and press the [ENTER] key.

The START parameter speciﬁes the beginning of

the area (Part) that will be edited, and the END

parameter speciﬁes the end of the area. Move the

cursor to the button, and press the [ENTER] key

to move the cursor to the setting area for that

parameter.

In the case of a parameter that speciﬁes a location

within a song, the units used will depend on the cur-

rently selected counter display method (time/time

code/measures).

Parameter

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

114

Chapter

Operation section

If measures (MEASURE) are selected as the

counter display method, “beats” will be the

smallest unit by which an editing location can be

speciﬁed. However even in this case, you can

use the Wave Display window or markers and

locate points to specify the editing location in

more detail.

Tip!

For some editing commands, you will use the FR.

START and FR. END parameters to specify the edit

source area, and the TO START parameter to specify

the starting location of the edit destination.

Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys and the

[DATA/JOG] dial to edit the values of each

unit.

Tip!

• As necessary, the smallest unit of time changed by a

single click of the [DATA/JOG] dial can be changed

by the GRID setting in the UTILITY screen Prefer.2

page.

• If markers, A/B points, or In/Out points have been

set in the song, you can use the [ ]/[ ], [A]/[B],

and [IN]/[OUT] keys to set an editing location to the

location of the corresponding marker or locate

point.

Press the [ENTER] key.

The parameter setting will be ﬁnalized, and you

will return to step 4 (parameter selection).

Set the END parameter in the same way

that you set the START parameter.

In the same way, make settings for the other

parameters required by the command.

Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

editing operation.

To execute the editing operation, move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The editing command you selected in step 3 will

be executed. When processing is ﬁnished, you

will return to step 1.

Tip!

• To cancel, move the cursor to the CANCEL button

and press the [ENTER] key.

• With the exception of the EXPORT command, the

result of the operation can be undone by pressing

the [UNDO] key immediately after execution.

Editing by Region

Press the [EDIT] key → [F1] (TR Edit) key.

The EDIT screen TR Edit page will appear, where

you can perform track editing operations. For

details on the items displayed in this page, refer

to page 111 “Editing entire Tracks.”

Move the cursor to the REGION menu, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The editing commands of the REGION menu will

be listed.

Move the cursor to the desired editing

command, and press the [ENTER] key.

Buttons for setting the parameters of the selected

command will appear. The parameter setting area

in the lower part of the display will show the set-

tings of the parameter currently selected by the

cursor.

Parameter

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

115

Operation section

Tip!

If you want to select a different editing command,

move the cursor to the highlighted edit command but-

ton, and press the [ENTER] key.

Move the cursor to the REGION parameter

button, and press the [ENTER] key.

The parameter setting area will show the name of

the currently selected region, and the starting

location (FROM) and ending located (TO) of that

region.

Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys

to select the region that you want to edit.

Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to move between

tracks (1–16), and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ]

keys to select one of the regions included in that

track.

Press the [ENTER] key.

The region to be edited will be ﬁnalized, and you

will return to step 3 (parameter selection).

Repeat steps 4–6 as necessary to set the other

parameters in the same way.

Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm execu-

tion of the editing operation.

To execute, move the cursor to the OK

button and press the [ENTER] key.

The editing command selected in step 3 will be

executed. When processing is completed, you

will return to the state of step 1.

Tip!

• To cancel, move the cursor to the CANCEL button

and press the [ENTER] key.

• With the exception of the NAME command and the

EXPORT command, the result of the operation can

be undone by pressing the [UNDO] key immediately

after execution.

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

116

Chapter

Operation section

Editing the audio data of virtual tracks 1–8

This section explains how to use the V.TR Edit page to

edit the audio of virtual tracks 1–8 in units of entire

tracks, or in units of individual parts or regions.

With the exception that a virtual track 1–8 within the

speciﬁed track will be the object of operations, the

contents of the menus, editing commands, and

parameter settings are essentially the same as “Editing

the audio data of tracks 1-16,” P.111.

Press the [EDIT] key → [F2] (V.TR Edit) key.

The EDIT screen V.TR Edit page will appear,

where you can edit virtual tracks.

This page shows the following information.

1 Track number

This is the currently selected track number (1–

16). Your editing operations will affect the virtual

tracks 1–8 included in this track. If virtual tracks

are paired, this will be indicated by a heart sym-

bol.

B Virtual track numbers

This area lists the virtual track numbers 1–8. The

“C” character displayed at the left indicates the

virtual track that is currently selected for the track

C Track names

These are the names assigned to virtual tracks 1–

D Track view

For each virtual track 1–8, a bar graph indicates

the presence of audio data. Vertical lines within

this area indicate the speciﬁed editing area or

editing destination. The symbols displayed below

this area indicate locate points or markers that

have been set at the corresponding locations.

E TRACK/PART/REGION menus

These menus access the editing commands for

tracks, parts, and regions.

F Parameter setting area

In this area you can set the parameters necessary

to execute the editing command.

Move the cursor to the track number area,

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select a

track (1–16).

When you switch tracks, the track names of vir-

tual tracks 1–8 and the track view area will

change accordingly.

Tip!

You can also use the REC TRACK SELECT [1]–[16]

keys to select a track 1–16.

According to the smallest unit that you

want to edit (the entire virtual track, part,

or region), move the cursor to either the

TRACK, PART, or REGION menu, and press

the [ENTER] key.

The editing command menu will appear.

Move the cursor to the desired editing

command, and press the [ENTER] key.

According to the editing command you selected,

buttons for the parameters of that command will

appear. The parameter area in the lower part of

the display will show the settings of the parame-

ter currently selected by the cursor.

To edit the setting of a parameter, move

the cursor to the corresponding button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The cursor will move to the setting area in the

lower part of the display.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to edit the value

of the parameter, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The cursor will return to the location of the but-

ton in step 4.

Repeat steps 4–6 to make settings for the

other parameters.

To execute the editing command, move

the cursor to the EXECUTE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm execu-

tion of the editing command.

As an exception, the NAME commands of the TRACK

menu and REGION menu do not require the EXE-

CUTE button to be used.

12 3 4

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

117

Operation section

To execute the editing command, move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The editing command you selected in step 4 will

be executed. When processing is completed, you

will return to the state of step 1.

Tip!

• To cancel, move the cursor to the CANCEL button

and press the [ENTER] key.

• With the exception of the NAME commands of the

TRACK/REGION menus and the EXPORT commands

of the TRACK/PART/REGION menus, the result of

the operation can be undone by pressing the

[UNDO] key immediately after execution.

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

118

Chapter

Operation section

Editing commands

This section describes the editing commands of the

TRACK/PART/REGION menus of the TR Edit and V.TR

Edit pages.

• All of the editing commands available in the TR Edit

page and V.TR Edit page are the same. However,

some parameters or values cannot be selected in the

V.TR Edit page.

• Some editing commands require substantial time for

processing. None of the commands can be cancelled

while processing is taking place.

• Never turn off the power of the AW2816 while an

editing command is being processed (in particular

while the access indicator is blinking). Doing so can

damage the internal hard disk, and cause all data to

be lost forever.

Commands and parameters of

the TRACK menu

The TRACK menu contains commands that edit all

audio in an entire track at once. The following pages

describe the commands and parameters that can be

selected from the TRACK menu.

Settings/parameters marked by an asterisk (*) cannot

be selected in the V.TR Edit page.

●NAME

Edit the name (track name) of the speciﬁed track.

• TRACK

Select the track whose name you want to edit.

• NAME

Access the NAME EDIT popup window in which

you can input the new name. Input the name in

the popup window, move the cursor to the OK

button and press the [ENTER] key to ﬁnalize the

new name. If paired tracks are selected, ﬁnaliz-

ing the name of the odd-numbered track will dis-

play a popup window allowing you to set the

name of the even-numbered track.

Tip!

• Once recording is performed, that virtual track is

automatically assigned a default name of “V.Tr x-y”

(x= track number 1–16, y= virtual track number 1–

8). If an editing command is used to erase all audio

data of a track, the track name will return to “-NO

REC-”.

• It is not possible to edit a track name that is dis-

played as “-NO REC-”.

●ERASE

Erase all audio data from the speciﬁed track.

• TRACK

Select the track that you want to erase. If you

select “AL” (*) as the setting, all virtual tracks cur-

rently selected for tracks 1–16 will be selected

for erasure.

• ALL V.TR (All virtual tracks) (*)

Specify whether you want to erase all virtual

tracks included in the track (Yes) or only the vir-

tual track currently selected for the track (No).

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

●COPY

Copy the audio data from the speciﬁed track to

another track.

• FR.TRACK (From track)

Select the copy source track.

• TO TRACK

Select the copy destination track.

• ALL V.TR (All virtual tracks) (*)

Specify whether you want to copy all virtual

tracks included in the copy source track (Yes) or

only the currently selected virtual track (No).

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

When you execute the Copy command, the entire

copy destination track will be erased, and replaced by

the contents of the copy source.

Tip!

If you copy from one of two paired tracks, the copy

destination track will automatically be paired. If you

copy from one track to a paired track, the same audio

data will be copied to both of the paired tracks.

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

119

Operation section

●EXCHANGE

Exchange the audio data of two tracks.

• FR.TRACK (From track)

• TO TRACK

Select the two tracks that will be exchanged. An

unrecorded track can be selected for the TO

TRACK alone.

• ALL V.TR (All virtual tracks) (*)

Specify whether all virtual tracks of the two

tracks will be exchanged (Yes) or only the cur-

rently selected virtual track will be exchanged

(No).

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

Tip!

If a paired track is selected for either the FR.TRACK or

TO TRACK parameter, the command will be executed

with the assumption that the other track is also a

paired track.

●SLIP

Move all audio data of the speciﬁed track forward or

backward.

• TRACK

Select the track that will be moved. If you select

“AL” (*) all virtual tracks currently selected for

tracks 1–16 will be moved.

• ALL V.TR (All virtual tracks) (*)

Specify whether all virtual tracks of the track will

be moved (Yes) or only the virtual track currently

selected for the track will be moved (No).

• SLIP

Specify the distance of movement in the range of

±5 hours. (The smallest settable unit will depend

on the currently selected counter display

method.) When moving in the negative direction,

it is not possible to set this parameter so that the

beginning of a region would move earlier than

absolute time zero.

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

●T-COMP (Time compression/expansion)

Expand or compress the length of the entire speciﬁed

track without affecting its pitch.

• TRACK

Select the track that you want to expand or com-

press.

• RATIO

Specify the ratio of expansion/compression in

0.01% units, over a range of 50–200%.

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

• Execution of the T-COMP command will require

more processing time than the actual time length of

the data being processed. Also, it is not possible to

cancel the command while processing is occurring.

• If multiple regions existed in the track, they will be

combined into a single region as a result of execut-

ing this command.

T-COMP

RATIO=50%

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 ABC

A B C

T-COMP

RATIO=150%

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 A B C

A B C

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

120

Chapter

Operation section

●PITCH

Raise or lower the pitch of the entire speciﬁed track

without affecting the length of the audio.

• TRACK

Select the track whose pitch you want to change.

• PITCH

Specify the amount of pitch change in semitone

steps, over a range of ±12 semitones.

• FINE

Specify a ﬁne adjustment in one-cent units to the

pitch change, over a range of ±50 cents.

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

• Execution of the PITCH command will require more

processing time than the actual time length of the

data being processed. Also, it is not possible to can-

cel the command while processing is occurring.

• If multiple regions existed in a track, they will be

combined into a single region as a result of execut-

ing this command.

●APPEND

Combine the multiple regions within the speciﬁed

track into a single region. Gaps between regions will

be converted to silent audio data.

• TRACK

Select the track whose regions you want to com-

bine.

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

Execution of the APPEND command will require more

processing time than the actual time length of the

data being processed. Also, it is not possible to cancel

the command while processing is occurring.

●EXPORT

Convert the audio data of the speciﬁed track into a

WAV ﬁle, and write it to a CD-RW drive, MO drive, or

similar device.

• TRACK

Select the track that you want to write as a WAV

ﬁle. If you select a track 1–16 for this setting, a

monaural WAV ﬁle for the corresponding track (a

stereo WAV ﬁles if the track is paired) will be

written. If you select “AL” (*), monaural WAV

ﬁles for all tracks 1–16 (stereo WAV ﬁles for

paired tracks) will be written. However, tracks

that do not contain a region will not be written.

• TO DRIVE

Switch to a screen where you can select the writ-

ing destination drive. In that screen, use the

DRIVE area to select the drive, move the cursor

to the EXIT button, and press the [ENTER] key to

return to the previous screen.

• TO FILE

Access a NAME EDIT popup window to edit the

ﬁlename of the WAV ﬁle. (If you select “AL” as

the setting of the TRACK parameter, it will not be

possible to edit the ﬁlename.) Input the new ﬁle-

name, move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key to ﬁnalize it.

• TO SIZE

When writing 24 bit audio data to a WAV ﬁle,

you can select whether it will be written as 24 bit

data (24 bit) or whether the lower 8 bits will be

discarded, converting the data to 16 bit (16 bit).

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

• If you select “AL” for the TRACK parameter, it will

not be possible to select CD-RW for the TO DRIVE

parameter.

• Execution of the EXPORT command will require

more processing time than the actual time length of

the data being processed. Also, it is not possible to

cancel the command while processing is occurring.

Tip!

• For details on using the EXPORT command, refer to

page 167.

• With the exception of the NAME and EXPORT com-

mands of the TRACK menu, the result of the opera-

tion can be undone by pressing the [UNDO] key

immediately after execution.

• When selecting the track for the TRACK/FR.TRACK/

TO TRACK parameters, you can also use the REC

TRACK SELECT [1]–[16] keys to specify the track

number.

1 2 3 4 5 A B C

APPEND

1 2 3 4 5 A B C

EXPORT

Length of the WAV file that is actually written

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

121

Operation section

Commands and parameters of

the PART menu

The PART menu contains commands that edit the

desired area (Part) of audio in the selected track. The

following pages describe the commands and parame-

ters that can be selected from the PART menu.

Settings/parameters marked by an asterisk (*) cannot

be selected in the V.TR Edit page.

●ERASE

Erase all audio data from the speciﬁed part. If all

audio data of the track is erased, the track name will

change to “-NO REC-”.

• TRACK

Select the track from which you want to erase

audio data. If you select “AL” (*) as the setting, all

virtual tracks currently selected for tracks 1–16

will be selected for erasure.

• ALL V.TR (All virtual tracks) (*)

Specify whether you want to erase data from all

virtual tracks included in the track (Yes) or only

the virtual track currently selected for the track

(No).

• START

Specify the beginning of the part that you want to

erase.

• END

Specify the end of the part that you want to erase.

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

●DELETE

Delete all audio data from the speciﬁed part. Any

existing audio data later than the deleted data will be

moved forward according to the length of the deleted

part.

• TRACK

Select the track from which you want to delete

audio data. If you select “AL” (*) as the setting, all

virtual tracks currently selected for tracks 1–16

will be selected for deletion.

• ALL V.TR (All virtual tracks) (*)

Specify whether you want to delete data from all

virtual tracks included in the track (Yes) or only

the virtual track currently selected for the track

(No).

• START

Specify the beginning of the part that you want to

delete.

• END

Specify the end of the part that you want to

delete.

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

●COPY

Copy the audio data of the speciﬁed part to the speci-

ﬁed location of the speciﬁed track.

• FR.TRACK (From track)

Select the copy source track.

• FR.START (From start)

Specify the beginning of the copy source part.

• FR.END (From end)

Specify the end of the copy source part.

• ALL V.TR (All virtual tracks) (*)

Specify whether you want to copy all virtual

tracks included in the copy source track (Yes) or

only the virtual track currently selected for that

track (No).

• TO TRACK

Specify the copy destination track.

• TO START

Specify the beginning of the copy destination.

• TIMES

Specify the number of times (1–99) that the data

will be copied.

1 2 3 4 5 A B C

ERASE

START END

1 2 3 4 5 A B C

1 4 5 4 5

DELETE

START END

1 2 3 4 5 A B C

A B C

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

122

Chapter

Operation section

• INTERVAL

If the TIMES parameter is set to 2 or more, specify

the spacing between the start locations of each

copy. This cannot be set to a time that is shorter

than the length of the speciﬁed part.

• INSERT

Specify whether the copied audio data will be

inserted into the copy destination track (Insert) or

overwritten (Overwrite).

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

Tip!

If you copy from a paired track to an unpaired track,

the copy destination track will automatically be

paired. If you copy from an unpaired track to a paired

track, the same audio data will be copied to both of

the paired tracks.

●MOVE

Move the audio data of the speciﬁed part to the speci-

ﬁed location of the speciﬁed track. At this time, the

audio data at the move destination will be erased.

• FR.TRACK (From track)

Select the move source track.

• FR.START (From start)

Specify the start location of the part that will be

moved.

• FR.END (From end)

Specify the end location of the part that will be

moved.

• ALL V.TR (All virtual tracks) (*)

Specify whether all virtual tracks included in the

track will be moved (Yes), or whether only the

virtual track currently selected for the track will

be moved (No).

• TO TRACK

Select the move destination track.

• TO START

Select the start location of the move destination.

• INSERT

Specify whether the audio data will be inserted

into the move destination track (Insert) or over-

written (OverWrite).

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

Tip!

If you move from a paired track to an unpaired track,

the move destination track will automatically be

paired. If you move from an unpaired track to a

paired track, only the odd-numbered track will be the

move destination.

COPY

FR.START FR.END

TO START

A B C D E F

Copy source track

(FR.TRACK)

Copy destination track

(TO TRACK)

1 2 3 4 5 6

Copy destination track

after execution

INTERVAL

Copy destination track

after execution

Copy destination track

after execution

INSERT=

Insert

INSERT=

OverWrite

TIME= 2

A B 2 3 4 C D E F

A B 2 3 4

A B 2 3 4 F

2 3 4

MOVE

FR.START FR.END

TO START

A B C D E F

Move source track

(FR.TRACK)

Move destination track

(TO TRACK)

1 2 3 4 5 6

Move destination track

after execution

Move destination track

after execution

INSERT=

Insert

INSERT=

OverWrite

A B 2 3 4 C D E F

A B 2 3 4 F

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

123

Operation section

●INSERT

Insert silence into the speciﬁed part. Subsequent

audio data will be moved backward according to the

length of the silent data that was inserted.

• TRACK

Select the track into which silence will be

inserted. If you select “AL” (*) for this setting,

silence will be inserted into all virtual tracks cur-

rently selected for tracks 1–16.

• START

Specify the starting location of the part into

which silence will be inserted.

• END

Specify the ending location of the part into which

silence will be inserted.

• ALL V.TR (All virtual tracks) (*)

Select whether silence will be inserted into all

virtual tracks included in the track (Yes), or only

into the virtual track currently selected for the

track (No).

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

●T-COMP (Time compression/expansion

Expand or compress the length of the speciﬁed part

without affecting its pitch.

• TRACK

Select the track in which you want to expand or

compress the length.

• START

Specify the starting location of the part to be

expanded/compressed.

• END

Specify the ending location of the part to be

expanded/compressed.

• RATIO

Specify the ratio of expansion/compression in

0.01% units, over a range of 50–200%.

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

• Execution of the T-COMP command will require

more processing time than the actual time length of

the data being processed. Also, it is not possible to

cancel the command while processing is occurring.

• If multiple regions existed in the speciﬁed part, they

will be combined into a single region as a result of

executing this command. If there are gaps between

regions, they will be converted into silent audio

data.

●PITCH

Raise or lower the pitch of the speciﬁed part without

affecting the length of the audio.

• TRACK

Select the track that contains the part whose

pitch you want to change.

• START

Specify the starting location of the part whose

pitch will be changed.

• END

Specify the ending location of the part whose

pitch will be changed.

• PITCH

Specify the amount of pitch change in semitone

steps, over a range of ±12 semitones.

• FINE

Specify a ﬁne adjustment in one-cent units to the

pitch change, over a range of ±50 cents.

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

• Execution of the PITCH command will require more

processing time than the actual time length of the

data being processed. Also, it is not possible to can-

cel the command while processing is occurring.

• If multiple regions existed in the speciﬁed part, they

will be combined into a single region as a result of

executing this command. If there are gaps between

regions, they will be converted into silent audio

data.

1 2 3 2 3 4 5

A B C

INSERT

START END

1 2 3 4 5 A B C

START END

1 2 3 4 5 A B C

A B C

T-COMP

RATIO=50%

2 3 4 5

START END

1 2 3 4 5

A B C

B C

T-COMP

RATIO=150%

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

124

Chapter

Operation section

●APPEND

Combine the multiple regions within the speciﬁed

part into a single region. Gaps between regions will

be converted to silent audio data.

• TRACK

Select the track containing the regions you want

to combine.

• START

Specify the starting location of the part in which

regions will be combined.

• END

Specify the ending location of the part in which

regions will be combined.

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

Execution of the APPEND command will require more

processing time than the actual time length of the

data being processed. Also, it is not possible to cancel

the command while processing is occurring.

●EXPORT

Convert the audio data of the speciﬁed part into a

WAV ﬁle, and write it to a CD-RW drive, external MO

drive, or other device.

• TRACK

Select the track from which you want to write a

WAV ﬁle. If you select a track 1–16 for this set-

ting, a monaural WAV ﬁle will be written from

the corresponding track (a stereo WAV ﬁles if the

track is paired) will be written. If you select “AL”

(*), monaural WAV ﬁles for all tracks 1–16 (stereo

WAV ﬁles for paired tracks) will be written. How-

ever, tracks that do not contain a region will not

be written.

• START

Specify the starting location of the part that will

be written as a WAV ﬁle.

• END

Specify the ending location of the part that will

be written as a WAV ﬁle.

• TO DRIVE

Switch to a screen where you can select the writ-

ing destination drive. In that screen, use the

DRIVE area to select the drive, move the cursor

to the EXIT button, and press the [ENTER] key to

return to the previous screen.

• TO FILE

Access a NAME EDIT popup window to edit the

ﬁlename of the WAV ﬁle. (If you select “AL” as

the setting of the TRACK parameter, it will not be

possible to edit the ﬁlename.) Input the new ﬁle-

name, move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key to ﬁnalize it.

• TO SIZE

When writing 24 bit audio data to a WAV ﬁle,

you can select whether it will be written as 24 bit

data (24 bit) or whether the lower 8 bits will be

discarded, converting the data to 16 bit (16 bit).

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

• If you select “AL” for the TRACK parameter, it will

not be possible to select CD-RW for the TO DRIVE

parameter.

• Execution of the EXPORT command will require

more processing time than the actual time length of

the data being processed. Also, it is not possible to

cancel the command while processing is occurring.

Tip!

• For details on using the EXPORT command, refer to

page 167.

• With the exception of the EXPORT command of the

PART menu, the result of the operation can be

undone by pressing the [UNDO] key immediately

after execution.

• When selecting the track for the TRACK/FR.TRACK/

TO TRACK parameters, you can also use the REC

TRACK SELECT [1]–[16] keys to specify the track

number.

• To specify a location for the START or END parame-

ter, you can use the [ ]/[ ] keys, [IN]/[OUT]

keys, [A]/[B] keys, [ ]/[ ] keys, or [RTZ] key

to assign the parameter to the location of the corre-

sponding marker or locate point.

APPEND

START END

1 2 3 4 A B C

EXPORT

START END

1 2 3 4 A B C

Length of the WAV file that is actually written

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

125

Operation section

Commands and parameters of

the REGION menu

The REGION menu contains commands that edit the

desired region (continuous audio data that was

recorded in one operation) of audio. The following

pages describe the commands and parameters that

can be selected from the REGION menu.

Settings/parameters marked by an asterisk (*) cannot

be selected in the V.TR Edit page.

●NAME

Edit the name (region name) of the region.

• REGION

Select the region whose name you want to edit.

• NAME

Access a NAME EDIT popup window where you

can input the new name. Input the name in the

popup window, move the cursor to the OK but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key to ﬁnalize the new

name.

Tip!

• Regions created during recording will automatically

be given a default name of “VTxy (x= track number

1–16, y= virtual track number 1–8).

• Regardless of the track/part/region unit, the region

name will be copied whenever audio data is copied.

●ERASE

The selected region will be erased. If all regions in a

track are erased, the track name will change to “-NO

REC-”.

• REGION

Select the region that you want to erase.

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

●DELETE

The selected region will be deleted. Subsequent audio

data will be moved forward according to the length of

the deleted region. If all regions in a track are deleted,

the track name will change to “-NO REC-”.

• REGION

Select the region that you want to delete.

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

●COPY

Copy the selected region to the speciﬁed location of

the speciﬁed track.

• REGION

Select the region that you want to copy.

• TO TRACK

Select the copy destination track.

• TO START

Specify the starting time of the copy destination.

• TIMES

Specify the number of times (1–99) that the data

will be copied.

• INTERVAL

If you set the TIMES parameter to 2 or higher to

make multiple copies, specify the spacing of the

copy start locations. It is not possible to set this

shorter than the length of the selected region.

• INSERT

Select whether the copied audio data will be

inserted into the copy destination track (Insert) or

overwritten (OverWrite).

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

●MOVE

Copy the selected region to the speciﬁed location of

the destination track. At this time, the move source

region will be erased.

• REGION

Select the region that you want to move.

• TO TRACK

Select the move destination track.

• TO START

Specify the starting time of the move destination.

• INSERT

Select whether the region will be inserted into

the move destination track (Insert) or overwritten

(OverWrite).

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

●DIVIDE

Divide the selected region into two regions at the

desired location.

• REGION

Select the region that you want to divide.

• DIVIDE

Specify the location at which you want to divide

the region.

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

Editing tracks and virtual tracks

126

Chapter

Operation section

●TRIM IN

Move the starting location of the selected region later

in time (toward the end of the song), and trim (discard)

the unwanted portion.

• REGION

Select the region that you want to trim.

• TRIM IN

Specify the amount of trimming in sample units.

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

●TRIM OUT

Move the ending location of the selected region ear-

lier in time (toward the beginning of the song), and

trim (discard) the unwanted portion.

• REGION

Select the region that you want to trim.

• TRIM OUT

Specify the amount of trimming in sample units.

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

●T-COMP (Time compression/expansion)

Expand or compress the length of the selected region

without affecting its pitch.

• REGION

Select the region that you want to expand or

compress.

• RATIO

Specify the ratio of expansion/compression in

0.01% units, over a range of 50–200%.

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

Execution of the T-COMP command will require more

processing time than the actual time length of the

data being processed. Also, it is not possible to cancel

the command while processing is occurring.

●PITCH

Raise or lower the pitch of the selected region without

affecting the length of the audio.

• REGION

Select the region whose pitch you want to

change.

• PITCH

Specify the amount of pitch change in semitone

steps, over a range of ±12 semitones.

• FINE

Specify a ﬁne adjustment in one-cent units to the

pitch change, over a range of ±50 cents.

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

Execution of the PITCH command will require more

processing time than the actual time length of the

data being processed. Also, it is not possible to cancel

the command while processing is occurring.

●EXPORT

Convert the audio data of the speciﬁed region into a

WAV ﬁle, and write it to a CD-RW drive, external MO

drive, or similar device.

• REGION

Select the region that you want to write as a WAV

ﬁle.

• TO DRIVE

Switch to a screen where you can select the writ-

ing destination drive. In that screen, use the

DRIVE area to select the drive, move the cursor

to the EXIT button, and press the [ENTER] key to

return to the previous screen.

• TO FILE

Access a NAME EDIT popup window to edit the

ﬁlename of the WAV ﬁle. Input the new ﬁle-

name, move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key to ﬁnalize it.

• TO SIZE

When writing 24 bit audio data to a WAV ﬁle,

you can select whether it will be written as 24 bit

data (24 bit) or whether the lower 8 bits will be

discarded, converting the data to 16 bit (16 bit).

• EXECUTE

Execute the command.

Tip!

• For details on using the EXPORT command, refer to

page 167.

• With the exception of the NAME and EXPORT com-

mands of the REGION menu, the result of the oper-

ation can be undone by pressing the [UNDO] key

immediately after execution.

• To specify a location for the TO START parameter,

you can use the [ ]/[ ] keys, [IN]/[OUT] keys,

[A]/[B] keys, [ ]/[ ] keys, or [RTZ] key to

assign the parameter to the location of the corre-

sponding marker or locate point.

Scene memory operations

127

Chapter

Operation section

Scene memory operations

This chapter explains scene memory functions and operation.

About scene memories

On the AW2816, the mix parameters of each channel,

the input patch and output patch settings, parameters

for effects 1/2, and various other settings can be col-

lectively assigned a name and stored in internal mem-

ory as a “scene.”

The memory area in which scenes are stored is called

“scene memory.” Scene memory lets you store up to

96 different scenes, and you can recall a desired

scene at any time by operations in the screen or by

key operations. The scene memory contents are saved

on the hard disk as part of the song.

Tip!

You can use automix (

→

P.133) to recall a scene, or

send program changes from an external device to

recall scenes on the AW2816 (

→

P.200).

Parameters included in a scene

The following parameters are included in a scene.

About scene numbers

There are 97 scene numbers, 00–96. Scenes can be

stored in numbers 01–96. Scene number 00 is recall-

only, and contains a preset scene used to restore the

parameters to their default setting.

The currently-recalled scene number is always dis-

played in the SCENE area of the screen. When you

operate the keys of the SCENE MEMORY section, the

scene number of the currently-operated scene will be

displayed brieﬂy at the right of the SCENE area.

If an “E” character is displayed at the right of the scene

number, this means that the current scene has been

edited since it was last recalled or stored.

Tip!

• The length of time that the scene name is displayed

at the right of the SCENE area can be adjusted if

desired. To do this, access the UTILITY screen/Pre-

fer.1 page ([UTILITY] key

→

[F2] key), and change

the value of the SCENE NAME DISPLAY TIME set-

ting (1–9 seconds).

• You can also make settings so that the scene name is

not displayed when you operate the keys of the

SCENE MEMORY section. To do this, access the

UTILITY screen Prefer.1 page ([UTILITY] key

→

[F2]

key), and turn the AUTO SCENE NAME DISPLAY

setting OFF.

Mix parame-

ters

Fader positions of all channels

Send levels from each channel to AUX

buses 1–6

Master levels of AUX buses 1–6 and

buses 1–8

[ON] key settings of all channels

Attenuation settings of all channels

Phase settings of all channels

EQ settings of all channels

Pan settings of all channels

Routing settings of all channels

Fader group and mute group settings of

all channels

Pairing settings of all channels

Dynamics settings of all channels

Delay settings of all channels

Effect parame-

ters

Parameter settings for effects 1/2

MIDI remote

Status of Remote A–D faders (1–8) and

[ON] keys (1–8)

Other

Scene name

Settings of the SCENE screen/Fade Time

page

Settings of the PATCH screen/Patch In/

Patch Out pages

Insert effect settings of each channel

Scene memory operations

128

Chapter

Operation section

Storing a scene

You can assign a name to the current settings and

store them in scene memory. A scene can be stored

either by operations in the screen, or by operating the

keys of the top panel.

Storing a scene by operations in

the screen

Press the [SCENE] key → [F1] key.

The SCENE screen/Scene Mem page will appear,

in which you can manage scene memories.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the store

destination scene number (01–96).

The row enclosed by the dotted line is the cur-

rently selected scene.

Tip!

• The scene number can also be selected by using the

[ ]/[ ] keys of the SCENE MEMORY section.

• Scene number 00 is recall-only. It is not possible to

store to this number.

Move the cursor to the STORE button, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear,

allowing you to input the scene name.

As necessary, use the character palette to

input a scene name.

For details on inputting characters, refer to

page 37.

To store the scene, move the cursor to the

OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

To cancel without storing, move the cursor to the

CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

If you store to a number in which a scene has already

been stored, the previous scene will be erased.

Tip!

• It is also possible to store the scene directly, without

inputting the scene name. To do this, access the

UTILITY screen/Prefer.1 page ([UTILITY] key

→

[F2]

key), and turn the STORE CONFIRMATION setting

OFF.

• You can protect a scene number to prevent it from

being accidentally erased (

→

P.131).

Storing a scene by key operations

Use the SCENE MEMORY section [ ]/[ ]

keys to select the store destination scene

number.

The currently selected scene number will be dis-

played in the SCENE area in the upper part of the

screen.

Press the [STORE] key.

The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear,

allowing you to input the scene name.

As necessary, use the character palette to

input a scene name.

To store the scene, move the cursor to the

OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

129

Scene memory operations

Operation section

Recalling a scene

Here’s how you can recall a scene from scene mem-

ory. The recall operation can be performed from the

screen or by using the keys of the top panel.

When you recall a scene, the current scene will be

discarded. If you will want to reuse the current scene

later, store it in scene memory before recalling

another scene.

Recalling a scene by operations

in the screen

Press the [SCENE] key → [F1] key.

The SCENE screen/Scene Mem page will appear.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene

number that you want to recall.

The row enclosed by the dotted line is the cur-

rently selected scene number.

Move the cursor to the RECALL button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

scene recall operation.

Tip!

You can also execute the recall operation directly,

without displaying this popup window. To do this,

access the UTILITY screen/Prefer.1 page ([UTILITY]

key

→

[F2] key), and turn the RECALL CONFIRMA-

TION setting OFF.

To execute the recall, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

To cancel without recalling, move the cursor to

the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

Tip!

• The time (fade time) over which the faders reach

their new locations when a scene is recalled can be

adjusted. To do this, access the SCENE screen/Fade

Time page ([SCENE] key

→

[F2] key), and set the

fade time for each fader (

→

P.348).

• If necessary, you can exclude speciﬁc faders from

recall operations. These settings are made in the

SCENE screen/RCL.Safe page ([SCENE] key

→

[F3]

key) (

→

P.349).

Recalling a scene by key opera-

tions

Use the SCENE MEMORY section [ ]/[ ]

keys to select the scene number that you

want to recall.

The SCENE area will display the currently

selected scene number. If a scene number other

than the current scene is selected, the scene

number will blink.

Press the [RECALL] key.

A popup window will appear, asking you to con-

ﬁrm the recall operation.

To execute the recall, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

The scene of the selected scene number will be

recalled.

Tip!

In the same way as when using the screen to recall a

scene, you can make settings so that the recall occurs

directly, without displaying the popup window.

Scene memory operations

130

Chapter

Operation section

Editing the name of a scene

Here’s how you can edit just the scene name of a

scene stored in memory.

Press the [SCENE] key → [F1] key.

The SCENE screen/Scene Mem page will appear.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene

number whose scene name you want to

edit.

It is not possible to edit the scene name of a number

in which no scene has been stored, a scene number

that is protected, or scene number 00.

Move the cursor to the TITLE EDIT button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear.

Use the character palette to input the

desired scene name.

To conﬁrm the new scene name, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

To cancel without changing the scene name,

move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press

the [ENTER] key.

131

Scene memory operations

Operation section

Protecting a scene

For each scene number, you can set the Protect setting

to prevent a stored scene from being accidentally

erased. Scenes for which Protect is turned on can only

be recalled.

Press the [SCENE] key → [F1] key.

The SCENE screen/Scene Mem page will appear.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene

number that you want to protect.

Tip!

You can also use the SCENE MEMORY section [ ]/

[ ] keys to select the scene number.

It is not possible to make Protect settings for a num-

ber in which a scene has not been stored, or for scene

number 00.

Move the cursor to the OFF button in the

PROTECTION area, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The button will change from OFF to ON, and

protection will be turned on for the selected

scene. Protected scenes will be indicated by a

symbol displayed in the PRT column of the list.

To defeat protection, move the cursor to

the ON button in the PROTECTION area,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The button will change from ON to OFF, and

protection will be defeated.

You can use the buttons of the PROTECTION

ON/OFF GLOBAL area to turn protection on/off

for a entire group of scenes.

• SCENE 01–50 ON/OFF buttons

These buttons turn protection on/off for scene

numbers 01–50.

• SCENE 51–96 ON/OFF buttons

These buttons turn protection on/off for scene

numbers 51–96.

Scene memory operations

132

Chapter

Operation section

Changing the order of scenes

A scene saved in scene numbers 01–96 can be moved

to another number.

Press the [SCENE] key → [F4] key.

The SCENE screen/Sort page will appear, in

which you can change the order of scenes. In the

SOURCE area at the left, you will select the

scene number that you want to move. Then in the

DESTINATION area at the right, you will select

the location into which the selected scene will

be inserted.

Move the cursor to the SOURCE area, and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene

whose order you want to change.

The row enclosed by the dotted line is the

selected scene.

Move the cursor to the DESTINATION area,

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

location at which the scene will be

inserted.

The list in the DESTINATION area will scroll, and

the insertion location will move.

To execute the change in order, move the

cursor to the EXECUTE button and press

the [ENTER] key.

The selected scene will move to the new loca-

tion, and the other scene numbers will change

accordingly.

133

Chapter

Using automix

Operation section

Using automix

This chapter explains the functions and operation of Automix, which

automates realtime mixing operations.

About automix

What is automix?

On the AW2816, operations of mixing parameters can

be recorded in realtime, and then played back. This

capability is called “automix.” Scene recall opera-

tions, channel fader movements, and [ON] key opera-

tions etc. can be recorded in automix as the song

progresses, allowing the mixdown to be completely

automated.

The currently-operated automix is called the “current

automix.” The contents of the current automix can be

stored in one of sixteen special memory areas, and

recalled at any time. Data for the sixteen automixes in

memory is saved on the hard disk as part of the cur-

rently-selected song (the “current song”).

What can be recorded in auto-

mix?

The following operations can be recorded in automix.

• Fader operations of each channel (including

operations of the [RTN 1]/[RTN 2] controls)

• AUX send operations of each channel

• [ON] key operations of each channel

• Pan operations of each channel

• EQ operations of each channel

• Scene memory and library recall operations

• REMOTE screen fader 1–8 and [ON] key opera-

tions

While the song plays back, the above operations can

be recorded on the automix in realtime, or you can

partially re-record speciﬁc operations by themselves.

When automix is stopped, you can also edit the tim-

ing and values of individual recorded data events.

How the automix is related to the

song

In general, automix operation is linked with the song.

When you play back the song, the automix will also

begin playing or recording, and when you stop the

song, the automix will also stop. Although it is possi-

ble to stop only the automix while the song is playing,

it is not possible to record or play back the automix

while the song is stopped.

Automix always begins at the Start Point of the song

(the absolute time zero location). For this reason if you

change the start point, the starting location of automix

will change accordingly. If you want to change the

start point, you should make this change before you

record the automix.

Be aware that if you change the start point, automix

cannot be recorded in the area earlier than the start

point (absolute time zero).

00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00

00:00:00:000 00:00:05:000

00:00:10:00.00

00:00:10:000

Start point = 00:00:00:00.00

Automix

Start point = 00:00:05:00.00

00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00

–00:00:05:000 00:00:00:000

00:00:10:00.00

00:00:05:000

Time display

(ABS)

Time code

display (ABS)

Song

Time display

(ABS)

Time code

display (ABS)

Song

Using automix

134

Chapter

Operation section

Creating a new automix

When you want to record automix for the ﬁrst time,

you must start by creating a new automix.

While playing back the beginning of the

song, make settings for the channel faders,

pan, EQ, and effect send/return, and store

them in a scene memory.

The scene you save will be the starting point for

automix recording. Alternatively, if you want a

previously-saved scene to be the starting point

for automix, recall that scene.

Press the [AUTOMIX] key → [F1] key

The following screen will appear.

Move the cursor to the NEW MIX button

located in the center of the display, and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm that

you want to create a new automix.

When a new automix is created, the contents of the

current automix will be erased. If you want to save the

contents of the current automix, refer to page 145

“Storing an automix.”

Move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A new automix will be created.

Press the [F4] key.

The screen will show the Event List page, where

you can edit the events recorded in the current

automix.

Move the cursor to the SCENE/LIB button

in the upper left of the display, and press

the [ENTER] key.

When the SCENE/LIB button is turned on, opera-

tions in the current automix that recall scenes

and various libraries will appear in the list

located in the center of the display. The TIME

area of the list indicates the absolute time at

which a recall operation will be executed, and

the EVENT area indicates the type of event that

will be recalled.

In this example, notice that data for the scene

number you selected in step 1 has been written

at the TIME area “00:00:00.000” location. When

you create a new automix, an event that recalls

the current scene (the most recently recalled or

stored scene) will be written at this location. You

are free to change this scene number or its time

location later if desired.

Using automix

135

Operation section

Recording and playing an automix

This section explains how fader operations for moni-

tor channels 1–8 can be recorded in the automix and

played back.

Recording fader operations in

the automix

Locate the song to a location slightly earlier

than the point where you want to begin

recording automix.

Press the [AUTOMIX] key → [F1] key.

The AUTOMIX screen/Main page will appear.

Automix recording and playback is performed

mainly in this page.

Tip!

When you press the [AUTOMIX] key to switch to the

AUTOMIX screen, the [HOME] key of the FADER

MODE section will automatically be turned on.

Move the cursor to the DISABLE button of

the AUTOMIX area, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The button in the AUTOMIX area enables or dis-

ables the automix. When you move the cursor to

the button indicating DISABLE and press the

[ENTER] key, the button will change to

“ENABLE,” and the automix function will be

enabled. While automix is enabled, the top panel

[AUTOMIX] key will light (or blink).

Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE area.

Turn the FADER button on, and the other

buttons (CH ON, PAN, EQ) off.

The FADER, CH ON, PAN, and EQ buttons in the

OVERWRITE area select the events that will be

recorded in the automix. When a button is on

(highlighted), the corresponding type of events

will be recorded in the automix. Each button cor-

responds to the following events.

• FADER..........Fader operations of each channel

(1–8/STEREO), and operations of

the [RTN 1]/[RTN 2] controls

• CH ON ........[ON] key operations of each

channel (1–8/STEREO/RTN 1/

RTN 2)

• PAN ............. Pan operations of each channel

• EQ................ EQ operations of each channel

Tip!

• Recall operations for scene memories and the vari-

ous libraries can be recorded in automix regardless

of the settings of the OVERWRITE buttons.

• If you want to record the AUX bus 1–6 send levels,

or to record operations of faders 1–8 in the REMOTE

screen, turn on the FADER button. If you want to

record operations of [ON] keys 1–8 in the REMOTE

screen, turn on the CH ON button.

Move the cursor to the REC button in the

display, and press the [ENTER] key.

The REC will blink. This indicates that automix is

in record-ready mode. When automix is in

record-ready mode, the top panel [AUTOMIX]

key will blink red.

In the MIXING LAYER section, press the

RECORDER [1-8] key.

Now faders 1–8 will function as channel faders

for monitor channels 1–8. If you want to record

fader operations of monitor channels 9–16, press

the RECORDER [9–16] key.

Use the [SEL] keys to select the channel

whose fader operations you want to

record.

When automix is in record-ready mode, you can

use the [SEL] keys to select the channels that will

be recorded. The [SEL] keys will blink for the

selected channels.

Tip!

If you press a blinking [SEL] key once again, the selec-

tion will be cancelled.

Using automix

136

Chapter

Operation section

Press the top panel PLAY [ ] key to play

back the song.

When the song begins playing, the REC button in

the display will switch to on (highlighted), and

automix recording will begin. While automix is

being recorded, the [AUTOMIX] key will light

external device.

While listening to the song, operate the

faders of the selected channels.

When you are ﬁnished with operations,

press the top panel STOP [ ] key to stop

the song.

The REC button in the display will return to off

(normal display), and automix recording will

stop. The [AUTOMIX] key will now be lit green.

A popup window will appear in the display, ask-

ing you whether you want to update the recorded

content.

If you want to update the recorded con-

tent, move the cursor to the OK button

and press the [ENTER] key.

If you want to discard the recorded content,

move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press

the [ENTER] key, and the automix will return to

its previous state.

Tip!

• As an alternative to pressing the STOP [ ] key, you

can also stop automix recording by using the STOP

button in the display. In this case, automix recording

will stop, but the song will continue playing.

• Even after updating the recorded contents of auto-

mix, you can move the cursor to the UNDO button

located in the right of the display and press the

[ENTER] key to return to the state prior to recording

(Undo). The top panel [UNDO] key cannot undo

automix.

Playing back the automix

In the AUTOMIX screen/Main page, make

sure that the REC button and AUTO REC

button are turned off.

Locate the song to a point slightly earlier

than where you began recording automix,

and press the top panel PLAY [ ] key.

The PLAY button in the display will turn on (the

STOP button will turn off), and automix will

begin playing automatically.

Tip!

If you begin playback from the middle of the song,

automix will also begin playback from that same loca-

tion. In this case if there are any automix events ear-

lier than the location at which playback was begun,

automix playback will begin from a state in which all

of those events have been executed.

To stop the automix, move the cursor to

the STOP button in the display and press

the [ENTER] key, or press the top panel

STOP [ ] key.

Even if you yourself do not stop the automix, it

will stop automatically after the last event

recorded in automix has been executed.

Using automix

137

Operation section

Recording additional fader oper-

ations of other channels

Here’s how the previously-recorded automix can be

played back while you additionally record fader oper-

ations of other channels.

Locate the song to a point slightly earlier

than where you began recording automix.

In the AUTOMIX screen/Main page, make

sure that the AUTOMIX button is set to

“ENABLE,” and that in the OVERWRITE

area the FADER button is turned on.

Move the cursor to the REC button in the

lower right of the display, and press the

[ENTER] key.

Automix will be in record-ready mode.

Use the [SEL] keys to select the monitor

channels whose fader operations you want

to record.

For this example, choose monitor channels other

than those that you recorded earlier.

Be aware that if you accidentally select the same

channels as before, the fader operation events that

had been recorded on those channels will be erased.

Press the top panel PLAY [ ] key to play

back the song.

The REC button and PLAY button in the display

will turn on (highlighted), and automix recording

(and playback of the recorded events) will begin.

While listening to the song, operate the

faders that you selected in step 4.

When you are ﬁnished operating the fad-

ers, press the top panel STOP [ ] key to

stop the song.

A popup window will ask you whether you want

to update the recorded contents.

If you want to update the recorded con-

tents, move the cursor to the OK button

and press the [ENTER] key.

If you want to discard the recorded contents,

move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press

the [ENTER] key.

Using automix

138

Chapter

Operation section

Recording additional mix elements

Other mixing elements of the same channel can be

recorded (overwritten), adding them to the previously-

recorded automix. For example after you have

recorded the fader operations, you can overwrite pan

and EQ operations for the same channels. As an

example, this section how pan operations for channel

1 can be overwritten into the automix, adding them to

the previously-recorded fader operations for the mon-

itor channels.

Locate the song to a location slightly earlier

than the point where you want to begin

overwriting.

Press the [AUTOMIX] key → [F1] key.

The AUTOMIX screen/Main page will appear.

Make sure that the AUTOMIX button indicates

“ENABLE.”

Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE area.

Turn on the PAN button, and turn off the

other buttons (FADER, CH ON, EQ).

Move the cursor to the REC button in the

display, and press the [ENTER] key.

The automix will be in record-ready mode.

Press the [PAN] key → [F2] key.

The PAN screen/Pan MONI page will appear,

where you can make pan settings for the monitor

channels.

Tip!

If you want to record operations other than channel

fader operations or scene recall operations, access the

desired screen after putting automix in record-ready

mode (or while automix is actually being recorded).

Switching screens will not cause record-ready mode

to be cancelled.

Press the RECORDER [1-8] key → [SEL] key

[SEL] key 1 will blink, and monitor channel 1

will be selected. In the display, the cursor will

move to the PAN knob of monitor channel 1.

Press the top panel PLAY [ ] key to play

back the song.

The song will start playback, and simultaneously,

automix recording (and playback of the recorded

events) will begin.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to operate the

pan (PAN knob) of monitor channel 1.

Tip!

Pan operations can also be recorded by using the PAN

knob displayed in the VIEW screen/CH View page.

When you are ﬁnished operating the pan,

press the top panel STOP [ ] key.

A popup window will ask you whether you want

to update the recorded contents.

If you want to update the recorded con-

tents, move the cursor to the OK button

and press the [ENTER] key.

Using automix

139

Operation section

Re-recording only part of the automix

(Punch-in/out)

If you make a mistake in your operations while

recording automix, you can use the automix punch-

in/out function to re-record just the incorrect part. As

an example, here’s how to use punch-in/out to re-

record the previously-recorded pan operations for

monitor channel 1.

Locate the song to a location slightly earlier

than the point at which you want to

punch-in.

Press the [AUTOMIX] key → [F1] key.

Make sure that the AUTOMIX button indicates

“ENABLE.”

Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE area.

Turn the PAN button on, and the other

buttons (FADER, CH ON, EQ) off.

Move the cursor to the AUTO REC button

in the display, and press the [ENTER] key.

The AUTO REC button will turn on (highlighted),

and automix will be in record-ready mode.

When you use the AUTO REC button instead of

the REC button, record-ready mode will not be

defeated even you start and then stop recording.

It is convenient to use the AUTO REC button

when you will be repeatedly recording and play-

ing back, as when using punch-in/out. If you use

the AUTO REC button, begin automix recording

before you use the [SEL] key to select a channel.

It is not necessary to press the [SEL] key before

you start recording.

Press the [PAN] key → [F2] key.

The PAN screen Pan MONI page will appear.

Press the RECORDER [1-8] key.

Monitor channels 1–8 will be selected as the

mixing layer.

Press the top panel PLAY [ ] key to begin

song playback.

The [AUTOMIX] key will light red, and automix

will be in record mode. However at this point,

nothing will be recorded since the recording

channel has not yet been selected.

When the song reaches the desired punch-

in location, press [SEL] key 1.

[SEL] key 1 will blink, and pan operations for

monitor channel 1 will be recorded (punch-in).

In the display, the cursor will move to the PAN

knob of monitor channel 1.

Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to change the

pan (PAN knob) setting.

When you have ﬁnished making settings,

once again press the [SEL] key that you

pressed in step 8.

The [SEL] key will go dark, and recording will

end (punch-out). Automix can continue to be

recorded, but since a recording channel has not

been selected, nothing will be actually be

recorded.

Tip!

Even if you did not operate pan in step 9, the pan

operation events that had been recorded between the

punch-in and punch-out will be erased. This method

can be used to erase undesired events from a speciﬁc

section.

Press the top panel STOP [ ] key.

A popup window will ask whether you want to

update the recorded contents.

Using automix

140

Chapter

Operation section

If you want to update the recorded con-

tents, move the cursor to the OK button

and press the [ENTER] key.

If the AUTO REC button is on, automix record-

ready mode will not be defeated even after the

recorded contents have been updated. (The

[AUTOMIX] key will continue blinking red.)

Now you can resume automix punch-in at any

time by pressing the PLAY [ ] key.

If you want to defeat record-ready mode, access

the AUTOMIX screen/Main page, move the cur-

sor to the AUTO REC button, and press the

[ENTER] key to turn the AUTO REC button off.

Tip!

Even when using the REC button to record automix,

you can use the [SEL] key as described above to

punch-in/out. However in this case, record-ready

mode will be defeated when automix is stopped.

Using automix

141

Operation section

Re-recording fader operations

The AW2816’s AUTOMIX screen contains a Fader Edit

page in which you can watch previously-recorded

fader movements while you record new fader move-

ments. This page is convenient when you want to

make detailed changes afterward to the fader move-

ments. As an example, we will explain how previ-

ously-recorded movements of the monitor channel 1

fader can be edited in a speciﬁc section of the song.

The Fader Edit page lets you view only the fader

movements of the monitor channels, input channels,

return channels, and stereo output channel. This

method cannot be used to edit AUX send fader opera-

tions or REMOTE screen fader operations.

Locate the song to a location slightly earlier

than the point at which you want to start

punch-in.

Press the [AUTOMIX] key →[F1] key.

Make sure that the AUTOMIX button is displayed

as “ENABLE.”

Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE area.

Turn the FADER button on, and the other

buttons (CH ON, PAN, EQ) off.

Press the [F3] key.

The Fader Edit page will appear.

Press the RECORDER [1-8] key to select

monitor channels 1–8 as the mixing layer.

In the center of the display, the current fader

positions of monitor channels 1–8 (and the stereo

output channel and return channels 1/2) will be

displayed as a bar graph.

Make sure that the FADER EDIT MODE area

ABSOLUTE button is turned on.

The two buttons in the FADER EDIT MODE area

are used to select the fader editing method. If the

ABSOLUTE button is on, the previously-recorded

events will be erased, and the new events will be

recorded.

Tip!

The RELATIVE button is used when you want to apply

a relative change to the previously-recorded fader

events. For details refer to page 338.

Move the cursor to the FADER EDIT OUT

area. Turn the END button off, and the RET

button on.

The END button of the FADER OUT AREA speci-

ﬁes whether to erase any events of the same type

that were previously recorded after the point at

which automix recording stopped. The RET but-

ton speciﬁes whether faders will return (after

punch-out) to the locations that were previously

recorded at the punch-out point. In cases such as

this example, where we want to edit the fader

movement in a speciﬁc section of the song, set

END=off and RET=on. If the RET button is on, the

knob located at the right of the button can be

used to specify the time (TIME) over which the

faders will return to their previously-recorded

positions.

Tip!

• For details on the functions of the FADER EDIT OUT

area buttons END and RET, refer also to page 338.

• The setting of the FADER EDIT OUT area RET but-

ton has no effect on how operations other than fad-

ers are recorded.

Move the cursor to the AUTO REC button

in the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.

Automix will be in record-ready mode.

Previously-recorded

fader movement

Newly-recorded

fader movement

Punch-in Punch-out

END= off

RET= on

TIME

Using automix

142

Chapter

Operation section

Press the top panel PLAY [ ] key to play

back the song.

Automix will be in record mode. However since

a recording channel has not yet been selected,

recording will not actually occur.

Listen to the song, and at the desired

punch-in location, press [SEL] key 1 (moni-

tor channel 1), and start operating the

fader.

Punch-in will begin the moment you press the

[SEL] key. When you operate the fader, the previ-

ously-recorded fader position and the currently-

recorded position will both be shown by the bar

graph, as shown in the diagram below. The up or

down arrow displayed beside the bar graph indi-

cates the direction in which you can move the

fader to return to the previously-recorded posi-

tion.

When you are ﬁnished operating the fader,

press [SEL] key 1 once again to punch-out.

When you are ﬁnished punching-in/out,

press the top panel STOP [ ] key.

A popup window will ask you whether you want

to update the recorded contents. If you want to

update, move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

Previously-recorded

fader position

If you moved below

the previously-recorded

position

If you moved above

the previously-recorded

position

New fader position Previously-recorded

fader position

New fader position

Using automix

143

Operation section

Editing individual automix events

In the AUTOMIX screen/Event List page, individual

events of previously-recorded automix data can be

edited while automix is stopped. You can adjust the

timing or values of individual events, or delete

unwanted events. The following types of events can

be edited in this way.

• Fader operations for each channel (including

operations of the [RTN 1]/[RTN 2] controls)

• [ON] key operations for each channel

• Pan operations for each channel

• Scene memory and library recall operations

• Operations of faders 1–8 and [ON] keys 1–8 in

the REMOTE screen

EQ operations and AUX send operations for a channel

cannot be edited or deleted as individual events. Use

the punch-in/out function to overwrite or delete the

appropriate area.

As an example, here’s how to edit events that recall a

scene or library.

Tip!

The timing of an event is always displayed as the abso-

lute time of the song. For this reason, we recommend

that you leave the counter set at absolute time display

when you are editing automix events (

→

P.238).

Press the [AUTOMIX] key → [F4] key.

The screen will show the Event List page, which

displays a list of the events recorded in automix.

Use the buttons in the screen to select the type of

events that will be displayed in the list. Each but-

ton corresponds to the following events.

1 SCENE/LIB button

Operations that recall scenes or libraries.

B CH ON button

[ON] key operations of each channel.

C PAN button

Pan operations of each channel.

D FADER button

Fader operations of each channel (including

operations of the [RTN 1]/[RTN 2] controls).

E REMOTE button

Fader/[ON] key operations in the REMOTE

screen.

In order to display REMOTE screen fader/[ON] key

operations in the list, you must turn on both the

REMOTE button and the FADER button, or both the

REMOTE button and the CH ON button respectively.

Turning on only the REMOTE button will not display

these events.

1 2 3 4 5

Using automix

144

Chapter

Operation section

Move the cursor to the SCENE/LIB button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The SCENE/LIB button will turn on, and scene/

library recall operations recorded in the automix

will be displayed in the list. The row enclosed by

a dotted line in the list is the currently selected

event.

The columns of the list show the following infor-

mation when the SCENE/LIB button is on.

• TIME

The time at which the event is executed is dis-

played as “hours: minutes: seconds: millisec-

onds.”

• EVENT

This indicates the type and value of the event.

The type of events that can be selected in this

column will depend on which button above the

list is turned on. If the SCENE/LIB button is on,

the following events will be displayed.

• SCENE xx .....Recall scene memory number xx

• EQ.Lib xxx....Recall an EQ library

• DY.Lib xxx....Recall dynamics library number

xxx

• EF.Lib xxx .....Recall effect library number xxx

• CH.Lib xxx ...Recall channel library number

xxx

• CHANNEL

This indicates the channel to which the data will

be recalled (input channel 1–8, monitor channel

1-16, stereo output channel, return channels 1/

2). This column will be blank if a scene memory

is selected in the EVENT column.

Tip!

For details on the displayed content for each event,

refer to page 344.

Move the cursor to the symbol at the

left of the list, and turn the [DATA/JOG]

dial to select the event that you want to

edit.

Use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys to move

the cursor to the item that you want to

edit, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to edit

the value.

Tip!

• If you edit the value in the TIME column (event tim-

ing), the cursor may jump over events in the list and

move to another location. This is because events are

re-ordered by time, and is not a malfunction.

• The timing of an event can be adjusted in ﬁne steps

of 25 ms.

To add a new event, move the cursor to

the DUPLICATE button in the upper right

of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.

The event currently selected for editing will be

duplicated at the same timing. Edit the time,

event type, and value as necessary.

To delete an unwanted event, move the

cursor to the DELETE button in the upper

right of the screen, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The event currently selected for editing will be

deleted.

If you want to view only the events of a

speciﬁc channel, move the cursor to the

SELECTED CH ONLY button and press the

[ENTER] key. Then use the [SEL] keys to

select the channel whose events you want

to view.

If the REMOTE button is on, the SELECTED CH ONLY

button and the SCENE/LIB and PAN buttons will have

no effect. Also, if the SELECTED CH ONLY button is

on, the REMOTE button will have no effect.

Using automix

145

Operation section

Storing an automix

You can assign a name to the current automix, and

store it in internal automix memory. Data for up to six-

teen automixes can be stored in memory.

Tip!

The automix data you store is saved on the hard disk

as part of the current song. In other words, you can

create up to sixteen automixes for a single song, and

compare these automixes at any time.

Press the [AUTOMIX] key → [F2] key.

The AUTOMIX screen/Memory page will appear.

This page is used mainly to manage the internal

automix memory.

Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

store destination automix number.

You can select a store destination automix num-

ber in the range of 01–16. Vacant automix num-

bers will appear in the list as “[No Data!].

Tip!

When this page is displayed, you can use the [DATA/

JOG] dial to select an automix number in the list

regardless of where the cursor is located.

Move the cursor to the STORE button at

the left of the list, and press the [ENTER]

key.

A popup window will appear, allowing you to

input the name. Assign a name of up to sixteen

characters. (For details on inputting characters,

refer to page 37.)

After inputting the name, move the cursor

to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key.

The current automix data will be stored in the

selected automix number.

Tip!

• If STORE CONFIRMATION is turned “OFF” in the

UTILITY screen/Prefer.1 page, you can save to the

speciﬁed automix number without having to input a

name. This method is convenient when you are

repeatedly overwriting an automix to store it in the

same automix number.

• The contents of the automixes stored in internal

memory and the current automix can be saved on a

MIDI sequencer or other external MIDI device by

using the MIDI Bulk Dump function. For details on

using Bulk Dump, refer to page 212.

The automix memory is used in common by the cur-

rent automix and the stored (maximum of) sixteen

automixes. This means that if the current automix

uses a large amount of memory, it may not be possi-

ble to store it even though vacant automix numbers

are shown in the list. In this case, use the Memory

page CLEAR button to delete an unneeded automix,

and then execute the Store operation.

Using automix

146

Chapter

Operation section

Recalling an automix

Here’s how to recall an automix that was stored in

internal memory.

Press the [AUTOMIX] key → [F2] key.

The AUTOMIX screen/Memory page will appear.

Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

automix number that you want to recall.

Move the cursor to the RECALL button

located at the left of the list, and press the

[ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

automix recall operation.

Move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The selected automix will be recalled, and the

current automix will be replaced by the recalled

automix data.

Tip!

In the UTILITY screen/Prefer.1 page, you can turn the

RECALL CONFIRMATION setting “OFF” so that the

popup window of step 3 will not appear, and the spec-

iﬁed automix number will be recalled directly.

Managing songs

147

Chapter

Operation section

Managing songs

This chapter explains song management operations such as saving,

loading, deleting, or copying songs.

About songs

What is a song?

On the AW2816, musical productions you create are

saved on the internal hard disk in units called “songs.”

A song that you saved can be loaded into internal

memory at any time to reproduce the state that was

saved.

A maximum of 30,000 songs can be saved on the

internal hard disk, if capacity allows. However, only

the song that is currently loaded (the “current song”)

can be operated on the AW2816 at any one time.

Tip!

When the AW2816 is powered-on, the most recently

operated song will automatically be loaded as the cur-

rent song.

Songs can be saved only on the current drive. An

external drive can be used to back up song data, but

cannot be used to save/load the current song or

record/playback audio data in the same way as the

internal hard disk.

Song structure

The AW2816 can use a hard disk of up to 64 GB

capacity. However, the capacity that can be used by

an individual song is limited to 6.4 GB. Of this 6.4

GB, approximately 2 MB is reserved as the system

area for storing various non-audio data, and the audio

data is recorded in the remaining area (the data area).

The diagram below shows the song structure on the

hard disk, and the data that is recorded in each area.

Song recording time

The time that can be recorded in one song (data area

of approximately 6.4 GB) will differ depending on the

quantization (number of bits) and sampling frequency

of the song. The following table shows the recordable

time for each track when a 16-track recording is made

using the default song settings.

Please be aware that the data area of a song also con-

tains audio data (i.e., for Undo) that is not actually

used in an audio track. For example even when you

erase all the audio data after once recording a track,

the erased audio data will remain in the song so that

Undo can be performed if needed, and this will

shorten the available recording time. As necessary,

you can execute the Optimize function (→P.154)

which deletes only the Undo data from the song.

The table shown above does not include the recording

time of the stereo track.

Song

Maximum recording time

for one track

16 bit/44.1 kHz approximately 1 hour 20 minutes

16 bit/48 kHz approximately 1 hour 13 minutes

24 bit/44.1 kHz approximately 53 minutes

24 bit/48 kHz approximately 49 minutes

Internal hard disk

(maximum 64 GB/30,000 songs)

• Song

(maximum

6.4 GB per song)

• System area (fixed at approximately 2 MB)

- Settings for each of the TRACK screen pages

- Tempo map settings

- Scene memories including the current scene

- Automix memory including the current automix

- Patch libraries

- EQ libraries

- Dynamics libraries

- Channel libraries

- Effect libraries

- SONG screen/Settings page settings

- Settings for each of the REMOTE screen pages

• Data area

- Audio data for 16 x 8 virtual tracks

- Audio data of the stereo track

- Audio data for undo/redo

Managing songs

148

Chapter

Operation section

Saving the current song

Here’s how to save the current song (the song that you

are currently operating) on the internal hard disk. Be

aware that if you turn off the power of the AW2816

without saving the current song, any changes in the

data of the current song will be lost.

Tip!

When turning off the power of the AW2816, you must

perform the shut-down operation (

→

P.12). When you

execute shut-down, the current song will be saved

automatically.

Press the [SONG] key → [F1] key.

The Song List page will appear, in which you can

save or load songs. The list in the center of the

display shows the songs that are currently saved

on the internal hard disk.

The song that is highlighted in the list indicates

the current song. The following information is

shown in the columns of the list.

• SONG NAME .... The ﬁrst sixteen characters of

the song name

• SAVED AT.......... The date and time at which

the song was last saved

• SIZE................... The size of the song

• BIT/FS ............... The number of bits and sam-

pling frequency of the song

• PRT ................... Protect status

Tip!

• The SONG NAME column displays the name that

was assigned when the new song was created. You

can edit this song name as necessary (

→

P.150).

• The size of the song displayed in the SIZE column

indicates the size of the audio data stored in the

data area of the song (

→

P.147). (This does not

include the size of the system area.)

To save the current song, move the cursor

to the SAVE button and press the [ENTER]

key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm that

you want to save the current song.

To save the song, move the cursor to the

OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

To cancel without saving, move the cursor to the

CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

Tip!

If instead of pressing the [SONG] key in step 1, you

hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [SONG] key,

the Song List page will appear, and the cursor will

automatically move to the SAVE button. This method

can be used as a shortcut when saving the current

song.

When you save the current song, it will always be

overwritten onto the previously-saved song. If you

want to keep the previously-saved song, create a

duplicate of the current song (

→

P.152).

149

Managing songs

Operation section

Loading a song

Here’s how a song saved in the internal hard disk can

be loaded as the current song.

Press the [SONG] key → [F1] key.

The SONG screen/Song List page will appear.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song

that you want to load.

In the list, the row enclosed by the dotted frame

indicates the song that is selected for loading.

Tip!

In the Song List page, you can turn the [DATA/JOG]

dial to select the song for loading regardless of the

location of the cursor.

Move the cursor to the LOAD button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you whether you want

to save the current song.

If you want to save the current song before

loading the newly selected song, move the

cursor to the YES button. If you want to

load the newly selected song without sav-

ing the current song, move the cursor to

the NO button. Then press the [ENTER]

key.

The selected song will be loaded.

Managing songs

150

Chapter

Operation section

Editing the song name/comment

Here’s how to edit the name (song name) or comment

of the current song.

Press the [SONG] key → [F2] key.

The SONG screen/Setting page will appear. The

SONG NAME area at the top of the screen indi-

cates the song name, and the COMMENT area

displays the comment.

Tip!

Unless you specify otherwise when newly creating a

song, a default song name of “xxxxx - NEW SONG”

(xxxxx will be a serial number) and default comment

of “No Description” will be assigned.

To edit the song name, move the cursor to

the NAME EDIT button in the upper left of

the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear,

allowing you to edit the song name.

If the current song is protected, it is not possible to

edit the song name or comment. For details on pro-

tect, refer to page 151.

The Song List page will display only the ﬁrst six-

teen characters of the song name.

Use the character palette to edit the song

name. Then move the cursor to the OK

button and press the [ENTER] key.

For details on inputting characters, refer to

page 37.

You can input a song name up to sixty-four char-

acters long. When you move the cursor to the

OK button and press the [ENTER] key, you will

return to the SONG screen/Setting page.

To edit the comment, move the cursor to

the COMMENT EDIT button in the upper

left of the screen, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The COMMENT EDIT popup window will

appear, allowing you to edit the comment.

Use the character palette to edit the com-

ment. Then move the cursor to the OK

button and press the [ENTER] key.

For details on inputting characters, refer to

page 37.

You can input a comment up to sixty-four char-

acters long. When you move the cursor to the

OK button and press the [ENTER] key, you will

return to the SONG screen/Setting page.

To ﬁnalize the edited song name and com-

ment, save the current song.

For details on how to save the current song, refer

to page 148.

151

Managing songs

Operation section

Protecting a song

A song can be protected to preserve its contents. If a

song is protected, you will not be able to edit or

record tracks, set locate points, or delete the song, etc.

We recommend that when you complete a song, you

protect it so that it will not be accidentally modiﬁed

or erased.

Load the song that you want to protect as

the current song.

Press the [SONG] key → [F2] key.

The SONG screen/Setting page will appear.

Move the cursor to the PROTECT area, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The button will change to ON, and the current

song will be protected.

The current song is now protected. However if you

turn off the power or load another song without sav-

ing the current song, its protect setting will be

defeated. In order to ﬁnalize the protect setting for

the current song, you must save it.

Save the current song.

The protect setting will be ﬁnalized for the cur-

rent song, and the following operations will be

prohibited.

• Deleting or optimizing the song

• Editing the song name or comment

• Setting or editing the locate points

• Deleting the stereo track

• Changing the virtual tracks

• Pairing tracks

• Recording or editing tracks

Tip!

If you want to defeat the protect setting of a song,

turn the PROTECT button OFF in step 3, and save the

current song.

Managing songs

152

Chapter

Operation section

Duplicating a song

Here’s how to copy (duplicate) a song that is saved on

the internal hard disk. This is convenient when you

want to keep a duplicate of the original state of a song

before performing various edits on the audio tracks.

When you execute the Song Copy operation, the cur-

rent song will be saved automatically.

Press the [SONG] key → [F3] key.

The SONG screen/Song Edit page will appear, in

which you can perform operations on entire

songs, such as copying or deleting a song.

The upper part of the display shows a list of the

songs currently saved on the internal hard disk.

The highlighted row in the list indicates the cur-

rent song. An “E” symbol will be displayed in the

EDIT column for the song that is currently

selected for operations. The other columns of the

list display the following information.

• SONG NAME .... Song name (the ﬁrst twelve

characters)

• SAVED AT.......... The date and time at which

the song was last saved

• SIZE................... The size of the song

• BIT/FS ............... The number of bits and sam-

pling frequency of the song

• PRT ................... Protect on/off status

Move the cursor to the list in the upper

part of the display.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song

that you want to copy, and press the

[ENTER] key to assign an “E” symbol at the

left side of the list.

Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the “E”

symbol will appear or disappear.

Tip!

Multiple songs including the current song can be

selected for copying.

Move the cursor to the COPY button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

copy operation.

To execute the copy, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

The current song will automatically be saved,

and then the copy operation will be executed. To

cancel the copy, move the cursor to the CANCEL

button and press the [ENTER] key.

When the current song is copied, two songs with

identical song name, date, and size will exist. So that

you do not confuse the original with the copy, we rec-

ommend that you edit the song name or comment.

(For details on editing the song name, refer to

page 150.)

153

Managing songs

Operation section

Deleting an unwanted song

Here’s how an unwanted song (except for the current

song) can be deleted from the internal hard disk.

• A deleted song will be lost forever. Use great care

when executing this operation.

• When you delete a song, the current song will be

saved automatically.

Press the [SONG] key → [F3] key.

The SONG screen/Song Edit page will appear.

The upper part of the display will show a list of

the songs currently saved in the internal hard

disk.

Move the cursor to the list in the upper

part of the display.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song

that you want to delete, and press the

[ENTER] key to assign an “E” symbol at the

left side of the list.

Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the “E”

symbol will appear or disappear.

Tip!

It is not possible to delete a protected song (a song for

which a symbol is displayed in the PRT column of

the list) or the current song (the song highlighted in

the list). If you attempt to execute the Delete opera-

tion with an “E” symbol assigned to these songs, an

error message will appear.

Move the cursor to the DELETE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

Delete operation.

If you want to delete the song, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The current song will be saved automatically,

and then the speciﬁed song will be deleted. To

cancel without deleting, move the cursor to the

CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

Managing songs

154

Chapter

Operation section

Deleting unused audio data from a song

(Optimize)

The AW2816 allows you to cancel the results of as

many ﬁfteen most recently performed recording or

editing operations (Undo), and then to re-execute the

cancelled operations (Redo). This is possible because

audio data for the Undo function is preserved in the

data area even after recording or editing operations

are executed.

However, the audio data preserved for Undo can be

deleted if you wish. (This action is called “Optimize.”)

For example if you are ﬁnished recording and editing,

and will no longer need to use Undo/Redo, you can

execute the Optimize operation for that song to

increase the available space on the hard disk.

• The Undo data that is deleted will be permanently

lost. Use great care when executing this operation.

• When you execute the Song Optimize operation, the

current song will be saved automatically.

Press the [SONG] key → [F3] key.

The SONG screen/Song Edit page will appear.

The upper part of the display will list the songs

that are saved on the internal hard disk. The song

for which an “E” symbol is displayed in the left of

the list is selected for the Optimize operation.

Move the cursor to the list in the upper

part of the display.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song

for which you want to execute the Opti-

mize operation, and press the [ENTER] key

to assign an “E” symbol in the left side of

the list.

Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the “E”

symbol will appear or disappear.

The Optimize operation can be executed on any song

except for protect songs. However, only one song can

be optimized at a time. If you attempt to execute

Optimize when more than one song is marked by the

“E” symbol, an error message will be displayed.

Move the cursor to the OPTIMIZE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

Optimize operation.

To execute the Optimize operation, move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The current song will be saved automatically,

and then Optimize will be executed. To cancel

without executing, move the cursor to the CAN-

CEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

Executing Optimize will simply delete the unneeded

audio data; it has no effect on hard disk fragmenta-

tion. (Fragmentation refers to a state in which contin-

uous audio data becomes distributed across separated

locations on the hard disk.) To clean up fragmenta-

tion, execute the Defrag operation (

→

P.166).

155

Managing songs

Operation section

Importing mixer data from an existing song

On the AW2816, settings such as the scene or library

data (referred to as “mixer data”) of an existing song

can be imported (loaded) into the current song. For

example this is convenient when an existing song

contains an original effect library that you want to

reuse in the current song.

• Be aware that when you execute the Mixer Data

Import operation, the corresponding mixer data in

the import destination song (current song) will be

erased, and replaced by the contents of the import

source.

• Mixer data for libraries includes all channel, EQ,

dynamics, and effect libraries.

Load the import destination song as the

current song.

Press the [SONG] key/[F3] key.

The SONG screen/Song Edit page will appear.

The upper part of the screen will list the songs

currently saved in the internal hard disk. The cur-

rent song is highlighted in the list.

Move the cursor to the list in the upper

part of the display.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

import source song, and press the [ENTER]

key to assign an “E” symbol in the left side

of the list.

Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the “E”

symbol will appear or disappear.

It is not possible to select the current song or multiple

songs as the import source. If you attempt to execute

Import in such a state, an error message will appear.

Move the cursor to the MIXER IMP button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The following MIXER DATA IMPORT popup win-

dow will appear.

Turn on the button(s) for the mixer data

that you want to import. (Multiple buttons

may be selected.)

Each button corresponds to the following data.

• SCENE MEM. button .... Scene memory data

• AUTOMIX button......... Automix memory data

• TEMPO MAP button .... Tempo map settings

• LIBRARY button........... Library data (channel,

EQ, dynamics, effect)

• MIDI REMOTE button.. Settings of the

REMOTE screen

To execute the Import operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

To cancel the Import operation, move the cursor

to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER]

key.

Managing songs

156

Chapter

Operation section

Importing tracks from an existing song

Desired tracks of audio data can be imported (loaded)

from an existing song into the current song. This is

convenient when you want audio materials recorded

in another song to be reused in the current song.

Load the import destination song as the

current song.

Press the [EDIT] key → [F5] key.

The TR Import page will appear, in which you

can import tracks from an existing song.

The upper part of the display will list the songs

that are currently saved on the internal hard disk.

The row that is highlighted in the list is the cur-

rent song, and the row enclosed in a dotted

frame is currently selected as the import source.

Each column of the list displays the following

information.

• DEST.SONG NAME......Song name (the ﬁrst

sixteen characters)

• SAVED AT.......... The date and time at which

the song was last saved

• SIZE................... The size of the song

• BIT/FS ............... The number of bits and sam-

pling frequency of the song

• PRT ................... Protect on/off status

Move the cursor to the list, and turn the

[DATA/JOG] dial to select the import

source song.

Move the cursor to the LOAD button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you for conﬁrmation.

Move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

Track information of the selected song will be

loaded, and the SOURCE TRACK area like the

following will appear.

Move the cursor to the SOURCE TRACK

area, and specify the track number (1–16)

and virtual track number (1–8) of the track

that you want to import.

Move the cursor to the TRACK CLIP button

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you for conﬁrmation.

Move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The track speciﬁed in the SOURCE TRACK area

will be ﬁnalized as the import source, and a dis-

play like the following will appear.

Once the import source track has been ﬁnalized, it

will not be possible to change the track in the

SOURCE TRACK area. If you want to change the

import source track, move the cursor to the song list

and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial. Select the OK button

in the popup window that asks for conﬁrmation, and

you will return to step 2.

Move the cursor to the DEST. TRACK area,

and specify the track number (1–16) and

virtual track number (1–8) of the import

destination track.

157

Managing songs

Operation section

Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you for conﬁrmation.

To execute the Import operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

To cancel without importing, move the cursor to

the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

Tip!

When you execute the Import operation, the import

destination track will be erased, and replaced by the

contents of the import source track. (The import des-

tination name will not be replaced.) However, you can

return to the previous state if you press the [UNDO]

key immediately after executing Import.

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

159

Chapter

Operation section

Using the internal hard disk/

external storage devices

This chapter explains operations on the AW2816’s internal hard disk

and on external storage devices (CD-RW drive, MO drive, external

hard disk, etc.).

Formatting the internal hard disk

Here’s how to format the internal hard disk, returning

it to the default condition. If frequent skips occur in

the sound during playback, or if errors occur in the

ﬁle system, try formatting the internal hard disk.

When you execute the Format operation, all song

saved on the disk will be lost forever. Use extreme

caution when executing this operation. If the disk

contains any songs you want to keep, you must back

them up before executing the Format operation

(

→

P.162).

Press the [FILE] key → [F3] key.

The FILE screen/Disk Util. page will appear, in

which you can format an internal or external

drive, or erase CD-RW media.

Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to display

“INT.IDE” in the DRIVE area, and press the

[ENTER] key.

In the DRIVE area of the Disk Util. page you can

select the drive that will be the object of the

operation. When you select “INT.IDE” (internal

hard disk), the display will change as follows.

Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button in

the FORMAT area, and press the [ENTER]

key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm execu-

tion of the Format operation.

Move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

Once again, a popup window will ask you to

conﬁrm the operation.

To execute the Format operation, move

the cursor to the OK button once again

and press the [ENTER] key. To cancel with-

out formatting, move the cursor to the

CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

When you move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key, formatting will begin.

When formatting is completed, an empty song

will be created automatically, and selected as the

current song.

It is not possible to halt the process while formatting

is taking place.

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

160

Chapter

Operation section

Formatting an external drive

Here’s how an external drive (external hard disk or

MO drive) connected to the SCSI connector can be

formatted. Use the following procedure to format an

external drive if you want to import/export WAV ﬁles

via an external drive, or to use an external drive to

back up AW2816 song data.

Press the [FILE] key → [F3] key.

The FILE screen/Disk Util. page will appear.

Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the SCSI

ID of the drive that you want to format,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The display will change as follows.

Move the cursor to the TYPE area, and use

the [DATA/JOG] dial to select one of the

following two ﬁle systems for which the

disk will be formatted.

• ORIGINAL

This is the AW2816’s native ﬁle system. Select

this if you want to use this drive or media for

song backup.

• FAT16

This is a ﬁle system used by PC operating systems

(MS-DOS, Windows 95, 98, Me, etc.). Select this

if you want to use this drive or media to

exchange ﬁles with your computer.

The AW2816 does not support the “FAT32” ﬁle sys-

tem used by Windows 95 OSR2 and later.

Tip!

For details on exchanging ﬁles with your computer,

refer to page 167.

Move the cursor to either the QUICK or the

NORMAL button, and press the [ENTER]

key to select the formatting method.

The formatting method will depend on the button

you select.

• QUICK

A logical format will be performed on the drive

or media. (This is a procedure that writes the

directory structure and other information onto

the disk. Also called “initializing.”) This method

can also be used to quickly erase data from a

drive or media that has already been physically

formatted.

• NORMAL

A physical format will be performed on the drive

or media. (This procedure physically prepares the

drive or media to accept data.) Depending on the

size of the drive or media, this can require a

length of time ranging from several minutes to an

hour or more. Use this method before using a

newly-purchased drive or media.

Regardless of the button you select, pressing the

[ENTER] key will display a popup window that

asks you to conﬁrm the formatting operation.

To execute the format, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

To cancel without formatting, move the

cursor to the CANCEL button and press the

[ENTER] key.

When you move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key, formatting will begin.

It is not possible to halt the process while formatting

is taking place.

161

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

Operation section

Erasing CD-RW media

Here’s how to erase CD-RW media inserted into an

internal or external CD-RW drive. If CD-RW media

has been used for another purpose, we recommend

that you use this procedure to completely erase the

contents of the CD-RW media before using it on the

AW2816.

Tip!

When AW2816 songs are backed up on CD-RW

media, or when audio data is written to CD-RW

media, the media is erased automatically as necessary.

It is not necessary for you to perform the following

procedure each time.

Press the [FILE] key → [F3] key.

The FILE screen/Disk Util. page will appear.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

desired CD-RW drive, and press the

[ENTER] key.

Choose “ATAPI” to select the internal CD-RW

drive, or the SCSI ID of an external drive to select

an external CD-RW drive. Press the [ENTER] key,

and the display will change as follows.

Move the cursor to either the PERFECTLY

or SIMPLY button in the CD-RW MEDIA

ERASE area, and press the [ENTER] key.

Depending on the button you selected, the era-

sure method will differ as follows.

• PERFECTLY

All data written on the CD-RW media will be

erased. This will take more time than SIMPLY. It is

best to use this method when you ﬁrst use CD-

RW media that was previously used for a differ-

ent purpose.

• SIMPLY

Only the table of contents (TOC) for the data

written on the CD-RW media will be erased. This

takes less time for the operation to be completed.

Regardless of the button you selected, pressing

the [ENTER] key will display a popup window

that asks you to conﬁrm the operation.

To execute the Erase operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key. To cancel without erasing,

move the cursor to the CANCEL button

and press the [ENTER] key.

When you move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key, erasure of the media will

begin.

It is not possible to halt the process while erasure is

taking place.

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

162

Chapter

Operation section

Backing up songs

Song data saved on the internal hard disk can be

backed up to a storage device such as an MO drive or

CD-RW drive. As a safeguard against accidental dam-

age to the internal hard disk, you should always back

up your important song data.

Selecting the backup format for a

removable drive

If you use a removable drive such as MO as the song

backup destination, you must ﬁrst specify the backup

format.

Press the [UTILITY] key → [F4] key.

The UTILITY screen/Prefer.3 page will appear.

Move the cursor to the button in the

REMOVABLE BACKUP area, and press the

[ENTER] key to select one of the two

backup formats (TYPE1/TYPE2).

Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the button

will change between “TYPE1” and “TYPE2.”

Each format has the following features.

• TYPE1 (default)

This format uses the full capacity of the remov-

able media to backup some or all of the songs.

The advantage of this format is that even if the

backup source songs do not all ﬁt on one volume

of media, the backup can extend across multiple

volumes of media.

If you select this type, the media will automati-

cally be formatted before the backup occurs.

• TYPE2

This format stores some or all of the songs as

individual ﬁles on the removable media. The

advantage of this format is that additional song

ﬁles can be added later to the free area of the

media on which other songs have already been

backed up in the same format. However, the

backup data cannot extend across multiple vol-

umes of media, as for TYPE1.

Before you can use this format to back up on pre-

viously-unused media, you must format that

media manually.

Tip!

• The selection of backup format is meaningful only

when using a removable drive.

• TYPE1 backup format will automatically be selected

if the backup destination is a CD-RW drive, and

TYPE2 will automatically be selected if the backup

destination is an external hard disk.

Executing the backup

Here’s how to back up song data to a CD-RW drive,

MO drive, external hard disk, or other storage device.

Before backing up on an external hard disk, or before

using TYPE2 backup format to back up on removable

media, you must format the backup destination drive

or media (

→

P.160). At this time, you must select

“ORIGINAL” as the type of ﬁle system. (It is not possi-

ble to back up on a drive or media that is formatted as

FAT16.)

Press the [FILE] key → [F1] key.

The FILE screen/Backup page will appear, where

you can perform song backup operations. The

upper part of the display lists the songs currently

saved on the internal hard disk. The highlighted

row in the list is the current song.

Move the cursor to the DESTINATION area

in the lower right of the display, use the

[DATA/JOG] dial to select the backup desti-

nation drive, and press the [ENTER] key.

Select “ATAPI” when backing up on the internal

CD-RW drive, or the corresponding SCSI ID

number when backing up on an external drive.

163

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

Operation section

If you are backing up on a CD-RW drive or

MO drive, insert the media into the drive.

If the backup destination is a CD-RW drive, press

the [SHIFT] key + [F2] key to open the tray of the

CD-RW drive, and insert the CD-R/RW media.

Press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] key to close the tray

of the CD-RW drive.

If the backup destination is an MO drive, make

sure that “write protect” is not engaged for the

MO disk, and insert it into the drive.

Move the cursor to the upper part of the

display, use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select

the song that you want to back up, and

press the [ENTER] key.

In the BACKUP SONG area, the button will

change from “DISABLE” to “ENABLE,” indicating

that the song has been selected for backup. The

“O” symbol at the left side of the list will change

to “●” for songs that have been selected for

backup.

If you want to backup several songs at the

same time, repeat step 4.

Tip!

• If you want to back up all songs, move the cursor to

the ALL ENABLE button located in the center of the

display, and press the [ENTER] key.

• If you want to remove all songs from the selection

for backup, move the cursor to the ALL DISABLE

button and press the [ENTER] key.

When you are ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the EXECUTE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

backup operation.

To execute the backup, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

To cancel the backup, move the cursor to

the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER]

key.

When you move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key, the backup operation will

occur in one of the following ways, depending

on the storage device that you selected as the

backup destination.

■ CD-RW drive

If you are backing up on CD-R media or on new CD-

RW media, the backup will begin immediately.

If you are backing up on previously-recorded CD-RW

media, a popup window will ask you to conﬁrm that

you want to erase the media. When you move the cur-

sor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key, the

media will ﬁrst be erased, and then the backup will be

performed.

If the selected song(s) do not ﬁt on a single volume of

media, a message will ask you to insert another vol-

ume of media. Eject the media and insert a new vol-

ume.

■ Removable drive such as MO

drive

If “TYPE1” is selected as the backup format, the media

will ﬁrst be formatted, and then the backup will be

performed. If the selected song(s) do not ﬁt on a single

volume of media, a message will ask you to insert

another volume of media. Insert a new volume of

media.

If “TYPE2” is selected as the backup format, backup

will begin immediately.

■ External hard disk

Backup will begin immediately.

• If you back up across multiple volumes of removable

media, make a note of the numerical sequence on

the label of each media volume.

• It is not possible to stop the backup process while it

is being executed.

Tip!

• The backed-up song data also includes the audio

data for Undo.

• If you are backing up to a CD-RW drive, you can

perform a writing test before the actual backup, or

compare the backed-up data with the original data

after the backup is performed. To use these func-

tions, access the UTILITY screen/Prefer.3 page, and

change the settings of the CD BACKUP/WAV-EXP

MODE area (

→

P.268).

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

164

Chapter

Operation section

Restoring backup data

Song data that was backed up on a storage device can

be restored (loaded) back into the AW2816’s internal

hard disk.

Press the [FILE] key → [F2] key.

The FILE screen/Restore page will appear, where

you can perform Restore operations.

Move the cursor to the SOURCE area

located in the lower left of the display, and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the drive

on which the backup data was saved.

Select “ATAPI” when restoring from the internal

CD-RW drive, or the corresponding SCSI ID

when restoring from an external drive.

If you are restoring from a CD-RW drive or

MO drive, insert the media into the drive.

If restoring from a CD-RW drive, hold down the

[SHIFT] key and press the [F2] key to open the

tray of the CD-RW drive, and insert the CD-R/

RW media. Hold down the [SHIFT] key and press

the [F1] key to close the tray of the CD-RW drive.

If the backup extended across multiple volumes of

media, you must be sure to insert the ﬁrst volume of

media.

Press the [ENTER] key.

The list in the upper part of display will show the

backup data that has been saved in the selected

drive.

Move the cursor to the list in the upper

part of the display, and use the [DATA/JOG]

dial to select the song data that you want

to restore. Then press the [ENTER] key.

The RESTORE SONG button will change from

DISABLE to ENABLE, indicating that the song

data has been selected for restoration. The “O”

symbol in the left of the list will change to “●” to

indicate song data that has been selected for res-

toration.

If you want to restore the data for multiple

songs, repeat step 5.

Tip!

• If you want to restore all song data, move the cursor

to the ALL ENABLE button located in the center of

the display, and press the [ENTER] key.

• If you want to exclude all song data from the selec-

tion, move the cursor to the ALL DISABLE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

When you have ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the EXECUTE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

Restore operation.

165

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

Operation section

To execute the Restore operation, move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key. To cancel without restoring,

move the cursor to the CANCEL button

and press the [ENTER] key.

When you move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key, the Restore operation will

begin.

• It is not possible to stop the Restore operation while

it is in progress.

• If the internal hard disk contains a song whose name

is identical with the name of a song being restored,

two identically-named songs will exist on the hard

disk. We recommend that you edit the name of one

of the songs to avoid confusion.

• Restore cannot be executed if the internal hard disk

does not contain enough space to load the backup

data.

Tip!

By formatting the internal hard disk and then restor-

ing the song data, you can make the data occupy con-

secutive areas of the hard disk, just as when Defrag

(

→

P.166) is executed.

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

166

Chapter

Operation section

Tidying up the data of the internal hard disk

(Defrag)

The Defrag operation re-orders the data on the inter-

nal hard disk so that each piece of data is located in

physically consecutive areas on the hard disk.

When you record immediately after formatting the

internal hard disk, the audio data will be written on

physically consecutive areas of the hard disk. How-

ever as you continue to record and edit the data, sin-

gle items of continuous audio data may be written to

separate locations that are distributed across the hard

disk. (Such a state is referred to as “fragmentation.”) If

fragmentation becomes severe, the access time will

be degraded, causing the audio to “skip” during play-

back, or it may become impossible to create a new

song even though there should be sufﬁcient free space

on the disk. You can resolve such problems by execut-

ing Defrag.

• In rare cases, data may be lost due to read/write

errors during the Defrag operation. Important song

data on the internal hard disk must be backed up

before you use this operation.

• Execution of the Defrag operation will require

approximately one hour per GB of data. The power

of the AW2816 must not be turned off during this

time. Doing so may irreparably damage the hard

disk and/or data in a way that cannot be recovered.

Do not use the Defrag operation if there is a possi-

bility of power failure due to lightning strikes or any

other reason.

Tip!

You can produce essentially the same results as the

Defrag operation by backing up all your songs, for-

matting the internal hard disk, and then restoring the

songs. For details on backing up songs, refer to

page 162.

Press the [FILE] key → [F3] key.

The FILE screen/Disk Util. page will appear.

Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select

“INT.IDE,” and press the [ENTER] key.

A display like the following will appear.

Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button in

the DEFRAG area, and press the [ENTER]

key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm that

you want to execute the Defrag operation.

To execute Defrag, move the cursor to the

OK button and press the [ENTER] key. To

cancel without executing, move the cursor

to the CANCEL button and press the

[ENTER] key.

When you move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key, the current song will be

saved, and then the Defrag operation will begin.

While Defrag is being executed, the state of

progress and the estimated remaining time will

be displayed in a popup window.

If you want to cancel Defrag processing

before it is completed, press the [ENTER]

key.

The process will be halted, and you will return to

the display of step 2.

Tip!

• The time required for Defrag to be completed will

depend on the structure of the song and on the

arrangement of data. In some cases, processing may

take less time than the remaining time displayed in

the popup window.

• If the Defrag operation is not necessary, a message

of “Defrag Cluster Not Found!” will be displayed

when you execute step 4, and Defrag will not be

executed.

• If an error in the song data is found while Defrag is

being processed, that song will be skipped, and

Defrag processing will continue. In this case, infor-

mation about the song in which the error was found

will be displayed immediately after Defrag is com-

pleted.

• If a hard disk read/write error occurs during Defrag

processing, the contents of the error will be dis-

played, and Defrag will be halted.

167

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

Operation section

Writing a track to a WAV ﬁle

(Exporting a WAV ﬁle)

The audio data of a desired track/virtual track can be

converted into a WAV ﬁle and written to a storage

device such as a CD-RW drive or MO drive. This func-

tion is convenient when you want to use a waveform

editing program on your computer to edit audio data

that was recorded on the AW2816.

To write track data as a WAV ﬁle, use the “EXPORT”

audio data editing command that was explained in

chapter 7. You can select a Track, Part, or Region as

the area of data to be written. (For more information

about tracks, parts, and regions, refer to page 108.) As

the range of tracks to be written, you can select a spe-

ciﬁc track, all tracks 1–16, or the stereo track. When

writing the data of a Part area, the speciﬁed part of

either the speciﬁed track or of all tracks will be writ-

ten.

Cautions when writing to a WAV

ﬁle

• Before you can write WAV ﬁles to an external

hard disk or MO drive, you must format that

drive/media in “FAT16” format (→P.160). WAV

ﬁles cannot be written to a 640 MB or 1.3 GB

MO disk, or to a drive/media that has been for-

matted in FAT32 format.

• If a single speciﬁed track is written, one monau-

ral WAV ﬁle will be created. If all tracks are writ-

ten, a separate monaural WAV ﬁle will be

created for each track. A stereo WAV ﬁle will be

created for paired tracks and for the stereo track.

• When writing WAV ﬁles to a CD-RW drive, only

one ﬁle can be written to each volume of CD-R/

RW media. For this reason, it is not possible to

add new WAV ﬁles to media on which a WAV

ﬁle has already been recorded, or to write multi-

ple tracks simultaneously.

• It is not possible to write a WAV ﬁle whose size

exceeds the free capacity of the media. The fol-

lowing table shows the capacity that is needed to

write WAV ﬁles for one minute of audio data.

* All times shown are approximate.

* A stereo WAV file will occupy the space of two tracks.

• Execution of the WAV ﬁle export operation

requires a longer time than the actual time of the

WAV ﬁle. It is not possible to halt the operation

while it is taking place.

• Even when writing a WAV ﬁle for the same time

area, writing in Region units will require less

time than writing a Track unit or Part unit.

Checking the free space on the

internal hard disk

In order to write a WAV ﬁle to an external storage

device, the internal hard disk must have as much or

more free space as the WAV ﬁle that will be written.

For example in order to write a WAV ﬁle for a ﬁve-

minute stereo track, there must be enough free space

to allow ﬁve minutes or more recording on two tracks

of the current song.

You can use the following procedure to check the free

space on the internal hard disk.

Use the REC TRACK SELECT [1]–[16] keys

to select record-ready mode for the same

number of tracks as the WAV ﬁle(s) that

you want to write.

If you want to write a WAV ﬁle for the stereo

track, as in the example above, press the REC

TRACK SELECT [1]/[2] keys.

Press the [METER] key → [F2] key to display

the METER screen/Meter 2 page.

The REMAIN area in the upper left of the display

will indicate the remaining time (hours: minutes)

that can be recorded on the record-ready tracks.

If you want to write a ﬁve-minute WAV ﬁle, as in

the example above, make sure that there is at

least ﬁve minutes of time remaining.

Tip!

If there is not enough free area, you can try executing

the Song Optimize operation to delete unused audio

data. If there is still not enough free area, back up the

song, delete unneeded virtual tracks (i.e., virtual

tracks that are not currently assigned to tracks), and

then execute the Song Optimize operation. For more

information about the Song Optimize operation, refer

to “Chapter 10. Managing songs.”

Quantiza-

tion bits

Sampling

frequency

Per track

Per 16

tracks

16 bit 44.1 kHz 5.2 MB 83 MB

16 bit 48 kHz 5.6 MB 90 MB

24 bit 44.1 kHz 7.8 MB 124 MB

24 bit 48 kHz 8.5 MB 135 MB

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

168

Chapter

Operation section

Exporting tracks to WAV ﬁles

Here’s how to use the TR Edit page to export (write)

audio data from tracks 1–16 to WAV ﬁles.

Press the [EDIT] key → [F1] (TR Edit) key.

The EDIT screen/TR Edit page will appear. For

details on the contents of the display, refer to

page 111.

Move the cursor to the TRACK menu if you

want to write data in Track units, to the

PART menu if you want to write data in

Part units, or to the REGION menu if you

want to write data in Region units. Then

press the [ENTER] key.

Tip!

To write the stereo track as a WAV ﬁle, select the

TRACK menu.

Move the cursor to the button of the

EXPORT command, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The parameters of the EXPORT command will

appear.

According to the menu that you selected in

step 3, move the cursor to the parame-

ter(s) that you want to set, and press the

[ENTER] key.

• If you selected the TRACK menu

TRACK parameter

Select the track(s) that will be written as a WAV

ﬁle. You can select 1–16, AL, or ST. If you select a

track 1–16, the individual track will be written as

a monaural WAV ﬁle. (A paired track will be

written as a stereo WAV ﬁle.) If you select AL, a

monaural WAV ﬁle for each of the 16 tracks (or a

stereo WAV ﬁle for each pair of tracks) will be

written. If you select ST, the stereo track will be

written to a stereo WAV ﬁle.

• If you selected the PART menu

TRACK parameter

Select the track(s) that will be written as a WAV

ﬁle. You can select 1–16 or AL. The type of WAV

ﬁle that will be created is the same as for the

TRACK parameter of the TRACK menu.

START parameter

Specify the beginning of the area that will be

written as a WAV ﬁle.

END parameter

Specify the end of the area that will be written as

a WAV ﬁle.

• If you selected the REGION menu

REGION parameter

Specify the region that will be written as a WAV

ﬁle.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [CURSOR] keys

to set the parameters, and then press the

[ENTER] key.

169

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

Operation section

Move the cursor to the TO DRIVE parame-

ter, and press the [ENTER] key.

The following display will appear.

1 DRIVE

Select the internal CD-RW drive or an external

SCSI device.

B FROM

If you selected the TRACK or PART menu in step

4, the TR area will indicate the track number, the

V area will indicate the virtual track number, and

the NAME area will indicate the track name. If

you selected the REGION menu, the region

name will be displayed.

If you selected the PART or REGION in step 4,

the selected length will be displayed below.

Move the cursor to the DRIVE area, turn

the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the writing

destination drive, and press the [ENTER]

key.

Select “ATAPI” if you want to select the internal

CD-RW drive, or select a SCSI ID if you want to

select an external SCSI device.

If all tracks are selected as the writing source, an

error message will be displayed if you attempt to

select the CD-RW drive as the writing destination.

Tip!

If you select the CD-RW drive as the writing destina-

tion, you may perform a data writing test before the

data is actually written, or compare the written data

with the source data to verify that it was written cor-

rectly. These settings are made in the CD BACKUP/

WAV-EXP MODE area of the UTILITY screen/Prefer.3

page. For details refer to page 268.

If necessary, insert media into the writing

destination drive.

If you are writing to the CD-RW drive, press the

[SHIFT] key + [F2] key to open the tray of the

CD-RW drive, and insert the CD-R/RW media.

Press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] key, and the tray of

the CD-RW drive will close.

If you are writing to an MO drive, insert media

that has been formatted in FAT16 format.

If you selected an external hard disk or MO drive

as the writing destination, the following display

will appear if that drive already contains one or

more WAV ﬁles.

Tip!

In the above list, “ xxx” indicates a lower directory

(xxx= directory name), and “ ” indicates the

next higher directory. You can move between directo-

ries by moving the cursor to these symbols and press-

ing the [ENTER] key.

Move the cursor to the EXIT button, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The writing destination drive will be conﬁrmed,

and you will return to the screen for selecting the

various parameters of the EXPORT command.

If you want to assign a name to the WAV

ﬁle, move the cursor to the TO FILE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will appear, allowing you to

input a name for the WAV ﬁle. Input the ﬁle-

name, move the cursor to the OK button, and

press the [ENTER] key. (For details on inputting

characters, refer to page 37.)

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

170

Chapter

Operation section

Characters that can be used in a ﬁlename are

limited to the following.

• When writing to CD-R/RW media

.......... A–Z 0–9 _

• When writing to media other than CD-R/RW

.......... A–Z a–z 0–9 _ ! # & + - ( ) .

• By default, the track name or region name plus a

ﬁlename extension of .WAV will be the ﬁlename.

• It is not possible to use a period at the beginning of

the ﬁlename.

• If you input any characters other than those listed

above, they will be converted into an underscore (_).

• If you select “AL” for the TRACK parameter, it will

not be possible to edit the ﬁlename. The track name

plus .WAV will be the ﬁlename.

If you want 24 bit audio tracks to be con-

verted to 16 bit data when they are writ-

ten, move the cursor to the TO SIZE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

If the current song uses 24 bit quantization, you

can specify that the lower 8 bits be discarded

and the data written as a 16 bit WAV ﬁle. Use the

[DATA/JOG] dial to change the setting to 16 (bit),

and press the [ENTER] key.

Tip!

• Omit this step if you want to export the data as a 24

bit WAV ﬁle.

• If the current song is 16 bit, the setting of the TO

SIZE parameter cannot be changed.

Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

Export operation.

To export the WAV ﬁle, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

To cancel without exporting, move the cursor to

the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

It is not possible to halt the operation while the WAV

ﬁle is being exported.

Tip!

• If the export destination device (MO or external

hard disk) contains an identically-named ﬁle, a

popup window will ask you whether you want to

overwrite the ﬁle.

• If anything has been stored on the writing destina-

tion CD-RW media, a popup window will ask you

whether it is ok to erase the media. Move the cursor

to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key to erase

the media and then export the data.

• If you set the TRACK parameter to “AL,” WAV ﬁles

will be written in the order of tracks 1–16.

• If the free space on the media is used up while the

data is being written, exporting of subsequent tracks

will be halted, and they will not be written as WAV

ﬁles.

171

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

Operation section

Exporting virtual tracks to WAV

ﬁles

Here’s how to use the V.TR Edit page to export (write)

audio data from a virtual track 1–8 of the speciﬁed

track to a WAV ﬁle. The basic procedure is essentially

the same as in the TR Edit page.

Press the [EDIT] key → [F2] (V.TR Edit) key.

The EDIT screen/V.TR Edit page will appear. For

details on the contents of the display, refer to

page 116.

Use the REC TRACK SELECT [1]–[16] keys

to select the track (1–16) that contains the

virtual track you want to export.

As you switch tracks, the track names and track

view of virtual tracks 1–8 will also change.

Move the cursor to the TRACK menu if you

want to write data in Track units, to the

PART menu if you want to write data in

Part units, or to the REGION menu if you

want to write data in Region units. Then

press the [ENTER] key.

Move the cursor to the button of the

EXPORT command, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The parameters of the EXPORT command will

appear.

According to the menu that you selected in

step 3, move the cursor to the parame-

ter(s) that you want to set, and press the

[ENTER] key.

• If you selected the TRACK menu

TRACK parameter

Select the virtual track that will be written as a

WAV ﬁle. If the selected virtual track is paired, a

stereo WAV ﬁle will be written.

• If you selected the PART menu

TRACK parameter

Select the virtual track 1–8 that will be written as

a WAV ﬁle. If the selected virtual track is paired,

a stereo WAV ﬁle will be written.

START parameter

Specify the beginning of the area that will be

written as a WAV ﬁle.

END parameter

Specify the end of the area that will be written as

a WAV ﬁle.

• If you selected the REGION menu

REGION parameter

Specify the region that will be written as a WAV

ﬁle.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [CURSOR] keys

to set the parameters, and then press the

[ENTER] key.

Move the cursor to the TO DRIVE parame-

ter, and press the [ENTER] key.

Move the cursor to the DRIVE area located

in the upper left of the display, turn the

[DATA/JOG] dial to select the writing desti-

nation drive, and press the [ENTER] key.

Select “ATAPI” if you want to select the internal

CD-RW drive, or select a SCSI ID if you want to

select an external SCSI device.

Move the cursor to the EXIT button, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The writing destination drive will be conﬁrmed,

and you will return to the screen for selecting the

various parameters of the EXPORT command.

As necessary, use the TO FILE parameter

and TO SIZE parameter to change the

name of the WAV ﬁle and its quantization

(number of bits).

For details on the TO FILE and TO SIZE parame-

ters, refer to page 169 to 170.

Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

Export operation.

To export the WAV ﬁle, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

To cancel without exporting, move the cursor to

the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

172

Chapter

Operation section

Loading a WAV ﬁle into a track

(Importing a WAV ﬁle)

Here’s how a WAV ﬁle stored on CD-R/RW or MO

media or on an external hard disk can be loaded and

assigned to an audio track of the AW2816. For exam-

ple this provides a convenient way for audio data that

was edited using waveform editing software on your

computer to be returned to the AW2816, or to use

WAV ﬁles from a commercially-available CD-ROM in

an AW2816 song.

Press the [EDIT] key → [F4] key.

The EDIT screen/WavImport page will appear, in

which you can load WAV ﬁles.

Move the cursor to the DRIVE area in the

upper left of the display, and turn the

[DATA/JOG] dial to select the drive that

contains the WAV ﬁle. Also, insert media

into the load source drive.

Tip!

• If you are importing a WAV ﬁle from CD-R/RW

media, press the [SHIFT] key + [F2] (CD UNLOAD)

key to open the tray of the CD-RW drive, and insert

the media that contains the WAV ﬁle.

• It is also possible to load a WAV ﬁle from an

ISO9660 format CD-ROM or mixed mode CD-ROM

(data track). However, Macintosh (HFS) CD-ROMs

and CD Extra data sections are not supported.

Press the [ENTER] key.

The AW2816 will recognize the WAV ﬁles of the

media inserted in the drive, and will display the

ﬁles as follows.

1 File list

This area lists the WAV ﬁles stored on the

selected drive. The FILE column shows the ﬁle-

name, and the TOTAL column shows the length

of the WAV ﬁle. The TYPE column displays a

or symbol to indicate whether the WAV ﬁle is

monaural or stereo, and the number at the right

indicates the quantization (16/24 bit) of the ﬁle.

B PASTE TO

Select the track to which the WAV ﬁle will be

assigned.

C Speciﬁed point

Specify the location at which the WAV ﬁle will

be placed in the track.

D TYPE

Select whether the WAV ﬁle will be inserted into

the track (Insert) or overwritten (OverWrite).

Tip!

If the CD-RW drive is selected, the tray will close as

soon as you press the [ENTER] key, and the AW2816

will recognize the CD-R/RW media.

173

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

Operation section

Move the cursor to the ﬁle list, and turn

the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the WAV ﬁle

that you want to import.

If the desired WAV ﬁle is in another directory,

move the cursor to the symbol and press the

[ENTER] key to move to the appropriate direc-

tory.

The AW2816 will only recognize ﬁles that have the

same sampling frequency as the current song, and

whose ﬁlename ends in an extension of “.wav”. No

other WAV ﬁles will be displayed in the ﬁle list.

Tip!

• Regardless of the quantization (number of bits) of

the current song, either 16 bit or 24 bit WAV ﬁles

can be loaded. If the WAV ﬁle has a different quanti-

zation than the current song, the quantization will

be converted when the data is loaded. WAV ﬁles

other than 16 bit or 24 bit are not supported.

• Move the cursor to the “ ” symbol in the ﬁle

list and press the [ENTER] key to return to the next

higher directory.

Move the cursor to the PASTE TO area, and

turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to specify the

track number (TR area) and virtual track

number (V area) for the import destination

track.

If you selected a stereo WAV ﬁle in step 4, you

can select odd-numbered/even-numbered pairs

of track numbers. In this case, the same virtual

track number will always be assigned.

Move the cursor to the location area, and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial to specify the loca-

tion in the track at which the WAV ﬁle will

be placed.

Move the cursor to the TYPE area. Select

“Insert” if you want to insert the WAV ﬁle

into the track, or “OverWrite” if you want

to overwrite the existing data.

If you select Insert, the audio data following the

speciﬁed location will be moved backward by

the length of the WAV ﬁle.

When you have ﬁnished making all set-

tings, move the cursor to the EXECUTE

button and press the [ENTER] key.

You will be asked to conﬁrm execution of the

Import operation.

To execute the Import operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

To cancel without executing, move the cursor to

the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

It is not possible to halt the operation while a WAV

ﬁle is being loaded.

Tip!

After the WAV ﬁle has been loaded, you can press the

[UNDO] key to return to the state prior to loading.

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

174

Chapter

Operation section

Loading CD audio into a track

(CD-DA Import)

Audio data (CD-DA) from a CD inserted into the CD-

RW drive can be loaded and assigned to a track of the

AW2816. This allows you to load materials from a

commercially available sampling CD.

The unauthorized copying or reuse of commercially

available music or sound data is forbidden, with the

exception of personal use or other use allowed by

Tip!

In addition to conventional audio CDs, you can also

load audio data from a mixed mode CD-ROM (track 2

or later), or a CD Extra audio track (ﬁrst session).

Enabling CD-DA loading

When the AW2816 is in the default state, CD-DA

loading is prohibited. Use the following procedure to

enable CD-DA import operations.

Press the [UTILITY] key → [F3] key.

The UTILITY screen/Prefer.3 page will appear.

Move the cursor to the DISABLE button in

the CD/DAT DIGITAL REC area, and press

the [ENTER] key.

A warning regarding copyright will be displayed.

Move the cursor to the NEXT button and press

the [ENTER] key to continue to the second page.

After you have read and understood this

warning, move the cursor to the YES but-

ton in the second page and press the

[ENTER] key.

The button display will change to “ENABLE,” and

CD-DA import operations will be enabled.

Tip!

When you want to input copy-protected digital signals

from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack or a digital I/O

card installed in the OPTION I/O slot, you will need

to switch the CD/DAT DIGITAL REC button to

ENABLE in the same way.

175

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

Operation section

Loading CD-DA data and assign-

ing it to a track

Load an existing song from the internal

hard disk (or create a new song with a

sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz).

CD-DA data can only be assigned to a track of a

song whose sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz.

Tip!

You can also import CD-DA data into a 24 bit song. In

this case, the CD-DA data will be converted into 24

bit audio data.

Press the [EDIT] key → [F3] key.

The EDIT screen/CD Import page will appear,

where you can load CD-DA data.

Move the cursor to the DRIVE area in the

upper left of the display, and turn the

[DATA/JOG] dial to select a CD-RW drive.

Select “ATAPI” to select the internal CD-RW

drive, or the corresponding SCSI ID to select an

external CD-RW drive.

Press the [SHIFT] + [F2] (CD UNLOAD).

The tray of the CD-RW drive will open.

Insert the media into the tray of the CD-

RW drive, and press the [SHIFT] key + [F1]

(CD LOAD).

The tray of the CD-RW drive will close, and the

display will change as follows.

1 Track list

This lists the audio tracks of the CD inserted in

the CD-RW drive.

B PASTE TO

Select the track to which the CD-DA data will be

assigned.

C Specify point

Specify the location in the track to which the CD-

DA data will be assigned.

D TYPE

Specify whether the CD-DA data will be inserted

into the track (Insert) or overwritten (OverWrite).

E EXTRACT POINT

Use the START and END settings to specify the

range that will actually be loaded from the audio

selected in 1.

Move the cursor to the track list, and turn

the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the CD audio

track that will be loaded.

Move the cursor to the EXTRACT POINT

area, and use the CURSOR [ ]/[ ] keys

and the [DATA/JOG] dial to specify the

beginning (START) and end of the range

that will be loaded.

START and END can be speciﬁed in units of min-

utes/seconds/frame (1/75 seconds).

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

176

Chapter

Operation section

Move the cursor to the PASTE TO area, and

turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to specify the

track number (TR area) and virtual track

number (V area) of the track into which the

data will be loaded.

Since CD-DA data is always loaded in stereo, the

track number will be selected as an odd-num-

bered/even-numbered pair. The same virtual

track number will always be assigned for both

tracks.

Move the cursor to the location point set-

ting, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to spec-

ify the location in the track at which the

CD-DA audio data will be placed.

Move the cursor to the TYPE area, and

select “Insert” if you want to insert the CD-

DA data into the track, or “OverWrite” if

you want to overwrite the existing data.

If you select “Insert,” audio data following the

speciﬁed location will be moved backward

according to the length of the loaded CD-DA

data.

When you have ﬁnished making all set-

tings, move the cursor to the EXECUTE

button and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

CD-DA Import operation.

To execute the operation, move the cursor

to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key.

To cancel without importing, move the cursor to

the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

It is not possible to halt the CD-DA Import operation

while it is being executed.

Tip!

• The time required for loading CD-DA data will

depend on the reading speed that is set in the FILE

screen/Disk Util. page (

→

P.248).

• After loading is completed, you can press the

[UNDO] key to return to the state prior to loading.

177

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

Operation section

Playing an audio CD (CD Play)

An internal or external CD-RW drive can be used to

play back a conventional audio CD or CD-R/RW

media to which audio data has been written (CD Play

function).

It is not possible to play CD-R media that has not

been ﬁnalized.

Tip!

The CD Play function is also able to play audio from a

mixed-mode CD-ROM (only track 2 and later) or CD

Extra (ﬁrst session only).

Press the [CD] key → [F2] key.

The CD Play page will appear, where you can

use a CD-RW drive to play back an audio CD.

Move the cursor to the DRIVE area in the

upper left of the display, use the [DATA/

JOG] dial to select the CD-RW drive, and

press the [ENTER] key.

Press the [SHIFT] key + [F2] key.

The tray of the CD-RW drive will open.

Insert the audio CD that you want to play

into the tray, and press the [SHIFT] key +

[F1] key.

The tray of the CD-RW drive will close.

Move the cursor to the button in the CD

PLAY MODE area, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The button in the CD PLAY MODE area will

change from OFF to ON, and the CD Play func-

tion will be on. The display will show track infor-

mation for the CD that is inserted in the CD-RW

drive.

A This area indicates the currently selected

track number (TRACK area) and the elapsed

time (TIME area).

B This area lists the track numbers on the CD

(TRACK area), and the time length of each

track (TIME area).

It is not possible to switch to another screen while the

CD Play function is on.

Press the PLAY [ ] key to play a track, or

the STOP [ ] key to stop.

During playback, the audio output of the CD-RW

drive will be sent directly to the stereo output

channel. Use the STEREO fader to adjust the vol-

ume.

When the CD Play function is on, the keys of the

transport section will have the following func-

tions.

* The FF [ ]/REW[ ] keys can be used only

when the audio CD is stopped. Fast-forward and

rewind operations will be executed only while

you continue pressing the FF [ ] or REW[ ]

keys.

Tip!

You can also select tracks by moving the cursor to the

list in the right side of the display, and using the

[DATA/JOG] dial and [ENTER] key.

• While the CD Play function is on, no signals other

than the audio output of the CD-RW drive will be

sent to the stereo bus.

• While an audio CD is playing, the access indicator in

the display section will blink.

Key Function

PLAY [ ] key Play the audio CD

STOP [ ] key Stop the audio CD

FF [ ]/REW[ ] keys Fast-forward/rewind

[ ]/[ ] keys Select tracks

Using the internal hard disk/external storage devices

178

Chapter

Operation section

To turn off the CD Play function, move the

cursor to the button in the CD PLAY MODE

area, and press the [ENTER] key.

Mastering

179

Chapter

Operation section

Mastering

This chapter explains the Mastering function that lets you use a CD-

RW drive to create an audio CD.

About mastering

The AW2816 can write audio data from the stereo

track of a song to CD-R/RW media in CD-DA format.

CD-R/RW media that has been written in this way can

be played back on a CD-RW drive or on a conven-

tional CD player in the same way as an audio CD.

Some CD players or CD-ROM drives that do not sup-

port CD-R/RW may be unable to play CD-R/RW

media to which audio data has been written.

Stereo tracks that can be mastered

To perform mastering, you select one or more songs

that contain the stereo tracks you want to write, and

write these stereo tracks to the CD-R/RW media.

However in order to be usable for mastering, the song

must have a quantization of 16 bits or 24 bits and a

sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz, must be saved on

the internal hard disk, and the stereo track must be

longer than four seconds.

• Mastering cannot be performed for a stereo track

that is part of a song whose sampling frequency is

48 kHz.

• In the case of a 24 bit/44.1 kHz stereo track, the

lower 8 bits will be discarded when the data is writ-

ten, converting the track into 16 bit/44.1 kHz data.

Media that can be used with the CD-RW drive

A CD-RW drive supports two types of media: “CD-R”

which allows data to be stored and only added to, and

“CD-RW” which allows the stored data to be erased

and rewritten. These two types of media have the fol-

lowing features.

• CD-R

CD-R media allows data to be stored, and addi-

tional data to be stored later. Data that has been

written cannot be erased and re-written. CD-R

media is available mainly in 650 MB and 700

MB capacities.

CD-R media to which audio data has been writ-

ten by the AW2816’s mastering function can be

played on CD-RW drives and on most CD play-

ers once the “Finalize” operation has been per-

formed.

• CD-RW

CD-RW media allows all recorded data to be

erased and re-written. It does not allow addi-

tional increments of data to be stored, as does

CD-R. Most CD-RW media is available in a

capacity of 650 MB.

CD-RW media to which audio data has been

written by the AW2816’s mastering function can

be played back on CD-RW drives and on some

CD players. However at present, you should be

aware that most CD players do not support CD-

RW.

Mastering

180

Chapter

Operation section

Track At Once and Disc At Once

Data can be written to CD-R/RW media in one of the

following two ways.

• Track At Once

This method writes data in units of tracks (areas

on the CD to which individual items of audio

data are written), and can be used only for CD-R

media.

When the Track At Once method is used to write

data to CD-R media, processing will pause after

each track is written, and this will create approx-

imately two seconds of silence between each

track. CD-R media that was written using this

method allows additional audio data to be added

later.

In order for CD-R media written using Track At

Once to be playable on a CD-RW drive or a con-

ventional CD player, a process called “Finalize”

must be performed on that disc to write informa-

tion such as track locations. However once the

CD-R media has been ﬁnalized, no further data

can be recorded on it.

• Disc At Once

This method writes data for all tracks at once,

and can be used for either CD-R or CD-RW

media. Unlike the Track At Once method, pro-

cessing will not pause between tracks even when

multiple tracks are written, but will continue

until all data has been written. For this reason, no

silence will be created between tracks.

Since CD-R/RW media written using Disk At

Once is automatically ﬁnalized, it can be played

back without further preparation on a CD-RW

drive or on a conventional CD player. However,

no additional data can be recorded on CD-RW

media, or on CD-R media written using Disc At

Once.

The following table shows how CD-R/RW discs on

which audio data is recorded are compatible with

CD-RW drives and CD players.

: playback possible

O: playback possible on most models

q: playback possible only on some models

×: playback not possible

Recording

Playback

CD-RW drives CD players

CD-R

Disc At Once (Finalized automatically)

No silence between tracks

Track At Once

Finalized Two seconds of silence

between tracks

Two seconds of silence

between tracks

Not yet ﬁnalized

(may add more data)

CD-RW

Disc At Once (Finalized automatically)

No silence between tracks

Track At Once CD-RW media does not support Track At Once

181

Mastering

Operation section

Checking the free space

on the internal hard disk

In order to execute the Mastering operation, the inter-

nal hard disk must have as much or more free space

as the data that will be written to the CD-R/RW

media. You can use the following procedure to check

the free space on the internal hard disk.

Load a 16 bit/44.1 kHz song as the current

song.

If there is no such song on the hard disk, create a

new 16 bit/44.1 kHz song.

Press the REC TRACK SELECT [ST] key to

put the stereo track in record-ready mode.

Press the [METER] key → [F2] key to display

the METER screen/Meter 2 page.

The REMAIN area in the upper part of the display

will indicate the remaining time that can be

recorded on the stereo track (hours/minutes). For

example if you want to create a 60-minute CD,

make sure that there is at least 60 minutes (1

hour) of time remaining.

Tip!

If there is insufﬁcient free area, try executing the

Song Optimize operation to delete unused audio

data. If there is still not enough free space, make a

backup of all songs, delete any virtual tracks that are

not assigned to the current tracks, and then execute

the Song Optimize operation. For details on the Song

Optimize operation, refer to “Chapter 10. Managing

songs.”

Setting the mastering mode

The AW2816 allows you to perform a “writing test”

before actually the mastering data is actually written,

in order to check whether errors will occur during

data transfer. With the default settings of the AW2816,

the writing test is disabled, but you may change this

setting if desired.

Press the [UTILITY] key → [F4] key.

The UTILITY screen/Prefer.3 page will appear.

If you want to perform a writing test before

the mastering operation, turn the TEST

button On and the WRITE button On in the

MASTERING MODE area.

Tip!

• If you turn the TEST button On and the WRITE but-

ton Off, only the writing test will be performed,

without performing the mastering operation. It is

not possible to turn off both the TEST and the

WRITE buttons.

• When using mastering for the ﬁrst time, we recom-

mend that you turn the TEST button On to check

whether there are any problems with the hard disk

and whether the writing speed of the CD-RW drive

is set appropriately.

Mastering

182

Chapter

Operation section

Executing mastering

Here’s how to use the mastering function to write the

stereo track data to CD-R/RW media.

If you want to write the stereo track to CD immedi-

ately after it was recorded, you must ﬁrst save the

current song.

Press the [CD] key → [F1] key.

The CD screen/CD Write page will appear.

Move the cursor to the DRIVE area in the

upper left of the display, use the [DATA/

JOG] dial to select the CD-RW drive, and

press the [ENTER] key.

Select “ATAPI” if you are using an internal CD-

RW drive, or the appropriate SCSI ID if you are

using an external CD-RW drive. When you press

the [ENTER] key, the TRACK AT ONCE and DISC

AT ONCE buttons will become available.

Press the [SHIFT] key + [F2] key.

The tray of the selected CD-RW drive will open.

Insert CD-R/RW media in the tray, and

press the [SHIFT] key + [F1] key.

The tray of the CD-RW drive will close.

Move the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE

button if you want to record using the

Track At Once method, or to the DISC AT

ONCE button if you want to record using

the Disc At Once method. Then press the

[ENTER] key.

If CD-R media was inserted, both the TRACK AT

ONCE and DISC AT ONCE buttons will be avail-

able for selection. If CD-RW media was inserted,

only the DISC AT ONCE button can be selected.

The screen shown below will appear if you insert

CD-R media, move the cursor to the TRACK AT

ONCE button, and press the [ENTER] key.

Tip!

If you insert previously-recorded CD-RW media,

move the cursor to the DISC AT ONCE button and

press the [ENTER] key, a popup window will appear

asking you to conﬁrm erasure of the CD-RW media. If

you want to erase the previously-recorded data and

continue with the mastering operation, move the cur-

sor to the OK button. If you want to cancel the mas-

tering operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL

button. Then press the [ENTER] key.

Move the cursor to the NEW button

located in the lower part of the display,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The list in the right side of the display will show

information for the stereo track that will be writ-

ten to track number 1 of the CD (the name of the

song that includes that stereo track, the data size

of the stereo track, and the copy protect setting).

183

Mastering

Operation section

Move the cursor to the stereo track infor-

mation in the list, and use the [DATA/JOG]

dial to select the stereo track that will be

written to track 1.

In this list, it is not possible to select stereo tracks that

are part of a 48 kHz sampling frequency song, or the

stereo track of a current song that has not been saved

on the hard disk. In addition, there may be cases in

which it will not be possible to select the stereo track

of a song that has not been optimized. (For details on

the Optimize operation, refer to page 154.)

If you want to permit digital copying of the

track you selected in step 7, move the cur-

sor to the COPYRIGHT button located in

the lower part of the screen, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The COPYRIGHT button speciﬁes whether copy-

prohibit ﬂags will be written into the sub-code

channel of the CD. If the button is set to PRO-

HIBIT, the COPY column of corresponding track

will show a symbol, and digital copying of

that track will be prohibited. If you switch the

tal copying of that track will be permitted.

Repeat steps 6–8 to select the stereo tracks

that you want to write to track numbers 2

and following of the CD.

Tip!

• If you move the cursor to the NEW button and press

the [ENTER] key, a new track will be added follow-

ing the last track number.

• If you use the INS button instead of the NEW but-

ton, a new track will be inserted before the currently

selected track number.

• If you use the DEL button, the currently selected

track number will be deleted from the list.

When you use the NEW button or INS button to add a

track number, the same stereo track will be always

selected as the initial setting. Be careful that you do

not inadvertently select the same stereo track twice.

As necessary, use the WRITE SPEED buttons

in the lower left of the display to specify

the writing speed.

The x1/x2/x4/x6 buttons correspond to single,

2x, 4x, and 6x writing speeds. Normally you

should select the fastest speed that your CD-RW

drive supports.

If errors occur repeatedly during writing, select a

slower writing speed.

When you have ﬁnished selecting all the

stereo tracks that will be written to the CD,

move the cursor to the EXECUTE button in

the lower right of the display, and press the

[ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm execu-

tion of the mastering operation.

Mastering

184

Chapter

Operation section

To execute the writing operation, move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

To cancel without executing, move the cursor to

the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

While the data is being written, a popup window

will display the estimated remaining time and the

progress of the operation. When writing is com-

pleted, the tray of the CD-RW will open automat-

ically.

Tip!

If the writing test has been turned on, the test will be

executed ﬁrst, and then the data will be written. If a

problem is detected during the test, a message will be

displayed.

The subsequent steps will differ as follows, depending

on whether you are using Track At Once or Disc At

Once.

■ When using Track At Once

When writing using Track At Once has been com-

pleted, a popup window will ask you whether you

want to Finalize the media.

If you want to ﬁnalize the disc, move the cursor to the

OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The tray of the

CD-RW will close automatically, and the disc will be

ﬁnalized.

If you do not want to ﬁnalize the disc, move the cur-

sor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

In this case, other audio data can be added later to the

ejected CD-R media.

If you selected the CANCEL button, the following

popup window will appear, asking you whether you

want to write again on other media.

If you want to create another disc containing the con-

tents of the list in step 9, insert a new CD-R disc,

move the cursor to the OK button, and press the

[ENTER] key. The CD-RW tray will close automati-

cally, and writing will be executed once again.

■ When using Disc At Once

When writing using Disc At Once has been com-

pleted, a popup window will ask whether you want to

write once more on new media.

If you want to create another CD with the same con-

tents, insert a new CD-R/RW disc, move the cursor to

the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key. The tray of

the CD-RW drive will close automatically, and writing

will be executed once again.

Tip!

When writing is executed multiple times in succes-

sion, processing of the second and subsequent disc

will take less time than for the ﬁrst disc.

185

Mastering

Operation section

Finalizing a disc

If CD-R media was written using Track At Once, data

from other stereo tracks can be added as long as the

disc has not been ﬁnalized. However, media that has

not yet been ﬁnalized cannot be played on a CD-RW

drive or conventional CD player. To make CD-R

media playable on a CD player, use the following pro-

cedure to ﬁnalize it.

Press the [CD] key → [F1] key.

The CD screen/CD Write page will appear. Make

sure that the CD-RW is selected in the DRIVE

area located in the upper left of the display.

Hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the

[F2] key to open the tray of the CD-RW

drive, and insert the CD-R media to be

ﬁnalized into the tray.

Hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [F1]

key to close the tray.

Move the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE

button, and press the [ENTER] key.

The FINALIZE button will appear at the left of the

TRACK AT ONCE button. The list in the right side

of the display will show the tracks that have been

written to the CD-R media.

Move the cursor to the FINALIZE button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm execu-

tion of the Finalize operation.

To execute the Finalize operation, move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

To cancel without executing, move the cursor to

the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

It is not possible to halt the operation while Finalize is

being executed.

MIDI

187

Chapter

Operation section

MIDI

This chapter explains how MIDI can be used on the AW2816.

What you can do using MIDI

On the AW2816 you can use MIDI to do the follow-

ing things.

●Synchronize operation with external devices

Synchronization signals such as MTC (MIDI Time

Code) or MIDI Clock can be sent from the AW2816

to an external MIDI device such as a computer or

MIDI sequencer, to synchronize the operation of the

external MIDI device with AW2816 song. (The

AW2816 is also able to receive MTC.)

●Operate the transport/Select recording tracks

MMC (MIDI Machine Control) messages can be

transmitted to the AW2816 from a computer or

other external MIDI device, to remotely control the

AW2816’s transport or to enable/disable tracks for

recording.

●Select scenes

When a scene is recalled on the AW2816, a pro-

gram change can be transmitted to an external MIDI

device. Conversely, program changes can be trans-

mitted from an external MIDI device to the

AW2816 to recall scenes on the AW2816.

●Control mix parameters

When you operate internal AW2816 parameters

such as fader and pan, control change or system

exclusive messages can be transmitted to an exter-

nal MIDI device. These messages can also be trans-

mitted from an external device to the AW2816,

controlling the AW2816’s parameters.

●MIDI Remote functions

The AW2816’s faders 1–8 and [ON] keys 1–8 can

be used to transmit previously-assigned MIDI mes-

sages to remotely control a MIDI tone generator or

other external device.

●Bulk Dump

Internal settings such as libraries and scene memo-

ries can be output as bulk data, and stored on an

external device such as a MIDI sequencer. By trans-

mitting the stored bulk data back to the AW2816, its

internal settings can be restored to a prior condi-

tion.

MIDI

188

Chapter

Operation section

MIDI connectors and the TO HOST connector

The AW2816 provides the following connectors for

exchanging MIDI messages with external devices.

●MIDI IN connector

This connector receives MIDI messages such as pro-

gram changes, control changes, and system exclu-

sive data.

●MIDI OUT/THRU connector

By switching an internal setting, you can make this

connector function either as a MIDI OUT connector

or a MIDI THRU connector. When used as a MIDI

OUT connector, this transmits MIDI messages that

were produced inside the AW2816, such as pro-

gram changes, control changes, and MIDI clock.

When used as a MIDI THRU connector, this re-

transmits the MIDI messages that were received at

the MIDI IN connector. (In this case, none of the

MIDI messages produced inside the AW2816 will

be output.)

●MTC OUT connector

This is a dedicated output connector for MTC (MIDI

Time Code). MTC will always be transmitted from

this connector, regardless of the internal settings.

●TO HOST connector

A separately sold cable can be used to connect this

connector to the serial port of your computer,

allowing MIDI messages to be transferred between

the AW2816 and your computer. Bi-directional data

transfer can be performed over a single cable con-

nected to the TO HOST connector.

The TO HOST connector cannot be used at the same

time as the MIDI IN and MIDI OUT/THRU connec-

tors.

189

MIDI

Operation section

Using the MIDI connectors to connect the

AW2816 to external devices

Making connections

If you want MIDI messages to be transferred between

the AW2816 and an external device that has MIDI

connectors, use separately sold MIDI cables to make

the following connections.

●To send messages from the AW2816 to an external

device

Connect the AW2816’s MIDI OUT/THRU connec-

tor to the MIDI IN connector of the external device.

●To send messages from the external device to the

AW2816

Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the external

device to the AW2816’s MIDI IN connector.

●To transmit MTC from the AW2816 to an external

device

Connect the AW2816’s MTC OUT connector to the

MIDI IN connector of the external device.

Tip!

The AW2816’s MTC OUT connector is a special MIDI

connector used to transmit MTC (MIDI Time Code)

when you want the AW2816 and an external device to

operate in synchronization.

Enabling the MIDI IN connector

and MIDI OUT/THRU connector

Here’s how to change the internal settings so that the

AW2816’s MIDI IN and MIDI OUT/THRU connectors

can be used to transmit and receive MIDI.

Tip!

The MTC connector is always enabled, regardless of

the internal settings.

Press the [MIDI] key → [F2] key.

The MIDI screen/MIDI Setup 2 page will appear.

In this page you can specify how MIDI messages

will ﬂow inside the AW2816.

1 MIDI/HOST switch

This switch selects whether the MIDI connectors

(MIDI) or the TO HOST connector (TO HOST)

will be used to input and output MIDI messages.

B OUT/THRU switch

This switch selects whether the MIDI OUT/THRU

connector will function as a MIDI OUT connec-

tor (OUT) or MIDI THRU connector (THRU).

Move the cursor to the MIDI/HOST switch,

and press the [ENTER] key to select

“MIDI.”

When the AW2816 is in the default state, the

MIDI/HOST switch is set to “MIDI.”

Tip!

In this page, signal routes through which MIDI mes-

sages are traveling are indicated by solid lines ( | ),

and signal routes through which MIDI messages are

not traveling are indicated by hollow lines ( || ).

Move the cursor to the OUT/THRU switch,

and press the [ENTER] key to select “OUT.”

When the AW2816 is in the default state, the

OUT/THRU switch is set to “OUT.”

Tip!

If you want to use the MIDI OUT/THRU connector as

a MIDI THRU connector, set the MIDI/HOST switch

= MIDI, and the OUT/THRU switch = THRU.

MIDI IN 1

External MIDI device

(e.g., computer)

MTC OUT

connector

MIDI IN 2

MIDI OUT/THRU

connector

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

connector

AW2816

1 2

MIDI

190

Chapter

Operation section

Using the TO HOST connector to connect the

AW2816 and your computer

Here’s how to use the AW2816’s TO HOST connector

to make connections to your computer.

Making connections

Use a separately sold cable to connect the AW2816’s

TO HOST connector to the serial port of your com-

puter. Using the TO HOST connector allows MIDI

messages to be simultaneously transmitted and

received over a single cable.

It is not possible to use the AW2816’s TO HOST con-

nector to make connections to some Macintosh com-

puters that do not have a modem/printer port. If you

are using this type of computer, make connections

using the MIDI connectors.

Enabling the TO HOST connector

Change the internal settings so that the AW2816 will

use the TO HOST connector to transmit and receive

MIDI.

Press the [MIDI] key → [F2] key.

The MIDI screen/MIDI Setup 2 page will appear.

1 MIDI/HOST switch

This switch selects whether the AW2816 will use

the MIDI connectors (MIDI) or the TO HOST

connector (TO HOST) to input and output MIDI

messages.

B TO HOST

Set the transmission speed of the TO HOST con-

nector as appropriate for the type of computer

you are using.

Move the cursor to the MIDI/HOST switch,

and press the [ENTER] key to select

“HOST.”

Move the cursor to the TO HOST setting,

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

setting appropriate for your computer.

• IBM/PC compatible: PC2 (38.4 kbps)

• NEC PC-9801/9821 series: PC1 (31.25 kbps) or

PC2 (38.4 kbps)

• Apple Macintosh series (models with a modem/

printer port): MAC

RS-232C

DB-9

Connection cable

(YAMAHA-CCJ-PC2)

MODEM

port

AW2816

Apple

Macintosh

computer

Connections to an IBM/PC compatible computer

TO HOST

connector

Connection cable

(YAMAHA-CCJ-MAC)

Connections to an Apple Macintosh computer

AW2816

IBM/PC

compatible

computer

TO HOST

connector

191

MIDI

Operation section

• To use a serial port connection, you will need to sep-

arately provide driver software appropriate for your

system.

• If you are using an NEC PC-9801/9821 series com-

puter, the TO HOST setting (TO HOST PC1 or TO

HOST PC2) will depend on the driver software you

are using. For details refer to the manual for your

software.

• If you are connecting a Macintosh, you must set the

MIDI interface setting of your application to 1 MHz.

• If you want to transmit MTC from the AW2816 to

your computer, we recommend that you separately

obtain a MIDI interface, and connect the AW2816’s

MTC OUT connector to the MIDI IN of your MIDI

interface. Although it is not impossible to output

MTC from the TO HOST connector, this will mean

that MTC and other MIDI messages will be carried

on the same cable, and the timing precision will not

be as good.

MIDI

192

Chapter

Operation section

Using MTC to synchronize the AW2816 and

an external device

Here’s how MTC (MIDI Time Code) can be transmitted

from the AW2816’s MTC OUT connector to synchro-

nize the operation of the AW2816 and an external

device.

Tip!

MTC speciﬁes the current time in units of hours: min-

utes: seconds: frames by converting time code into

MIDI messages. By transmitting MTC from the

AW2816 to an external device such as a computer or

MIDI sequencer, you can synchronize an external

device with the AW2816 song.

Use a MIDI cable to connect the AW2816’s

MTC OUT connector to the MIDI IN con-

nector of the external device (in the case of

a computer, the MIDI IN connector of your

MIDI interface).

By changing the internal settings, you can cause MTC

messages to be output from the MIDI OUT/THRU

connector or TO HOST connector. However with this

method, MTC and the other MIDI messages will be

carried on the same cable, and timing precision will

not be as good. You should use the MTC OUT connec-

tor if possible.

Press the [MIDI] key → [F1] key.

The MIDI screen/MIDI Setup 1 page will appear.

Move the cursor to the MASTER button in

the MTC SYNC area, and press the [ENTER]

key.

When the MASTER button is on, the AW2816

will function as a MTC master (the device that

transmits MTC).

Press the [SONG] key → [F2] key.

The SONG screen/Setting page will appear. In

this page you can select the frame rate of the

time code (the smallest unit of time code, indi-

cating the number of frames into which each sec-

ond is divided).

Move the cursor to the TIME CODE area, and

turn on one of the following four buttons to

select the frame rate.

• 24 button .....24 frames/second

• 25 button .....25 frames/second

• 30 button .....30 frames/second (30 non-drop

frame)

• 30D button ..29.97 frames/second (30 drop

frame)

With the default settings of the AW2816, 30

frames/second is selected.

Tip!

The frame rate you select here affects not only syn-

chronization with external devices, but also affects

the time code displayed in the counter and elsewhere.

To display time code in the counter, move

the cursor to the TIME CODE button in the

DISPLAY area, and press the [ENTER] key.

Make settings on your external device so

that it will follow the MTC messages it

receives, and put it in playback-ready

mode.

At this time, verify that the external device is set

to use the same MTC frame rate as you selected

in step 4.

193

MIDI

Operation section

On the AW2816, begin playing the song.

When the song begins playing, MTC will be

transmitted from the MTC OUT connector, and

the external device will begin running from the

same location. When you stop the AW2816

song, MTC transmission will stop and the exter-

nal device will also stop.

Tip!

• Conversely from the above example, it is also possi-

ble to send MTC from an external device to the

AW2816’s MIDI IN connector, and synchronize the

AW2816 as the MTC slave (the device that receives

MTC). However to stabilize the operation of the

recorder, we recommend that you use the AW2816

as the MTC master whenever possible.

• You can skew (change the time correspondence

between) the running position of the song and the

external device by changing the Time Code Top set-

ting (the time code time corresponding to the begin-

ning of the song) in the SONG screen/Setting page.

MIDI

194

Chapter

Operation section

Using MIDI clock to synchronize the AW2816

and an external device

The AW2816 and an external device can also be syn-

chronized by using MIDI Clock as the synchroniza-

tion data instead of MTC. Use this method if a MIDI

sequencer or rhythm machine that does not support

MTC needs to be synchronized with the AW2816, or

when you want to specify the locate position in units

of measures and beats.

Tip!

• MIDI Clock is timing data that divides each beat

into 24 parts.

• In order to synchronize the operation using MIDI

Clock, you must ﬁrst use the AW2816’s Tempo Map

page to make tempo settings and time signature set-

tings.

Connect the AW2816’s MIDI OUT/THRU

connector to the MIDI IN connector of the

external device. (Alternatively, connect the

AW2816’s TO HOST connector to the serial

port of your computer.)

For details on connections and settings, refer to

page 189 to 190.

Press the [MIDI] key → [F2] key.

The MIDI screen/MIDI Setup 2 page will appear.

A MIDI CLK ON/OFF switch

B MTC ON/OFF switch

Move the cursor to the MIDI CLK ON/OFF

switch, and press the [ENTER] key to turn it

“ON.”

When this switch is ON, MIDI Clock can be

transmitted from the MIDI OUT or TO HOST

connector.

Move the cursor to the MTC ON/OFF

switch, and press the [ENTER] key to turn it

“OFF.”

If both the MIDI CLK ON/OFF switch and MTC

ON/OFF switch are ON, both MIDI Clock and

MTC data will be output from the MIDI OUT or

TO HOST connector. If you are using MIDI Clock

for synchronization, you must be sure to turn the

MTC ON/OFF switch OFF.

Press the [SONG] key → [F2] key, and turn

on the MEASURE button in the DISPLAY

area.

The counter display will be in units of measures/

beats/ticks (1 tick = 1/960 of a quarter note), and

you will be able to specify locate positions in

measure/beat units.

Press the [SONG] key → [F4] key.

The SONG screen Tempo Map page will appear.

This page displays the beat map (METER area) in

which you can input time signature for the song,

and the tempo map (TEMPO area) in which you

can input tempo data. With the default settings, a

time signature of 4/4 and tempo data of

BPM=120.0 are input.

The following information is displayed in the

METER area and TEMPO area.

1 STEP

Displays the number (step number) of the time

signature data.

B MEASURE

Displays the location (measure number) of the

time signature data.

C METER

This is the time signature setting.

D STEP

Displays the number (step number) of the tempo

data.

E MEASURE/BEAT

Displays the location (measure number/beat) of

the tempo data.

F TEMPO

This is the tempo data value.

1 2 3 4 65

195

MIDI

Operation section

Tip!

• In order to use MIDI Clock to synchronize opera-

tions with another device, you must ﬁrst make

tempo settings and time signature settings on the

AW2816 so that the tempo and current location will

be speciﬁed correctly. This is done in the SONG

screen/Tempo Map page.

• It is difﬁcult to specify the tempo afterward, based

on an already-recorded audio track, so if you want

to use the counter in measure display mode or to

use MIDI Clock to synchronize the operation with

another device, you should make Tempo Map set-

tings before you record.

Move the cursor to the METER ﬁelds, and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial to set the time sig-

nature of the ﬁrst measure.

The numerator can be set in the range of 1–8,

and the denominator can be set as 2, 4, or 8.

If you want the time signature to change

during the song, move the cursor to the

NEW button located below the METER

area, and press the [ENTER] key.

New time signature data will be added at step 2.

Move the cursor to the METER area, and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial to specify the measure at which

you want the time signature to change (MEA-

SURE setting). Additional time signature data can

be added in the same way.

Tip!

• A maximum of 26 steps of time signature data can

be input in the METER area.

• If you want to edit time signature data that is at a

different location, move the cursor to the STEP set-

ting, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

desired step number.

• To delete the currently selected time signature data,

move the cursor to the DEL button located below

the METER area and press the [ENTER] key.

It is not possible to change the measure location of

the time signature at step number 1, or to delete it.

Move the cursor to TEMPO in the tempo

map, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to spec-

ify the tempo for the ﬁrst measure.

The tempo (BPM) can be set in a range of 20.0–

300.0.

If you want the tempo to change during

the song, move the cursor to the NEW but-

ton located below the TEMPO area, and

press the [ENTER] key.

New tempo data will be added at step 2. Move

the cursor to the TEMPO area, and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial to specify the measure location

(MEASURE and BEAT ﬁelds) and tempo (TEMPO

ﬁeld) of the desired tempo change. Use the same

procedure to add additional tempo data as

desired.

Tip!

• A maximum of 26 steps of tempo data can be input

in the TEMPO area.

• If you want to edit tempo data that is at a different

location, move the cursor to the STEP setting, and

turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the desired step

number.

• To delete the currently selected tempo data, move

the cursor to the DEL button located below the

TEMPO area and press the [ENTER] key.

• The internal metronome will sound according to the

time signature data and tempo data speciﬁed in this

page.

It is not possible to change the measure location of

the tempo data at step number 1, or to delete it.

Make settings on your external device so

that it will follow the incoming MIDI Clock

data, and put it in playback-ready mode.

Play back the song on the AW2816.

When the AW2816 song begins playing, a MIDI

Start message and then MIDI Clock messages

will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT/THRU

connector or the TO HOST connector, and the

external device will begin operation in synchro-

nization with the MIDI Clock tempo. When the

AW2816 song stops, a MIDI Stop message will

be transmitted, and the external device will also

stop running.

When you perform a locate operation on the

AW2816, a MIDI Song Position Pointer message

will be transmitted to indicate the current loca-

tion in terms of measure/beat/clock, and the

external device will also locate to the corre-

sponding location.

MIDI

196

Chapter

Operation section

Using MMC to control the AW2816

MMC (MIDI Machine Control) messages can be used

to control the transport of the AW2816 from an exter-

nal device. Here’s how you can synchronize the oper-

ation of the AW2816 with an external device such as

a computer or MIDI sequencer, and send MMC mes-

sages from the external device to the AW2816 to

remotely control various operations.

Tip!

• MMC is a group of MIDI messages used to remotely

control operations such as record, playback, stop, or

select/defeat record tracks on devices such as audio

recorders.

• Conversely from the example that is explained

below, you can transmit MMC from the AW2816 to

an external device, so that the external device is

remotely controlled from the AW2816. This method

is used when you need to synchronize the operation

of two AW2816 units (

→

P.197).

Connect the AW2816’s MTC OUT connec-

tor to the MIDI IN connector of the exter-

nal device, and make settings on both

devices so that the external device will fol-

low the MTC that is transmitted from the

AW2816.

For details on using MTC synchronization, refer

to page 192.

Connect the AW2816’s MIDI IN connector

to the MIDI OUT connector of the external

device (or connect the AW2816’s TO HOST

connector to the serial port of your com-

puter).

For details on connections and settings, refer to

page 189 to 190.

In this example, the AW2816 will be the MTC

master/MMC slave (the device that receives

MMC), and the external device will be the MTC

slave/MMC master (the device that transmits

MMC).

Press the [MIDI] key → [F3] key.

The MIDI screen MIDI Setup 1 page will appear.

Move the cursor to the SLAVE button in the

MMC MODE area, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The AW2816 will operate as an MMC slave.

Move the cursor to the numerical box in

the MMC DEVICE area, and use the [DATA/

JOG] dial to set the MMC device ID.

The device ID is a number used to distinguish

between devices when a system contains more

than one MMC-compatible device. The device

ID of the AW2816 can be set in a range of 1–127

(default setting= 1).

Set the external device to the same MMC

device ID that you selected in step 5.

Play back the external device.

When you play back the external device, the cor-

responding command will be transmitted to the

AW2816, and the AW2816 will begin playing.

Immediately after playback begins, the AW2816

will begin transmitting MTC to the external

device, and the external device will begin syn-

chronized operation in accordance with the

incoming MTC data.

When you stop the external device, the corre-

sponding MMC command will be transmitted to

the AW2816, and the AW2816 will stop.

Tip!

MMC can also be used to specify tracks for recording

and to control recording operations from an external

device.

MIDI IN

connector

MTC OUT

connector

MIDI OUT

connector

MIDI IN

connector

MTC master

MMC slave

MTC slave

MMC master

MTC

MMC

External MIDI device

(e.g., computer)

AW2816

197

MIDI

Operation section

Synchronizing two AW2816 units

If you are using two AW2816 units, you can use MMC

and MTC to synchronize their operation. In this case,

you can cascade the stereo bus of one unit into the

stereo bus of the other unit, to mix the stereo buses of

the two units and record the result on the stereo track

of one unit.

As an example, we will explain how two cascaded

AW2816 units can be operated in synchronization

and used as though they were a 32-track recorder.

Tip!

“Cascade connection” is a connection method in

which the output of one device is connected in series

to the input of another device. In this example, it

refers to connections by which the stereo bus of one

AW2816 is input directly into the stereo bus of

another AW2816.

Connect the two AW2816 units as shown

in the diagram below.

On the MTC master AW2816, press the

[MIDI] key → [F1] key.

The MIDI screen MIDI Setup 1 page will appear.

Make sure that the MASTER button is

turned on in the MTC SYNC area.

If it is off, use the cursor and [ENTER] key to turn

on the MASTER button of the SYNC area. This

AW2816 will function as the MTC master.

Move the cursor to the SLAVE button in the

MMC MODE area, and press the [ENTER]

key to turn it on.

The MTC master AW2816 will be set to function

as the MMC slave.

— MTC master unit —

The MTC slave AW2816 cannot function as an MMC

slave. When using MTC and MMC for synchroniza-

tion, the MTC master AW2816 must be the MMC

slave.

On the MTC master/MMC slave AW2816,

press the [SETUP] key → [F1] key to access

the SETUP screen/D.In Setup page.

In this page you can select the word clock source

to which the AW2816 will synchronize.

Make sure that the INT button of the

WORDCLOCK SOURCE area is turned on.

If the INT button is on, the MTC master AW2816

will use its own internal clock as the word clock

source. If the INT button is off, move the cursor

to the button, and press the [ENTER] key to turn

it on.

— MTC master unit —

When transferring digital audio signals between two

AW2816 units operated in synchronization, the gen-

eral rule is to set one unit as the MTC master/word

clock master (the device that transmits the word

clock), and the other unit as the MTC slave/word

clock slave (the device that receives the word clock).

If other methods are used, synchronization operation

may not occur correctly, or the playback pitch may be

incorrect.

MIDI IN

connector

MTC OUT

connector

MIDI OUT

connector

MTC master

MMC slave

Word clock master

MTC slave

MMC master

Word clock slave

MTC

MMC

DIGITAL

STEREO

IN jack

DIGITAL

STEREO

OUT jack

MIDI IN

connector

Use this AW2816 to

perform transport

operations

AW2816 AW2816

MIDI

198

Chapter

Operation section

On the MTC slave AW2816, press the

[MIDI] key → [F1] key to access the MIDI

Setup 1 page.

Move the cursor to the SLAVE button of

the MTC SYNC area, and press the [ENTER]

key to turn it on.

The corresponding AW2816 will be set to func-

tion as the MTC slave.

Move the cursor to the MASTER button of

the MMC MODE area, and press the

[ENTER] key to turn it on.

The MTC slave AW2816 will be set to function as

the MMC master.

— MTC slave unit —

On the MTC slave AW2816, press the

[SETUP] key → [F1] key to access the SETUP

screen/D.In Setup page.

Move the cursor to the D.ST IN button of

the WORDCLOCK SOURCE area, and press

the [ENTER] key.

The clock data included in the signal that is input

from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack of the MTC

slave AW2816 will be selected as the word clock

source. In this state, the MTC slave AW2816 will

also be the word clock slave.

— MTC slave unit —

If the sampling frequency of the two AW2816 units is

not the same, the word clock signal will not lock, and

playback will not occur correctly on the MTC slave

during synchronized playback. If you want two

AW2816 units to play back in synchronization, the

sampling frequency of both songs must be the same.

Move the cursor to the button marked DIS-

ABLE in the STEREO BUS CASCADE area,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The button display will change to ENABLE, and

the stereo bus signal received from the MTC mas-

ter/word clock master unit via the DIGITAL STE-

REO IN jack will be sent directly to the stereo

bus of the MTC slave/word clock slave.

— MTC slave unit —

Tip!

• If you have cascade-connected two AW2816 units,

you should generally set the STEREO fader of the

word clock master at nominal level (0 dB).

• By using the ATT. encoder in the STEREO BUS CAS-

CADE area, you can adjust the input level of the

DIGITAL STEREO IN jack (in this case, the level of

the signal sent from the MTC master/word clock

master AW2816).

On the MTC slave AW2816, press the PLAY

[ ] key.

The MTC master/word clock master will begin

running, and will output MTC. The MTC slave/

word clock slave AW2816 will follow this MTC,

and begin running. The stereo channel output of

the MTC master/word clock master will be sent

directly to the stereo bus of the MTC slave/word

clock slave.

Word clock master

Stereo output channel

Word clock slave

Stereo output channel

Input channels

Monitor channels

Return channels

ST bus

DIGITAL STEREO

OUT jack

DIGITAL STEREO

OUT jack

DIGITAL STEREO

IN jack

199

MIDI

Operation section

If you perform the stereo track record operation

on the MTC slave/word clock slave AW2816, the

stereo output channels of both the word clock

master and slave units will be mixed, and

recorded on the stereo track.

When you perform recording operations on the stereo

track of the MTC slave, press only the REC [ ] key.

(Do not hold down the REC [ ] key and press the

PLAY [ ] key.)

MIDI

200

Chapter

Operation section

Remotely switching AW2816 scenes

By sending program change messages from an exter-

nal device to the AW2816, you can switch the scene

memories of the AW2816. Program change messages

can also be transmitted to an external device when

you switch scenes on the AW2816.

Connect the AW2816’s MIDI IN connector

to the MIDI OUT connector of the external

device, and connect the AW2816’s MIDI

OUT/THRU connector to the MIDI IN con-

nector of the external device. (Alterna-

tively, connect the AW2816’s TO HOST

connector to the serial port of your com-

puter.)

For details on connections and settings, refer to

page 189 to 190.

Press the [MIDI] key → [F1] key.

The MIDI screen/MIDI Setup 1 page will appear.

Move the cursor to the TX (transmit) but-

ton in the PROGRAM CHANGE area, and

press the [ENTER] key to switch the button

ON. In the same way, switch the RX

(receive) button in the PROGRAM

CHANGE area ON as well.

With these settings, program changes can be

transmitted and received.

Move the cursor to the Tx CH numerical

box in the MIDI CH. area, and set the MIDI

channel that will be used for transmission.

Then move the cursor to the numerical

box of the Rx CH, and set the MIDI chan-

nel for reception.

Tip!

• Normally you will use the same setting for the trans-

mit and receive MIDI channels.

• If the OMNI button is turned ON in the PROGRAM

CHANGE area, program changes on all MIDI chan-

nels will be received, regardless of the speciﬁed

MIDI reception channel.

Press the [F3] key.

The MIDI screen/PGM Asgn. page will appear. In

this page you can assign a scene number to each

program change number 1–128.

Tip!

• With the default settings, scene numbers 01–96 are

assigned to program numbers 1–96, and scene num-

ber 00 is assigned to program number 100. (All

other program change numbers will be displayed as

“-NO ASSIGN-”.)

• You can use the INITIALIZE button located in the

right of the display to return all program change

number assignments to their default setting.

Move the cursor to the PGM CHG. area,

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select a

program change number (1–128).

If the same scene number is assigned to more than

one program change number, recalling the corre-

sponding scene will cause only the lowest-numbered

program change message to be transmitted.

Move the cursor to the right, and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene num-

ber (00–96) that you want to assign to the

program change number selected in step

If you select a scene number in which no scene data

has been stored, the TITLE area will indicate “[No

Data!].”

201

MIDI

Operation section

Transmit a program change message from

the external device.

The AW2816 will recall the scene that corre-

sponds to the program change that was received.

If you recall a scene on the AW2816, the corre-

sponding program change message will be trans-

mitted.

If you recall a scene number to which no program

change number has been assigned, no program

change will be transmitted.

MIDI

202

Chapter

Operation section

Controlling AW2816 parameters from an

external device

The mix parameters and effect parameters of the

AW2816 can be controlled remotely via the MIDI IN

connector/TO HOST connector. There are two ways to

do this: using control changes or using parameter

changes (system exclusive).

Tip!

• Since most devices are able to handle control

change messages, they have the advantage of being

easy to use. However caution is necessary if devices

other than the AW2816 are being used simulta-

neously in your system, since external devices that

receive control change messages may operate in

unexpected ways.

• Parameter changes (system exclusive) are MIDI mes-

sages used only by the AW2816, and will not cause

other devices to behave unexpectedly. However,

they may be difﬁcult to use since they occupy a

larger amount of data.

Using control changes to operate

parameters

On the AW2816, control change numbers 0–95 and

102–119 are assigned to various parameters, and the

corresponding parameter can be controlled by trans-

mitting the appropriate control change from an exter-

nal device. It is also possible to transmit control

changes when you operate a parameter on the

AW2816.

This section explains how to assign an AW2816

parameter to a control change, and record/changes of

that parameter on a MIDI sequencer.

■ Assigning a parameter to a con-

trol change

Here’s how the parameter whose operation you want

to record can be assigned to a control change number

(0–95, 102–119).

Press the [MIDI] key → [F4] key.

The MIDI screen/CTL Asgn. page will appear. In

this page you can specify the parameter that is

assigned to each control change.

1 CTL CHG. No.

This is the control change number to which a

parameter will be assigned.

B PARAMETER (1–3)

This area shows the parameter that is assigned to

each control change number. Select the parame-

ter group in the left column (parameter 1), and

specify the necessary values for that group in the

other two columns (parameters 2 and 3). Control

change numbers to which no parameter has been

assigned will be displayed as “NO ASSIGN.”

Move the cursor to the CTL CHG. No. row,

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

control change number to which a param-

eter will be assigned.

The row enclosed by a dotted frame indicates the

currently selected control change number.

Control change numbers 0 and 32 are deﬁned as

“Bank Select” (messages used to switch sound banks

on a synthesizer). Since some MIDI sequencers han-

dle these bank select messages differently than other

control changes, these messages may not be suitable

for controlling parameters.

Parameter 1

Parameter 2

Parameter 3

203

MIDI

Operation section

Move the cursor to the PARAMETER area,

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

parameter that you want to assign.

For example if you want to assign the FADER

group parameter “AUX bus 1 master level,” set

the items of the PARAMETER area to (from left to

right) “FADER,” “MASTER,” “AUX 1.”

Tip!

• For the parameters that are assigned to each control

change number by default, refer to page 280.

• Of the parameters that can be assigned, channel

faders, AUX sends, [ON] keys, EQ, and pan opera-

tions can also be recorded in automix. (For details

on automix, refer to page 133.) If you use automix

to record operations that can be recorded on auto-

mix, and record the remaining parameter operations

on an external MIDI sequencer, you can minimize

the amount of MIDI messages that need to be trans-

mitted between the AW2816 and your MIDI

sequencer.

■ Recording/playing parameter

operations on a MIDI sequencer

Here’s how you can operate AW2816 parameters to

transmit control changes, record these messages on a

MIDI sequencer that is synchronized with the

AW2816, and then play back the recorded messages.

Connect the AW2816 and your MIDI

sequencer as shown in the following dia-

gram, and make settings so that the

AW2816 and MIDI sequencer will operate

in synchronization using MTC.

For details on synchronizing with MTC, refer to

page 192.

Before you record and play back control change mes-

sages on a MIDI sequencer, make sure that the MIDI

Thru function (sometimes called “Patch Thru” or

“MIDI Echo”) of the sequencer is turned off. If this

function is on, the control changes transmitted from

the AW2816 will be immediately returned to the

AW2816, causing malfunctions.

Press the [MIDI] key → [F1] key.

The MIDI screen/MIDI Setup 1 page will appear.

In this page you can use the TX (transmit) and RX

(receive) buttons of the CONTROL CHANGE

area to turn control change transmission and

reception on/off.

Move the cursor to the TX (transmit) but-

ton in the CONTROL CHANGE area, and

press the [ENTER] key to switch the button

ON. In the same way, turn the RX (receive)

button of the CONTROL CHANGE area

ON.

With these settings, operating a parameter on the

AW2816 will transmit the corresponding control

change. Also, the corresponding parameter will

change when a control change is received from

an external device.

Move the cursor to the Tx CH numerical

box in the MIDI CH. area, and set the MIDI

channel that will be used for transmission.

Then move the cursor to the numerical

box of the Rx CH, and set the MIDI chan-

nel for reception.

Tip!

• Normally you should set the Receive and Transmit

channels to the same setting.

• If the OMNI button is turned ON in the CONTROL

CHANGE area, control changes of all MIDI chan-

nels will be received, regardless of the Receive chan-

nel setting.

MIDI IN 1

connector

MTC OUT

connector

MIDI IN 2

connector

MIDI OUT/THRU

connector

MIDI OUT

connector

MIDI IN

connector

MTC

Control

changes

Control

changes

MTC master MTC slave

External MIDI

device

(e.g., computer)

AW2816

MIDI

204

Chapter

Operation section

Put your MIDI sequencer in record-ready

mode, and play back the song on the

AW2816.

The two devices will run in synchronization.

When recording parameter operations on a MIDI

sequencer, you must turn automix off (DISABLE). If

the automix function is on (ENABLE), control changes

will also be transmitted for the parameters operated

by automix.

Access the screen containing the parame-

ter that you assigned to a control change,

and operate that parameter.

Control change messages corresponding to the

parameter movements will be transmitted from

the MIDI OUT/THRU connector or TO HOST

connector, and will be recorded on your MIDI

sequencer.

When you have ﬁnished operating the

parameter, press the STOP [ ] key to stop

the song.

The MIDI sequencer will also stop.

Put the MIDI sequencer in playback-ready

mode.

On the AW2816, locate to a location earlier

than where you recorded the parameter

operation, and play back the song.

The MIDI sequencer will play back in synchroni-

zation with the AW2816. When the AW2816

receives control change messages from the MIDI

sequencer, the corresponding parameters will

change.

Using system exclusive to oper-

ate parameters

On the AW2816 you can use a type of system exclu-

sive messages called “parameter changes” to operate

internal parameters, instead of using control changes.

Here’s how to record/playback parameter changes on

your MIDI sequencer.

Tip!

For details on the parameters that can be operated by

parameter change messages, refer to “MIDI data for-

mat” at the end of this manual.

Connect the AW2816 and your MIDI

sequencer as shown the diagram on

page 203, and make settings so that the

AW2816 and MIDI sequencer will operate

in synchronization using MTC.

For details on MTC synchronization, refer to

page 192.

Before you record and play back parameter change

messages on a MIDI sequencer, make sure that the

MIDI Thru function (sometimes called “Patch Thru”

or “MIDI Echo”) of the sequencer is turned off. If this

function is on, the parameter changes transmitted

from the AW2816 will be immediately returned to the

AW2816, causing malfunctions.

Press the [MIDI] key → [F1] key.

The MIDI screen/MIDI Setup 1 page will appear.

Move the cursor to the TX (transmit) but-

ton in the PARAMETER CHANGE area, and

press the [ENTER] key to turn the button

ON. In the same way, switch the RX

(receive) button ON in the PARAMETER

CHANGE area.

205

MIDI

Operation section

With these settings, operating a parameter will

cause the corresponding parameter change to be

transmitted. When a parameter change is

received from an external device, the corre-

sponding parameter will be controlled.

Put your MIDI sequencer in record-ready

mode, and play back the AW2816 song.

Both devices will begin running in synchroniza-

tion.

Operate a parameter on the AW2816.

Parameter change messages corresponding to the

parameter movements will be transmitted from

the MIDI OUT/THRU connector or TO HOST

connector, and will be recorded on your MIDI

sequencer.

When you have ﬁnished operating the

parameter, press the STOP [ ] key to stop

the song.

The MIDI sequencer will also stop.

Put the MIDI sequencer in playback-ready

mode.

On the AW2816, locate to a location earlier

than where you recorded the parameter

operation, and play back the song.

The MIDI sequencer will play back in synchroni-

zation with the AW2816. When the AW2816

receives parameter change messages from the

MIDI sequencer, the corresponding parameters

will change.

MIDI

206

Chapter

Operation section

Remotely controlling an external MIDI device

This section explains the “MIDI Remote” function that

lets you use faders 1–8 and [ON] keys 1–8 to control

an external device.

About the MIDI Remote function

The AW2816 lets you assign a desired MIDI message

to each fader 1–8 and [ON] key 1–8, and transmit the

assigned MIDI messages by operating the faders and

[ON] keys. This is called the “MIDI Remote” function.

The following types of message can be assigned to the

faders and [ON] keys.

■ MIDI messages that can be

assigned to faders

MIDI messages with a value that changes in a range of

0–127 can be assigned to a fader. For example if you

assign control change #7 (volume) to a fader, and

make settings so that the control change value

changes in the range of 0–127, you will be able to use

fader movements to control the volume of a MIDI

tone generator in a range of 0–127.

■ MIDI messages that can be

assigned to [ON] keys

MIDI messages with a value that switches between 0

and 127 can be assigned to an [ON] key. For example

if you assign control change #64 (Hold) to an [ON]

key, and make settings so that the [ON] key switches

between values of 0 and 127, a control change mes-

sage of #64 with a value of 127 (Hold On) will be

transmitted when you turn the [ON] key on (lit), and

the same message with a value of 0 (Hold Off) will be

transmitted when you turn the [ON] key off (dark).

You can also make settings so that a MIDI message

with a ﬁxed value is transmitted only when the [ON]

key is turned on (lit). For example you can assign a

program change #1 message so that the correspond-

ing program change message will be transmitted each

time the [ON] key is switched on.

Control change number 7

Transmitted

Value= 127

Value= 0

Control change

number 64

(value=127)

Control change

number 64

(value=0)

Transmitted Transmitted

Program change

number 1

Program change

number 1

Transmitted Transmitted

207

MIDI

Operation section

Using the default MIDI Remote

settings

When the AW2816 is in the default state, messages

are already assigned to faders 1–8 and [ON] keys 1–8.

Here’s how to use these default MIDI Remote settings.

Connect the AW2816’s MIDI OUT/THRU

connector to the MIDI IN connector of the

external device.

For details on connections and settings, refer to

page 189.

In the FADER MODE section, press the

[REMOTE] key.

The REMOTE screen will appear, where you can

operate the MIDI Remote function. The REMOTE

screen has four pages, Remote A–Remote D, and

in each page you can assign different MIDI mes-

sages to faders 1–8 and [ON] keys 1–8. The MIDI

messages assigned by default to the faders and

[ON] keys in the Remote A–Remote D pages are

listed in page 317.

While the REMOTE screen is displayed, the STEREO

fader, [RTN 1]/[RTN 2] controls, and the various [ON]

keys will function in the same way as when the HOME

screen is displayed. (They will control the input/out-

put levels of the stereo output channel and return

channels 1/2, and switch them on/off.)

Press one of the [F1]–[F4] keys to access

the page (Remote A–Remote D) in which

the MIDI message you want to transmit

has been assigned to a fader/[ON] key.

In this example, the Remote C page has been

selected.

Move the cursor to the REMOTE x setting

(x is a character A–D) in the right side of

the display, and press the [ENTER] key.

The button will change from “DISABLE” to

“ENABLE,” and the MIDI Remote function will

be enabled for the corresponding page (in this

example, the Remote C page). In this state, oper-

ating the faders 1–8/[ON] keys will transmit the

MIDI message assigned to the corresponding

controller.

Tip!

Each of the Remote A–D pages can be enabled/dis-

abled independently. The MIDI Remote function can-

not be used when you have accessed a page that is set

to DISABLE.

Operate faders 1–8/[ON] keys 1–8.

The MIDI message assigned to the corresponding

fader/[ON] key will be transmitted from the MIDI

OUT connector.

Tip!

Operations of the MIDI Remote faders 1–8/[ON] keys

1–8 can be recorded in the automix. When this func-

tion is operated manually, only eight channels of fad-

ers and [ON] keys can be operated simultaneously,

but by using automix to record operations in each

page one after another, you can simultaneously play

back 32 channels of fader and [ON] key operations.

MIDI

208

Chapter

Operation section

Assigning MIDI messages to fad-

ers

A MIDI message of up to 16 bytes can be assigned to

each fader/[ON] key used in MIDI Remote. There are

two ways to assign a MIDI message to a controller:

you can assign a MIDI message that was received at

the MIDI IN or TO HOST connector (with or without

modifying the message), or you can input each byte

individually.

Here’s how the control change #10 message received

at the MIDI IN connector can be assigned to Remote

A fader 1, so that operating fader 1 will remotely con-

trol Pan on an external tone generator.

Connect the AW2816’s MIDI IN connector

to the MIDI OUT connector of the external

device, and the AW2816’s MIDI OUT/

THRU connector to the MIDI IN connector

of the external device.

For details on connections and settings, refer to

page 189.

• Make sure that the ECHO button is turned off in the

CONTROL CHANGE area of the MIDI screen/MIDI

Setup 1 page. If this button is on, receiving a control

change from an external device will cause the same

message to be re-transmitted back to the external

device, which may cause malfunctions.

• The TX, RX, and OMNI settings in the MIDI screen/

MIDI Setup 1 page do not affect MIDI Remote oper-

ations.

Press the [REMOTE] key → [F1] key.

The REMOTE screen/Remote A page will appear.

The display will show the MIDI messages (in

hexadecimal form) that are assigned to the [ON]

key and fader of the currently selected channel.

A MIDI message assigned to the [ON] key

B MIDI message assigned to the fader

C Currently selected channel number (high-

lighted)

Press [SEL] key 1.

The MIDI message assigned to fader 1 will be

displayed in the lower line of the display. By

default, control change #7 (MIDI Ch=1) will be

assigned.

The values in the MIDI message display area

have the following signiﬁcance.

• 00–FF (hexadecimal).... This is the MIDI mes-

sage that is actually

transmitted.

• END .............This indicates the end of the

MIDI message. When you oper-

ate the fader, the MIDI message

from the beginning to immedi-

ately before END will be trans-

mitted.

• FAD..............This indicates a value that will

correspond to the current posi-

tion of the fader. When you raise

or lower the fader, the “FAD”

byte will be transmitted as a

value 00–7F (hexadecimal).

Move the cursor to the LEARN button in

the lower line of the display, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The LEARN button will be turned on. While this

button is on, channel messages (note-on/off, con-

trol change, program change, etc.) or system

exclusive messages received at the AW2816’s

MIDI IN connector will be captured automati-

cally, and input into the MIDI message display

area.

Tip!

If multiple messages are received while the LEARN

button is on, the last-received MIDI message will be

inputed.

209

MIDI

Operation section

Transmit a control change #10 MIDI mes-

sage from your external device.

The captured control change data will be input

in the MIDI message display area. If a control

change is received, the byte corresponding to the

changing value 0–127 (the third byte) will auto-

matically be set to “FAD.”

Tip!

When a MIDI message is received while the LEARN

button is on, the byte following the last byte of the

message will automatically be input as “END.”

• If a MIDI message longer than 16 bytes is received

when the LEARN button is on, the ﬁrst 16 bytes will

be input. In this case, the “END” value will not be

input, meaning that no MIDI message will be trans-

mitted when you operate the fader.

• If the MIDI message assigned to the fader does not

contain a “FAD” byte, no MIDI message will be

transmitted when you operate the fader.

Make sure that a control change has been

input in the MIDI message area. Then

move the cursor to the LEARN button and

press the [ENTER] key to turn off the

LEARN button.

Move the cursor to the REMOTE A area in

the right of the display, and press the

[ENTER] key to switch the button to

“ENABLE.”

The remote functions of the Remote A page will

be enabled, and MIDI messages will be transmit-

ted when you operate faders 1–8/[ON] keys 1–8.

Operate fader 1.

As you raise or lower fader 1, control change #10

messages will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT

connector with a value that varies in the range of

0–127.

Tip!

If you used the LEARN button to capture a channel

message, the MIDI reception channel will also be

used as the MIDI transmission channel.

If you want to name the fader to which the

MIDI message was assigned, move the cur-

sor to the NAME EDIT button in the lower

part of display, and press the [ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.

Use the character palette to input a name,

move the cursor to the OK button, and

press the [ENTER] key.

For details on inputting characters, refer to

page 37.

The name you input will be shown below the 1–

8 buttons in the lower part of the display.

Tip!

• The edited contents of the Remote A–Remote D

pages are saved as part of the song.

• If you want to return the settings of the currently

selected page (Remote A–Remote D) to the factory

default settings, hold down the [SHIFT] key and

press the [F5] key.

MIDI

210

Chapter

Operation section

Assigning MIDI messages to the

[ON] keys

As an example, here’s how you can use a sustain

pedal connected to a MIDI sequencer to assign Hold

On (control change #64 with a value of 127) and

Hold Off (control change #64 with a value of 0) mes-

sages to the Remote A [ON] key 1.

Connect the AW2816’s MIDI IN connector

to the MIDI OUT connector of a synthe-

sizer to which a sustain pedal is connected,

and connect the AW2816’s MIDI OUT/

THRU connector to the MIDI IN connector

of the external device.

For details on connections and settings, refer to

page 189.

Press the [REMOTE] key → [F1] key.

The REMOTE screen REMOTE A page will

appear.

Press [SEL] key 1.

The upper line in the display will show the MIDI

message currently assigned to [ON] key 1.

With the default settings, no MIDI message is

assigned to [ON] key 1 in the Remote A page. In such

cases, a value of “END” will be input at the ﬁrst byte

to indicate the end of the MIDI message.

Move the cursor to the LEARN button in

the upper line of the display, and press the

[ENTER] key to turn the button on.

Press the sustain pedal connected to your

MIDI synthesizer.

A control change #64 with a value of 127 (7F in

hexadecimal; Hold On message) will be input in

the MIDI message display area. For this message,

the right digit (ﬁrst place) of the ﬁrst byte is the

MIDI channel number, the second byte is the

control number, and the third byte is the actual

value.

Turn off the LEARN button, and release the

sustain pedal.

Tip!

If you release the sustain pedal before turning the

LEARN button off, a control change #64 with a value

of 0 (hexadecimal 00) will be input (Hold Off) in the

MIDI message display area. However even in this

case, the following procedure will not be affected.

Move the cursor to the third byte, and use

the [DATA/JOG] dial to change the value to

“SW.”

The byte whose value is set to “SW” will be trans-

mitted as a value of 127 (hexadecimal 7F) when

the [ON] key changes to On, and as a value of 0

(hexadecimal 00) when the [ON] key changes to

Off. In this example, the data will be output as a

Hold On/Off message.

Tip!

• The MIDI message to be assigned can also be speci-

ﬁed one byte at a time, using the procedure of step

7. In this case, you will need to input the “END”

value at the end of the MIDI message.

• If you want to transmit a speciﬁc MIDI message

each time the [ON] key is pressed, you do not need

to input the “SW” value.

If you input the MIDI message one byte at a time, it is

possible that you may input an invalid MIDI message

by accident. Be aware that if this occurs, operating a

fader or [ON] key will send this MIDI message from

the MIDI OUT connector or TO HOST connector,

possibly causing the connected external device to

malfunction.

211

MIDI

Operation section

Make sure that the REMOTE A button is

displayed as “ENABLE,” and operate [ON]

key 1.

As [ON] key 1 is turned on/off, a Hold On/Off

MIDI message will be transmitted from the MIDI

OUT connector.

Tip!

• If desired, your operations of [ON] key 1 can be

recorded in the automix.

• You can also change the function of an [ON] key so

that it switches on/off each time you press the key.

For details refer to the explanation of the LATCH/

UNLATCH button on page 315.

If you want to name the [ON] key to which

the MIDI message was assigned, move the

cursor to the NAME EDIT button in the

upper line of the display, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.

Use the character palette to input the

desired name. Then move the cursor to the

OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

For details on inputting characters, refer to

page 37.

The name that you input will be displayed below

buttons 1–8 in the lower part of the display.

Tip!

The edited contents of the Remote A–D pages are

saved as part of the song.

MIDI

212

Chapter

Operation section

Sending the AW2816’s internal settings via

MIDI (Bulk Dump)

The AW2816 is able to convert the settings of the

MIDI screen and the contents of the various libraries

into MIDI data (“Bulk Data”), and transmit this from

its MIDI OUT connector/TO HOST connector (Bulk

Dump). By recording this bulk data on a MIDI

sequencer or other external device, the internal set-

tings of the AW2816 can be backed up on that

device, or copied to another AW2816 unit.

Here’s how to record bulk data on a MIDI sequencer.

Connect the AW2816’s MIDI IN connector

to the MIDI OUT connector of the external

device, and the AW2816’s MIDI OUT/

THRU connector to the MIDI IN connector

of the external device. (Alternatively, con-

nect the AW2816’s TO HOST connector to

the serial port of your computer.)

For details on connections and settings, refer to

page 189 to 190.

Press the [MIDI] key → [F5] key.

The MIDI screen/Bulk Dump page will appear.

1 CATEGORY

Here you can select the type of settings that will

be transmitted as bulk data.

For details on the settings that correspond to each

button, refer to page 281.

Move the cursor to the button correspond-

ing to the bulk data you want to transmit,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The button will be turned on, indicating that it

has been selected for bulk dump.

If you selected one of the SCENE MEM.–

REMOTE buttons, move the cursor to the

setting area at the right of each button,

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to edit the

setting.

Tip!

If you move the cursor to the ALL button in the lower

left of the display and press the [ENTER] key, the but-

tons of all categories will be turned on, and the set-

tings for SCENE MEM.–REMOTE categories will be set

to “ALL.” Use the ALL button when you want to trans-

mit data for all categories via bulk dump.

Set your MIDI sequencer to record-ready

mode.

Before you record bulk data on a MIDI sequencer,

make sure that the MIDI Thru function (sometimes

called “Patch Thru” or “MIDI Echo”) of the sequencer

is turned off. If this function is on, the bulk data trans-

mitted from the AW2816 will be immediately

returned to the AW2816, causing malfunctions.

213

MIDI

Operation section

Move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

Bulk dump will begin. While bulk dump is being

executed, a popup window will show which data

is currently being transmitted.

Tip!

When the popup window is displayed, you can abort

the bulk dump by pressing the [ENTER] key.

• The value of the INTERVAL ﬁeld speciﬁes the length

of the time interval that will be left between each

block of bulk data transmitted from the AW2816. If

an error occurs during the bulk dump, try increasing

the INTERVAL value.

• The time required to transmit or receive a bulk

dump will depend on the category that is selected

and the data that is recorded. Particularly in the

case of automix, be aware that it may take longer,

depending on what has been recorded.

To receive bulk data transmitted from an

external device, press the [MIDI] key → [F1]

key.

The MIDI screen/MIDI Setup 1 page will appear.

Move the cursor to the RX button in the

BULK area, and press the [ENTER] key to

turn the button ON.

In this state, bulk data can be received.

With the transport of the AW2816

stopped, transmit bulk data from the MIDI

sequencer.

When the AW2816 has received all of the bulk

data, the corresponding settings and/or libraries

will be updated.

Other functions

215

Chapter

Operation section

Other functions

This chapter explains other convenient functions provided by the

AW2816, and how multiple functions can be used in conjunction

with each other.

Assigning a functions to the [CTRL] key +

function keys

On the AW2816 you can press the [CTRL] key + [F1]–

[F5] keys to execute various pre-speciﬁed functions.

This lets you create your own shortcut keys.

In the UNIT section, press the [UTILITY] key

→ [F5] (CTRL Key Asgn.) key.

The UTILITY screen/CTRL Key Asgn. page will

appear. In this page you can assign a function to

each combination of the [CTRL] key + [F1] –

[CTRL] key + [F5].

A CTRL+F1 – CTRL+F5

B Function list

C ASSIGN button

Move the cursor to the symbol that indi-

cates the key operation to which you will

assign a function, and press the [ENTER]

key.

That symbol will be highlighted, allowing you to

assign a function.

Move the cursor to the function list in the

lower part of the display, and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial to select the desired func-

tion.

Other functions

216

Chapter

Operation section

The following functions can be assigned.

* Depending on the operating mode of the AW2816 (e.g., when the transport is running), it may not be possible to exe-

cute the functions marked by an asterisk (*). In this case, an error message will appear at the bottom of the display.

Tip!

If you select SCENE NUMBER as the assigned func-

tion, an input ﬁeld will appear at the right of the func-

tion list, allowing you to specify the scene number.

Move the cursor to this ﬁeld, and use the [DATA/JOG]

dial to specify the scene number.

Move the cursor to the ASSIGN button at

the left of the function list, and press the

[ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

assignment.

To conﬁrm the assignment, move the cur-

sor to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key.

To cancel, move the cursor to the CANCEL but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key.

To execute an assigned function, hold

down the [CTRL] key and press the appro-

priate function key.

Display Function

NO ASSIGN No function assigned

SHUT DOWN Display the SONG screen/Shut Down screen (shortcut to shutdown) (*)

SONG SAVE

Display the SONG screen/Song List page, and move the cursor to the SAVE button

(shortcut to save the current song) (*)

CD LOAD Close the tray of the CD-RW drive, and load the CD (*)

CD UNLOAD Open the tray of the CD-RW drive (*)

AUTOMIX [ENABLE/DISABLE] Turn automix on (Enable) or off (Disable) (*)

MTC SYNC [MASTER/SLAVE] Switch the AW2816 between MTC master (Master) and MTC slave (Slave) (*)

SCENE NAME

Display the currently-recalled scene name in the upper right of the screen for a ﬁxed

interval

SCENE RECALL NO.xx Recall scene number xx (use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the number xx)

DELAY [ON/OFF] Switch the delay on/off for the currently selected channel

EQ [ON/OFF] Switch the EQ on/off for the currently selected channel

DYN [ON/OFF] Switch the dynamics processor on/off for the selected channel

PEAK HOLD [ON/OFF] Switch peak hold on/off

OSCILLATOR [ON/OFF] Switch the test tone oscillator on/off

217

Other functions

Operation section

Making ﬁne adjustments to the pitch of an

entire song (Vari-pitch)

When the AW2816’s internal clock is used as the

word clock source, you can adjust the sampling fre-

quency of the song to make ﬁne adjustments to the

playback pitch (Vari-pitch). For example, you can use

this to match the playback pitch of the AW2816 to an

acoustic instrument that would be difﬁcult to tune.

Press the [SETUP] key → [F1] (D.In SETUP)

key.

The SETUP screen/D.In Setup page will appear.

In the WORDCLOCK SOURCE area, make

sure that the INT button is turned on.

If the INT button is off, move the cursor to the

INT button and press the [ENTER] key. When the

INT button is on, the internal clock is selected as

the word clock source.

Move the cursor to the VARI button in the

VARI area, and press the [ENTER] key.

Vari-pitch will be enabled.

Move the cursor to the knob located at the

right of the VARI button, and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial to adjust the sampling fre-

quency (playback pitch).

The vari-pitch setting can be adjusted in the

range of –5.97% to +6.00. If necessary, you can

play back the song while you adjust this.

To defeat vari-pitch, move the cursor to the

FIX button and press the [ENTER] key.

The sampling frequency will return to the previ-

ous value.

Digital devices that are synchronized to the digital

audio signal being output from the AW2816 will also

be affected when you use the vari-pitch function. This

may cause problems such as failure of the sampling

frequency to lock between the AW2816 and the exter-

nal digital device connected to it.

Other functions

218

Chapter

Operation section

Saving channel settings (Channel Library)

The mix parameter settings of a desired channel can

be stored in a memory area called the Channel

Library. The stored settings can be recalled at any

time. The following mix parameters are stored in the

channel library.

• Channel on/off

• Attenuator

• Phase

• Equalizer on/off

• Equalizer parameters

• Dynamics processor on/off

• Dynamics processor types

• Dynamics processor parameters

• Delay on/off

• Delay time

• Routing

•Pan

• Fader position

• AUX1–6 on/off

• AUX1–6 pre-fader/post-fader setting

• AUX1–6 send levels

Of the parameters displayed in the VIEW screen/CH

View page ([VIEW] key

→

[F1] key), channel pairing

settings and settings related to effect insertion are not

saved in the channel library.

Storing channel settings in a

library

Use the [SEL] keys to select the channel

whose settings you want to store, and

press the [VIEW] key → [F2] (Library) key.

The VIEW screen/Library page will appear. The

currently selected channel is shown in the upper

left of the display.

Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

library number (02–64) in which you will

store the settings.

The row enclosed by a dotted frame is the cur-

rently selected library number.

Library numbers 00 and 01 are recall-only libraries

used to reset a channel to default settings. (00 sets

faders to -inﬁnity, and 01 sets faders to 0 dB.) Chan-

nel settings cannot be stored in these libraries.

Move the cursor to the STORE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear,

allowing you to input the library title.

Use the character palette to input the

library title.

For details on inputting characters, refer to

page 37.

Tip!

If desired, you can execute the Store operation with-

out inputting the library title. To do this, access the

UTILITY screen/Prefer.1 page ([UTILITY] key

→

[F2]

key), and turn the STORE CONFIRMATION setting

OFF. If you execute the Store operation with this set-

ting, the most-recently recalled library title will be

assigned automatically.

Move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The channel settings will be stored in the library.

If you overwrite a previously-stored library number,

the original data cannot be recovered.

Tip!

Channel library settings are saved as part of the song.

You can also use the MIDI Bulk Dump function to

save the contents of the channel library on a MIDI

sequencer or other external device.

219

Other functions

Operation section

Recalling channel settings from a

library

Use the [SEL] key to select the channel for

which you want to recall settings, and

press the [VIEW] key → [F2] (Library) key.

The VIEW screen/Library page will appear.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

library number that you want to recall.

The SOURCE CHANNEL area at the right of the

list shows the original channel from which those

settings were stored. If this area indicates ST

OUT, the settings are only for the stereo output

channel. If this area indicates INPUT 1–8/MONI

1–16/RTN 1–2, the settings are for an input chan-

nel/monitor channel/return channel respectively.

If this area indicates GENERAL, the settings can

be used for any channel.

Tip!

• Channel settings are not compatible between the

stereo output channel and other channels (input

channels, monitor channels, return channels).

• If the currently selected channel is not compatible

with the source channel, an indication of “CON-

FLICT” will appear below the SOURCE CHANNEL

area, and the library cannot be recalled.

If you recall to a paired channel, the same settings

will be recalled for both channels.

Move the cursor to the RECALL button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

recall operation.

Tip!

It is also possible to recall the library directly without

displaying the popup window. To do this, access the

UTILITY screen/Prefer.1 page ([UTILITY] key

→

[F2]

key), and turn the RECALL CONFIRMATION setting

off.

To execute the recall, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

To cancel, move the cursor to the CANCEL but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key.

Tip!

Channel libraries can also be recalled using automix.

Editing the title of a channel

library

Press the [VIEW] key → [F2] (Library) key.

The View screen/Library page will appear.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

library whose title you want to edit.

Move the cursor to the TITLE EDIT button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear.

Use the character palette to input the

desired library title.

For details on inputting characters, refer to

page 37.

To update the library title, move the cursor

to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key.

The library title will be updated.

Other functions

220

Chapter

Operation section

Saving equalizer settings (EQ Library)

Equalizer settings made for each channel can be

stored in a memory area called the EQ Library. The

stored settings can be recalled at any time.

Storing EQ settings in a library

Use the [SEL] keys to select the channel

whose settings you want to store, and

press the [EQ] key → [F2] (Library) key.

The EQ/ATT/GRP screen/Library page will

appear. In this page you can store or recall equal-

izer settings for the currently selected channel.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

library number (041–128) into which the

settings will be stored.

The row enclosed by the dotted line is the cur-

rently selected library.

• Library numbers 001–040 contain recall-only librar-

ies with pre-programmed EQ parameters. EQ set-

tings cannot be stored in these libraries.

• If you overwrite a previously-stored library number,

the original data cannot be recovered.

Move the cursor to the STORE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear,

allowing you to specify the library title.

Use the character palette to input the

desired library title.

For details on inputting characters, refer to

page 37.

Tip!

If desired, you can store without inputting the library

title when you press the STORE button. To do this,

access the UTILITY screen/Prefer.1 page ([UTILITY]

key

→

[F2] key), and turn the STORE CONFIRMATION

setting off. When you store, the title of the most

recently recalled library will be assigned automatically.

Move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The EQ settings will be stored in the speciﬁed

library.

Tip!

The contents stored in the EQ library are saved on the

internal hard disk as part of the current song. You can

also use the MIDI Bulk Dump function to save EQ

library settings on a sequencer or other external MIDI

device.

221

Other functions

Operation section

Recalling EQ settings from a

library

Use the [SEL] keys to select the channel for

which you want to recall settings, and

press the [EQ] key → [F2] (Library) key.

The EQ/ATT/GRP screen/Library page will

appear, with the recall destination channel

selected.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

library number whose settings you want to

recall.

The EQ CURVE area at the right of the list will

show the currently selected equalizer settings.

Move the cursor to the RECALL button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

recall operation.

Tip!

It is also possible to recall the library directly without

displaying the popup window. To do this, access the

UTILITY screen/Prefer.1 page ([UTILITY] key

→

[F2]

key), and turn the RECALL CONFIRMATION setting

off.

To execute the recall, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

To cancel the recall, move the cursor to the CAN-

CEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

If you recall to a paired channel, the same settings

will be recalled to both channels.

Tip!

EQ libraries can also be recalled using automix.

Editing the title of an EQ library

Press the [EQ] key → [F2] (Library) key.

The EQ/ATT/GRP screen/Library page will

appear.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

library whose title you want to edit.

Move the cursor to the TITLE EDIT button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear.

Use the character palette to input the

desired library title.

For details on inputting characters, refer to

page 37.

To update the library title, move the cursor

to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key.

To cancel the title you input, move the cursor to

the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

Other functions

222

Chapter

Operation section

Storing dynamics processor settings

(Dynamics Library)

Dynamics processor settings made for each channel

can be stored in a memory area called the Dynamics

Library. The stored settings can be recalled at any

time.

Storing dynamics processor set-

tings in a library

Use the [SEL] keys to select the channel

whose settings you want to store, and

press the [DYN] key → [F2] (Library) key.

The DYN/DLY screen/Library page will appear,

with the corresponding channel selected. In this

page, dynamics processor settings for the cur-

rently selected channel can be stored in or

recalled from the library.

Tip!

The currently selected channel is indicated in the

upper left of the display.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

library number (041–128) into which the

settings will be stored.

The row enclosed by the dotted line is the cur-

rently selected library.

• Library numbers 001–040 contain recall-only librar-

ies with pre-programmed dynamics processor set-

tings. Dynamics settings cannot be stored in these

libraries.

• If you overwrite a previously-stored library number,

the original data cannot be recovered.

Move the cursor to the STORE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear,

allowing you to specify the library title.

Use the character palette to input the

desired library title.

For details on inputting characters, refer to

page 37.

Tip!

If desired, you can store without inputting the library

title when you press the STORE button. To do this,

access the UTILITY screen/Prefer.1 page ([UTILITY]

key

→

[F2] key), and turn the STORE CONFIRMA-

TION setting off. When you store, the title of the most

recently recalled library will be assigned automati-

cally.

Move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The settings will be stored in the speciﬁed library.

Tip!

The contents stored in the dynamics library are saved

on the internal hard disk as part of the current song.

You can also use the MIDI Bulk Dump function to

save dynamics library settings on a sequencer or other

external MIDI device.

223

Other functions

Operation section

Recalling dynamics processor set-

tings from a library

Use the [SEL] keys to select the channel for

which you want to recall settings, and

press the [DYN] key → [F2] (Library) key.

The DYN/DLY screen/Library page will appear,

with the corresponding channel selected.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

library number whose settings you want to

recall.

Tip!

The CURVE/TYPE area at the right of the list will

show the currently selected dynamics processor set-

tings.

Move the cursor to the RECALL button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

recall operation.

Tip!

It is also possible to recall the library directly without

displaying the popup window. To do this, access the

UTILITY screen/Prefer.1 page ([UTILITY] key

→

[F2]

key), and turn the RECALL CONFIRMATION setting

off.

To execute the recall, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

To cancel the recall, move the cursor to the CAN-

CEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

If you recall to a paired channel, the same settings

will be recalled to both channels.

Tip!

Dynamics libraries can also be recalled using automix.

Editing the title of a dynamics

library

Press the [DYN] key → [F2] (Library) key.

The DYN/DLY screen/Library page will appear.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

library whose title you want to edit.

Move the cursor to the TITLE EDIT button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear.

Use the character palette to input the

desired library title.

For details on inputting characters, refer to

page 37.

To update the library title, move the cursor

to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key.

To cancel the title you input, move the cursor to

the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

Other functions

224

Chapter

Operation section

Copying attenuator settings to all channels

Here’s how attenuator settings can be copied from

one channel to all channels (except the stereo output

channel).

Use the [SEL] keys to select the copy source

channel, and press the [EQ] key → [F1]

(EQ/ATT) key.

The EQ/ATT/GRP screen/EQ/ATT page will

appear.

Move the cursor to the ATT. area.

Press the [SHIFT] key + [F5] (COPY ATT. TO

ALL) key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

copy operation.

Move the cursor to the OK button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The copy will be executed, and the same attenu-

ator setting will be copied to all channels except

the stereo output channel.

If you copy to paired channels, the same attenuator

settings will be copied to both channels.

225

Other functions

Operation section

Copying delay time/phase settings to all

channels

Here’s how delay time and phase settings (normal/

reverse) can be copied from one channel to all chan-

nels (except the stereo output channel).

Press the [DYN] key → [F3] (DLY/Ø 1-8) key

or the [DYN] key → [F4] (DLY/Ø MONI)

key.

The phase/delay settings of each channel will be

displayed. Press the [F3] (DLY/Ø 1-8) key to view

input channels 1–8, or press the [F4] (DLY/Ø

MONI) key to view monitor channels 1–16.

Move the cursor to the desired item of the

copy source channel (the DELAY numerical

box or the Ø button).

Move the cursor to the DELAY setting if you want

to copy the delay time, or to the Ø setting if you

want to copy the phase setting.

The copy operation cannot be executed when the cur-

sor is at the delay on/off button.

Press the [SHIFT] key + [F5] (COPY TO ALL)

key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

copy operation.

To execute the copy, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

To cancel the copy, move the cursor to the CAN-

CEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

When you copy to paired channels, the same delay

time/phase setting will be copied to both channels.

Other functions

226

Chapter

Operation section

Copying pan settings to all channels

Here’s how pan settings can be copied from one

channel to all channels.

Press the [PAN] key → [F1] (Pan 1-8) key or

the [PAN] key → [F2] (Pan MONI) key.

The pan settings of each channel will be dis-

played. Press the [F1] (Pan 1-8) key to view input

channels 1–8, or press the [F2] (Pan MONI) key

to view monitor channels 1–16.

Move the cursor to the PAN knob of the

copy source channel. (Alternatively, use the

[SEL] keys to select the copy source chan-

nel.)

Press the [SHIFT] key + [F5] (COPY PAN TO

ALL) key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

copy operation.

To execute the copy, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

To cancel the copy, move the cursor to the CAN-

CEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

When you copy to paired channels, the same pan set-

ting will be copied to both channels.

Copying fade times to all channels

Here’s how fade time settings can be copied from one

channel to all channels.

Recall the scene whose fade time settings

you want to change, and press the

[SCENE] key → [F2] (Fade Time) key.

The SCENE screen/Fade Time page will appear.

This page displays the fade time settings of each

channel.

Move the cursor to the copy source chan-

nel. (Alternatively, use the [SEL] keys to

select the copy source channel.)

Press the [SHIFT] key + [F5] (COPY TO ALL)

key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the

copy operation.

To execute the copy, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

To cancel the copy, move the cursor to the CAN-

CEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

When you copy to paired channels, the same fade

time setting will be copied to both channels.

227

Other functions

Operation section

Dithering digital signals

When a song recorded with 24 bit quantization is

recorded on an external 16 bit recorder via the DIGI-

TAL STEREO OUT jack or a digital I/O card, the lower

8 bits are automatically discarded. As desired, you

can apply dithering to the signal that is output at this

time.

In this section we will explain how dithering can be

applied when the AW2816’s DIGITAL STEREO OUT

jack is connected to the digital input jack of a DAT

recorder, and you mix down a 24 bit to the 16 bit DAT

recorder.

Tip!

When a digital audio signal is transferred from a

higher-resolution system to a lower-resolution system,

the quantization noise caused when bits are rounded-

off may be objectionable. In such cases, a small

amount of random noise can be added to the signal to

make the quantization noise less obtrusive. This pro-

cess is called “dithering.”

Press the [SETUP] key → [F3] (Dither Out)

key.

The SET UP screen/Dither Out page will appear.

In this page you can turn dithering on/off and

specify the word length (number of bits) of the

output signal for the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack

and the output channels of the digital I/O card.

Move the cursor to the ON/OFF button in

the DIGITAL ST OUT area, and press the

[ENTER] key to switch the button ON.

Use the ON/OFF buttons in the Dither Out page

to enable/disable dithering for each output jack/

output channel.

Tip!

• Turning dithering on has no effect if you are trans-

ferring from a lower-resolution system to a higher-

resolution system (e.g., 16 bit

→

24 bit), or transfer-

ring between systems of equal resolution (e.g., 16

bit

→

16 bit).

• For a digital I/O card, dithering is switched on/off in

odd-numbered

→

even-numbered pairs of output

channels (1/2, 3/4 ...)

In the WORD LENGTH (BIT) area of the

DIGITAL ST OUT row, move the cursor to

the “16” button and press the [ENTER] key.

In the WORD LENGTH (BIT) area you can select

the word length (number of bits) of the digital sig-

nal that will be output. Normally you will move

the cursor to the button for the word length that

corresponds to the receiving device, and press

the [ENTER] key.

• Changing the word length will have no effect on a

channel for which dithering is turned off.

• Be careful that dithering is not applied twice or

more to the same source. If this occurs, the effect of

dithering will be lost and the S/N ratio will be

degraded.

Start recording on your DAT recorder, and

then play back the AW2816 song.

The lower 8 bits will be automatically discarded,

and the dithered 16 bit audio will be recorded on

the DAT recorder.

Settings in the Dither Out page are common to all

songs. If you do not need dithering, be sure to turn

OFF all buttons in the ON/OFF area.

Tip!

Dithering can be applied in the same way when

recording tracks or the stereo track within the

AW2816. For details refer to page 260

AW2816

DAT recorder

DIGITAL

STEREO

IN jack

DIGITAL

STEREO

OUT jack

DAT

00.00.00.00

Other functions

228

Chapter

Operation section

Using the test tone oscillator

The AW2816 contains a test tone oscillator that lets

you choose between three types of sine wave and

noise. The signal of this oscillator can be sent to buses

1–8/AUX buses 1–6/stereo bus, and used for checking

levels or measuring the frequency response.

Press the [UTILITY] key → [F1] (Oscillator)

key.

The UTILITY screen/Oscillator page will appear.

In the WAVEFORM area, move the cursor

to the button for the waveform that you

want to output, and press the [ENTER] key.

The following waveforms can be selected.

• SINE 100 Hz ..... 100 Hz sine wave

• SINE 1 kHz........ 1 kHz sine wave

• SINE 10 kHz...... 10 kHz sine wave

• NOISE ............... White noise

In the BUS ASSIGN area, move the cursor

to the button for the bus to which you

want to output the signal, and press the

[ENTER] key.

Tip!

You can select multiple buses simultaneously.

Make sure that the LEVEL knob is set to the

minimum (–96 dB). Then move the cursor

to the OFF button in the OSC ON area,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The button will change to ON, and the signal

will be sent to the speciﬁed bus.

Sine waves and white noise have a higher sound pres-

sure level than their perceptual volume, and may

damage speakers or cause personal harm if played at

a high volume. Please be careful of the output level

when using the test tone oscillator.

Move the cursor to the LEVEL knob, and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial to raise the output

level.

To turn off the test tone oscillator, move

the cursor to the ON button of the OSC

ON area, and press the [ENTER] key.

The button will change to OFF, and the oscillator

will be turned off.

229

Other functions

Operation section

Using the metronome

The AW2816 has a built-in metronome that can

sound a click during song playback/recording accord-

ing to the tempo and time signature settings of the

tempo map.

Press the [SONG] key → [F4] (Tempo Map)

key.

The SONG screen/Tempo Map page will appear.

Move the cursor to the METER area or

TEMPO area, and input the desired time

signature data or tempo data.

For details on inputting time signature data and

tempo data, refer to page 195.

Press the [TRACK] key → [F1] (TR View) key.

The TRACK screen/TR View page will appear. In

the METRO. area in the lower right of the display,

you can turn the metronome on/off and adjust its

volume.

Move the cursor to the ON/OFF button in

the METRO. area, and press the [ENTER]

key.

The button display will change to ON, and the

metronome function will be turned on.

Move the cursor to the knob in the right of

the METRO. area, and use the [DATA/JOG]

dial to adjust the volume of the metro-

nome.

Play back the song.

A click sound will be output from MONITOR

OUTPUT jacks/PHONES jack, according to the

tempo map settings.

To silence the metronome, move the cur-

sor to the ON button in the METRO. area,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The button display will change to OFF, and the

metronome will be silenced.

Tip!

With the default settings of the AW2816, the metro-

nome will be output from the MONITOR OUTPUT

jacks/PHONES jack mixed with the other signals.

However by changing the Input Patch settings, you

can assign the metronome output to the desired input

channel (

→

P.71). In this case, the click sound will

always be sent to the input channel while the song is

playing, regardless of the settings in the METRO. area.

Other functions

230

Chapter

Operation section

Mixing and recording multiple channels

Chapter 3 explained how an input channel could be

recorded directly onto a track. However in some

cases, you may want to mix multiple input channels

and record them on one or two tracks. For example

this is convenient if you have set up multiple mics for

a drum set, and want to mix them to stereo and record

the drums on two tracks.

As an example, here’s how you can mix the input sig-

nals of input channels 1–4 and record them on tracks

1/2.

■ Make patching and routing set-

tings

In order to mix multiple input channels and record

them on tracks 1/2, you must change the patching so

that the input signals of the input channels are sent to

two buses, and the signals of those buses are recorded

on tracks 1/2.

Connect mics or instruments to INPUT

jacks 1–4, and use the [GAIN] controls to

adjust the input sensitivity.

Press the [PATCH] key → [F1] (Patch IN) key

to access the PATCH screen/Patch IN page,

and assign the signal of each INPUT jack

you are using to an input channel.

For this example, assign INPUT jacks 1–4 (AD 1–

AD 4) to input channels 1–4.

Also in the PATCH screen/Patch IN page,

assign the desired bus to the recorder

inputs of the tracks you want to record.

For this example, assign buses 1/2 (BUS 1/2) to

recorder inputs 1/2.

Tip!

Recalling scene number 00 or patch library number

00 will also produce the above state.

Make sure that the [ON] key is turned on

for each of the input channels you want to

mix, and raise the faders.

Press the [PAN] key → [F1] (Pan 1-8) key to

access the PAN screen/Pan 1-8 page, and

turn the bus assign 1/2 button on and the

ST button off for each input channel 1-4.

Also set the pan of input channels 1–4.

With these settings, the signal that passes through

the fader and pan of input channels 1–4 will be

sent to tracks 1/2.

It will not be possible to modify the pan settings of

each audio source after recording on tracks 1/2.

Make pan settings with care.

231

Other functions

Operation section

■ Monitor the signal

Make settings so that the input signal sent to recorder

inputs 1/2 can be monitored via the stereo output

channel from the MONITOR OUT jacks/PHONES

jack.

Press the REC TRACK SELECT [1]/[2] keys.

REC TRACK SELECT [1]/[2] keys will blink, and

tracks 1/2 will be in record-ready mode.

Press the [PAN] key → [F2] (Pan MONI) key

to access the PAN/ROUTE screen/Pan

MONI page, and turn the ST button on for

monitor channels 1/2. Also turn off all bus

assign 1-8 buttons.

The input signal of tracks 1/2 (the bus 1/2 signal)

will be sent via monitor channels 1/2 to the ste-

reo bus.

Set the monitor channel 1 PAN knob to the

far left (L16), and the monitor channel 2

PAN knob to the far right (R16).

Press the RECORDER [1-8] key to select

monitor channels 1–8 as the mixing layer.

Make sure that the monitor channel 1/2

[ON] keys are turned on, and raise faders

1/2 and the STEREO fader to the 0 dB posi-

tion.

With these settings, the input signals will pass

through monitor channels 1/2 and the stereo out-

put channel, and can be monitored from the

MONITOR OUT jacks/PHONES jack.

■ Create a mix and record

Now we will adjust the mix balance of the input

channels, and record the result on tracks 1/2.

Press the [METER] key.

The METER screen will appear. In this screen you

can view the input/output levels of the tracks 1–

16 and the output level of the stereo output

channel. Play your instrument(s), and verify that

the track 1/2 and stereo output channel meters

respond.

Tip!

The METER screen contains a Meter 1 page and a

Meter 2 page, but you may select either one.

Press the INPUT [1-8] key to select input

channels 1–8 as the mixing layer.

While watching the meters (input level) for

tracks 1/2, operate the input channel 1–4

faders to set the mix balance.

It will not be possible to adjust the mix balance of

each audio source after they are recorded on track 1/

Tip!

If the stereo output channel (L/R) meter clips, lower

the monitor channel faders or the STEREO fader.

When you have ﬁnished setting the bal-

ance, press the REC [ ] key + PLAY [ ]

key to begin recording.

Other functions

232

Chapter

Operation section

Pingpong-recording multiple tracks to one or

two tracks

On the AW2816, multiple previously-recorded tracks

can be mixed, and recorded on one or two tracks. This

operation is called “ping-pong recording” or “bounce

recording.” After ping-pong recording, you can assign

other virtual tracks to the original tracks and use them

to record new parts. This is convenient when you

want to record more than 17 parts of audio sources.

As an example, here’s how tracks 1–14 can be mixed

in stereo and recorded on tracks 15/16.

■ Set the patching and routing

In order to perform ping-pong recording, the monitor

channels that will be the ping-pong recording sources

must be sent to buses 1–8, and the outputs of those

buses must be patched to the inputs of the ping-pong

recording destination tracks. In this example, we will

make settings to send tracks 1–14 to buses 7/8, and

record on tracks 15/16.

Press the [PATCH] key → [F1] (Patch IN) key

to access the PATCH screen/Patch IN page,

and assign buses 7/8 (BUS 7/8) to recorder

inputs 15/16.

Press the RECORDER [1-8]/[9-16] keys to

verify that the [ON] keys are turned on for

monitor channels 1–14, and raise the fad-

ers.

Press the [PAN] key → [F2] (Pan MONI) key

to access the PAN screen/Pan MONI page.

Turn the bus assign 7/8 buttons on and the

ST button off for each monitor channel 1–

14. Also set the pan for each channel.

With these settings, the signal that has passed

through the fader and pan of monitor channels

1–14 will be routed through buses 7/8, and sent

to recorder inputs 15/16.

It will not be possible to adjust the pan of each audio

source after recording to tracks 15/16. Make pan set-

tings carefully.

■ Monitor the input signals

Now we will make settings so that the signals sent to

recorder inputs 15/16 can be monitored via the stereo

output channel from the MONITOR OUT jacks/

PHONES jack.

Press the REC TRACK SELECT [15]/[16]

keys.

The REC TRACK SELECT [15]/[16] keys will

blink, and tracks 15/16 will be in record-ready

mode.

Press the [PAN] key → [F2] (Pan MONI) key

to access the PAN screen/Pan MONI page.

For monitor channels 15/16, turn the ST

button on and the bus assign 1–8 buttons

off.

Set the monitor channel 15 PAN knob to

the far left (L16), and the monitor channel

16 pan knob to the far right (R16).

233

Other functions

Operation section

The settings of the Pan MONI page will be as fol-

lows.

Press the RECORDER [9-16] key to select

monitor channels 9–16 as the mixing layer,

and set faders 7/8 (monitor channels 15/

16) and the STEREO fader to the 0 dB posi-

tion.

Press the [METER] key to display the METER

screen.

The METER screen will appear, displaying meters

for the input/output levels of tracks 1–16.

The METER screen contains a Meter 1 page and a

Meter 2 page, but in this example you may select

either page.

Move the cursor to the INPUT MONITOR

area in the lower left of the display, and

turn on the INDI. button. At this time, ver-

ify that the INPUT buttons are highlighted

for the record-ready tracks 15/16.

If the INDI. (individual) button is on, you will

always be able to monitor the input signal for

tracks whose INPUT button is highlighted as

“ ,” regardless of the current running mode.

Tip!

For details on the function of each button in the

INPUT MONITOR area, refer to page 352.

■ Create a mix and record

Press the PLAY [ ] button to play back the

song.

Press the RECORDER [1-8]/[9-16] keys to

select monitor channels 1–8/9–16 as the

mixing layer, and create the mix balance

for tracks 1–14.

While you create the mix, make sure that the

input level does not clip for tracks 15/16 in the

METER screen.

If you want to adjust monitor channel 1–14

parameters other than the faders (e.g., pan, EQ,

dynamics processor), you will need to use the

[PAN], [EQ], and [DYN] etc. to access other

screens. After adjusting pan or EQ, be sure to

return to the METER screen to check the input

levels, and adjust the faders as necessary.

When you have ﬁnished creating the mix,

hold down the REC [ ] key and press the

PLAY [ ] key to begin recording on tracks

15/16.

Tip!

When you have ﬁnished ping-pong recording on

tracks 15/16, you can switch the virtual tracks of

tracks 1–14, and record other instruments on tracks

1–14 without losing the original source tracks of the

ping-pong recording.

235

Reference section

The Reference section explains all the screens and pages that

appear in the display of the AW2816. You can use this sec-

tion like a dictionary when you want to learn more about the

functions in a display page, or to ﬁnd out which display page

contains the operation you want to use.

Reference section

SONG screen

FILE screen

CD screen

QUICK REC screen

SETUP screen

UTILITY screen

MIDI screen

PATCH screen

VIEW screen

PAN/ROUTE screen

EQ/ATT/GRP screen

DYN/DLY screen

AUX1–AUX4 screens

AUX5/EFF1, AUX6/EFF2 screens

REMOTE screen

HOME screen

METER screen

SCENE screen

AUTOMIX screen

EDIT screen

TRACK screen

236

Reference section

How to read the Reference section

This page explains how to read the Reference section.

A Screen name

B Page name/title

C Function

A brief explanation of the functions available in

this page.

D Key operation

The procedure for accessing this page from the

panel.

→ indicates the order in which keys are to be

pressed.

Example: [SONG] key → [F1] (Song List) key

(After pressing the [SONG] key, press the [F1] key)

+ indicates that you should hold down one key

and press the other key.

Example: [SHIFT]] key + [SONG] key

(Hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the

[SONG] key)

E Functions in the screen

Explanations of the functions or displays in this

screen.

F Additional functions

Explanations of the additional functions assigned

to the function keys ([F1]–[F5] keys) in this page.

You must hold down the [SHIFT] key in order to

access these additional functions.

HOME screen

IN/Rtn/MONI page

Monitor the input level of each channel

Function

This page displays the input level of input

channels 1–8, return channels 1/2, and

monitor channels 1–16.

Key operations

• [HOME] key → [F1] (IN/Rtn/MONI) key

• Repeatedly press the [HOME] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

Level meters

This area indicates the input level of each channel.

Below each level meter, the location of the fader

for that channel is displayed in dB units.

B PRE EQ button

POST EQ button

POST FADER button

Use these three buttons to select the location

within the signal routing that will be displayed by

the level meters (1). Turning on the PRE EQ but-

ton will display the pre-EQ signal level, the POST

EQ button will display the post-EQ signal level,

and the POST FADER button will display the post-

fader signal level. This is convenient when you

want to see the location at which the input signal

of that channel is clipping.

E STEREO OUT LEVEL

This displays the position of the STEREO fader in

dB units.

■ Additional functions in the IN/Rtn/

MONI page

In the IN/Rtn/MONI page, holding down the [SHIFT]

key will assign the following additional function to

the [F1] key.

• [F1] (PEAK HOLD) key

Switches the Peak Hold function on/off. When

peak hold is on, a “” symbol indicating the

peak level will be maintained in the level meter

(1). The peak hold setting also affects the level

meters displayed in pages other than in the EQ/

ATT/GRP screen and the DYN/DLY screen.

2 3 4 5

ATT

4BAND EQ

DYNAMICS

etc.

PAN

LEVELON

PRE EQ

INPUT SELECT

METER

POST EQ

METER

POST FADER

METER

237

Reference section

SONG screen

Song List page

Save/load/create a song

Function

Load an existing song, save the current

song, or create a new song.

Key operation

• [SONG] key → [F1] (Song List) key

• [SHIFT] key + [SONG] key (shortcut)

• Repeatedly press the [SONG] key

until the display shown at right

appears.

Screen functions

A Song list

This is a list of the songs saved on the internal hard

disk. The song enclosed by the dotted line is cur-

rently selected for loading. Use the [DATA/JOG]

dial to select a song. The highlighted line indicates

the current song (the currently-loaded song).

The song list displays the following information.

• SONG NAME ...... Song name (however, only

the ﬁrst 16 characters)

• SAVED AT............ Date and time at which the

song was last saved

• SIZE .................... Size of the song

• BIT/FS ................. Number of quantization bits/

sampling frequency of the

song

• PRT...................... Song protect (→P.238) on/off

status

Tip!

• If song protect is on, the PRT column will show “ ”.

• In this page, you can turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to

select the song for loading regardless of where the

cursor is located.

B SELECTED SONG NAME

This displays the name of the song that is currently

selected in the song list. This area is for display

only, and cannot be edited.

C COMMENT

This displays the comment for the song that is cur-

rently selected in the song list. This area is for dis-

play only, and cannot be edited.

Tip!

The song name and comment can be edited in the

SONG screen Setting page.

D LOAD button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the song selected in the

song list will be loaded.

E SAVE button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the song will be saved. If

you accessed this page by holding down the

[SHIFT] key and pressing the [SONG] key, the cur-

sor will automatically move to this button, so you

can save the song by simply pressing the [ENTER]

key again. (Shortcut for the Song Save operation)

Tip!

When you save a song, it will always be overwritten

onto the current song on the hard disk.

F NEW SONG button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, a new song will be created.

SONG screen

238

Reference section

Setting page

Settings for the current song

Function

Make various settings for the current

song, such as editing a song name,

selecting the counter display method,

and selecting the time code frame rate.

Key operation

• [SONG] key → [F2] (Setting) key

• Repeatedly press the [SONG] key

until the display shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A NAME EDIT button

This button edits the song name of the current

song. Move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, and a popup window will appear,

allowing you to input the song name. You can

input a song name of up to 64 characters.

B SONG NAME

This displays the name of the current song.

C COMMENT EDIT button

Move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, and a popup window will appear,

allowing you to input a comment for the current

song. You can input a comment of up to 64 char-

acters.

D COMMENT

This displays the comment of the current song.

E DISPLAY

Use the following three buttons to select the dis-

play method for the counter that is shown at the

top of the LCD display.

• SECOND button

The counter will be displayed as time (hours/min-

utes/seconds/milliseconds).

• TIME CODE button

The counter will be displayed as time code (hours/

minutes/seconds/frames/sub-frames).

• MEASURE button

The counter will be displayed as measures (mea-

sures/beats/ticks).

Tip!

The display method you select here will also affect

how the track editing range is speciﬁed (EDIT screen

TR Edit page etc.), and how locate points are displayed

(TRACK screen Mark Adj. page etc.).

F PROTECT

This switches the protect status on/off for the cur-

rent song. When song protect is “ON,” it is not

possible to perform track recording or editing, or

to change the locate point. This setting is conve-

nient when you have completed a song and want

to keep it being modiﬁed.

G FRAME RATE

Use the following four buttons to select the frame

rate of the time code. The frame rate setting will

affect the counter time code display and the MTC

that is transmitted and received.

• 24 button ............ 24 frames/second

• 25 button ............ 25 frames/second

• 30 button ............ 30 frames/second (30 non-

drop frame)

• 30D button.......... 29.97 frames/second (30

drop frame)

Tip!

If you are using MTC to synchronize the AW2816 and

an external device, you must set the frame rate of both

devices to match.

239

Reference section

H TOP

This sets the time code location that corresponds

to the beginning of the song (Time Code Top).

Move the cursor to the TOP area, and use the [ ]/

[ ] keys and the [DATA/JOG] dial to adjust the

hours/minutes/seconds/frames/subframes value.

The range is “00:00:00:00.00”–“24:00:00:00.00”

(it is not possible to specify a negative value).

• When you change the Time Code Top, it will affect

both the time code display in the screen as well as

the MTC that is transmitted and received.

• When the Time Code Top is changed, the location of

the Start Point and End Point will automatically be

moved forward or backward. For the Start Point/End

Point, refer to the Track screen/Mark Adj. page

(

→

P.327).

I RGN. FADE TIME (Region Fade Time)

This adjusts the time over which fade-in/fade-out

will occur at the beginning and end of a region

(Region Fade Time). The range is 3, 5, 10, 20, or 45

(msec), and the default setting is 5 msec.

Tip!

If the level changes abruptly at the start or end of a

region, a click or pop may be heard during playback. If

this occurs, you can increase the Region Fade Time.

Tip!

The settings in this page are saved on the internal hard

disk as part of the current song. After you modify these

settings, save the current song as necessary.

Time code display

Time display

Song

00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00

00:00:00:000 00:00:05:000

00:00:10:00.00

00:00:10:000

Time code top = 00:00:00:00.00

Time code top = 00:00:

05:00.00

Time code display

Time display

Song

00:00:05:00.00 00:00:10:00.00

00:00:00:000 00:00:05:000

00:00:15:00.00

00:00:10:000

SONG screen

240

Reference section

Song Edit page

Delete/copy/optimize a song

Function

These operations let you edit songs

saved on the internal hard disk by delet-

ing, copying, or optimizing.

Key operation

• [SONG] key → [F3] key (Song Edit)

key

• Repeatedly press the [SONG] key

until the screen shown at right

appears.

Screen functions

A Song list

This is a list of the songs saved on the internal hard

disk. The highlighted line indicates the current

song, and the song enclosed by the dotted line has

been selected in the list for loading.

The “E” symbol displayed in the EDIT column of

the song list indicates that the corresponding song

has been selected for editing. Use the [DATA/JOG]

dial to move the desired song so that it is enclosed

by the dotted line, and press the [ENTER] key to

add or remove the “E” symbol.

The following information is displayed in the other

columns of the song list.

• SONG NAME ...... Song name (however, only

the ﬁrst 12 characters)

• SAVED AT............ Date and time at which the

song was last saved

• SIZE..................... Size of the song

• BIT/FS ................. Number of quantization bits/

sampling frequency of the

song

• PRT...................... Song protect (→P.238) on/off

status

B DELETE button

This button deletes the song(s) marked by the “E”

symbol from the internal hard disk. If you have

assigned the “E” symbol to multiple songs, they

will be deleted together.

• It is not possible to delete the current song.

• A deleted song can never be recovered. Use this

operation with caution.

C COPY button

This button copies the song(s) marked by the “E”

symbol within the internal hard disk. If you have

assigned the “E” symbol to multiple songs, they

will be copied together.

D OPTIMIZE button

This button executes the Optimize operation for the

song marked by the “E” symbol. When you optimize

a song, currently-unused data (e.g., Undo data) within

that song will be deleted. Use this when you want to

increase the free space on the internal hard disk.

•

After Optimize has been executed, it will not be possible

to use the Undo function to return to the previous state

• The Optimize operation does not have any effect on

data fragmentation (a state in which a piece of continu-

ous data has become distributed across different areas

of the hard disk). To clean up fragmented data, you must

use the Defrag function (FILE screen Disk Util. page).

• Only one song at a time can be Optimized. It is pos-

sible to optimize the current song.

E MIXER IMP (Mixer Import) button

This button imports mixer data (scene memory

and automix, etc.) from the song marked by the

“E” symbol into the current song. The data to be

imported can be selected from the following types.

• Scene Memory (SCENE MEM.)

• Automix (AUTO MIX)

• Tempo Map (TEMPO MAP)

• Patch and effect libraries, etc. (LIBRARY)

• MIDI Remote settings (MIDI REMOTE)

• Only one song can be selected as the Import source.

If you attempt to execute the Import operation when

the “E” symbol is displayed for more than one song,

an error message will appear.

• It is not possible to select the current song as the

Import source.

F Parameter area

When you move the cursor to the 2–5 buttons,

this area will display the function that can be exe-

cuted by that button (DELETE/COPY/OPTIMIZE/

MIXER IMPORT).

241

Reference section

Tempo Map page

Program the tempo and time signature of a song

Function

Here you can program the tempo data

and time signature data for the tempo

map, to manage the measures of a song.

Key operation

• [SONG] key → [F4] (Tempo Map) key

• Repeatedly press the [SONG] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A METER

This area displays a list of the time signature data

from the beginning of the song. The line enclosed

by the dotted line is the currently selected time

signature data.

The time signature data displayed in the METER

area contains the following items.

• STEP ...............Displays the step number of the

time signature data. Move the

cursor to this area and turn the

[DATA/JOG] dial to select the

desired time signature data.

• MEASURE.......Displays the location (measure

number) of the time signature

data. Move the cursor to this

area and turn the [DATA/JOG]

dial to change the measure num-

ber (1–1000) of the correspond-

ing time signature data. If you

change the location of the time

signature data so that it is moved

before or after the preceding or

following time signature data,

the step numbers will automati-

cally be exchanged.

• METER............This is the time signature setting.

Move the cursor to this area and

turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to

specify the time signature (2/1–8/

8). The numerator and denomi-

nator of the time signature can

be set separately.

Tip!

When the AW2816 is in the default state, time signa-

ture data of 4/4 is already input at measure 1.

• It is not possible to move the time signature data of

measure 1.

• It is not possible to place two time signatures at the

same measure. If you move the cursor to the MEA-

SURE area and specify the same measure number as

an existing time signature, the previous time signa-

ture data will be deleted.

B NEW button

This button adds new time signature data at the

end of the METER area. When you move the cur-

sor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, time

signature data will be added after the last step

number.

C INS (Insert) button

This button inserts new time signature data into

the METER area. When you move the cursor to this

button and press the [ENTER] key, new data will

be inserted before the currently selected step num-

ber (i.e., the step enclosed by the dotted line).

• You can input a maximum of 26 steps (step numbers

1–26) of time signature data. It is not possible to add

or insert more than this number.

• The INS button cannot be used to insert new data

before step number 1.

2 4 6 7 8

SONG screen

242

Reference section

D DEL button

This button deletes time signature data from the

METER area. When you move the cursor to this

button and press the [ENTER] key, the currently

selected time signature (i.e., the step enclosed by

the dotted line) will be deleted. It is not possible to

delete the time signature data for step number 1.

E TEMPO

This area displays a list of the tempo data that has

been input from the beginning of the song. The

line enclosed by the dotted line is the currently

selected tempo data.

The tempo data displayed in the TEMPO area con-

tains the following items.

• STEP .................... Displays the step number of

the tempo data. Move the

cursor to this area and turn

the [DATA/JOG] dial to select

the desired tempo data.

• MEASURE/BEAT .. Displays the location (mea-

sure number and beat) of the

tempo data. Move the cursor

to this area and turn the

[DATA/JOG] dial to change

the measure number (1–

1000) of the corresponding

tempo data. If you change the

location of the tempo data so

that it moved before or after

the preceding or following

tempo data, the step numbers

will automatically be

exchanged.

• TEMPO ................ This is the tempo setting.

Move the cursor to this area

and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial

to specify the tempo (BPM).

The BPM value can be set in

steps of 0.1 over a range of

20.0–300.0.

F NEW button

This button adds new tempo data at the end of the

TEMPO area. When you move the cursor to this

button and press the [ENTER] key, tempo data will

be added after the last step number.

G INS (Insert) button

This button inserts new tempo data into the

TEMPO area. When you move the cursor to this

button and press the [ENTER] key, new data will

be inserted before the currently selected step num-

ber (i.e., the step enclosed by the dotted line).

• You can input a maximum of 26 steps (step numbers

1–26) of tempo data. It is not possible to add or

insert more than this number.

• The INS button cannot be used to insert new data

before step number 1.

H DEL button

This button deletes tempo data from the TEMPO

area. When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the currently selected

tempo data (i.e., the data enclosed by the dotted

line) will be deleted. It is not possible to delete the

tempo data for step number 1.

■ Additional functions in the Tempo

Map page

In the Tempo Map page, holding down the [SHIFT]

key will assign the following additional functions to

the [F1]–[F3] keys.

• [F1] (NEW) key

When the cursor is in the METER area, this will

add new time signature data at the end of the

METER area. When the cursor is in the TEMPO

area, this will add new tempo data at the end of

the TEMPO area.

• [F2] (INS) key

When the cursor is in the METER area, this will

insert new time signature data into the METER

area. When the cursor is in the TEMPO area, this

will insert new tempo data into the TEMPO area.

• [F3] (DEL) key

When the cursor is in the METER area, this will

delete the currently selected time signature data

from the METER area. When the cursor is in the

TEMPO area, this will delete the currently selected

tempo data from the TEMPO area.

243

Reference section

Shut Down page

Prepare the AW2816 for powering-off

Function

Shut down the AW2816 so that the

power can be turned off.

Key operation

• [SONG] key → [F5] (Shut Down) key

• Repeatedly press the [SONG] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A Current song status

This area displays various information for the cur-

rent song.

• NAME.................. Song name of the current

song

• COMMENT ......... Comment of the current song

• BIT ...................... Number of quantization bits

for the current song

• FS ........................ Sampling frequency of the

current song

• SIZE..................... Size of the current song when

it was last saved

• PROTECT ............ Song protect setting

• SAVE AT .............. Date and time at which the

current song was last saved

• The SIZE and SAVE AT displays are updated when the

current song is saved.

• This page is for display only, there are no items that

can be edited.

B EXECUTE button

This button shuts down the AW2816. In this page,

the cursor will always be located at this button, so

you can execute shutdown simply by pressing the

[ENTER] key.

• If you turn off the power of the AW2816 without per-

forming the shutdown operation, data on the internal

hard disk may be lost. You must always execute Shut-

down before turning off the power.

• Before powering-off the AW2816, the volume of

your playback system (power amp etc.) should be

turned down to zero (or its power turned off).

SONG screen

244

Reference section

FILE screen

Backup page

Back up a song

Function

In this page, song data on the internal

hard disk can be backed up on an inter-

nal/external CD-RW drive or SCSI

device (e.g., MO drive).

Key operation

• [FILE] key → [F1] (Backup) key

• Repeatedly press the [FILE] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A Song list

This is a list of the songs saved on the internal hard

disk. The song enclosed by the dotted line is cur-

rently selected. The highlighted line indicates the

current song (currently loaded song).

In the BACKUP column, the “

●” symbol indicates

a song that has been selected for backup, and the

“” symbol indicates a song that has been

excluded from the backup.

The song list displays the following information.

• SONG NAME ...... Song name (however, only

the ﬁrst 12 characters)

• SAVED AT............ Date and time at which the

song was last saved

• SIZE..................... Size of the song

• BIT/FS ................. Number of quantization bits/

sampling frequency of the

song

• PRT...................... Write protect (→P.238) on/off

status

B BACKUP SONG button

This button switches the song currently selected in

the song list between Selected for backup

(ENABLE) or Excluded from the backup (DISABLE).

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the symbol in the BACKUP

column (

● or ) will alternate for the currently

selected song.

C ALL ENABLE button

If you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, all songs will be selected for backup.

D ALL DISABLE button

If you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, all songs will be excluded from the

backup.

E SOURCE

This shows the backup source drive (internal hard

disk). This item is for display only, and cannot be

modiﬁed.

F DESTINATION

This selects the backup destination drive. Move

the cursor to this ﬁeld and use the [DATA/JOG]

dial to select a SCSI ID number (external SCSI

device/external CD-RW drive) or “ATAPI” (internal

CD-RW drive), and press the [ENTER] key to con-

ﬁrm your selection.

G EXECUTE button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, a popup window will ask

you to conﬁrm the operation. Move the cursor to

OK and press the [ENTER] key to begin the

backup.

245

Reference section

FILE screen

Tip!

• When backing up to removable media such as an MO

drive, you can select from two types of backup:

“TYPE 1” in which the backup can extend across

multiple volumes of media, and “TYPE 2” in which

data can be backed up in units of individual songs on

one volume of media. The selection of either TYPE 1

or TYPE 2 is made in the UTILITY screen Prefer.3

page (

→

P.268).

• Before backing up to CD-R/RW media, you can

select whether to use the “Test writing” function

which checks beforehand for writing errors, and the

“Compare” function which checks for errors by com-

paring the written data with the original data

(

→

P.269).

• For details on the backup procedure, refer to

page 162.

■ Additional functions in the Backup

page

In the Backup page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F2] keys.

• [F1] (CD LOAD) key

Close the tray of the CD-RW drive and load the

CD.

• [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key

Open the tray of the CD-RW drive.

FILE screen

246

Reference section

Restore page

Reload backed-up song data

Function

In this page, song data can be reloaded

(restored) from an internal/external

CD-RW drive or external SCSI device

back into the internal hard disk of the

AW2816.

Key operation

• [FILE] key → [F2] (Restore) key

• Repeatedly press the [FILE] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A Song list

This is a list of the songs saved on the backup

internal CD-RW drive or external SCSI device. The

song enclosed by the dotted line is currently

selected.

In the RESTORE column, the “

●” symbol indicates

a song that has been selected for restore, and the

“” symbol indicates a song that has been

excluded from the restore operation.

The song list displays the following information.

• SONG NAME ...... Song name (however, only

the ﬁrst 12 characters)

• SAVED AT............ Date and time at which the

song was last saved

• SIZE..................... Size of the song

• BIT/FS ................. Number of quantization bits/

sampling frequency of the

song

• PRT...................... Song protect (→P.238) on/off

status

B RESTORE SONG button

This button switches the song currently selected in

the song list between Selected for restore

(ENABLE) or Excluded from the restore operation

(DISABLE).

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the symbol in the RESTORE

column (

● or ) will alternate for the currently

selected song.

C ALL ENABLE button

If you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, all songs will be selected for restore.

D ALL DISABLE button

If you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, all songs will be excluded from the

restore.

E SOURCE

Select the drive from which the data will be

restored. Move the cursor to this ﬁeld and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial to select a SCSI ID number

(external SCSI device/external CD-RW drive) or

“ATAPI” (internal CD-RW drive), and press the

[ENTER] key to conﬁrm your selection.

F DESTINATION

This shows the restore destination drive (internal

hard disk). This item is for display only, and cannot

be modiﬁed.

G EXECUTE button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, a popup window will ask

you to conﬁrm the operation. Move the cursor to

OK and press the [ENTER] key to begin the restore

operation.

Tip!

• Song data backed up on the upper-level model

AW4416 can be restored to the AW2816, but only

the audio data of each track will be restored.

• For details on the Restore procedure, refer to

page 164.

247

Reference section

■ Additional functions in the Restore

page

In the Restore page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys.

• [F1] (CD LOAD) key

Close the tray of the CD-RW drive and load the

CD.

• [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key

Open the tray of the CD-RW drive.

• [F3] (RELOAD) key

Reload (re-read) removable media (such as MO) to

update the song list.

FILE screen

248

Reference section

Disk Util. page

Format or erase a disk

Function

In this page you can format or defrag-

ment the internal hard disk, format an

external SCSI device, or erase CD-RW

media.

Key operation

• [FILE] key → [F3] (Disk Util.) key

• Repeatedly press the [FILE] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A Drive select

Move the cursor to this area and use the [DATA/

JOG] dial to select the desired drive from the fol-

lowing.

• SCSI ID number .. Select this when you want to

format an external SCSI

device (e.g., MO) or to erase

CD-RW media in an external

CD-RW drive.

• ATAPI .................. Select this when you want to

erase CD-RW media in the

internal CD-RW drive.

• INT.IDE ............... Select this when you want to

format or defrag the internal

hard disk.

After selecting the desired drive, press the [ENTER]

key to conﬁrm your selection.

The display will change as follows, according to the

drive you selected.

■ If you selected the internal hard disk

DEFRAG (Defragment)

This button executes the Defrag operation, which

cleans up data fragmentation on the internal hard

disk.

• If read/write errors occur during the Defrag opera-

tion, it is possible that the data on the internal hard

disk may be lost. If the internal hard disk contains

important song data, you should back it up before

executing Defrag.

• Defrag will require about one hour of processing

time for 1 GB of data. During this time, you must not

turn off the power of the AW2816. Doing so will

cause fatal damage to the hard disk and the data, and

may render it irrecoverable.

• Avoid executing Defrag if power failure due to light-

ning strikes etc. is a possibility.

Tip!

While Defrag is being executed, you can press the

[ENTER] key to abort the processing.

C FORMAT

This button formats the internal hard disk.

When the Format operation is executed, all audio data

on the hard disk will be lost forever. Please use this

operation with care.

■ If you selected an external SCSI

device (MO or external hard disk)

QUICK/NORMAL buttons

Use these two buttons to select how the external

SCSI device will be formatted.

249

Reference section

• NORMAL ............ Execute normal formatting.

Since the disk will be

checked for faulty sectors

while formatting is per-

formed, some time will be

required for the operation to

be completed.

• QUICK ................ Formatting will be executed

without checking for faulty

sectors. This is convenient

when you want to erase the

disk and use it immediately.

(However, faulty sectors may

remain, so this is not recom-

mended if you will be mak-

ing important recordings.)

E File system select

Move the cursor to this area and turn the [DATA/

JOG] dial to select which of the following two ﬁle

systems will be used for formatting.

• ORIGINAL .......... Format the media with the

AW2816’s own ﬁle system.

Select this if you will be using

the drive as a song backup

destination.

• FAT16.................. Format the media using a ﬁle

system used mainly by the

Windows operating system.

Select this if you will be using

the drive to transfer WAV ﬁles

between the AW2816 and a

computer.

Be sure that the appropriate ﬁle system is selected

before you format an external hard disk or MO disk. It

is not possible to switch the ﬁle system after format-

ting.

■ If you selected an internal/external

CD-RW drive

AUDIO READ SPEED

Use the x1, x2, x4, and x8 buttons to select the

speed at which audio data will be executed read

(single speed/double speed/quad speed/8x speed).

Tip!

This setting affects only how audio data is imported

from CD. (For other purposes, reading will automati-

cally occur at the fastest speed supported by the CD-

RW drive.) Normally you should set this to the fastest

speed supported by your CD-RW drive.

G WRITE SPEED

Use the x1, x2, x4, and x6 buttons to select the

speed at which data will be written (single speed/

double speed/quad speed/6x speed).

Tip!

This setting affects the writing speed at which song

data is backed up on a CD-RW drive, exported to a

WAV ﬁle, or written to an audio CD. Normally you

should set this to the fastest speed supported by your

CD-RW drive.

H CD-RW MEDIA ERASE

Select one of the following two methods by which

the CD-RW media will be erased.

• SIMPLY................ Only the TOC (Table Of Con-

tents) of the CD-RW media

will be erased. With this

method, the erasure will hap-

pen relatively quickly.

• PERFECTLY.......... Erase all data from the CD-

RW media. With this method,

a certain amount of time will

be required for the erasure to

be completed.

Executing the Erase operation with either method will

cause the data on the CD-RW media to be lost forever.

Use this operation with caution.

Tip!

For details on erasing CD-RW media, refer to

page 161.

■ Additional functions in the Disk Util.

page

In the Disk Util. page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F2] keys.

• [F1] (CD LOAD) key

Close the tray of the CD-RW drive and load the

CD.

• [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key

Open the tray of the CD-RW drive.

FILE screen

250

Reference section

CD screen

CD Write page

Use a CD-RW drive to create an audio CD

Function

Write the stereo track data of the song

to CD-R/RW media to create an audio

CD (Mastering function).

Key operation

• [CD] key → [F1] (CD Write) key

• Repeatedly press the [CD] key until

the screen shown at right appears.

Screen functions

A DRIVE

Select an internal or external CD-RW drive. Move

the cursor to this area and use the [DATA/JOG]

dial to select “ATAPI” (internal CD-RW drive) or a

SCSI ID number (external CD-RW drive), and then

press the [ENTER] key to conﬁrm your selection.

B FINALIZE button

This button writes track locations and other infor-

mation into the data area to “ﬁnalize” CD-R media

that was written using the “track at once” method.

This button will be displayed only if the TRACK AT

ONCE button (3) is turned on.

CD-R media to which audio data was recorded using

the “track at once” method cannot be played on a con-

ventional CD player or by the CD Player function of

the AW2816 until the media has been ﬁnalized.

C TRACK AT ONCE button

D DISC AT ONCE button

Use these two buttons to select one of the follow-

ing two methods by which data will be stored on

the CD-R or CD-RW media.

• Track At Once

This method records audio data as individual

tracks on the CD. This can be selected only if the

media is CD-R. A CD-R disc that was recorded

using this method allows additional data to be

written, as long as the disc has not yet been ﬁnal-

ized. (However, CD-R media that has not yet been

ﬁnalized cannot be played on a conventional CD

player or by the CD Player function of the

AW2816.)

• Disc At Once

This method records all tracks (the entire disc) at

once. CD-R/RW media recorded using this

method will be ﬁnalized automatically.

E WRITE SPEED buttons

Use the x1, x2, x4, and x6 buttons to select the

writing speed (single speed/double speed/quad

speed/6x speed). Normally you will select the fast-

est speed that your CD-RW drive supports.

F Track list

In this area you can view and select the stereo

track(s) that will be written to each track of the CD.

The line enclosed by the dotted lines is the track

that is selected for the current operation. The fol-

lowing information is shown in each column of

the track list.

• TRACK................. This indicates the CD track

number. Move the cursor to

this area and use the [DATA/

JOG] dial to select the track

to which the operation will

apply.

• SONG NAME ...... This shows the song name of

songs that contain a stereo

track. Move the cursor to this

area and use the [DATA/JOG]

dial to select the stereo track

that will be written to the cor-

responding track.

LK8

9 J

251

Reference section

CD screen

• SIZE..................... This indicates the data size of

the stereo track. The total

data size is shown in the

TOTAL line (7).

• COPY .................. This indicates whether copy

protection is enabled. Tracks

for which you have pressed

prohibit digital copying will

be indicated by a symbol

(i.e., copy protection

enabled).

• The track list will display only the stereo tracks of

songs with a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. Stereo

tracks within songs whose sampling frequency is

48 kHz will not be displayed.

• A stereo track that has just been recorded will not be

displayed in the track list until you save the current

song. If you want to write the stereo track of the cur-

rent song to a CD, you must ﬁrst save the current

song.

Tip!

• If you select the stereo track of a 24 bit (44.1 kHz)

song, the lower 8 bits will be discarded during mas-

tering, converting it to 16 bit (44.1 kHz) data.

• If the CD-RW drive contains CD-R media with data

that was recorded using Track At Once, the SONG

NAME/SIZE/COPY area will indicate “---EXISTING---”.

G Total

This indicates the total of the SIZE column of the

track list. A total of approximately 650 Mbytes can

be written onto a 74 minute CD-R/RW disc.

H NEW button

This button adds a new track to the end of the

track list.

I INS (Insert) button

This button inserts a new track before the track

number that is currently selected in the list.

J DEL (Delete) button

This button deletes the currently selected track

from the track list.

K COPYRIGHT button

This button switches the copy protect setting for

the track currently selected in the track list. Move

the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key

to switch between the following two button dis-

plays.

• PROHIBIT ........... Prohibit digital copying of the

track (Copy Protect enabled).

• PERMIT ............... Permit digital copying of the

track (Copy Protect disabled).

L EXECUTE button

This button executes writing (mastering) to the

CD-R/RW media.

Tip!

• Before you begin actually writing, it is also possible

to check whether errors will occur while the data is

transmitted (Test Writing function). This setting is

made in the UTILITY screen Prefer.3 page (

→

P.268).

• For details on the procedure for writing an audio CD,

refer to page 179.

■ Additional functions in the CD Write

page

In the CD Write page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F5] keys.

• [F1] (CD LOAD) key

Close the tray of the CD-RW drive and load the

CD.

• [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key

Open the tray of the CD-RW drive.

• [F3] (NEW) key

Add a new track to the end of the track list (6).

This is the same function as the NEW button (8).

• [F4] (INS) key

Insert a new track after the track number currently

selected in the track list (6). This is the same func-

tion as the INS button (9).

• [F5] (DEL) key

Delete the track that is currently selected in the

track list (6). This is the same function as the DEL

button (J).

CD screen

252

Reference section

CD Play page

Use a CD-RW drive to play an audio CD

Function

Use an internal/external CD-RW drive

connected to the AW2816 to play an

audio CD (CD Play function).

Key operation

• [CD] key → [F2] (CD Play) key

• Repeatedly press the [CD] key until

the screen shown at right appears.

Screen functions

A DRIVE

Select an internal or external CD-RW drive. Move

the cursor to this area and use the [DATA/JOG]

dial to select “ATAPI” (internal CD-RW drive) or a

SCSI ID number (external CD-RW drive), and press

the [ENTER] key.

B CD PLAY MODE button

Move the cursor to this area and press the [ENTER]

key to switch the CD Play function on/off. When

the CD Play function is on, the keys of the trans-

port section can be used to control audio CD play/

stop, etc. When the CD Play function is on, the

keys will function as follows.

• When the CD Play function is on, the operations of

keys other than the above keys, the [CURSOR] keys,

the [DATA/JOG] dial, and the [ENTER] key will be

ignored.

• The CD audio signal is routed through the stereo out-

put channel and output from the STEREO OUT jacks.

(Use the STEREO fader to adjust the volume.) During

this time, the signals of other channels will not be

sent to the stereo output channel.

Stereo output channel

• While an audio CD is playing, the access indicator in

the display section will blink.

• For details on using the CD Play function, refer to

page 177.

C Counter

This displays the track number (TRACK column) of

the playback track currently selected in the track

list (4), and the elapsed time of that track (TIME

column).

D Track list

This displays a list of the CD track numbers

(TRACK column) and track times (TIME column).

The highlighted line is the currently selected play-

back track. You can also move the cursor to the

track list and use the [DATA/JOG] dial and

[ENTER] key to select the playback track.

Tip!

The CD Play function is also able to play audio from a

mixed-mode CD-ROM (only track 2 or later) or CD

Extra (ﬁrst session only).

Key Function

PLAY [ ] key Play back the audio CD

STOP [ ] key Stop the audio CD

FF [ ]/

REW [ ] keys

Rewind/fast-forward

[ ]/[ ] keys Select tracks

STEREO L

STEREO R

ATT

4BAND EQ

DYNAMICS

STEREO

BALLEVELON

OFF

CD PLAY

mode

CD-RW DRIVE

ATT

4BAND EQ

DYNAMICS

253

Reference section

■ Additional functions in the CD Play

page

In the CD Play page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F2] keys.

• [F1] (CD LOAD) key

Close the tray of the CD-RW drive and load the

CD.

• [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key

Open the tray of the CD-RW drive.

CD screen

254

Reference section

QUICK REC screen

Quick Rec page

Visually patch input sources to tracks

Function

While viewing the patch status on the

screen, you can assign eight input

sources directly to tracks 1–16.

Key operation

• [QUICK REC] key

Screen functions

A MIX. CH (Mixer Channels)

This area displays the input sources assigned to

input channels 1–8. The (jack) symbol dis-

played at the right of this area indicates the direct

output of each channel.

If you move the cursor to the jack symbol and

press the [ENTER] key, the input channel for that

row will be highlighted, indicating that it is

selected for operations. If you move the cursor to a

selected channel and press the [ENTER] key once

again, the selection will be defeated.

Move the cursor to the numerical value box for

each input channel, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial

to select the input source from the following.

• AD 1–AD 8.......... INPUT jacks 1–8

• SLT-1–SLT-8.......... INPUT 1–8 of an I/O card

(OPTION I/O slot)

• DIN L/DIN R....... L or R channel of the DIGI-

TAL STEREO IN jack

• MET..................... Internal metronome

B Patch cable

Virtual patch cables indicate how the direct out-

puts of input channels 1–8 (the MIX. CH area) are

connected to recorder inputs 1–16 (the REC. TR

area).

To connect a patch cable, move the cursor to the

jack in the MIX.CH area and press the [ENTER]

key, and then move the cursor to a REC.TR jack

and press the [ENTER] key. (Performing these steps

in reverse order will produce the same result.)

To cancel an individual patch cable, use the

CLEAR button (4). To cancel all patch cables, use

the ALL CLEAR button (5).

• It is possible to connect a single input channel to

multiple tracks. However, it is not possible to con-

nect multiple input channels to a single track.

• A maximum of eight patch cables can be connected.

If all eight have been connected, it will not be possi-

ble to change any connections unless you cancel one

of the cables.

• The patching that you specify in the Quick Rec page

will take effect only when you use the EXECUTE but-

ton (

C CURRENT button

D FLAT button

Use these two buttons to specify whether the set-

tings of the corresponding input channels will be

initialized when Quick Rec is executed.

If the CURRENT button is on (highlighted), execut-

ing Quick Rec will not change the input channel

settings; only the patching will change.

If the FLAT button is on, executing Quick Rec will

recall channel library 01 to input channels to

which a patch cable is connected, initializing the

mix parameters.

1 2

5 7 8

255

Reference section

QUICK REC screen

E REC.TR (Recorder Tracks)

This area displays the connection status of tracks

1–16. The (jack) symbol displayed at the left of

this area indicates the recorder input of each track.

If you move the cursor to the jack and press the

[ENTER] key, the track of that row will be high-

lighted, indicating that it is selected for operations.

If you move the cursor to a selected track and

press the [ENTER] key once again, the selection

will be defeated.

F ALL CLEAR button

This button cancels all patch cables.

G CLEAR button

This button cancels the patch cable connected to

that track.

H EXECUTE button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the patching you speciﬁed

in the Quick Rec page will take effect. When you

do this, the input channels/tracks connected by the

patch cables will change as follows.

• The signal ﬂow of the corresponding input chan-

nels and tracks will change according to the

patching you speciﬁed in the Quick Rec page.

• Assignments to the stereo bus will be forcibly

turned off for the corresponding input channels.

• On the monitor channels for the corresponding

tracks, the mix parameters will be reset to the

default values.

• All corresponding tracks will be in record-ready

mode.

• If the FLAT button is on, the settings of input

channels to which a patch cable is connected

will be reset to the default settings.

For details on operations in the Quick Rec page,

refer to page 80.

• Input channels/tracks (monitor channels) to which

no patch cables are connected in the Quick Rec page

will not be affected in any way.

• When you access the Quick Rec page, the patch

cables will be displayed according to the settings that

you made most recently. However if you have manu-

ally modiﬁed the input patching or recorder input

patching in another screen, the patch cable display

may not necessarily match the actual signal ﬂow.

256

Reference section

SETUP screen

D.in Setup page

Word clock and cascade settings

Function

In this page you can select the word

clock source to which the AW2816 will

synchronize, and make vari-pitch set-

tings. You can also make settings for

cascading the digital output of an exter-

nal device into the stereo bus of the

AW2816.

Key operation

• [SETUP] key → [F1] (D.in Setup) key

• Repeatedly press the [SETUP] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A Slot

If an optional I/O card is installed in OPTION I/O

slot, a graphic will be displayed to show the type

of I/O card. Cards in which no card is installed

will be displayed as “No Card.”

B WORD CLOCK SOURCE

From the following choices, select one of the fol-

lowing clock source to which the AW2816 will

synchronize.

• SLOT 1/2–7/8

The input signal from a digital I/O card installed in

OPTION I/O slot will be the clock source. One

pair of digital I/O card input channels 1/2–7/8 can

be selected.

Choose this setting when you want to use an exter-

nal device such as a digital MTR as the word clock

master, so that the AW2816 will synchronize to

the clock data included in the digital input signal.

• INT

The internal clock of the AW2816 will be selected

as the clock source.

Choose this setting when you are using the

AW2816 by itself, or when you want to use the

AW2816 as the word clock master to which a dig-

ital MTR or other external device will synchronize.

• D.ST IN

The word clock data included in the input signal

of the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack will be the clock

source.

Choose this setting when cascading the digital out-

put of an external device into the stereo bus of the

AW2816, or when you are inputting the signal of a

device that cannot act as a slave (e.g., a CD player)

via the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack.

A highlighted button indicates that it is

currently selected as the word clock

source.

A button with an X mark indicates that

no digital audio signal is being input

from the corresponding digital I/O card

or connector. A button that is displayed

in this way cannot be selected as a clock

source.

A button with a/mark indicates that a

digital audio source is being input from

the corresponding digital I/O card or

connector, but is not synchronized with

the internal clock of the AW2816.

This indicates that digital audio is being

input from the corresponding digital I/O

card or connector, and is synchronized

with the internal clock of the AW2816.

257

Reference section

SETUP screen

C Fs (Sampling frequency)

This displays the sampling frequency of the signal

that is currently selected as the clock source.

• Immediately after the clock source is selected, the

AW2816 will display “LOCK” for a time, indicating

that it is attempting to synchronize to that clock

source.

• If “UNLOCK” is displayed, it was for some reason

impossible to synchronize to the currently selected

clock source. Make sure that the clock source selec-

tion is appropriate, and the external device has not

malfunctioned.

• When you make the AW2816 synchronize to an

external clock source, you must make sure that the

sampling frequency of the song matches the value

displayed in the Fs ﬁeld. If these values are different,

the pitch may change when the clock source is

changed back to “INT” (internal clock).

D VARI (Vari-pitch)

When “INT” (internal clock) is selected as the

clock source, you can use the following two but-

tons to specify whether the sampling frequency

will be variable.

• FIX button

When this button is on, the sampling frequency of

the AW2816 will be ﬁxed at the value displayed at

the right of the button. Normally you will select

this setting.

• VARI (vari-pitch) button

When this button is on, you can use the knob

located at right to make ﬁne adjustments to the

sampling frequency over a range of –5.97%–

+6.00%. This is used mainly to make ﬁne adjust-

ments to the playback pitch or the length of the

song.

E STEREO BUS CASCADE

This speciﬁes whether the external device con-

nected to the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector will

be cascade-connected to the stereo bus of the

AW2816.

Select “D.ST” as the clock source, move the cursor

to the button labeled “DISABLE,” and press the

[ENTER] key. The button will change to “ENABLE.”

In this state, the signal that is input from the DIGI-

TAL STEREO IN connector will be sent directly to

the stereo bus of the AW2816. At this time you can

use the ATT. knob to adjust the level (attenuation)

of the input signal.

If you attempt to enable cascade connection when a

clock other than “D.ST IN” is selected as the clock

source, a message of “CANNOT ASSIGN DIGITAL ST-

IN” will appear, and it will not be possible to set the

button to “ENABLE.”

SETUP screen

258

Reference section

Monitor page

Monitor the digital input signals

Function

Monitor the state of the digital audio

signals being input from the DIGITAL

STEREO IN jack or from digital I/O

card installed in the OPTION I/O slot.

Key operation

• [SETUP] key → [F2] (Monitor) key

• Repeatedly press the [SETUP] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A CHANNEL STATUS MONITOR

Here you can monitor the status of the digital sig-

nals that are input from the DIGITAL STEREO IN

connector and from a digital I/O card installed in

OPTION I/O. Each display item has the following

signiﬁcance.

• Fs (frequency)

Indicates the sampling frequency of the input sig-

nal.

• EMPHASIS

This shows whether the input signal has been pro-

cessed by emphasis.

• CATEGORY

This shows the category of the digital input signal.

• COPY (copy permit)

This shows the copy permit/prohibit status of the

digital input signal.

Tip!

• Processing that pre-emphasizes the high-frequency

portion of the signal is called “emphasis,” and pro-

cessing that attenuates this portion to restore the

original ﬂat response is called “de-emphasis.” Even if

the AW2816 receives a signal to which emphasis has

been applied, it will not perform de-emphasis.

• Digital input signals from option I/O are displayed in

pairs of adjacent odd-numbered

→

even-numbered

input channels (channels 1/2, 3/4, ...)

Display Meaning

44.1k Sampling frequency = 44.1 kHz

48k Sampling frequency = 48 kHz

None Unknown sampling frequency

UNLOCK

No signal is being input, or an

invalid signal is being input

Display Meaning

ON Emphasis on

OFF Emphasis off

??? Unknown

Display Meaning

GEN General use

LASER OPTICAL

Optical laser device such as a

CD player

D/D Conv

D/D converter or signal processor

D.Broadcast Digital broadcast

Instrument Instrument or sound module

AD Conv

A/D converter

(without copyright data)

A/D Conv with (c)

A/D converter

(with copyright data)

Solid Memory Solid-state memory device

Experimental Experimental device

Unknown Unknown device

Display Meaning

OK Copying permitted

Prohibit Copying prohibited

259

Reference section

Dither Out page

Dithering and word length settings for digital output

Function

When digitally outputting a 24 bit song,

you can turn dithering on/off and spec-

ify the word length for dithering.

Key operation

• [SETUP] key → [F3] (Dither Out) key

• Repeatedly press the [SETUP] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A ON/OFF (Dithering on/off)

Turn dithering on/off for the DIGITAL STEREO

OUT connector (DIGITAL ST OUT) and the output

channels of the OPTION I/O slot (OPTION OUT

SLOT).

Tip!

• When sending digital audio from a system with a

high number of bits to a lower system (e.g., 24 bits

→

16 bits), “round-off” of the bits may cause unpleas-

ant quantization noise. This is the reason that dither-

ing is applied to add a very small amount of noise to

the signal, so that quantization noise will not be as

obtrusive.

• When sending audio from a lower-resolution system

to a higher-resolution system (e.g., 16 bits

→

24 bits)

or when sending audio between systems of identical

resolution (e.g., 16 bits

→

16 bits), turning dithering

on will have no effect.

• For digital I/O cards, dithering is switched on/off by

pairs of adjacent odd-numbered

→

even-numbered

channels (1/2, 3/4, ...).

B WORD LENGTH (BIT)

Specify the word length (number of bits) of the sig-

nal that is sent from channels for which dithering

is turned on.

Tip!

For example if you want to send a 24 bit song to a 16

bit external recorder with dithering applied, you

would set the corresponding channels to Dither = on,

Word Length = 16.

Changing the word length of a channel for which dith-

ering is turned off will have no effect.

SETUP screen

260

Reference section

Dither TRK page

Dithering and word length settings for recording tracks

Function

When recording tracks 1–16 and the

stereo track of a 24 bit song, you can

turn dithering on/off and specify the

word length for dithering.

Key operation

• [SETUP] key → [F4] (Dither TRK) key

• Repeatedly press the [SETUP] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A ON/OFF (Dithering on/off)

Turn dithering during recording on/off for adjacent

odd-numbered → even-numbered pairs of tracks

(tracks 1/2, 3/4, ...). (The settings of the stereo track

are shared with tracks 1/2.)

Tip!

For details on what dithering does, refer to the Dither

Out page (

→

P.259).

B WORD LENGTH (BIT)

Specify the word length (number of bits) used

when recording a track for which dithering is

turned on.

Tip!

For example if you have recorded a song at 24 bit/44.1

kHz, and want to write it to an audio CD with dither-

ing applied, you would set the stereo track to Dither =

on and Word Length = 16 at the time of mixdown.

• You must be careful not to apply dithering two or

more times to the same source. Doing so will elimi-

nate the effect of dithering, and will also degrade the

S/N ratio.

• Since the settings within the pages of the SETUP

screen are common to all songs, they will not be

reset when you switch songs. If you have turned dith-

ering on, we recommend that you always turn it off

when you ﬁnish recording.

261

Reference section

Solo Setup page

Settings for the Solo function

Function

Here you can make various settings for

the Solo function.

Key operation

• [SETUP] key

→

[F5] (Solo Setup) key

• Repeatedly press the [SETUP] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A STATUS

Use the following two buttons to select the operat-

ing mode in which the Solo function will be used.

• RECORDING SOLO button

When this button is on, the solo signal will be

routed through the dedicated SOLO bus and out-

put from the MONITOR OUT jacks/PHONES jack.

(It will not affect the signals sent to the stereo bus

or to buses 1–8.) You will also be able to monitor

channels that are not assigned to the stereo bus or

to buses 1–8.

This mode is convenient when you want to moni-

tor an input source during recording without

affecting the signals sent to the stereo bus or buses

1–8.

• MIXDOWN SOLO button

When this button is on, the solo signal will be

routed through the stereo bus and output from the

MONITOR OUT jacks/PHONES jack. When the

Solo function is turned on, only the soloed chan-

nel will be sent to the stereo bus, and other chan-

nels will be muted. For this reason, it is not

possible to monitor channels that are not assigned

to the stereo bus.

This mode is convenient when you want to solo a

speciﬁc channel during mixdown.

B LISTEN

When the RECORDING SOLO button is turned on

in the STATUS area (1), you can use the following

two buttons to select the location from which the

signal will be sent from each channel to the SOLO

bus.

• PRE FADER button

When this button is on, the signal from immedi-

ately before the fader will be sent to the SOLO

bus. Since the pan setting of each channel will

have no effect, the signal being monitored from

the MONITOR OUTPUT jacks/PHONES jack will

be monaural.

• AFTER PAN button

When this button is on, the signal that has passed

through the fader and pan will be sent to the

SOLO bus. The fader and pan settings will affect

the signal that is monitored in the MONITOR OUT

jacks/PHONES jack.

C SEL MODE (Select Mode)

When the Solo function is on ([SOLO] key lit), you

can use the following two buttons to choose how

the monitor signal will be selected.

• LAST SOLO button

When this button is on, only the channel whose

[ON] key was pressed last will be monitored.

• MIX SOLO button

When this button is on, you can use the [ON] keys

to select two or more channels for monitoring.

1 2 3 4

SETUP screen

262

Reference section

D LEVEL

When the RECORDING SOLO button is turned on

in the STATUS area (1), this adjusts the level of

the signal that is sent to the SOLO bus.

E SOLO SAFE CHANNEL

When the MIXDOWN SOLO button is turned on

in the STATUS area (1), you can specify channels

that will be excluded from the Solo function.

Channels that are turned on in this area will not be

muted even when the [SOLO] key is pressed. For

example, this is convenient when you will always

want to monitor the return channels 1/2.

Tip!

When you press a [SEL] key, the cursor will move to

the corresponding channel in the SOLO SAFE CHAN-

NEL area.

263

Reference section

UTILITY screen

Oscillator page

Using the test tone oscillator

Function

Select the waveform of the test tone

oscillator built into the AW2816, and

send it to the desired bus.

Key operation

• [UTILITY] key → [F1] (Oscillator) key

• Repeatedly press the [UTILITY] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A Level meter

This shows the oscillator output level that is being

sent to buses 1–8 and AUX buses 1–6.

B OSC ON (Oscillator On) button

This button turns the oscillator on/off (default set-

ting= off). When you move the cursor to this but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key, the button display

will change to “ON,” and the oscillator signal will

be sent to the bus(es) you selected in the BUS

ASSIGN area (5). The oscillator level is controlled

by the LEVEL knob (3), and the waveform is

selected in the WAVEFORM area (4).

Tip!

• Sine waves and white noise have a higher sound pres-

sure level than they appear to your ears. Use caution,

since they may damage your speakers if played back

at a high volume.

• If you press the OSC ON button when the LEVEL

knob (

) is raised, high-volume sound may be out-

put suddenly. We recommend that you make sure

that the LEVEL knob is lowered before you turn on

the oscillator.

C LEVEL knob

This knob adjusts the output level (–96 dB to 0 dB)

of the oscillator.

D WAVEFORM

Use the following buttons to select the waveform

of the test tone oscillator.

• SINE 100 Hz button....... 100 Hz sine wave

• SINE 1 kHz button ......... 1 kHz sine wave

• SINE 10 kHz button ....... 10 kHz sine wave

• NOISE ............................ White noise

E BUS ASSIGN

Use the following buttons to specify the bus to

which the oscillator signal will be sent.

• BUS 1–8 buttons ............ Buses 1–8

• AUX 1–6 buttons............ AUX buses 1–6

• ST BUS button................ Stereo bus

UTILITY screen

264

Reference section

Prefer.1 page

Make overall settings for the AW2816 (1)

Function

Enable/disable warning messages, and

specify the point from which direct out-

put will be taken.

Key operation

• [UTILITY] key → [F2] (Prefer.1) key

• Repeatedly press the [UTILITY] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A AUTO SCENE NAME DISPLAY

If this button is on, operating any of the keys in the

SCENE MEMORY section ([STORE] key, [ ]/[ ]

keys, etc.) will cause the scene name to be dis-

played for a time in the upper right of the screen

(Default setting= on).

B SCENE NAME DISPLAY TIME

This setting speciﬁes the length of time that the

scene name will be displayed when the AUTO

SCENE NAME DISPLAY button (1) is on. This can

be set in one-second increments over a range of 1

to 9 seconds (Default setting= 4 seconds).

C STORE CONFIRMATION

If this button is on, a popup window will ask you

for conﬁrmation when you store a scene or library

(Default setting = on).

D RECALL CONFIRMATION

If this button is on, a popup window will ask you

for conﬁrmation when you recall a scene or library

(Default setting = on). You can turn this off if you

want to switch scenes quickly.

E DIRECT OUT EXTRACT POSITION

Use the following three buttons to select the loca-

tion from which the signal will be sent when you

use direct output from input channels 1–8.

• PRE EQ................ Before the EQ

• PRE FADER.......... Before the fader

• POST FADER ....... After the fader (default set-

ting)

Input c

hannel

ATT

4BAND EQ

DYNAMICS

etc.

PAN

LEVELON

PRE FADER

POST FADER

PRE EQ

DIRECT OUT

INPUT SELECT

265

Reference section

F DIGITAL ST IN SYNC CAUTION

When this button is on, an error message will be

displayed in the lower part of the screen if a signal

not synchronized with the word clock source is

being input to the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector.

(Default setting = on)

G OPTION IN SYNC CAUTION

When this button is on, an error message will be

displayed in the lower part of the screen if a signal

not synchronized with the word clock source is

being input to a digital I/O card installed in the

OPTION I/O slot. (Default setting = on)

UTILITY screen

266

Reference section

Prefer. 2 page

Make overall settings for the AW2816 (2)

Function

Set the rollback time, pre-roll/post-roll

time, and the nudge playback method

etc.

Key operation

• [UTILITY] key → [F3] (Prefer.2) key

• Repeatedly press the [UTILITY] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A GRID

This sets the minimum unit when you specify an

area in the EDIT screen TR Edit page or V.TR Edit

page. For example if the grid value is set to

“00:00:00.010,” the speciﬁed location will

move in 10 millisecond increments for each

click of the [DATA/JOG] dial. (Default=

00:00:00.000)

• If measure units are selected as the counter display

method, the GRID setting will be ignored.

• The GRID setting has no effect on adjustment of the

locate points (TRACK screen/Mark Adj. page) or on

using the [NUM LOCATE] key to specify the locate

points.

B ROLLBACK TIME

This speciﬁes the time of the rewind that will

occur when the [ROLL BACK] key is pressed. You

can set this time in 1 millisecond increments over

a range of 0–30 seconds (default setting= 5 sec-

onds). For details on using Rollback, refer to page

98.

C PREROLL/POSTROLL TIME

These settings specify the pre-roll time (the play-

back time that precedes punch-in) and post-roll

time (the playback time that follows punch-in).

Each can be set in 1 second increments over a

range of 0–5 seconds (default setting= 5 seconds).

For details on using auto punch-in/out, refer to

page 64.

D METER FINE

This selects the resolution of the level meters dis-

played in the METER screen Meter1/Meter2 page.

Move the cursor to the button and press the

[ENTER] key to switch between the following two

settings.

• NORMAL

The full range of the level meter will correspond to

values of –48 dB to 0 dB.

• FINE

The full range of the level meter will correspond to

values of –18 dB–0 dB. This setting is convenient

when you want to perform detailed level adjust-

ments near 0 dB.

Tip!

• This setting does not affect the level meters displayed

in pages other than the METER screen.

• The level meter resolution can also be selected in the

METER screen Meter1/Meter2 page.

E PLAY MODE

This selects the play mode of the Nudge function

(a function that lets you use the [JOG ON] key and

the [DATA/JOG] dial to search for a location).

Move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key to switch between the following two

settings.

• AFTER

Playback will be repeated for the speciﬁed nudge

time (6) starting at the current location.

• BEFORE

Playback will be repeated for the speciﬁed nudge

time (6) ending at the current location.

267

Reference section

F TIME

This speciﬁes the interval of playback (Nudge

Time) that is repeated by the Nudge function. This

can be adjusted in 1 millisecond increments over

a range of 25–800 milliseconds (default setting=

100 milliseconds).

For details on using the Nudge function, refer to

page 96.

G CD/DAT DIGITAL REC

This setting speciﬁes whether digital recording

from a CD player or DAT recorder connected to

the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector, or importing

from an audio CD inserted in the CD-RW drive

will be allowed (ENABLE) or prohibited (DIS-

ABLE). If the button is displayed as “DISABLE,”

moving the cursor to the button and pressing the

[ENTER] key will display the following warning

message.

When you move the cursor to the NEXT button

and press the [ENTER] key, the second page of the

warning message will be displayed.

If you move the cursor to the YES button and press

the [ENTER] key, the warning message will disap-

pear, and the button will change to “ENABLE.”

H DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT

This setting speciﬁes whether SCMS (Serial Copy

Management System) copy protect data will be

enabled (ENABLE) or not (DISABLE) for the digital

signal output from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT

jack. When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the setting will alternate

between ENABLE/DISABLE.

Even if this is set to ENABLE, it will be possible to

digitally record onto a DAT/MD recorder con-

nected to the DIGITAL STEREO OUT connector,

but it will not be possible to make second-genera-

tion digital copies.

• If DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT is set to ENABLE

DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT

= ENABLE

AW2816

Digital recording

possible

Digital recording

not possible

DAT or MD, etc.

UTILITY screen

268

Reference section

Prefer. 3 page

Make overall settings for the AW2816 (3)

Function

Here you can set the internal clock of

the AW2816, and specify the backup

method for removable media, etc.

Key operation

• [UTILITY] key → [F4] (Prefer.3) key

• Repeatedly press the [UTILITY] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A CLOCK

This area sets the internal clock of the AW2816.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to set the year (Y), month

(M), day (D), hour (h), minute (m), and second (s),

and use the SET button to ﬁnalize the date and

time. If you use the RESET button instead of the

SET button, the settings you input will be can-

celled, and the previous date and time will reap-

pear.

Tip!

• When you save a song, date and time data according

to this clock will be saved on the hard disk along with

the song data.

• When the AW2816 is shipped, its internal clock is set

to Japan time.

B BATTERY

This shows the state of the battery that powers the

internal clock of the AW2816. If the battery has

sufﬁcient capacity remaining, this will indicate

“OK.” If the battery has run down, this will indi-

cate “LOW.” If the “LOW” indication appears,

please contact your dealer to have the battery

replaced. (A fee will be charged.)

C REMOVABLE BACKUP (Removable media

backup method)

This selects the backup method used when back-

ing up a song on removable media such as MO.

Move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key to switch between the following two

settings.

• TYPE 1 (default setting)

This backup method allows the capacity of the

removable media to be used to its fullest potential.

This method is suitable when you are backing up

multiple songs at once. Even if the data does not ﬁt

on a single volume of media, you can backup

across multiple volumes of media. If this method is

selected, the media will be formatted automati-

cally before backup is executed.

• TYPE 2

This backup method uses only as much space on

the removable media as occupied by the data

being backed up. This method is suitable when

you are backing up individual songs at a time. As

long as there is space remaining on the media, you

can back up other songs later. However, it is not

possible to backup data that spans multiple vol-

umes of media (as you can using TYPE 1). Before

using the TYPE 2 method to back up on a new vol-

ume of media, you must format the media.

For details on how to back up songs, refer to page

162.

269

Reference section

D MASTERING MODE

Select the operation of the Mastering function that

creates audio CDs.

• TEST button

If this button is on, a “writing test” will be per-

formed before mastering is executed, to check

whether errors occur during writing (default= off).

The writing test will require approximately as

much time as the actual writing.

• WRITE button

Use this button to turn the actual mastering opera-

tion on/off (default=on). If the TEST button is on

and the WRITE button is off, only the writing test

will be performed.

If an error occurs during the writing test, the master-

ing operation will be aborted immediately. Check

whether the writing speed is set appropriately, and

whether the hard disk has sufﬁcient free space for the

mastering operation.

E CD BACKUP/WAV-EXP MODE (CD

backup/WAV export mode)

Use the following three buttons to specify how

songs will be backed up to CD-R/RW media, and

how audio data will be exported (written) to a

WAV ﬁle.

• TEST button

If this button is on, a “writing test” will be per-

formed before backup/export is executed, to check

whether errors occur during writing (default= off).

The writing test will require approximately as

much time as the actual writing.

• WRITE button

Use this button to turn the actual backup/export

operation on/off (default=on). If the TEST button is

on and the WRITE button is off, only the writing

test will be performed.

• COMPARE button

If this button is on, the data on the CD-R/RW

media will be compared with the original data on

the internal hard disk immediately after the data

has been written (default= off). If for some reason

the data was not recorded accurately on the CD-R/

RW media, an error message will appear during

the Compare operation. Compare will require

approximately as much time as writing the data.

UTILITY screen

270

Reference section

CTRL Key Asgn. page

Assign additional functions to the [CTRL] key + function keys

Function

Select the functions that will be exe-

cuted when you hold down the [CTRL]

key and press a function key [F1]–[F5].

Key operation

• [UTILITY] key → [F5] (CTRL Key

Asgn.) key

• Repeatedly press the [UTILITY] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A CTRL+F1–CTRL+F5

This area displays the function that is currently

assigned to each combination of the [CTRL] key

and the [F1]–[F5] keys. When you move the cursor

to the desired combination and press the [ENTER]

key, the corresponding graphic of the [CTRL] key

and [F1]–[F5] keys will be highlighted, and will be

selected for assignment.

B Function list

Here you can specify the function that will be

assigned to the key combination you selected in

(1). The line enclosed by the dotted frame is the

currently selected function. The following func-

tions can be assigned.

* Depending on the operating state of the

AW2816, functions marked with an asterisk may

not be executed (such as when the transport is

running). In such cases, an error message will

appear at the bottom of the display.

Display Function

NO ASSIGN

No assignment

SHUT DOWN

Display the SONG screen/

Shut Down page (shortcut

to shutdown)*

SONG SAVE

Display the SONG screen/

Song List page, and move

the cursor to the SAVE but-

ton (shortcut to save the

current song)*

CD LOAD

Close the tray of the CD-RW

drive and load the CD*

CD UNLOAD

Open the tray of the CD-RW

drive*

AUTOMIX

[ENABLE/DISABLE]

Switch automix on (Enable)

or off (Disable)*

MTC SYNC [MAS-

TER/SLAVE]

Switch the AW2816

between MTC master (Mas-

ter) or MTC slave (Slave)*

SCENE NAME

Display the currently-

recalled scene name in the

upper right of the screen for

a ﬁxed length of time

SCENE RECALL

NO.xx

Recall scene number xx (use

the [DATA/JOG] dial to

select xx)

DELAY [ON/OFF]

Switch delay on/off for the

selected channel

EQ [ON/OFF]

Switch EQ on/off for the

selected channel

DYN [ON/OFF]

Switch the dynamics proces-

sor on/off for the selected

channel

PEAK HOLD [ON/

OFF]

Switch peak hold on/off

OSCILLATOR [ON/

OFF]

Switch the test tone oscilla-

tor on/off

Display Function

271

Reference section

C ASSIGN button

This button executes the function assignment.

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, a popup window will ask

you for conﬁrmation. Move the cursor to the OK

button and press the [ENTER] key to execute the

assignment.

Tip!

While you hold down the [CTRL] key, the functions

currently assigned to the [F1]–[F5] function keys will

be displayed in the lower part of the screen.

If the CD-RW drive is not selected in pages such as the

CD screen CD Write/CD Play page or the EDIT screen

CD Import page, “CD LOAD” or “CD UNLOAD” func-

tions assigned to the [CTRL] + function keys cannot be

executed.

UTILITY screen

272

Reference section

MIDI screen

MIDI Setup 1 page

Basic MIDI settings (1)

Function

Make settings for MIDI transmit/

receive channels, turn message recep-

tion on/off, and make MIDI synchroni-

zation settings.

Key operation

• [MIDI] key → [F1] (MIDI Setup 1) key

• Repeatedly press the [MIDI] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A PROGRAM CHANGE

Use the following buttons to make transmission/

reception settings for program change messages.

• TX (transmission)

... Turns program change trans-

mission on/off. When this

button is on, recalling a

scene on the AW2816 will

cause the program change

assigned to that scene num-

ber to be transmitted.

• RX (reception)..... Turns program change recep-

tion on/off. When this button

is on, receiving a program

change will cause the

AW2816 scene assigned to

that program change number

to be recalled.

• OMNI.................. When this button is on, pro-

gram changes on all MIDI

channels will be received,

regardless of the Rx CH

(Receive MIDI channel).

• ECHO

....................When this button is on, the

identical message will be re-

transmitted from the MIDI OUT/

TO HOST connectors when a

program change is received.

Tip!

The scene number assigned to each program change

number 1–128 can be changed in the MIDI screen

PGM Asgn. page.

B CONTROL CHANGE

Use the following buttons to make transmission/

reception settings for control change messages.

• TX (transmission)

... Turns control change trans-

mission on/off. When this

button is on, operating a

parameter on the AW2816

will cause the control change

message assigned to that

parameter to be transmitted

from the MIDI OUT/TO

HOST connector.

• RX (reception)..... Turns control change recep-

tion on/off. When this button

is on, receiving a control

change will cause the

AW2816 parameter assigned

to that control change num-

ber to be modiﬁed.

• OMNI.................. When this button is on, con-

trol changes on all MIDI

channels will be received,

regardless of the Rx CH

(Receive MIDI channel).

• ECHO.................. When this button is on, the

identical message will be re-

transmitted from the MIDI

OUT/TO HOST connector

when a control change mes-

sage is received.

Tip!

A parameter can be assigned to each control change

number in the MIDI screen CTL Asgn. page.

273

Reference section

C PARAMETER CHANGE

Use the following buttons to make transmission/

reception settings for the system exclusive mes-

sages (parameter changes) that control the

AW2816’s parameters.

• TX (transmission)

... Turns parameter change

transmission on/off. When

this button is on, operating a

AW2816 parameter will

cause the parameter change

message assigned to that

parameter to be transmitted.

• RX (reception)..... Turns parameter change

reception on/off. When this

button is on, receiving a

parameter change message

will cause the corresponding

parameter of the AW2816 to

change.

• ECHO.................. When this button is on, the

identical message will be re-

transmitted from the MIDI

OUT/TO HOST connectors

when a parameter change

message is received.

D BULK

This button turns bulk data reception on/off, as

well as reception of messages that requires a bulk

dump (Bulk Dump Request).

Tip!

Bulk Dump data consists of system exclusive messages

containing various internal memory settings of the

AW2816 (scene memory, library, and automix data), as

well as MIDI settings. By recording bulk data on an

external device such as a MIDI sequencer, you can

backup the internal settings of the AW2816. Bulk data

transmission is performed in the MIDI screen Bulk

Dump page.

E MTC SYNC

When using MTC (MIDI Time Code) to synchro-

nize the AW2816 and an external MIDI device,

this setting selects whether the AW2816 will func-

tion as the MTC master or as an MTC slave.

• MASTER button

When this button is on, the AW2816 will be the

MTC master, and MTC will be transmitted from the

MTC OUT connector when the transport of the

AW2816 is operated. Use this setting when you

want an external MIDI device to follow the

AW2816, or when using the AW2816 by itself.

• SLAVE button

When this button is on, the AW2816 will be an

MTC slave. When MTC is received from the MIDI

IN/TO HOST connector when the AW2816 is in

playback-ready mode, the AW2816 will run in

accordance with the MTC messages. Use this set-

ting when you want two AW2816 units to operate

in synchronization, or when you want the

AW2816 to synchronize with a device that can

only function as the MTC master.

Tip!

The MTC generated within the AW2816 can also be

transmitted from the MIDI OUT/TO HOST connector

as well as from the MTC OUT connector. This setting is

made in the MIDI screen/MIDI Setup2 page.

F SYNC OFFSET

When the

AW2816

is used as an MTC slave,

you can shift the absolute time of the

AW2816

relative to the MTC that is received. The range is

“–24:00:00:00.00”–“+24:00:00:00.00”.

Tip!

The Sync Offset setting does not affect the MTC that is

transmitted from the AW2816’s MTC OUT connector.

If you want the MTC that is transmitted from the MTC

OUT connector to be shifted relative to the AW2816’s

absolute time, you must change the Time Code Top

(

→

P.239).

G SYNC AVERAGE

When the AW2816 is used as an MTC slave, this

setting speciﬁes the range of tolerance for irregu-

larities in MTC timing. Select one of the following

three settings.

• OFF button

When this button is on, the range of tolerance will

be narrowest, and the AW2816 will synchronize

to the incoming MTC with the highest precision.

However if there is signiﬁcant instability in the

received MTC, synchronization may be lost or

may become unstable. This setting is appropriate

when you are synchronizing two AW2816 units.

• 1 button/2 button

Turning the 1 button on will increase the range of

tolerance, and turning the 2 button on will specify

the maximum tolerance. These settings are appro-

priate when an external device with greater MTC

instability (such as a tape recorder or computer-

based sequencer) is being used as the MTC master.

Received

time code

Time code

display (ABS)

Received

time code

Time code

display (ABS)

Received

time code

Time code

display (ABS)

00:00:10:00.00 00:00:15:00.00

00:00:20:00.00

Sync offset = 00:00:00:00.00

Song

00:00:10:00.00 00:00:15:00.00

00:00:15:00.00 00:00:20:00.00

00:00:20:00.00

00:00:25:00.00

Sync offset = +00:00:05:00.00

00:00:10:00.00 00:00:15:00.00

00:00:05:00.00 00:00:10:00.00

00:00:20:00.00

00:00:15:00.00

Sync offset = 00:00:05:00.00

MIDI screen

274

Reference section

Tip!

When the AW2816 is synchronized as an MTC slave to

an external device, and the accuracy of the received

MTC becomes unstable, the AW2816 will attempt to

follow by making ﬁne adjustments to the playback

pitch. The SYNC AVERAGE parameter sets the range of

tolerance for this type of variance in MTC.

The SYNC AVERAGE setting is valid only when the

word clock source is set to “INT” (internal clock).

H Tx CH (Transmit channel)

This sets the channel (1–16) on which MIDI mes-

sages are transmitted from the AW2816.

I Rx CH (Receive channel)

This sets the channel (1–16) on which MIDI mes-

sages are received by the AW2816.

J MMC DEVICE

When MMC (MIDI Machine Control) is used to

perform remote control between the AW2816 and

an external MIDI device, this setting speciﬁes the

device ID (1–127) that is used to distinguish each

device. (Default setting= 1)

K MMC MODE

Use the following three buttons to make settings

for MMC reception and transmission.

• OFF button

When this button is on, the AW2816 will not

receive or transmit MMC. Turn this button on

when you are using the AW2816 by itself.

• MASTER button

When this button is on, operating the transport of

the AW2816 will cause the corresponding MMC

command to be transmitted from the MIDI OUT/

TO HOST connector. Use this setting when you

are using the AW2816 as the MMC master to con-

trol external MIDI devices.

• SLAVE button

When this button is on, the AW2816 will obey

MMC commands received at the MIDI IN/TO

HOST connector. Use this setting when you want

to use the AW2816 as an MTC slave, so that an

external MIDI device can remotely control the

AW2816’s transport and select or defeat recording

track selections.

Tip!

In order to use MMC, the device ID of the AW2816

and the external MIDI device must match. The device

ID of the AW2816 is set by the MMC DEVICE setting

(

The AW2816 cannot simultaneously operate as a slave

for both MTC and MMC. For this reason if the SLAVE

button in the MTC SYNC area is turned on, the SLAVE

button in the MMC MODE area will not be available.

275

Reference section

MIDI Setup 2 page

Basic MIDI settings (2)

Function

Select the port used for MIDI transmis-

sion/reception, and select the synchro-

nization messages that will be output

from the MIDI OUT connector/TO

HOST connector.

Key operation

• [MIDI] key → [F2] (MIDI Setup 2) key

• Repeatedly press the [MIDI] key until

the screen shown at right appears.

Screen functions

A MIDI CLK ON/OFF (MIDI clock on/off)

This is an on/off switch for the MIDI clock that is

sent to the MIDI OUT connector/TO HOST con-

nector. When you move the cursor to this button

and press the [ENTER] key, the setting will alter-

nate between on/off. When this is on, MIDI clock

will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector/

TO HOST connector according to the MIDI/HOST

setting (3). In order to transmit MIDI Clock from

the MIDI OUT connector, the OUT/THRU switch

(4) must be set to “OUT.”

B MTC ON/OFF switch

This is an on/off switch for the MTC messages sent

to the MIDI OUT connector/TO HOST connector.

When you move the cursor to this graphic and

press the [ENTER] key, the setting will be switched

on/off. If this is on, MTC will be transmitted to the

MIDI OUT connector or TO HOST connector

according to the MIDI/HOST (3) setting. In order

to transmit MTC from the MIDI OUT connector,

the OUT/THRU switch (4) must be set to “OUT.”

Tip!

Regardless of this setting, MTC will always be transmit-

ted from the MTC OUT connector.

C MIDI/HOST switch

This selects the port that will transmit and receive MIDI

messages. When you move the cursor to this graphic

and press the [ENTER] key, the setting will alternate

between “MIDI” (use the MIDI IN/MIDI OUT connec-

tors) and “HOST” (use the TO HOST connector).

Tip!

Regardless of which is selected, receiving a MIDI mes-

sage will cause “MIDI” to be displayed below the CPU

“IN” area.

D OUT/THRU switch

This selects the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU

connector. When you move the cursor to this

screen and press the [ENTER] key, the setting will

alternate between “THRU” (MIDI messages

received at the MIDI IN connector will be re-trans-

mitted without change) and “OUT” (MIDI messages

generated within the AW2816 will be transmitted).

If this is set to “THRU,” none of the MIDI messages

generated within the AW2816 (MIDI Clock, MMC,

program change, etc.) will be transmitted.

Tip!

In this page, signal routes over which MIDI messages

ﬂow are shown as solid lines ( | ), and signal routes

over which MIDI messages do not ﬂow are shown as

hollow lines ( || ).

E TO HOST

This sets the transmission speed of the TO HOST

connector, as appropriate for the computer you

are using. Move the cursor to the TO HOST con-

nector and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select one

of the following transmission speeds.

*1 Select PC1 or PC2 according to the driver you are

using.

*2 Only for models that provide a modem/printer

port. On the software you are using, set the clock

to “1 MHz.”

Setting Platform Speed

PC1

NEC PC-9800/9821 series

31.25 kbps

PC2

IBM PC compatible, NEC

PC-9800/9821 series

38.4 kbps

MAC Apple Macintosh series

31.25 kbps

MIDI screen

276

Reference section

PGM Asgn. page

Assign AW2816 scene numbers to program change numbers

Function

Assign scene numbers 0–96 to program

numbers 1–128.

Key operation

• [MIDI] key → [F3] (PGM Asgn.) key

• Repeatedly press the [MIDI] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A PGM CHG. (Program change number)

This column displays program change numbers 1–

128. Move the cursor to this column, and turn the

[DATA/JOG] dial to select the program number to

which you want to assign a scene number.

B SCENE MEM. No. (Scene memory num-

ber)

This column displays the scene number assigned

to each program change number. Move the cursor

to this column, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to

select a scene number.

C SCENE MEM. TITLE (Scene memory title)

This column displays the scene name of each

scene number. Scene numbers for which no scene

has been stored will indicate “No Data!”

D INITIALIZE

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the scene number assign-

ments will be reset to the following settings.

Tip!

The settings of the PGM Asgn. page can be transmitted

as bulk data from the MIDI OUT/TO HOST connec-

tors, and saved on an external MIDI device (

→

P.212).

1 2 3

Program change

number

Scene number

1–96 1–96

97–99/101–128 No assignment

100 0 (Initial data)

277

Reference section

CTL Asgn. page

Assign parameters to control change numbers

Function

Assign various internal parameters of

the AW2816 to control change num-

bers (0–95, 102–119).

Key operation

• [MIDI] key → [F4] (CTL Asgn.) key

• Repeatedly press the [MIDI] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A CTL CHG. No. (Control change number)

This column displays control change numbers to

which parameters can be assigned. Move the cur-

sor to this column and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to

select a control change number 0–95 or 102–119.

Parameters cannot be assigned to control change num-

bers 96–101, since these are used for NRPN and RPN

messages.

B Parameter

These columns display the parameter that is

assigned to each control change number. Select

the parameter group in the left column, and select

other necessary values in the remaining two col-

umns.

C INITIALIZE button

This button resets the control change number

assignments to the initial settings, refer to page

280.

MIDI screen

278

Reference section

• List of parameters that can be assigned

• Parameters marked as (1) or (2) in this table use the

combination of two control changes to control one

parameter. For example if you want to control the

HOLD parameter of the dynamics processor, you

must specify different control change numbers for

“REL/HLD H” and REL/HLD L.”

• When using control changes to control parameters, it

is not possible to switch the HIGH band EQ and

LOW band EQ parameters to shelving or low-pass/

high-pass ﬁlter.

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Content

NO ASSIGN No parameter assigned

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Content

FADER

CHANNEL Control the fader of the speciﬁed channel

INPUT 1–8 Input channel 1–8

MONI 1–16 Monitor channel 1–16

RETURN 1/2 Effect return 1/2

MASTER

Control the stereo output channel fader or the master level of AUX bus

1–6/bus 1–8

ST OUT Stereo output channel

AUX 1–6 AUX bus 1–6

BUS 1–8 Bus 1–8

AUX 1 SEND

AUX 6 SEND

Control the send level sent from the channel to an AUX bus 1–6. Parame-

ter 2 speciﬁes the AUX bus, and parameter 3 speciﬁes the desired channel.

INPUT 1–8 Input channel 1–8

MONI 1–16 Monitor channel 1–16

RETURN 1/2 Return channel 1/2

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Content

Control the on/off status of the channel [ON] key. Use parameters 2 and

3 to specify the desired channel.

CHANNEL

INPUT 1–8 Input channel 1–8

MONI 1–16 Monitor channel 1–16

RETURN 1/2 Return channel 1/2

MASTER ST OUT Stereo output channel

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Content

PHASE

Switch the phase (normal/reverse) of the speciﬁed channel.

NOM/REV

INPUT 1–8 Input channel 1–8

MONI 1–16 Monitor channel 1–16

RETURN 1/2 Effect return 1/2

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Content

PRE/POST

AUX 1 SEND

AUX 6 SEND

Switch the pre-fader/post-fader settings of the signal that is sent from

each channel to AUX buses 1–6. Use parameter 2 to specify the bus, and

parameter 3 to select the desired channel.

INPUT 1–8 Input channel 1–8

MONI 1–16 Monitor channel 1–16

RETURN 1/2 Effect return 1/2

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Content

DELAY

Control the delay of each channel. Use parameter 2 to select the param-

eter to be controlled, and parameter 3 to select the desired channel.

ON/OFF Delay on/off

TIME HIGH Delay time ... (1)

TIME LOW Delay time ... (2)

INPUT 1–8 Input channel 1–8

MONI 1–16 Monitor channel 1–16

RETURN 1/2 Effect return 1/2

279

Reference section

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Content

Control the channel EQ and attenuation. Use parameter 2 to select the

type of parameter that you want to control, and use parameter 3 to

specify the desired channel.

ON/OFF EQ on/off

Q LOW Q of the LOW band EQ

F LOW F (frequency) of the LOW band EQ

G LOW G (gain) of the LOW band EQ

Q L-MID Q of the L-MID band EQ

F L-MID F (frequency) of the L-MID band EQ

G L-MID G (gain) of the L-MID band EQ

Q H-MID Q of the H-MID band EQ

F H-MID F (frequency) of the H-MID band EQ

G H-MID G (gain) of the H-MID band EQ

Q HIGH Q of the HIGH band EQ

F HIGH F (frequency) of the HIGH band EQ

G HIGH G (gain) of the HIGH band EQ

ATT. Attenuation

INPUT 1–8 Input channel 1–8

MONI 1–16 Monitor channel 1–16

RETURN 1/2 Return channel 1/2

ST OUT Stereo output channel

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Content

DYNAMICS

Control the dynamics processor of the channel. Use parameter 2 to

select the type of parameter that you want to control, and use parame-

ter 3 to select the desired channel.

ON/OFF Dynamics processor on/off

THRESHOLD THRESHOLD

ATTACK ATTACK

G/RANGE GAIN or RANGE

REL/HLD H RELEASE ... (1) or HOLD ... (2)

REL/HLD L RELEASE ... (1) or HOLD ... (2)

RAT/DEC H RATIO, or DECAY ... (1)

K/DEC L/W RATIO, DELAY ...(2), or WIDTH

INPUT 1–8 Input channel 1–8

MONI 1–16 Monitor channel 1–16

ST OUT Stereo output channel

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Content

EFFECT

Control the parameters of internal effect 1/2. Use parameter 2 to select

effect 1 or 2, and use parameter 3 to select the desired effect parameter.

EFFECT1 H PARAM 1–15 Internal effect 1 ...(1)

EFFECT1 L

PARAM 1–15 Internal effect 2 ...(2)

PARAM 1–15 Parameter number 1–15

EFFECT1 MIX BAL MIX BAL parameter of internal effect 1

EFFECT2 H PARAM 1–15 Internal effect 2 ...(1)

EFFECT2 L

PARAM 1–15 Internal effect 2 ...(2)

PARAM 1–15 Parameter number 1–15

EFFECT2 MIX BAL MIX BAL parameter of internal effect 2

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Content

PAN

Control the channel pan (or balance). Use parameters 2 and 3 to specify

the desired channel.

CHANNEL

INPUT 1–8 Input channel 1–8

MONI 1–16 Monitor channel 1–16

RETURN1 L/R L/R of effect return 1

RETURN2 L/R L/R of effect return 2

BALANCE ST OUT Balance of the stereo output channel

MIDI screen

280

Reference section

• Default parameters for each control change number

Tip!

• For details on the procedure for assigning a control

change to a parameter, refer to page 202.

• The settings of the CTL Asgn. page can be transmit-

ted as bulk data from the MIDI OUT/TO HOST con-

nectors, and saved on an external MIDI device such

as a MIDI sequencer (

→

P.212).

CTL

CHG.

PARAMETER

119 NO ASSIGN

110 NO ASSIGN

109 FADER AUX5 SEND INPUT 8

108 FADER AUX5 SEND INPUT 7

107 FADER AUX5 SEND INPUT 6

106 FADER AUX5 SEND INPUT 5

105 FADER AUX5 SEND INPUT 4

104 FADER AUX5 SEND INPUT 3

103 FADER AUX5 SEND INPUT 2

102 FADER AUX5 SEND INPUT 1

95 NO ASSIGN

94 NO ASSIGN

93 NO ASSIGN

92 PAN BALANCE ST OUT

91 PAN CHANNEL RETURN2 R

90 PAN CHANNEL RETURN2 L

89 PAN CHANNEL RETURN1 R

88 PAN CHANNEL RETURN1 L

87 NO ASSIGN

72 NO ASSIGN

71 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 8

70 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 7

69 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 6

68 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 5

67 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 4

66 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 3

65 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 2

64 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 1

63 ON MASTER ST OUT

62 ON CHANNEL RETURN 2

61 ON CHANNEL RETURN 1

60 NO ASSIGN

49 NO ASSIGN

48 ON CHANNEL INPUT 8

47 ON CHANNEL INPUT 7

CTL

CHG.

PARAMETER

46 ON CHANNEL INPUT 6

45 ON CHANNEL INPUT 5

44 ON CHANNEL INPUT 4

43 ON CHANNEL INPUT 3

42 ON CHANNEL INPUT 2

41 ON CHANNEL INPUT 1

40 FADER MASTER BUS 8

39 FADER MASTER BUS 7

38 FADER MASTER BUS 6

37 FADER MASTER BUS 5

36 FADER MASTER BUS 4

35 FADER MASTER BUS 3

34 FADER MASTER BUS 2

33 FADER MASTER BUS 1

32 NO ASSIGN

31 NO ASSIGN

30 NO ASSIGN

29 FADER MASTER AUX 6

28 FADER MASTER AUX 5

27 FADER MASTER AUX 4

26 FADER MASTER AUX 3

25 FADER MASTER AUX 2

24 FADER MASTER AUX 1

23 FADER MASTER ST OUT

22 FADER CHANNEL RETURN 2

21 FADER CHANNEL RETURN 1

20 NO ASSIGN

9 NO ASSIGN

8 FADER CHANNEL INPUT 8

7 FADER CHANNEL INPUT 7

6 FADER CHANNEL INPUT 6

5 FADER CHANNEL INPUT 5

4 FADER CHANNEL INPUT 4

3 FADER CHANNEL INPUT 3

2 FADER CHANNEL INPUT 2

1 FADER CHANNEL INPUT 1

0 NO ASSIGN

281

Reference section

Bulk Dump page

Transmit the AW2816’s internal settings via MIDI

Function

In this page, the contents of the

AW2816’s various memories (scene

memory, library, automix, etc.) as well

as MIDI-related settings can be trans-

mitted as bulk data from the MIDI

OUT/TO HOST connectors.

Key operation

• [MIDI] key → [F5] (Bulk Dump) key

• Repeatedly press the [MIDI] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A CATEGORY

Select the type of information that will be transmit-

ted as bulk data. If you have selected a category

SCENE MEM. – REMOTE, move the cursor to the

ﬁeld at the right of the button, and turn the [DATA/

JOG] dial to select the contents from that category

that you want to transmit. Each button corresponds

to the following information.

4 5

Category Values

SETUP MEM.

AW2816 settings other than the

following items

—

PGM. TABLE

Settings of the MIDI screen PGM

Asgn. page

—

CTL. TABLE

Settings of the MIDI screen CTL

Asgn. page

—

SCENE MEM. The speciﬁed scene memory

01–96 Scene number 1–96

EDIT BUFFER Current scene (current mixing settings)

ALL All scene numbers 1–96 + current scene

PATCH LIBRARY The speciﬁed patch library

01–20 Library number 1–20

ALL All library numbers 1–20

CH LIBRARY The speciﬁed channel library

02–64 Library number 2–64

ALL All library numbers 2–64

EQ LIBRARY The speciﬁed EQ library

41–128 Library number 41–128

ALL All library numbers 41–128

DYN. LIBRARY The speciﬁed dynamics library

41–128 Library number 41–128

ALL All library numbers 41–128

EFF. LIBRARY The speciﬁed effect library

42–128 Library number 42–128

ALL All library numbers 42–128

AUTO MIX The speciﬁed automix

1–16 Memory number 1–16

BUFFER Current automix

ALL All memory numbers 1–16 + current automix

REMOTE Settings of the REMOTE screen

REMOTE A–

REMOTE D

Settings of the REMOTE A–REMOTE D page

ALL Settings of all pages REMOTE A–REMOTE D

MIDI screen

282

Reference section

B ALL button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, all of the buttons in the (1)

area will be on. In addition, categories for which

the transmitted content can be speciﬁed (SCENE

MEM.–REMOTE) will be set to the “ALL” selection.

C REQUEST button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, a “Bulk Dump Request”

message will be sent from the MIDI OUT/TO

HOST connector, requesting the bulk dump data

that you selected in (1).

Use this function when you have connected the

MIDI IN/MIDI OUT connectors of two AW2816

units to each other, and want to copy scene mem-

ories or libraries from one AW2816 to the other.

D TRANSMIT button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the bulk dump data

selected in (1) will be transmitted from the MIDI

OUT/TO HOST connector.

Use this when you want to save bulk dump data

on an external device such as a MIDI sequencer.

Before transmitting bulk dump data or bulk dump

request messages to the AW2816, you must turn Bulk

Dump Data Reception “on” in the MIDI screen MIDI

Setup 1 page.

E INTERVAL

This speciﬁes the interval that will be left between

data blocks when a bulk dump is transmitted from

the AW2816. This setting can be made in 1 milli-

second increments over a range of 0–300 millisec-

onds. (Default setting= 0)

Tip!

Depending on the device that is receiving the bulk

dump data, errors may occur during bulk dump recep-

tion. If this occurs, try increasing the INTERVAL (

)

setting. If a bulk dump is being performed between

two AW2816 units, leave the INTERVAL setting at

zero.

The time required for receiving or transmitting a bulk

dump will depend on the selected category and the

recorded data. In particular in the case of automix, be

aware that a longer time may be required depending

on how much data has been recorded.

AW2816

Bulk dump data

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

Request message

Bulk dump: reception on

AW2816

Bulk dump: reception on

283

Reference section

PATCH screen

Patch IN page

Patch signals to a channel/track

Function

Assign signals to the inputs of input

channels 1–8, return channels 1/2, and

recorder tracks 1–16.

Key operation

• [PATCH] key → [F1] (Patch IN) key

• Repeatedly press the [PATCH] key

until the display shown at right

appears.

Screen functions

A MIXER CHANNEL INPUT ASSIGN

Select the signal that will be assigned to input

channels 1–8 and return channels 1/2. The follow-

ing signals can be assigned.

• Input channels 1–8

• Return channels 1/2

*1 Only Return Channel 1 (RTN 1) can be selected

*2 Only Return Channel 2 (RTN 2) can be selected

B EFFECT PATCH

Select whether internal effects 1/2 will be used via

AUX buses 5/6 (AUX 5/AUX 6) or inserted into the

speciﬁed channel (INSERT). For details on opera-

tion, refer to page 88.

C RECORDER TRACK INPUT ASSIGN

Here you can select the signals to be assigned to

the inputs of tracks 1–16. The following signals

can be assigned.

• Recorder inputs 1–16

Tip!

For details on operations in the Patch IN page, refer to

page 71.

Display Signal type

AD 1 – AD 8 INPUT jacks 1–8

SL 1 – SL 8 INPUT 1–8 of an I/O card

DIN L/DIN R

L/R channels of the DIGITAL

STEREO IN jack

MET Internal metronome

Display Signal type

EFF1 L/R

Return of internal effect 1

EFF2 L/R

Return of internal effect 2

AD 1/2 – AD 7/8 INPUT jacks 1/2–7/8

SL 1/2 – SL 7/8 INPUT 1/2–7/8 of an I/O card

DIN L/R

DIGITAL STEREO IN jack (ste-

reo)

Display Signal type

BUS 1 – BUS 8 Bus 1–8

DIR 1 – DIR 8 Input channel direct out 1–8

PATCH screen

284

Reference section

Patch OUT page

Patch signals to output jacks/output channels

Function

Assign output signals to the OMNI

OUT connectors, STEREO OUT con-

nectors, DIGITAL STEREO OUT con-

nector, and the output channels of I/O

card.

Key operation

• [PATCH] key → [F2] (Patch OUT) key

• Repeatedly press the [PATCH] key

until the display shown at right

appears.

Screen functions

A OMNI OUT ASSIGN

B OPTION I/O SLOT OUT ASSIGN

In these areas you can select the signals that will

be assigned to the OMNI OUT 1–4 connectors

and to the output channels of an I/O card installed

in the OPTION I/O slot, respectively. The follow-

ing signals can be assigned.

C D.ST OUT ASSIGN (Digital stereo out

assign)

D ST OUT ASSIGN (Stereo out assign)

In these areas you can select the pairs of output

signals that will be assigned to the DIGITAL STE-

REO OUT connector and STEREO OUT connec-

tor, respectively. The following signals can be

assigned.

Display Signal type

ST L/ST R Stereo output channel L or R

BUS 1 – BUS 8 Bus 1–8

DIR 1 – DIR 8

Direct output of input chan-

nels 1–8

AUX 1 – AUX 6 AUX buses 1–6

RDR 1 – RDR 16 Direct output of tracks 1–16

Display Signal type

ST L/R Stereo output channel (L/R)

BUS 1/2 – BUS 7/8 Buses 1/2–7/8

DIR 1/2 – DIR 7/8

Direct output of input chan-

nels 1/2–7/8

AUX 1/2 – AUX 5/6 AUX buses 1/2–5/6

RDR 1/2 – RDR 15/

Direct output of tracks 1/2–

15/16

285

Reference section

If you specify an output jack/output channel as an

insert send connector for connecting an external

effect to a certain channel, the displays in the Patch

OUT page will change as follows. These displays indi-

cate the insert send that has been patched to that out-

put jack/output channel.

■ OMNI OUT ASSIGN (1)/OPTION I/O SLOT

OUT ASSIGN (2) areas

■ D.ST OUT ASSIGN (3)/ST OUT ASSIGN (4)

areas

• When you change the setting in the Patch OUT page

for a output jack/output channel that is patched to

an insert send, a popup window will ask you whether

you want to cancel that patch.

• It is also possible to display insert sends that are not

patched to an output jack/output channel. However

in this case, the insert send will be grayed, and no

signal will be sent. (The operation of assigning an

output jack/output channel to an insert send can be

performed only in the VIEW screen CH View page.)

Tip!

• For details on operations in the Patch OUT page,

refer to page 74.

• For details on how to insert an external effect into a

channel, refer to page 78.

Display Signal type

I-I 1–I-I 8 Insert send for input channel 1–8

I-M 1–I-M 16

Insert send for monitor channel

1–16

I-R1L/I-R1R

Insert send for return channel 1 L

or R

I-R2L/I-R2R

Insert send for return channel 2 L

or R

I-STL/I-STR

Insert send for stereo output

channel L or R

Display Signal type

I-I 1/2–I-I 7/8

Insert send for input channels 1/

2–7/8

I-M 1/2–I-M

15/16

Insert send for monitor channels

1/2–15/16

I-RT1 L/R

Insert send for return channel 1

(L/R)

I-RT2 L/R

Insert send for return channel 2

(L/R)

I-ST L/R

Insert send for stereo output

channel (L/R)

PATCH screen

286

Reference section

Patch Lib page

Store or recall patching settings

Function

Store the settings of the Patch IN/Patch

OUT pages in the patch library, or

recall previously-stored settings.

Key operation

• [PATCH] key → [F3] (Patch Lib) key

• Repeatedly press the [PATCH] key

until the display shown at right

appears.

Screen functions

A SEL CH (Select channel)

This indicates the channel that is currently

selected by its [SEL] key.

B INPUT/MONI (Input/monitor)

This indicates the input signal that is patched to

the input channel/monitor channel (1). For the

meaning of the abbreviation that is displayed, refer

to the explanation of the Patch IN page (→P.283).

C BUS

In this area, the buses to which the signal from the

channel (1) is sent are highlighted. “1”–“8” indi-

cate bus 1–8, “ST” indicates the stereo bus, and

“D” indicates direct output.

The “D” (direct output) is displayed only while an

input channel is selected by its [SEL] key.

D TRACK 1–8/9–16

In this area, “■” symbols indicate the recorder

tracks to which buses 1–8 (and input channel

direct outputs) are currently patched.

E Input/output meter

These meters show the input level of the currently

selected channel and adjacent odd-numbered →

even-numbered channels. If a stereo output chan-

nel is selected, these meters show the L/R output

level.

• Areas (

)–(

) are for display only, and contain no

items that can be set.

• Areas (

)–(

) will not be displayed if a stereo input

channel is selected.

F TITLE EDIT button

This button lets you edit the name (library title) of

the patch data stored in the library. Move the cur-

sor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, and a

TITLE EDIT popup window will appear, allowing

you to edit the library title.

Library number 0 is a recall-only preset, and therefore

its library title cannot be modiﬁed. Also, library num-

bers in which no patch data has been stored are dis-

played as “No Data!,” and it will not be possible to edit

the library title.

G RECALL button

This button recalls the patch data that is currently

selected in the library list.

Library numbers in which no patch data has been

stored are displayed as “No Data!,” and cannot be

recalled.

2 3 5

287

Reference section

H STORE button

This button stores the current patch data into the

number selected in the library list. If patch data

has already been stored in that number, it will be

overwritten by the new patch data.

Library number 0 is a recall-only preset. New patch

data cannot be stored in it.

I Library list

This displays a patch library list. The row enclosed

by the dotted line is the currently selected library

number. Each column of the list displays the fol-

lowing information.

• NO...................... The library number 0–20.

• LIBRARY TITLE .... The library title. If nothing

has been stored, this indi-

cates “No Data!”

• ROM ................... Recall-only settings are indi-

cated by a “” symbol.

■ Additional functions in the Patch Lib

page

In the Patch Lib page you can hold down the [SHIFT]

key to assign the following functions to [F1]–[F3].

• [F1] (TITLE EDIT) key

Edits the name (library title) of the stored patch set-

tings. This is the same function as the TITLE EDIT

button (6).

• [F2] (RECALL) key

Recalls the patch settings that are currently

selected in the library list. This is the same function

as the RECALL button (7).

• [F3] (STORE) key

Stores the current patch settings. This is the same

function as the STORE button (8).

Plug-in page

Make settings for a MY plug-in system-compatible I/O card

Function

Make various settings for a MY plug-in

system-compatible I/O card installed in

the Option I/O slot.

Key operations

• [PATCH] key → [F4] (Plug-in) key

• Repeatedly press the [PATCH] key

until the screen shown at right

appears

Screen functions

The contents of the screen will depend

on the I/O card that is installed. Please

refer to the manual for your card. If no I/

O card is installed or if it cannot be rec-

ognized, the display will indicate “No

Plug-in Card.”

PATCH screen

288

Reference section

VIEW screen

CH View page

Displays all parameters of a channel

Function

This page displays all mix parameters of

the channel selected by its [SEL] key. All

parameters (except for EQ and dynam-

ics processor) can also be edited in this

page.

Key operation

• [VIEW] key → [F1] (CH View) key

• Repeatedly press the [VIEW] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A ATT. (attenuation)

Set the attenuation value.

B PHASE

Switch between normal (N) and reverse (R) phase.

C EQ (equalizer)

Turn the EQ on/off. This area also displays a graph

showing the approximate response of the current

EQ settings.

D DYNAMICS

Turn the dynamics processor on/off. This area also

displays a graph showing the approximate

response of the current dynamics processor set-

tings.

E DELAY

This switches delay on/off. By moving the cursor to

the numerical boxes located at the right of the but-

ton and turning the [DATA/JOG] dial, you can set

the delay time in units of milliseconds (ms) or sam-

ples (sample).

F ROUT (Routing)

Use the 1–8 buttons and the ST button to select

the bus (buses 1–8/stereo bus) that will be the out-

put destination for that channel.

G PAN/BALANCE

For input channels/monitor channels/return chan-

nels, this knob sets the pan (position) between the

L/R channels of the stereo bus or between the odd-

numbered → even-numbered buses. For the stereo

output channel, this knob sets the L/R volume bal-

ance.

Tip!

When you move the cursor to the PAN/BALANCE

knob and press the [ENTER] key, the knob will be reset

to the center.

H FADER GROUP

Use the A–D buttons to register/cancel assignment

of this channel to fader groups (A–D).

I MUTE GROUP

Use the E–H buttons to register/cancel assignment

of this channel to mute groups (E–H).

J PAIR

This button sets/cancel pairing of the currently

selected channel with the adjacent odd-numbered

→ even-numbered channel. The operation of most

mix parameters such as the fader and the [ON]

key will be linked for two paired channels that

have been paired. This is convenient when you are

handling stereo audio sources.

K Input/output meters

These meters indicate the input level of the input

channels/monitor channels/return channels, or the

output level of the stereo output channel.

6897K21

289

Reference section

L ASSIGN button

This button patches the input/output of an internal

effect, or the input/output channel of a desired

input/output jack or I/O card, to the insert send/

return of this channel. Use this when you want to

insert an internal effect or external effect into the

signal route of this channel.

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the following popup win-

dow will appear.

The various areas of the popup window have the

following functions.

• OFF button

When this button is highlighted, nothing will be

patched to the insert send/return of this channel.

• INT.EFF 1 (Internal effect 1) button

When this button is turned on, the input/output of

internal effect 1 will be patched to the insert send/

return of the corresponding channel.

• INT.EFF 2 (Internal effect 2) button

When this button is turned on, the input/output of

internal effect 2 will be patched to the insert send/

return of the corresponding channel.

• In order to insert an internal effect 1/2 into a chan-

nel, you must ﬁrst set the EFFECT PATCH ﬁeld EFF1/

EFF2 parameter to “INSERT” in the PATCH screen

Patch IN page. If this parameter is not set to

“INSERT,” it will not be possible to turn on the

INT.EFF 1/INT.EFF 2 button.

• It is not possible to insert the same internal effect

into multiple channels. For example even in the case

of paired channels, if internal effect 1 or 2 is patched

to one channel, it will not be possible to patch the

same internal effect into the other channel.

• EXTERNAL button

When this button is turned on, the input/output

connector/input/output channel selected in the

SEND/RTN. ﬁeld will be patched to the input

send/return of the corresponding channel.

• SEND

When the EXTERNAL button is on, select one of

the following choices as the output jack/output

channel that will be patched to the insert send.

■ For an input channel/monitor channel

■ For a return channel/stereo output channel

• RTN. (Return)

When the EXTERNAL button is on, select one of

the following choices as the input jack/input chan-

nel that will be patched to insert return.

■ For an input channel/monitor channel

■ For a return channel/stereo output channel

• An external effect can be inserted into multiple chan-

nels. (However, it is not possible for the same input/

output jack/input/output channel to be shared by the

insert send/return of multiple channels.)

• If you want to insert an external effect into two

paired channels, you must make insert send/return

settings independently for each channel.

Tip!

• For the procedure of inserting an internal effect into

a desired channel, refer to page 88.

• For the procedure of inserting an external effect into

a desired channel, refer to page 78.

Display Meaning

OMNI 1–OMNI 4 OMNI OUT jacks 1–4

SLT-1 – SLT-8

OPTION I/O slot output chan-

nels 1–8

D STO L/D STO R

L or R channel of the DIGITAL

STEREO OUT jack

ST OUT L/ST OUT

L or R channel of the STEREO

OUT jack

Display Meaning

OMNI 1/2 – OMNI

3/4

OMNI OUT jacks 1/2–3/4

SLT-1/2 – SLT-7/8

OPTION I/O slot output chan-

nels 1/2–7/8

D ST OUT

DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack (L/

ST OUT STEREO OUT jack (L/R)

Display Meaning

AD 1 – AD 8 INPUT 1–8 jacks

SLT-1 – SLT-8

OPTION I/O slot input chan-

nels 1–8

D STIN L/D STIN R

L or R channel of the DIGITAL

STEREO OUT jack

Display Meaning

AD 1/ 2– AD 7/8 INPUT 1/2–7/8 jacks

SLT-1/2 – SLT-7/8

OPTION I/O slot input chan-

nels 1/2–7/8

DSTI L/R DIGITAL STEREO IN jack (L/R)

VIEW screen

290

Reference section

M FADER

The current location of the fader is shown graphi-

cally and numerically. You can also edit the fader

value in this page.

N ON/OFF

This indicates the on/off status of the channel. The

on/off status can also be switched in this page.

O AUX

This area shows the send level of the signals sent

from this channel to AUX buses 1–6, both graphi-

cally and numerically. You can also edit the set-

tings in this page.

P PRE/PST (Pre/Post)

This area shows whether pre-fader or post-fader

has been selected as the routing for the signal sent

from this channel to AUX buses 1–6. You can also

edit the settings in this page.

Q AUX ON/OFF

This area shows the on/off status of the signals sent

from this channel to AUX buses 1–6. You can also

edit the settings in this page.

When a stereo output channel is selected, parameters

(

), (

), and (

) will not be dis-

played. When a return channel is selected, parameters

(

), (

), and (

) will not be displayed.

■ Additional functions in the CH View

page

In the CH View page, holding down the [SHIFT] key

will assign the following additional functions to the

[F1]–[F5] keys.

• [F1] (EQ ON/OFF)

Switches the EQ on/off. This is the same function

as the button in the EQ area (3).

• [F2] (DYN ON/OFF)

Switches the dynamics processor on/off. This is the

same function as the button in the DYNAMICS

area (4).

• [F3] (ROUT OFF) key

Turns off all buttons 1–8 in the ROUT area (6).

(This does not affect the ST button.)

• [F4] (PAN CENTER) key

Sets the PAN/BALANCE knob (7) to the center

position.

• [F5] (EFF.INS ASGN) key

Accesses a popup window in which you can patch

an internal effect or input/output jack or input/out-

put channel to the insert send/return of the chan-

nel. This is the same function as the ASSIGN

button (L).

291

Reference section

Library page

Store or recall channel settings

Function

Store the settings of the currently

selected channel into the channel

library, or recall stored settings.

Key operation

• [VIEW] key → [F2] (Library) key

• Repeatedly press the [VIEW] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A SEL CH (Select channel)

This indicates the channel that is currently

selected by its [SEL] key. The displayed abbrevia-

tion has the following meaning.

• INPUT 1–8 .......... Input channel 1–8

• MONI 1–16......... Monitor channel 1–16

• RTN 1/2 .............. Return channel 1/2

• ST OUT ............... Stereo output channel

B EQ/DYN./DELAY settings

This area displays the EQ, dynamics processor,

and delay settings of the currently selected chan-

nel.

C Input/output meters

These indicate the input level of the currently

selected channel and the adjacent odd-numbered

→ even-numbered channel. If a stereo output

channel is selected, the L/R output level will be

displayed.

Areas (

)–(

) are only for display, and have no edit-

able items.

D TITLE EDIT button

This button lets you edit the name (library title) of

the channel data stored in the library. When you

move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, the TITLE EDIT popup window will

appear, allowing you to edit the library title.

Library numbers 0 and 1 are recall-only preset pro-

grams, and their names cannot be edited. Also, num-

bers in which channel settings have not been stored

will be displayed as “No Data!,” and their title cannot

be edited.

E RECALL button

This button recalls the channel data that is cur-

rently selected in the library list.

Channel data is compatible between input chan-

nels, monitor channels, and return channels, and

can be recalled between these types of channels.

However, parameters that are not common to both

will be treated as follows when recalled.

■ When the settings of return channel 1 are

recalled to an input channel/monitor chan-

nel

Parameter

Behavior of recall

destination channel

Pan

L channel setting of the return

channel will be applied.

Dynamics proces-

sor

All parameters will be reset to

the default values.

AUX Send 5

Set to AUX Send 5 = on, Send

Level = –∞.

AUX Send 6

The recall source setting will

be applied without change.

VIEW screen

292

Reference section

■

When the settings of return channel 2 are

recalled to an input channel/monitor channel

■ When the settings of an input channel/

monitor channel are recalled to return

channel 1

■ When the settings of an input channel/

monitor channel are recalled to return

channel 2

Libraries numbers in which no channel data has been

stored (displayed as “No Data!”) cannot be recalled.

F STORE button

This button stores the channel settings into the

number that is selected in the library list. If chan-

nel data has already been stored in that number, it

will be overwritten by the new channel data.

• It is not possible to store in the recall-only library

numbers 0/1.

• Pairing settings and effect insert settings are not

stored in the library. Nor will the pairing or effect

insert settings of the recall destination be affected

when you recall a library.

G Library list

This displays a channel library list. The row sur-

rounded by a dotted line indicates the library

number that is currently selected by the [DATA/

JOG] dial. The following information is displayed

by the columns of the list.

• NO...................... The library number 0–64.

• LIBRARY TITLE .... The library title. If channel

data has not been stored, this

indicates “No Data!”

• ROM ................... Recall-only settings are indi-

cated by a “” symbol.

H SOURCE CHANNEL

This indicates the channel from which that library

number was stored. The meaning of the abbrevia-

tion is the same as for SEL CH (1). For library

numbers 0/1, this will display “GENERAL.”

• Channel data is not compatible between the stereo

output channel and other channels (input channels,

monitor channels, return channels).

• If the currently selected channel is not compatible

with the source channel, “CONFLICT” will be dis-

played below the SOURCE CHANNEL area, and

Recall will not be possible.

■ Additional functions in the Library

page

In the Library page you can hold down the [SHIFT]

key to assign the following additional functions to

[F1]–[F3].

• [F1] (TITLE EDIT) key

Edits the name (library title) of the stored channel

settings. This is the same function as the TITLE

EDIT button (4).

• [F2] (RECALL) key

Recalls the channel currently selected in the

library list. This is the same function as the RECALL

button (5).

• [F3] (STORE) key

Stores the settings of the channel selected by its

[SEL] key. This is the same function as the STORE

button (6).

Parameter

Behavior of recall

destination channel

Pan

L channel setting of the return

channel will be applied.

Dynamics proces-

sor

All parameters will be reset to

the default values.

AUX Send 5

The recall source setting will

be applied without change.

AUX Send 6

Set to AUX Send 6 = on, Send

Level = –∞.

Parameter

Behavior of recall

destination channel

Pan

The recall source setting will

be applied to both L/R chan-

nels.

Dynamics proces-

sor

Ignored.

AUX Send 5 Ignored.

AUX Send 6

The recall source setting will

be applied without change.

Parameter

Behavior of recall

destination channel

Pan

The recall source setting will

be applied to both L/R chan-

nels.

Dynamics proces-

sor

Ignored.

AUX Send 5

The recall source setting will

be applied without change.

AUX Send 6 Ignored.

293

Reference section

PAN/ROUTE screen

Pan 1–8/Pan MONI page

Set pan and routing for each channel

Function

Set pan and routing for the input chan-

nels, return channels and monitor

channels, and set the balance of the ste-

reo output channel.

Key operation

• [PAN] key → [F1] key (Pan 1–8)/[PAN]

key → [F2] key (Pan MONI)

• Repeatedly press the [PAN] key until

one of the screens shown at the right

appear.

Screen functions

A PAN/ROUTING

This indicates the channel that is currently

selected for operations.

B Bus assign

Use the 1–8 buttons and the ST button to select

the bus (bus 1–8/stereo bus) to which the signal of

that channel will be assigned.

C PAN knob

These knobs set the L/R balance of the stereo bus

or the pan (position) between odd-numbered/

even-numbered buses. When a stereo output

channel is selected, this knob sets the balance

between the left/right channels. To edit the setting,

move the cursor to the knob and turn the [DATA/

JOG] dial. The range is L16 (far left) – CENTER –

R16 (far right).

Tip!

When you move the cursor to the PAN knob and press

the [ENTER] key, the knob will be reset to the center.

D MODE

Use the following three buttons to select how the

PAN knobs will function between paired chan-

nels.

• INDIVIDUAL button

When this button is on, the PAN knobs will oper-

ate independently for each channel. (Default set-

ting)

• GANG button

When this button is on, the PAN knobs of two

paired channels will be linked to maintain the dis-

tance of spread.

• INVERTED GANG button

When this button is on, the PAN knobs of two

paired channels will be linked in the opposite

direction.

If you select “GANG” when the pan knobs of two

paired channels are set to far left and far right respec-

tively, it will be impossible to move the pan knobs. The

same will apply if you select “INVERTED GANG”

when both pan knobs of two paired channels are set to

far left or far right. In such cases, temporarily set one

channel to “INDIVIDUAL” before adjusting the pan

settings.

PAN/ROUTE screen

294

Reference section

■ Additional functions in the Pan 1–8/

Pan MONI page

In the Pan 1–8/Pan MONI page, holding down the

[SHIFT] key will assign the following additional func-

tions to [F1]–[F5].

• [F1] (INDIVIDUAL) key

The PAN knobs of two paired channels will oper-

ate independently. This is the same function as the

INDIVIDUAL button in the MODE area (3).

• [F2] (GANG) key

The PAN knobs of two paired channels will be

linked to maintain the distance of spread. This is

the same function as the GANG button in the

MODE area (3).

• [F3] (INVERTED GANG) key

The PAN knobs of two paired channels will be

linked in the opposite direction. This is the same

function as the INVERTED GANG button in the

MODE area (3).

• [F4] (ALL ROUT OFF) key

All bus assign buttons 1–8 in the currently dis-

played page will be turned off. (The ST button will

not be affected.)

• [F5] (COPY PAN TO ALL) key

Copy the pan setting of the channel selected by

the cursor to all channels, including those in other

pages.

295

Reference section

Pair page

Set pairing of channels/buses

Function

Set/defeat pairing for input channels 1–

8, monitor channels 1–16, buses 1–8,

and AUX buses 1–4.

Key operation

• [PAN] key → [F3] (Pair) key

• Repeatedly press the [PAN] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A Channel/Bus

This area indicates the channel/bus for which pair-

ing will be set/defeated.

B Pairing

Move the cursor to a button in this area and press

the [ENTER] key to set/cancel pairing for adjacent

odd-numbered → even-numbered channels or

buses. When pairing is set, the heart symbol will

be connected, and the button will indicate “STE-

REO.” When pairing is cancelled, the heart symbol

will be divided, and the button will indicate

“MONO x 2.”

Tip!

• For paired channels, all mix parameters other than

phase, pan and effect insert settings will be linked.

• For buses that are paired, the master level (HOME

screen/Bus page) will be linked.

• For AUX buses that are paired, the master level

(HOME screen/Bus page) and the send level of the

signals sent from each channel to the corresponding

AUX bus will be linked.

PAN/ROUTE screen

296

Reference section

EQ/ATT/GRP screen

EQ/Att page

EQ and attenuation settings

Function

Make four-band EQ and attenuation

settings for the selected channel.

Key operation

• [EQ] key → [F1] key (EQ/Att) key

• Repeatedly press the [EQ] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A EQ ON button

This button turns EQ on/off. In this page, you can

use the [ENTER] key to switch the EQ on/off

regardless of the cursor location.

B ATT. (Attenuation) knob

This knob adjusts the amount of attenuation of the

signal before it is input to the EQ, in the range of

–96– 0 dB. This is used mainly to prevent the sig-

nal from clipping when the EQ is used to boost a

speciﬁc frequency range.

C EQ CURVE

This graph indicates the approximate response of

the EQ.

D Output meter

This meter indicates the signal level after passing

through the EQ.

E Q knob

This knob adjusts the Q (sharpness) at which the

center frequency speciﬁed by the F knob (6) will

be boosted or cut. The range is 10–0.10, and

smaller values will produce a more abrupt curve.

For the LOW band EQ, turning the Q knob fully

clockwise will make the indication read

“L.SHELF,” switching to a shelving type EQ. Turn-

ing the Q knob fully counterclockwise will make

the indication read “HPF,” switching to a high pass

ﬁlter.

For the HIGH band EQ, turning the Q knob fully

clockwise will make the indication read

“H.SHELF,” switching to a shelving type EQ. Turn-

ing the Q knob fully counterclockwise will make

the indication read “LPF,” switching to a low pass

ﬁlter.

F F (Frequency) knob

This knob sets the center frequency at which the

boost/cut will occur, in a range of 21 Hz–20.1

kHz.

G G (Gain) knob

This knob sets the amount of boost/cut, in a range

of –18 dB–+18 dB. if the LOW band EQ is set to

“HPF” or the HIGH band EQ is set to “LPF,” this

knob will switch the corresponding ﬁlter on/off.

213 4

297

Reference section

EQ/ATT/GRP screen

■ Additional functions in the EQ/Att

page

In the EQ/Att page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following additional functions to the [F1],

[F2] and [F5] keys.

• [F1] (FLAT) key

Reset all bands to a boost/cut amount of 0.0 dB

(off if HPF/LPF is selected).

• [F2] (BAND FLAT) key

This button resets the boost/cut amount to 0.0 dB

(or OFF for the HPF/LPF) for the LOW, L-MID, M-

MID, or HIGH bands whose title is highlighted.

• [F5] (COPY ATT. TO ALL) key

Copy the attenuation setting of the selected chan-

nel to all channels. (However, the stereo output

channel is excepted.)

EQ/ATT/GRP screen

298

Reference section

Library page

Store/recall EQ settings

Function

Store EQ settings in the EQ library, or

recall the stored settings.

Key operation

• [EQ] key → [F2] (Library) key

• Repeatedly press the [EQ] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A SEL CH (Select channel)

This indicates the channel that is currently

selected by its [SEL] key. The abbreviations have

the following meaning.

• INPUT 1–8 .......... Input channel 1–8

• MONI 1–16......... Monitor channel 1–16

• RTN 1/2 .............. Return channel 1/2

• ST OUT ............... Stereo output channel

B CURRENT EQ CURVE

This graph indicates the approximate response of

the EQ for the selected channel.

C Output meter

This meter indicates the signal level after passing

through the EQ.

D TITLE EDIT button

This button edits the name (library title) of the EQ

settings stored in the library. When you move the

cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, a

TITLE EDIT popup window will appear, allowing

you to edit the library title.

Library numbers 1–40 are recall-only preset memories,

and their names cannot be changed. Numbers in

which no EQ program has been stored are displayed as

“No Data!,” and their title cannot be changed.

E RECALL button

This button recalls the EQ settings currently

selected in the library list.

Library numbers in which no EQ settings have been

stored will be displayed as “No Data!,” and cannot be

recalled.

F STORE button

This button stores the current EQ settings into the

number selected in the library list. If EQ settings

have already been stored in that number, they will

be overwritten by the new EQ settings.

It is not possible to store into the recall-only library

numbers 1–40.

G Library list

This displays the EQ library list. The row enclosed

by a dotted line indicates the library number that

is currently selected by the [DATA/JOG] dial. The

columns of the list display the following informa-

tion.

• NO...................... The library number 1–128.

• LIBRARY TITLE .... The library title. If no data has

been stored, this will indicate

“No Data!”

• ROM ................... Recall-only EQ settings are

indicated by the “” sym-

bol.

H EQ CURVE

This graph indicates the approximate response of

the EQ settings currently selected in the library list.

299

Reference section

■ Additional functions in the Library

page

In the Library page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys.

• [F1] (TITLE EDIT) key

Edits the name (library title) of the stored EQ set-

tings. This is the same function as the TITLE EDIT

button (4).

• [F2] (RECALL) key

Recalls the EQ settings that are selected in the

library list. This is the same function as the RECALL

button (5).

• [F3] (STORE) key

Stores the EQ settings of the channel that is cur-

rently selected by its [SEL] key. This is the same

function as the STORE button (6).

EQ/ATT/GRP screen

300

Reference section

Fader Grp page

Assign/cancel fader groups

Function

Assign input channels 1–8 and monitor

channels 1–16 to fader groups A–D.

When you operate the fader of a chan-

nel that belongs to a fader group, all

channels belonging to that fader group

will be controlled together.

Key operation

• [EQ] key → [F3] (FaderGrp) key

• Repeatedly press the [EQ] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A Fader groups A–D

The ● symbols indicate the fader group A–D to

which each input channel 1–8 and monitor chan-

nel 1–16 belongs.

When you move the cursor up or down to select

group A–D and use the [SEL] key to select a chan-

nel, that channel will be assigned to the corre-

sponding fader group. When you press the [SEL]

key once again, the channel will be removed from

the fader group.

A channel cannot belong to more than one fader

group.

Tip!

While this page is displayed, the fader group assign-

ment status is also indicated by the lit/dark status of

the [SEL] keys.

B ENABLE

These buttons turn fader groups A–D on/off. The

A–D buttons will be highlighted to indicate that

the corresponding fader group is turned on.

Tip!

• If you want to adjust the fader location of a channel

after that channel has already been assigned to a

fader group, turn off the ENABLE button to tempo-

rarily defeat that fader group.

• If a screen other than the Fader Grp page is dis-

played, you can hold down the [SEL] key to tempo-

rarily exclude a channel from the fader group. By

operating the fader while you hold down the [SEL]

key, you can operate a desired channel indepen-

dently of the fader group.

Do not manually operate two or more faders of a

group at the same time. Doing so will strain the motor

and cause malfunctions.

■ Additional functions in the FaderGrp

page

In the FaderGrp page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following additional function to the [F1]

key.

• [F1] (ALL CLEAR) key

Cancels all fader group assignments.

301

Reference section

Mute Grp page

Assign/cancel mute groups

Function

Assign input channels 1–8 and monitor

channels 1–16 to mute groups E-H.

When you operate the [ON] key of a

channel that belongs to a mute group,

all channels belonging to that mute

group will be switched on/off together.

Key operation

• [EQ] key → [F4] (Mute Grp) key

• Repeatedly press the [EQ] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A Mute groups E–H

The ● symbols indicate the mute group E–H to

which each input channel 1–8 and monitor chan-

nel 1–16 belongs.

When you move the cursor up or down to select

mute group E–H and use the [SEL] key to select a

channel, that channel will be assigned to the cor-

responding mute group. When you press the [SEL]

key once again, the channel will be removed from

the mute group.

Tip!

Channels that are turned on and channels that are

turned off can be assigned to the same mute group. In

this case, pressing the [ON] key of a channel that is

assigned to that mute group will cause the “on” chan-

nels to be turned “off,” and the “off” channels to be

turned “on.”

A channel cannot belong to more than one mute

group.

B ENABLE

These buttons turn mute groups E–H on/off. The E–

H buttons will be highlighted to indicate that the

corresponding mute group is turned on.

Tip!

If you want to adjust the on/off setting of a channel

after that channel has already been assigned to a mute

group, turn off the ENABLE button to temporarily

defeat that mute group.

■ Additional functions in the Mute

Grp page

In the Mute Grp page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following additional function to the [F1]

key.

• [F1] (ALL CLEAR) key

Clear all mute group settings.

EQ/ATT/GRP screen

302

Reference section

DYN/DLY screen

Dyn. Edit page

Dynamics processor settings

Function

Make dynamics processor settings for

the selected channel

Key operation

• [DYN] key → [F1] (Dyn. Edit) key

• Repeatedly press the [DYN] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A KEY IN SOURCE

Use the following buttons to select the signal (key-

in) that will trigger the dynamics processor.

• SELF (POST EQ) button

The post-EQ signal of the currently selected chan-

nel

• SELF (PRE EQ) button

The pre-EQ signal of the currently selected chan-

nel

• AUX1 OUT button

The signal immediately before the master send

level of the AUX 1 bus

• AUX2 OUT button

The signal immediately before the master send

level of the AUX 2 bus

• LEFT (POST EQ) button

The post-EQ signal of the adjacent channel to the

left

• LEFT (PRE EQ) button

The pre-EQ signal of the adjacent channel to the

left

• If input channel 1, monitor channel 1, or the stereo

output channel is selected, the LEFT (POST EQ)/LEFT

(PRE EQ) buttons will be unavailable.

• Because return channels 1/2 do not have dynamic

processors, the items of this page will not be dis-

played if a return channel is selected.

B Channel

When the LEFT (POST EQ) or LEFT (PRE EQ) but-

ton is turned on in KEY IN SOURCE (1), this dis-

plays the key-in source channel.

C ST LINK (Stereo link)

If the button in this area is turned on, the dynamics

processor settings and operation will be linked for

adjacent odd-numbered → even-numbered chan-

nels. In this case, both channels will operate

simultaneously if either channel exceeds the

threshold level.

To turn the button on, move the cursor to the box

at the right, and select one of the following as the

channel(s) for which the dynamic processor will

be enabled.

• BOTH.................. Both odd-numbered and

even-numbered channels

• L.......................... Only the odd-numbered (left)

channel

• R.......................... Only the even-numbered

(right) channel

Tip!

• The button in the ST LINK area will always be on for

the stereo output channel and for paired channels. (It

will not be possible to turn it off.)

• When you turn on the button in the ST LINK area,

the dynamics processor settings of the odd-num-

bered channel will be copied to the even-numbered

channel.

52 6

303

Reference section

DYN/DLY screen

D ON/OFF

This button turns the dynamics processor on/off.

Tip!

Even when the cursor is in the PARAMETER area (

you can press the [ENTER] key to turn this button on/

off.

E GR (Gain reduction)

This displays the amount of gain reduction produced

by the dynamics processor, in a range of –18 dB–

0 dB

F Output meter

This indicates the signal level after passing through

the dynamics processor.

G CURVE

This shows the approximate response of the cur-

rent dynamics processor. The horizontal axis of the

graph is the input level, and the vertical axis is the

output level.

H TYPE

This shows the type of the currently selected

dynamics processor. The display has the following

meaning.

• COMP ................. Compressor

• EXPAND.............. Expander

• GATE................... Gate

• COMPANDER (HARD/SOFT)

Compander (hard/soft)

• DUCKING........... Ducking

It is not possible to change the type of dynamics pro-

cessor in this page. If you want to use a different type,

settings that use the desired type must be recalled

from the library. (Recall operations are performed in

the DYN/DLY screen/Library page.)

I PARAMETER

Here you can set the various parameters of the

dynamics processor. The type and range of the

parameters will differ depending on the type of

dynamics processor. For details on the type and

function of the parameters, refer to the appendix at

the end of this manual.

DYN/DLY screen

304

Reference section

Library page

Storing and recalling dynamics processor settings

Function

Store dynamics processor settings in

the library, or recall stored programs.

Key operation

• [DYN] key → [F2] (Library) key

• Repeatedly press the [DYN] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A SEL CH (Select channel)

This indicates the channel that is currently

selected by its [SEL] key. The displayed abbrevia-

tions have the following meaning.

• INPUT 1–8 .......... Input channel 1–8

• MONI 1–16......... Monitor channel 1–16

• ST OUT ............... Stereo output channel

B CURRENT DYNAMICS CURVE/TYPE

This shows the approximate characteristics and

type of the current dynamics processor.

C GR (Gain reduction)

This displays the amount of gain reduction produced

by the dynamics processor, in a range of –18 dB–

0 dB.

D Output meter

This indicates the signal level after passing through

the dynamics processor.

E TITLE EDIT button

This button edits the name (library title) of the set-

tings stored in the library. When you move the cur-

sor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, a

TITLE EDIT popup window will appear, allowing

you to edit the library title.

Library numbers 1–40 are recall-only preset programs,

and their name cannot be changed. Numbers in which

no dynamics program has been stored are displayed as

“No Data!,” and their title cannot be changed.

F RECALL button

This button recalls the settings currently selected

in the library list.

Library numbers in which no dynamics settings have

been stored will be displayed as “No Data!” and can-

not be recalled.

G STORE button

This button stores the current dynamics processor

settings into the number selected in the library list.

If dynamics processor settings have already been

saved in that number, they will be overwritten by

the new settings.

It is not possible to store to recall-only library numbers

1–40.

H Library list

This displays the dynamics library list. The row

enclosed by the dotted line is the library number

currently selected by the [DATA/JOG] dial. The

columns of the list display the following informa-

tion.

• NO...................... The library number 1–128

• LIBRARY TITLE .... The library title and the type

used by the settings. If noth-

ing has been stored, this will

indicate “No Data!”

• ROM ................... Recall-only settings are indi-

cated by the “” symbol.

8 9

3 4

305

Reference section

I CURVE/TYPE

This displays the approximate response of the set-

tings selected in the library list, and the type that is

used.

Since return channels 1/2 do not have dynamics pro-

cessors, the items of this page will not be displayed if a

return channel is selected.

■ Additional functions in the Library

page

In the Library page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys.

• [F1] (TITLE EDIT) key

Edits the name (library title) of the stored settings.

This is the same function as the TITLE EDIT button

(5).

• [F2] (RECALL) key

Recalls the settings selected in the library list. This

is the same function as the RECALL button (6).

• [F3] (STORE) key

Stores the current dynamics processor settings.

This is the same function as the STORE button (7).

DYN/DLY screen

306

Reference section

Dly/ø1–8/Dly/øMONI page

Delay/phase settings

Function

Set the delay and phase of the input

channels, return channels, and monitor

channels.

Key operation

• [DYN] key → [F3] (Dly/ø1–8) key, [F4]

(Dly/øMONI) key

• Repeatedly press the [DYN] key until

the desired page appears.

Screen functions

A Channel

This area indicates the channel for which delay/

phase settings will be made.

B DELAY

Here you can specify the time (delay time) by

which the input signal of each channel will be

delayed. Of the two numerical boxes, the upper

box shows the delay time in millisecond units, and

the lower box in sample units. Editing either value

will cause the other value to correspond.

Tip!

Unlike a conventional delay, the main use of this delay

is to correct the timing of the input signal. For example

you can use this to apply delay to a monitor channel to

make the rhythmic feel “lag,” or when recording to

compensate for time differences between mics that are

placed at a distance from each other.

The delay time range for the millisecond adjustment

will depend on the sampling frequency of the song.

The range will be 0–54.2 milliseconds if the sampling

frequency is 48 kHz, and 0–59 milliseconds if the sam-

pling frequency is 44.1 kHz. When adjusting in sample

units, the range will be 0–2600 samples regardless of

the sampling frequency.

C On/off

These buttons switch the delay on/off.

Tip!

For channels that are paired, the delay time and on/off

settings will always change in tandem.

D ø (Phase)

These buttons switch the phase of the input signal.

The phase is normal when the button indicates N

(normal), and reversed when the button indicates

R (reverse).

Tip!

• The phase setting can be made independently even

for paired channels.

• If you press a [SEL] key when this page is displayed,

the cursor will automatically move to the location of

the corresponding channel. (The Dly/ø1–8 page and

Dly/øMONI page will automatically switch as neces-

sary.)

■ Additional functions in the Dly/

øpages

In the Dly/ø1–8, Dly/øMONI pages you can press the

[SHIFT] key to assign the following additional func-

tion to the [F5] key.

• [F5] (COPY TO ALL) key

Copies the delay time/phase settings of the chan-

nel selected by the cursor to all channels including

those in other pages.

307

Reference section

AUX1–AUX4 screens

Pre/Pst page

Make on/off and pre/post settings for the AUX sends

Function

Make on/off and pre/post settings for

the signal sent from the input channels,

return channels, and monitor channels

to AUX buses 1–4.

Key operation

• [AUX 1]–[AUX 4] keys

Screen functions

A Channels

This area displays the channels that can be edited.

For paired channels, a “–” symbol is displayed

between the channel numbers. The abbreviations

have the following meanings.

• INPUT 1–8 .......... Input channels 1–8

• REC MONI 1–16

... Monitor channels 1–16

• RTN1/RTN2 ........ Return channels 1/2

B PRE/POST buttons

These buttons select either the pre-fader signal or

the post-fader signal as the source of the signal

that is sent from each channel to the correspond-

ing AUX bus.

C ON/OFF buttons

These buttons are on/off switches for the signal

that is sent from each channel to the correspond-

ing AUX bus.

Tip!

• You can also use the [SEL] keys to select the channel.

• Pre-fader/post-fader and on/off settings are linked

for paired channels.

D Send level

This indicates the send level for each channel. Use

the faders for each channel (1–8) to adjust the

send level.

E Output meter

This indicates the output level for the correspond-

ing AUX bus and the adjacent odd-numbered →

even-numbered AUX bus.

F GBL (Global)

Use the PRE button or POST button to switch all

channels between pre-fader/post-fader.

43 2

ATT

4BAND EQ

DYNAMICS

etc.

PAN

LEVELON

PRE/POST

AUX 5(EFF 1)

AUX 6(EFF 2)

AUX 4

AUX 1

...

AUX

AUX1–AUX4 screens

308

Reference section

■ Additional functions in the Pre/Pst

pages

In the Pre/Pst page, you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F2] keys.

• [F1] (GLOBAL PRE) key

Sets all channels to pre-fader. This is the same

function as the PRE button in the GBL area (6).

• [F2] (GLOBAL POST) key

Sets all channels to post-fader. This is the same

function as the POST button in the GBL area (6).

309

Reference section

AUX5/EFF1, AUX6/EFF2 screens

Eff. Edit page

Edit the parameters of internal effects 1/2

Function

Edit the parameters of the effect that is

selected for internal effect 1 (AUX5/

EFF1 screen) or external effect 2

(AUX6/EFF2).

Key operation

• [AUX 5] key/[AUX 6] → [F1] (Eff. Edit)

key

• Repeatedly press the [AUX 5] key or

[AUX 6] key until the desired screen

appears.

Screen functions

A USED AS (Effect usage method)

This indicates the type of connection with which

the internal effect is currently being used.

• AUX5/AUX6........ The internal effect is being

used via AUX send/return.

• INSERT................ The internal effect is inserted

into a speciﬁc channel.

Tip!

This area is for display only, and cannot be edited. The

selection of whether the internal effect will be used via

send/return or inserted can be changed in the EFFECT

PATCH area of the PATCH screen/Patch IN page.

B BYPASS

This switches bypass on/off for the internal effect.

Tip!

Even when the cursor is not located in the BYPASS

area, you can press the [ENTER] key to switch bypass

on/off.

C CURRENT EFFECT NAME

This displays the name (library title) of the cur-

rently recalled effect settings. The “M” or “S” sym-

bol displayed at the right indicates whether the

type of effect used by these settings is monaural

(M) or stereo (S).

D EFFECT TYPE

This displays the type of the currently selected

effect. At the right of this area, the type is shown

graphically.

It is not possible to change the effect type in this page.

If you want to use a different effect type, you must

recall from the library an effect setting that uses the

desired type. Library recall operations are performed

in the Library page of the AUX5/EFF1 or AUX6/EFF2

screen.

E Output meter

This indicates the output level of the internal

effect.

F Effect parameters

Use the knobs displayed in this area to edit the

parameters of the effect. The type of parameters

and their ranges will depend on the type of the

currently selected effect. For details on the param-

eter types and ranges, refer to the appendix at the

end of this manual.

G MIX BAL. (Mix balance) knob

This knob sets the mix balance between the effect

sound (wet) that is output from the internal effect

and the original sound (dry). With a setting of 0%

only the original sound will be output. At 50% the

effect sound and original sound will be mixed

equally, and at 100% only the effect sound will be

output. If you are using the internal effect via AUX

send/return, set this to 100%. If you are inserting

the effect into a speciﬁc channel, set it to the

appropriate value for your needs.

Tip!

The MIX BAL. knob will be displayed in the same loca-

tion regardless of the effect type that is selected.

3 5

AUX5/EFF1, AUX6/EFF2 screens

310

Reference section

■ Additional functions in the Eff Edit

page

In the Eff Edit page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following function to the [F1] key.

• [F1] (BYPASS ON/OFF) key

Switches effect bypass on/off. This is the same

function as the button in the BYPASS area (2).

311

Reference section

Library page

Store/recall effect settings

Function

Store effect settings in the effect library,

or recall the stored settings.

Key operation

• [AUX 5]–[AUX 6] keys → [F2]

(Library) key

• Repeatedly press an [AUX 5]–[AUX 6]

key until the desired screen appears.

Screen functions

A CURRENT EFFECT NAME

This displays the name (library name) of the cur-

rently-recalled effect settings. The “M” or “S” sym-

bol displayed at the right indicates whether the

type of effect used by these settings is monaural

(M) or stereo (S).

B EFFECT TYPE

This displays the type of the currently selected

effect. At the right of this area, the type is shown

graphically.

C Output meter

This indicates the output level of the internal

effect.

D TITLE EDIT button

This button edits the name (library title) of the

stored effect settings. When you move the cursor

to this button and press the [ENTER] key, a TITLE

EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to

edit the library title.

Since library numbers 1–41 are recall-only presets,

their library titles cannot be edited. Also, library num-

bers for which no settings have been stored are dis-

played as “No Data!” and their titles cannot be edited.

E RECALL button

This button recalls the effect settings that are cur-

rently selected in the library list.

Library numbers for which no settings have been

stored are displayed as “No Data!” and cannot be

recalled.

F STORE button

This button stores the current effect settings into

the number that is selected in the library list. If set-

tings have already been stored in that number,

they will be overwritten by the new settings.

It is not possible to store into recall-only library num-

bers 1–41.

G Library list

This is the effect library list. The row enclosed by

the dotted line is the library number currently

selected by the [DATA/JOG] dial. The columns of

the list display the following information.

• NO...................... The library number 1–128.

• LIBRARY TITLE .... The library title. A “M” or “S”

symbol indicates whether the

effect type used by that

library number is monaural

or stereo. Numbers for which

no effect settings have been

stored are displayed as “No

Data!”

• ROM ................... Recall-only settings are indi-

cated by a “” symbol.

AUX5/EFF1, AUX6/EFF2 screens

312

Reference section

H EFFECT TYPE

This indicates the effect type of the settings

selected in the library list.

Tip!

In general, the effect libraries are common to both

external effects 1 and 2. However, effect settings that

use the “HQ.PITCH” effect type can be recalled only

for internal effect 2.

■ Additional functions in the Library

page

In the Library page, you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys.

• [F1] (TITLE EDIT) key

Edits the name (library title) of the stored effect set-

tings. This is the same function as the TITLE EDIT

button (4).

• [F2] (RECALL) key

Recalls the settings selected in the library list. This

is the same function as the RECALL button (5).

• [F3] (STORE) key

Stores the current effect settings. This is the same

function as the STORE button (6).

313

Reference section

Pre/Pst page

Turn effect send on/off, and switch between pre/post

Function

In this page, the signal sent from the

input channels, return channels, and

monitor channels to internal effects 1/2

(AUX buses 5/6) can be switched on/off

and between pre-fader/post-fader.

Key operation

• [AUX 5] key/[AUX 6] key → [F3] (Pre/

Pst) key

• Repeatedly press the [AUX 5] key or

[AUX 6] key until the desired page

appears.

Screen functions

A Channels

This area displays the channels that can be edited.

For paired channels, a “–” symbol is displayed

between the channel numbers. The abbreviations

have the following meanings.

• INPUT 1–8 .......... Input channels 1–8

• REC MONI 1–16

... Monitor channels 1–16

• RTN1/RTN2 ........ Return channels 1/2

• It is not possible to send signals from return channel

1 to effect 1 (AUX bus 5), or from return channel 2

to effect 2 (AUX bus 6). This is in order to prevent a

loop from occurring between return channels and

effects.

• Due to the reason described above, return channel 1

(return channel 2) will not be displayed in the AUX5/

EFF1 screen (AUX6/EFF2 screen).

B PRE/POST buttons

These buttons select either the pre-fader signal or

the post-fader signal as the source of the signal

that is sent from each channel to the correspond-

ing internal effect.

C ON/OFF buttons

These buttons are on/off switches for the signal

that is sent from each channel to the correspond-

ing effect send.

D Send level

This indicates the send level for each channel. Use

the faders for each channel (1–8) to adjust the

send level.

Tip!

You can also use the [SEL] keys to select a channel.

E Output meter

This indicates the output level of the AUX buses 5/

F GBL (Global)

Use the PRE button or POST button to switch all

channels between pre-fader/post-fader.

■ Additional functions in the Pre/Pst

page

In the Pre/Pst page, you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F2] keys.

• [F1] (GLOBAL PRE) key

Sets all channels to pre-fader. This is the same

function as the PRE button in the GBL area (6).

• [F2] (GLOBAL POST) key

Sets all channels to post-fader. This is the same

function as the POST button in the GBL area (6).

43 2

AUX5/EFF1, AUX6/EFF2 screens

314

Reference section

REMOTE screen

Remote A–Remote D pages

Remotely control external MIDI devices

Function

Operate faders 1–8 and [ON] keys 1–8

to transmit speciﬁed MIDI messages for

controlling external MIDI devices.

Key operation

• [REMOTE] key → [F1] (Remote A)–

[F4] (Remote D) keys

• Repeatedly press the [REMOTE] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A MIDI messages

This area displays (in hexadecimal) the MIDI mes-

sages assigned to the fader and [ON] key of the

channel selected by its [SEL] key.

Move the cursor to each numerical box, and turn

the [DATA/JOG] dial to edit the value of each byte

(as a two-digit hexadecimal number). The follow-

ing settings can be selected.

• 00–FF (hexadecimal)

Corresponds to the actual

MIDI message that will be

transmitted.

• END .................... Indicates the end of the MIDI

message. When you operate

the [ON] key or fader, the

MIDI message from the

beginning to immediately

before the END will be trans-

mitted.

• SW ([ON] switch only)

Indicates the on/off status of

the [ON] key. The byte that

you set to “SW” will be trans-

mitted as a value of 7F (hexa-

decimal) when the [ON] key

changes to “on,” and as a

value of 00 (hexadecimal)

when it changes to “off.”

• FAD (fader only).. Indicates the current position

of the fader. The byte that you

set to “FAD” will be transmit-

ted as a value 00–7F (hexa-

decimal) when you operate

the fader.

Tip!

The MIDI message that can be assigned to one fader or

[ON] key is a maximum of 16 bytes including “END.”

• When assigning a MIDI message, you must be sure to

add “END” at the end of the message. If “END” is

not speciﬁed, the MIDI message will not be sent.

• When assigning a MIDI message to a fader, you must

set one of the bytes to “FAD.” If “FAD” is not speci-

ﬁed, the MIDI message will not be sent when you

operate the fader.

• When assigning a MIDI message to an [ON] key, you

may set one of the bytes to “SW” as desired. In this

case, the MIDI message will be transmitted as SW=7F

when the [ON] key is turned on, and as SW=00 when

the [ON] key is turned off.

• If you do not specify “SW,” the MIDI message you

input in this page will be transmitted only when the

[ON] key is turned on.

• If you assign a MIDI message manually, it is possible

that an illegal MIDI message may be transmitted. As

far as possible, we recommend that you assign MIDI

messages by using the LEARN button (

). (For

details on using the LEARN button, refer to

page 208.)

2 4

315

Reference section

B NAME EDIT buttons

These buttons edit the name (maximum 8 charac-

ters) assigned to the fader/[ON] key. When you

move the cursor to these buttons and press the

[ENTER] key, a popup window will appear, allow-

ing you to input the name.

C LATCH/UNLATCH button

This button selects the mode of operation when

the [ON] key is pressed. Move the cursor to this

button and press the [ENTER] key to switch

between the following two modes of operation.

• LATCH

On/off will alternate each time you press the [ON]

key.

• UNLATCH

The state will be “on” only while you hold down

the [ON] key, and will be “off” when you release

it.

Tip!

Depending on whether you select Latch or Unlatch,

the operation of the [ON] key will be as follows.

• If “SW” is speciﬁed

• If “SW” is not speciﬁed

Tip!

Normally you will use the Unlatch mode when you do

not specify “SW.”

D LEARN button

When this button is turned on, the channel mes-

sage or system exclusive message received at the

MIDI IN/TO HOST connector will be input into

the MIDI message area (1). This function is conve-

nient since it allows MIDI messages received by

the AW2816 to be assigned directly (or with mod-

iﬁcations) to an [ON] key or fader.

Tip!

• Normally you will turn on only one of the [LEARN]

buttons.

• When a channel message or system exclusive is

received while the LEARN button is on, the byte fol-

lowing the last byte of the message will automatically

be set to “END.”

• If a system exclusive message longer than 16 bytes is

received while the LEARN button is on, the ﬁrst 16

bytes will be displayed.

• If the LEARN button for the fader is on, and a control

change message with continuously changing value is

received, the byte corresponding to the variable

value will automatically be set to “FAD.”

E ENABLE/DISABLE button

This button switches whether the Remote func-

tions of the currently displayed page will be

enabled (ENABLE) or disabled (DISABLE).

When you access the Remove A–Remote D pages

and switch this button to ENABLE, the correspond-

ing MIDI messages will be transmitted when you

operate the [ON] keys or faders.

Tip!

• You can enable/disable the remote function indepen-

dently for each of the Remote A–Remote D pages.

• The on/off state of the [ON] keys and the position of

the faders is remembered independently for each of

the Remote A–Remote D pages.

• The state of the faders/[ON] keys used by the Remote

function can be saved in a scene memory, or you can

record fader/[ON] key operations in automix. This

allows you to use the Remote A–D pages simulta-

neously.

F 1–8 buttons

These indicate channel numbers 1–8. The cur-

rently selected channel will be highlighted, and

the upper part of the display will show the MIDI

messages assigned to the [ON] key and fader of

that channel. Below each button, the name of the

[ON] key (upper line) and the name of the fader

(lower line) is shown for the corresponding chan-

nel.

To select a channel, you can press its [SEL] key,

move the cursor to a button 1–8 and press the

[ENTER] key, or directly operate an [ON] key or

fader.

dark darklit

MIDI data transmitted

(SW=7F)

MIDI data transmitted

(SW=00)

dark

LATCH

dark lit

MIDI data transmitted

(SW=7F)

MIDI data transmitted

(SW=00)

UNLATCH

MIDI data transmitted

darkdark lit

UNLATCH

REMOTE screen

316

Reference section

■ Additional functions in the Remote

A–Remote D pages

In the Remote A–Remote D pages, holding down the

[SHIFT] key will assign the following additional func-

tions to the [F1]–[F5] keys.

• [F1] (LATCH/UNLATCH) key

Selects latch or unlatch as the operation when the

[ON] key is pressed. This is the same function as

the LATCH/UNLATCH button (3).

• [F2] (LEARN [ON]) key

The MIDI message received at the MIDI IN/TO

HOST connector will be assigned to the [ON] key.

This is the same function as the LEARN button (4)

for the [ON] key.

• [F3] (LEARN [FADER] key

The MIDI message received at the MIDI IN/TO

HOST connector will be assigned to the fader. This

is the same function as the LEARN button (4) for

the fader.

• [F4] (ENABLE/DISABLE) key

Selects whether to enable (ENABLE) or disable

(DISABLE) the settings of the currently displayed

page. This is the same function as the ENABLE/

DISABLE button (5).

• [F5] (BANK INITIALIZE) key

All MIDI messages and names assigned to the

[ON] keys and faders of the currently displayed

page will be initialized to the default settings.

The default settings for the MIDI messages and

names assigned to the [ON] keys and faders in the

Remote A–D pages are as follows.

317

Reference section

• Default parameters for Remote A–D

Remote A

Remote B

Remote C

Remote D

Channel

[ON] key Fader

Name Message Name Message

1 No assignment VOL CH1 Control change #7 (MIDI ch=1)

2 No assignment VOL CH2 Control change #7 (MIDI ch=2)

3 No assignment VOL CH3 Control change #7 (MIDI ch=3)

4 No assignment VOL CH4 Control change #7 (MIDI ch=4)

5 No assignment VOL CH5 Control change #7 (MIDI ch=5)

6 No assignment VOL CH6 Control change #7 (MIDI ch=6)

7 No assignment VOL CH7 Control change #7 (MIDI ch=7)

8 No assignment VOL CH8 Control change #7 (MIDI ch=8)

Channel

[ON] key Fader

Name Message Name Message

1 No assignment VOL CH9 Control change #7 (MIDI ch=9)

2 No assignment VOL CH10 Control change #7 (MIDI ch=10)

3 No assignment VOL CH11 Control change #7 (MIDI ch=11)

4 No assignment VOL CH12 Control change #7 (MIDI ch=12)

5 No assignment VOL CH13 Control change #7 (MIDI ch=13)

6 No assignment VOL CH14 Control change #7 (MIDI ch=14)

7 No assignment VOL CH15 Control change #7 (MIDI ch=15)

8 No assignment VOL CH16 Control change #7 (MIDI ch=16)

Channel

[ON] key Fader

Name Message Name Message

1 CH1 SUS Control change #40 (MIDI ch=1) CH1 VOL Control change #7 (MIDI ch=1)

2 CH1 SOS Control change #42 (MIDI ch=1) CH1 PAN Control change #10 (MIDI ch=1)

3 CH1 SOFT Control change #43 (MIDI ch=1) CH1 EXP Control change #11 (MIDI ch=1)

4 No assignment CH1 MOD Control change #1 (MIDI ch=1)

5 CH1 PORT Control change #41 (MIDI ch=1) CH1 PORT Control change #5 (MIDI ch=1)

6 No assignment CH1 REV Control change #91 (MIDI ch=1)

7 No assignment CH1 CHO Control change #93 (MIDI ch=1)

8 No assignment CH1 VAR Control change #94 (MIDI ch=1)

Channel

[ON] key Fader

Name Message Name Message

1 PGM CHG1 Program change #1 (MIDI ch=1) CTL CHG1 Control change #1 (MIDI ch=1)

2 PGM CHG2 Program change #2 (MIDI ch=1) CTL CHG2 Control change #2 (MIDI ch=1)

3 PGM CHG3 Program change #3 (MIDI ch=1) CTL CHG3 Control change #3 (MIDI ch=1)

4 PGM CHG4 Program change #4 (MIDI ch=1) CTL CHG4 Control change #4 (MIDI ch=1)

5 PGM CHG5 Program change #5 (MIDI ch=1) CTL CHG5 Control change #5 (MIDI ch=1)

6 PGM CHG6 Program change #6 (MIDI ch=1) CTL CHG6 Control change #6 (MIDI ch=1)

7 PGM CHG7 Program change #7 (MIDI ch=1) CTL CHG7 Control change #7 (MIDI ch=1)

8 PGM CHG8 Program change #8 (MIDI ch=1) CTL CHG8 Control change #8 (MIDI ch=1)

REMOTE screen

318

Reference section

HOME screen

IN/Rtn/MONI page

Monitor the input level of each channel

Function

This page displays the input level of

input channels 1–8, return channels 1/

2, and monitor channels 1–16.

Key operation

• [HOME] key → [F1] (IN/Rtn/MONI)

key

• Repeatedly press the [HOME] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A Level meters

This area indicates the input level of each channel.

Below each level meter, the location of the fader

for that channel is displayed in dB units.

B PRE EQ button

C POST EQ button

D POST FADER button

Use these three buttons to select the location

within the signal routing that will be displayed by

the level meters (1). Turning on the PRE EQ but-

ton will display the pre-EQ signal level, the POST

EQ button will display the post-EQ signal level,

and the POST FADER button will display the post-

fader signal level. This is convenient when you

want to see the location at which the input signal

of that channel is clipping.

Tip!

The settings of buttons (

)–(

) also affect the input

meter display in the VIEW screen CH VIEW/Library

page.

E STEREO OUT LEVEL

This displays the position of the STEREO fader in

dB units.

■ Additional functions in the IN/Rtn/

MONI page

In the IN/Rtn/MONI page, holding down the [SHIFT]

key will assign the following additional function to

the [F1] key.

• [F1] (PEAK HOLD) key

Switches the Peak Hold function on/off. When

peak hold is on, a “” symbol indicating the

peak level will be maintained in the level meter

(1). The peak hold setting also affects the level

meters displayed in pages other than in the EQ/

ATT/GRP screen and the DYN/DLY screen.

2 3 4 5

ATT

4BAND EQ

DYNAMICS

etc.

PAN

LEVELON

PRE EQ

INPUT SELECT

METER

POST EQ

METER

POST FADER

METER

319

Reference section

Bus page

Monitor the output levels of buses

Function

Monitor the output level of buses 1–8

and AUX buses 1–6. In this page you

can also adjust the master level of each

bus.

Key operation

• [HOME] key → [F2] (Bus) key

• Repeatedly press the [HOME] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A Level meters

These indicate the output level for each bus.

B Faders

These faders adjust the master level for each bus.

To adjust the position of a fader, move the cursor

to the desired fader and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial.

The position of the fader for each bus is displayed

in dB units below each fader.

Tip!

If buses are paired, a heart symbol will be displayed

between the corresponding odd-numbered

→

even-

numbered buses. Pairing settings are made in the PAN/

ROUTE screen Pair page.

C PRE FADER button

D POST FADER button

Use these two buttons to select the location within

the signal routing at which the level will be indi-

cated by the level meters (1). Turning on the PRE

FADER button will display the pre-fader (3) signal

level, and the POST FADER button will display the

post-fader signal level.

E STEREO OUT LEVEL

This displays the position of the STEREO fader in

dB units.

■ Additional functions in the Bus page

In the Bus page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following function to the [F1] key.

• [F1] (PEAK HOLD) key

Switches the Peak Hold function on/off. When

peak hold is on, a “” symbol indicating the

peak level will be maintained in the level meter

(1). The peak hold setting also affects the level

meters displayed in pages other than in the EQ/

ATT/GRP screen and the DYN/DLY screen.

3 4 5

AUX 5(EFF 1)

AUX 6(EFF 2)

AUX 4

AUX 1

BUS 8

BUS 1

BUS 1(...8)

LEVEL

POST FADER

METER

PRE FADER

METER

AUX 1(...6)

LEVEL

METERMETER

... ...

HOME screen

320

Reference section

Omni/ST page

Monitor the output levels of the OMNI OUT jacks and

stereo output

Function

Monitor the output levels of OMNI

OUT jacks 1–4 and the stereo output

channel.

Key operation

• [HOME] key → [F3] (Omni/ST) key

• Repeatedly press the [HOME] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears

Screen functions

A OMNI OUT level meters

These meters indicate the output level of OMNI

OUT jacks 1–4. The type of output signal assigned

to each OMNI OUT jack is displayed below the

level meters.

Tip!

This page is for display only, and contains no editable

items. The type of signal assigned to the OMNI OUT

jacks can be changed in the PATCH screen/Patch OUT

page.

B STEREO OUT level meter

This meter indicates the output level of the stereo

output channel.

C PRE FADER button

D POST FADER button

Use these two buttons to select the location within

the signal routing at which the level will be indi-

cated by the STEREO OUT level meter (2). Turn-

ing on the PRE FADER button will display the

signal level before the STEREO fader, and turning

on the POST FADER button will display the signal

level after the STEREO fader.

The PRE FADER button/POST FADER button setting

will not affect the OMNI OUT level meter display.

E STEREO OUT LEVEL

This displays the position of the STEREO fader in

dB units.

■ Additional functions in the Omni/ST

page

In the Omni/ST page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following function to the [F1] key.

• [F1] (PEAK HOLD) key

Switches the Peak Hold function on/off. When

peak hold is on, a “” symbol indicating the

peak level will be maintained in the level meters

(1)(2). The peak hold setting also affects the level

meters displayed in pages other than in the EQ/

ATT/GRP screen and the DYN/DLY screen.

4 5

STEREO L

STEREO R

ATT

4BAND EQ

DYNAMICS

STEREO

BALLEVELON

ATT

4BAND EQ

DYNAMICS

PRE FADER

METER

PRE FADER

METER

321

Reference section

Option page

Monitor the output levels of the I/O card

Function

Display meters that indicate the output

levels to an I/O card installed in the

option I/O slot.

Key operation

• [HOME] key → [F4] (Option) key

• Repeatedly press the [HOME] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears

Screen functions

A Level meters

These level meters indicate the output levels of the

I/O card. The type of signal assigned to each out-

put channel 1–8 is displayed below the level

meters.

Tip!

This page is for display only, and contains no editable

items. The type of signal assigned to each output chan-

nel of the I/O card can be changed in the PATCH

screen/Patch OUT page.

B STEREO OUT LEVEL

The position of the STEREO fader is shown in dB

units.

■ Additional functions in the Option

page

In the Option page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following function to the [F1] key.

• [F1] (PEAK HOLD) key

Switches the Peak Hold function on/off. When

peak hold is on, a “” symbol indicating the

peak level will be maintained in the level meters

(1). The peak hold setting also affects the level

meters displayed in pages other than in the EQ/

ATT/GRP screen and the DYN/DLY screen.

HOME screen

322

Reference section

TRACK screen

TR View page

View the recorded content for each track

Function

The regions of each track are displayed

as bar graphs. In this page you can also

set the input monitor for each track,

and switch muting on/off.

Key operation

• [TRACK] key → [F1] (TR View) key

• Repeatedly press the [TRACK] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A T (Track)

This is the track number 1–16.

B B (Bus)

This indicates the type of signal assigned to the

input (recorder input) of each track 1–16. The

abbreviations have the following meaning.

• B1–B8.................. Buses 1–8

• D1–D16 .............. Direct output of input chan-

nels 1–8

Tip!

The signals assigned to the recorder inputs can be

speciﬁed in the RECORDER TRACK INPUT ASSIGN

area of the PATCH screen/Patch IN page (

→

P.73).

C NAME

This displays the name of the virtual track selected

for each track 1–16. Tracks in which nothing has

been recorded will indicate “-NO REC-”. When

you record something in a track, a name of “V.Tr x -

y” (x=track number 1–16, y=virtual track number

1–8) will be assigned automatically.

Tip!

• A name of up to 16 characters can be assigned to a

virtual track, but only the ﬁrst 8 characters will be

displayed in the NAME column (

• The name of a virtual track can be edited in the EDIT

screen/TR Edit page.

D V (Virtual track)

This is the virtual track number (1–8) currently

selected for each track 1–16.

Tip!

The virtual track used for each track can be selected in

the TRACK screen/V.Track page.

E M (Mute)

This displays the mute on/off status of tracks 1–16

as “

●” (mute=on) or “” (mute=off) symbols. You

can also switch mute on/off by moving the cursor

to this area and pressing the [ENTER] key.

Tip!

• The M column is linked with the MUTE buttons of

the METER screen (

→

P.351).

• The mute on/off setting of each track does not affect

the [ON] keys of the monitor channels.

• On the AW2816, the number of tracks that can be

played back simultaneously may be limited by the

number of tracks that are set to record-ready mode.

In this case, muting will be forcibly turned on for

tracks that cannot be played back.

• If you want to defeat muting for a track that was

forcibly muted, you must ﬁrst mute another track. If

you attempt to defeat muting without increasing the

number of muted tracks, a message of “CANNOT

CHANGE MUTE” will be displayed, and muting will

not be defeated.

• By pressing the [ALL SAFE] key you can cancel the

record-ready and muted status of all tracks.

12 3 45 6 7

323

Reference section

F I (Input monitor)

This column indicates the type of signal monitored

by tracks 1–16. This will indicate “

●” when moni-

toring the track playback, and “” when monitor-

ing the signal sent to the input of the track (input

source). The type of signal being monitored will

change depending on the settings of the INPUT

MONITOR column (9), the state of the REC

TRACK SELECT [1]–[16] keys, and the current run-

ning mode.

G Track view

The regions (continuous audio data recorded in a

single operation) included in each track are dis-

played as bar graphs in this area. The vertical line

in this area indicates the current location. The

symbols displayed at the bottom of the frame indi-

cate locate points or markers that have been set in

those locations. The following types of symbols are

displayed.

• S.......................... Start point

• E.......................... End point

• I........................... In point

• O......................... Out point

• A ......................... A point

• B.......................... B point

• 1–99.................... Markers 1–99

• R.......................... Relative time zero location

Tip!

The “R” symbol that indicates the relative time zero

location will be displayed only if relative time is

selected as the counter display method. Relative time

can be selected in the METER screen/Meter 2 page.

H ALL MUTE OFF

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, muting will be turned off

for all tracks.

Tracks that have been muted due to limitations in the

number of simultaneously playable tracks cannot be

unmuted unless you reduce the number of record-

ready tracks, or mute other tracks.

I INPUT MONITOR

This selects the input monitor mode (the way in

which input monitor will be switches for each

track). This is the same function as the INPUT

MONITOR area of the METER screen. For details

refer to page 351.

J Current position

The vertical line in this box indicates the approxi-

mate current location between the start and end

points of the song. The small symbols below the

box indicate the approximate location of the

locate points and markers.

K METRO. (Metronome)

This area turns the metronome on/off (the ON/OFF

button) and adjusts the volume of the metronome

(the knob). When you turn on the internal metro-

nome and raise the volume, the metronome sound

will be output from the MONITOR OUT/PHONES

jacks during song playback or recording.

Tip!

• The tempo and time signature of the metronome are

speciﬁed in the SONG screen Tempo Map page.

• If necessary, you can select the output signal of the

internal metronome (MET) as an input source for

input channels 1–8. Assignments to input channels

are made in the PATCH screen/Patch IN page.

• If the internal metronome is selected as an input

source for an input channel, the metronome output

will be sent to the corresponding input channel with-

out regard to the settings of the ON/OFF button or

volume knob in the METRO. area.

■ Additional functions in the TR View

page

In the TR View page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–

[F4] keys.

• [F1] (REMAIN) key

Displays the remaining available recording time

(hours: minutes) in the counter located in the

upper part of the screen. Hold down the [SHIFT]

key and press the [F1] key once again to return to

the normal counter display.

Tip!

The remaining recordable time will differ depending

on the number of tracks that are currently in record-

ready mode. For example if you increase the number

of tracks in record-ready mode from one track to two

tracks, the remaining recordable time will be halved.

• [F2] (WAVE) key

Displays the audio of the desired track as a wave-

form. This is convenient when you want to set a

locate pointer or marker while viewing the wave-

form.

• [F3] (X-ZOOM IN) key

Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F3] (X-

ZOOM IN) key, the track view 7 will zoom-in

horizontally (four levels).

• [F4] (X-ZOOM OUT) key

Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F4] (X-

ZOOM OUT) key, the track view 7 will zoom-out

horizontally (four levels).

TRACK screen

324

Reference section

V. Track page

Select the virtual track for each track

Function

Switch the virtual track assigned to each

track 1–16, and set/cancel pairing

between tracks.

Key operation

• [TRACK] key → [F2] (V. Track) key

• Repeatedly press the [TRACK] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A Pairing

Move the cursor to this area and press the [ENTER]

key to enable (or cancel) pairing for adjacent odd-

numbered → even-numbered tracks. The “” sym-

bol will be displayed when pairing is enabled, and

“” when pairing is disabled.

Tip!

Paired tracks will be linked when you switch virtual

tracks, or when you select them for track editing. This

is convenient when you want tracks on which stereo

sources are recorded to be handled together.

Enabling/disabling of pairing does not affect the pair-

ing settings of the monitor channels. Pairing of moni-

tor channels is performed in the Pair page of the PAN/

ROUTE screens.

B T (track)

These are the track numbers 1–16.

C NAME

This area displays the name of the virtual track cur-

rently selected for each track 1–16. Tracks on

which nothing has been recorded will be dis-

played as “-NO REC-”. When you record some-

thing on such a track, a name of “V.Tr x-y” (x=

track number 1–16, y= virtual track number 1–8)

will be assigned automatically.

Tip!

• A name of up to 16 character can be assigned to a

virtual track, but only the ﬁrst 8 characters will be

displayed in the NAME column (

• The name of the currently selected virtual track can

be edited in the EDIT screen/TR Edit page.

D VIRTUAL TRACK

Move the cursor to this area and press the [ENTER]

key to select the virtual track that will be used for

each track 1–16. The highlighted number indicates

the number of the virtual track that is currently

selected for each track 1–16. Of the remaining vir-

tual track numbers, tracks that have been recorded

will be displayed as “ .”

Tip!

For details on using virtual tracks, refer to page 66.

■ Additional functions in the V. Track

page

In the V. Track page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following additional function to [F1].

• [F1] (REMAIN) key

Displays the remaining available recording time

(hours: minutes) in the counter located in the

upper part of the screen. Hold down the [SHIFT]

key and press the [F1] key once again to return to

the normal counter display.

12 3 4

325

Reference section

Stereo page

Playing or erasing the stereo track

Function

Play back the stereo track, or erase the

recorded contents of the stereo track.

Key operation

• [TRACK] key → [F3] (Stereo) key

• Repeatedly press the [TRACK] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A M (Mute) button

This switches muting on (●)/off ( ) for the stereo

track. When muting is switched off, the L/R output

of the stereo track will be sent directly to monitor

channels 1/2, and at the same time, muting will be

forced on for tracks 1–16.

By playing back a song in this state, you can mon-

itor the stereo track via monitor channels 1/2 →

stereo bus. When you switch muting back on for

the stereo track, muting of tracks 1–16 will be

defeated, returning to the normal state.

In order to listen to the stereo track via the stereo bus,

monitor channels 1/2 must each be assigned to the ste-

reo bus. Be aware that in this case, the settings of

parameters such as pan, EQ, and dynamics processor

for monitor channels 1/2 and the stereo output chan-

nel will directly affect the playback sound of the stereo

track.

Tip!

If you want to hear the stereo track “ﬂat” (unproc-

essed), you can either press the [TRACK CUE] key

→

REC TRACK SELECT [ST] key to send the output of the

stereo track directly to the MONITOR OUT/PHONES

jacks, or you can prepare a scene memory that con-

tains “ﬂat” settings for monitor channels 1/2 and the

stereo output channel.

B Track view

This bar graph shows the region of the stereo track.

The symbols displayed below the track view indi-

cate locate points and markers that are assigned to

those locations. The displayed symbols have the

following signiﬁcance.

• S.......................... Start point

• E.......................... End point

• I .......................... In point

• O......................... Out point

• A ......................... A point

• B ......................... B point

• 1–99.................... Markers 1–99

• R ......................... Relative time zero location

(displayed only when the

counter is switched to rela-

tive time)

C Current position

The vertical line in this box indicates the approxi-

mate current location between the beginning of

the song and the end point. The small symbols

below the box indicate the approximate location

of the locate points and markers.

D STEREO OUT

This meter indicates the output level of the stereo

output channel.

Tip!

By using the PRE/POST button in the HOME screen/

Omni/ST page, you can select whether the pre-fader

level or the post-fader level will be displayed.

E ST TRACK ERASE (Stereo track erase) but-

ton

This button erases the recorded content of the ste-

reo track. When you move the cursor to this button

and press the [ENTER] key, a conﬁrmation popup

window will appear. Move the cursor to the OK

button and press the [ENTER] key, and the stereo

track will be erased.

1 52

TRACK screen

326

Reference section

The stereo track can record only one region, with L/R

as a pair. If after recording the stereo track, you record

once again, the previously recorded content will auto-

matically be erased. (However, you can use the

[UNDO] key to bring back the previous recorded con-

tent.)

■ Additional functions in the Stereo

page

In the Stereo page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–

[F3] keys.

• [F1] (REMAIN) key

Displays the remaining recordable time (hours:

minutes) in the counter located in the upper part

of the display. Hold down the [SHIFT] key and

press the [F1] key once again to return to the nor-

mal counter display.

• [F2] (X-ZOOM IN) key

Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F2] (X-

ZOOM IN) key, the track view 2 will zoom-in

horizontally in four levels.

• [F3] (X-ZOOM OUT) key

Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F3] (X-

ZOOM OUT) key, the track view 2 will zoom-out

horizontally in four levels.

327

Reference section

Mark Adj. page

Adjust/delete locate points and markers

Function

Adjust the positions of markers and

locate points (e.g., “in” or “out”

points), or delete locate points and

markers.

Key operation

• [TRACK] key → [F4] (Mark Adj.) key

• Repeatedly press the [TRACK] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A LOCATE POSITION

This area displays the various locate points listed

below. To edit a locate point that has already been

set, move the cursor to the desired numerical box,

and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial. For locate points

that have not yet been set, the numerical box will

indicate “--”.

• START/END (Start point/End point)

These locate points correspond to the [ ] and

[ ] keys respectively. The Start point is the abso-

lute time (ABS) zero location, and corresponds to

the beginning of the ﬁrst measure (if measures are

used). When you create a new song, the beginning

of the song will be set initially as the Start point.

When you record a song, the location at which

recording ends will be set automatically as the End

point.

The Start point and End point displayed in this

page are always in time code units. If you edit the

Start point, the location of that time code will be

absolute time zero.

Tip!

If the song length changes because a track was erased

or moved, the end point will automatically be reset to

the ending location of the song.

• IN/OUT (In point/Out point)

These locate points correspond to the [IN] and

[OUT] keys. They are also used as the recording-

start and end locations during auto punch-in/out.

The In/Out points are automatically set to the loca-

tions at which recording was last begun and

ended, and can also be set individually by using

the [SET] + [IN] keys or [SET] + [OUT] keys.

Time display

(ABS)

Time code

display (ABS)

00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00

00:00:00:000 00:00:05:000

00:00:10:00.00

00:00:10:000

Start point = 00:00:00:00.00

Song

Time display

(ABS)

Time code

display (ABS)

Song

00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00

–00:00:05:000 00:00:00:000

00:00:10:00.00

00:00:05:000

Start point = 00:00:05:00.00

TRACK screen

328

Reference section

• A/B (A point/B point)

These locate correspond to the [A] and [B] keys.

They are also used to specify the area for A-B

repeat playback. The A/B points can also be set

individually by using the [SET] + [A] keys or [SET]

+ [B] keys.

Tip!

If you move the cursor to the button located at the left

of the locate point numerical box and press the

[ENTER] key, a “ ” symbol will be displayed there,

indicating that this point has been selected for dele-

tion. (Pressing the [ENTER] key once again will make

the symbol disappear.)

It is not possible to select the start/end points for dele-

tion.

• The units used to display the In/Out points and A/B

points will depend on the counter display method

setting (time/time code/measures)

• If measure display is selected, units of measures/

beats/ticks will be displayed for the locate points.

However, only the measure and beat units can be

selected for editing. If measure display is selected, it

will not be possible to edit In/Out points or A/B

points located earlier than the Start point. (In this

case, only the beat will be displayed for the corre-

sponding locate point.)

B Markers

This area displays the markers 1–99 that have been

set in the song. The row enclosed by the dotted

line is the currently selected marker. Move the cur-

sor to the MARKER column and turn the [DATA/

JOG] dial to select a marker number. Then move

the cursor to the POSITION column and edit the

location of the corresponding marker.

Tip!

If you move the cursor to the button located at the left

of the marker number and press the [ENTER] key, a

“ ” symbol will be displayed at the left, indicating

that the corresponding marker has been selected for

deletion. (Pressing the [ENTER] key once again will

make the symbol disappear.) If you select a different

marker when the “ ” symbol is displayed, the deletion

symbol will be cancelled.

• When editing the location of a marker, it is not possi-

ble to move it past the preceding or following

marker.

• The marker number is automatically assigned in

sequence, starting from the beginning of the song.

For this reason when you delete a marker, the marker

numbers will be changed as necessary.

C DELETE button

This button deletes the locate points or markers

that are selected for deletion (i.e., for which the

“” symbol is displayed).

Tip!

• The IN/OUT points and A/B points can also be

deleted by holding down the [CANCEL] key and

pressing the [IN]/[OUT] or [A]/[B] key. If you want to

delete a marker using key operations, use the [ /

[ ] keys to move to the marker you want to delete,

and then hold down the [CANCEL] key and press the

[MARK] key.

• For details on setting a locate point or marker, refer

to page 102 to 103.

■ Additional functions in the Mark

Adj. page

In the Mark Adj. page, you can press the [SHIFT] key

to assign the following additional function to the [F1]

key.

• [F1] (REMAIN) key

Displays the remaining recordable time (hours:

minutes) in the counter located in the upper part

of the display. Hold down the [SHIFT] key and

press the [F1] key once again to return to the nor-

mal counter display.

329

Reference section

EDIT screen

TR Edit page

Edit tracks

Function

Assign a name to each track, and edit

audio data by tracks, parts, or regions.

Key operation

• [EDIT] key → [F1] (TR Edit) key

• Repeatedly press the [EDIT] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A TRACK menu

Here you can select commands to edit tracks of

audio data. When you move the cursor to this

menu and press the [ENTER] key, a list of buttons

for selecting the commands will be displayed

(below center). Then move the cursor to the com-

mand you want to execute and press the [ENTER]

key, and a list of buttons for the parameters of that

command will be displayed (below right).

When the parameter buttons are displayed, you

can move the cursor to the button of the currently-

highlighted command and press the [ENTER] key

to return to the list of commands. If you move the

cursor to the highlighted menu at the top of the list

and press the [ENTER] key, you will return to the

ﬁrst menu list.

B PART menu

Here you can select commands to edit the desired

range (part) of a track. The method of selecting a

command from the PART menu and accessing

parameters is the same as for the TRACK menu

(1).

C REGION menu

Here you can select commands to edit pieces of

audio data that were recorded in a single opera-

tion (regions). The method of selecting a command

from the REGION menu and accessing parameters

is the same as for the TRACK menu (1).

Tip!

For details on the commands that can be selected from

the TRACK/PART/REGION menus and their parame-

ters, refer to page 118.

D Pairing

When you move the cursor to this column and

press the [ENTER] key, pairing will be enabled (or

cancelled) for adjacent odd-numbered → even-

numbered tracks. Paired tracks are indicated by a

“” symbol, and unpaired tracks are indicated by

a “” symbol. When editing tracks or parts, both

tracks of a pair will be affected by your editing.

5 6 7 8

Menu Command Parameter

EDIT screen

330

Reference section

Tip!

• It is possible to move the cursor to the (

) area only

if the three menus TRACK/PART/REGION are dis-

played.

• The pairing settings you make in this page are linked

with the TRACK screen/V.Track page.

E T (Track)

This column displays the track number 1–16.

F NAME

This column displays the name of the virtual track

currently selected for each track 1–16. Tracks in

which nothing has been recorded are displayed as

“-NO REC-”. When you record something on such

a track, it will automatically be assigned a name of

“V.Tr x-y” (x= track number 1–16, y= virtual track

number 1–8).

Tip!

A name of up to 16 character can be assigned to a vir-

tual track, but only the ﬁrst 8 characters will be dis-

played in the NAME column (

G V (virtual track)

This shows the virtual track number (1–8) that is

currently selected for each track 1–16.

Tip!

Virtual tracks are selected in the TRACK screen/

V.Track page.

H Track view

In this area, the regions included in each track are

displayed as a bar graph. The vertical line in the

track view area indicates the location at which the

area for editing has been set. The symbols dis-

played at the bottom of the track view area indi-

cate locate points and markers.

While editing, the track and area selected for edit-

ing will be displayed as follows.

When you specify an editing source and editing

destination track/range (e.g., when copying or

moving audio data), the display will be as follows.

I Parameter setting area

In this area you can set the parameters for execut-

ing the selected command.

Tip!

• For details on track editing operations, refer to

page 111.

• If markers or locate points have been set within the

song, you can use the [ ]/[ ] keys, LAST REC

[IN]/[OUT] keys, and [A]/[B] keys to specify the edit-

ing location or editing range.

The keys of the transport section will have no effect

while the TR Edit page is displayed.

■ Additional functions in the TR Edit

page

In the TR Edit page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–

[F3] keys.

• [F1] (REMAIN) key

Displays the remaining recordable time (hours:

minutes) in the counter located in the upper part

of the display. Hold down the [SHIFT] key and

press the [F1] key once again to return to the nor-

mal counter display.

• [F2] (X-ZOOM IN) key

Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F2] (X-

ZOOM IN) key, the track view 8 will zoom-in on

the time axis in four levels.

• [F3] (X-ZOOM OUT) key

Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F3] (X-

ZOOM OUT) key, the track view 8 will zoom-out

on the time axis in fout levels.

Track to be edited Edited area

Edit source track

Edit destination track

Edit source area

Edit destination area

331

Reference section

V.TR Edit page

Edit virtual tracks

Function

Edit the virtual tracks 1–8 included in

the speciﬁed track.

Key operation

• [EDIT] key → [F2] (V. TR Edit) key

• Repeatedly press the [EDIT] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A TRACK menu

B PART menu

C REGION menu

These are the same as the TR Edit page TRACK

menu, PART menu, and REGION menu, with the

difference that the editing will apply to virtual

tracks 1–8 of the same track. For details refer to the

explanation that begins on page 329. For the com-

mands that can be selected in each menu and

their parameters, refer to page 118 and following.

In the V.TR Edit page, it is not possible to select all

tracks or all virtual tracks for editing.

D Track number

This is the track number that contains the virtual

track you are editing. To change the track number,

move the cursor to this area and turn the [DATA/

JOG] dial, or press a REC TRACK SELECT [1]–[16]

key.

E V (virtual track number)

This column shows the virtual track numbers 1–8.

The virtual track currently selected is indicated by

a “C” (Current) symbol at the left of this column.

F NAME

This column displays the names of virtual tracks 1–

8. Tracks in which nothing has been recorded are

displayed as “-NO REC-”. When you record some-

thing on such a track, it will automatically be

assigned a name of “V.Tr x-y” (x= track number 1–

16, y= virtual track number 1–8).

Tip!

A name of up to 16 characters can be assigned to a vir-

tual track, but only the ﬁrst 8 characters will be dis-

played in the NAME column (

G Track view

In this area, the regions included in each virtual

track are displayed as a bar graph. With the excep-

tion that virtual tracks 1–8 are displayed simulta-

neously, this display is the same as in the TR Edit

page.

H Parameter area

In this area you can set the required parameters for

executing the command.

Tip!

• For details on editing a virtual track, refer to

page 116.

• If markers or locate points have been set within the

song, you can use the [ ]/[ ] keys, LAST REC

[IN]/[OUT] keys, and [A]/[B] keys to specify the edit-

ing location or editing range.

The keys of the transport section will have no effect

while the V. TR Edit page is displayed.

5 4 6 7

EDIT screen

332

Reference section

■ Additional functions in the V.TR Edit

page

In the V.TR Edit page, you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following additional functions to the [F1]–

[F3] keys.

• [F1] (REMAIN) key

Displays the remaining recordable time (hours:

minutes) in the counter located in the upper part

of the display. Hold down the [SHIFT] key and

press the [F1] key once again to return to the nor-

mal counter display.

• [F2] (X-ZOOM IN) key

Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F2] (X-

ZOOM IN) key, the horizontal axis of the track

view (7) will zoom-in (4 levels).

• [F3] (X-ZOOM OUT) key

Each time you press the [SHIFT] key + [F3] (X-

ZOOM OUT) key, the horizontal axis of the track

view (7) will zoom-out (4 levels).

333

Reference section

CD Import page

Import an audio CD to the desired track

Function

Import CD-DA (CD audio) data from an

audio CD inserted in the internal or

external CD-RW drive, and assign it to

the desired track.

Key operation

• [EDIT] key → [F3] (CD Import) key

• Repeatedly press the [EDIT] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A DRIVE

Select the internal or external CD-RW drive. Move

the cursor to this area, use the [DATA/JOG] dial to

select the desired CD-RW drive, and press the

[ENTER] key to conﬁrm your selection.

B Track list

This lists the tracks of the audio CD inserted in the

CD-RW drive. The row enclosed in the dotted line

is the track currently selected as the import source.

To select the track, move the cursor into the list

and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial.

Tip!

You can also import audio data from a mixed-mode

CD-ROM (track 2 or later) or CD-DA data from a CD

Extra (ﬁrst session only), as well as from a conven-

tional audio CD.

C PASTE TO

Specify the track/virtual track in which the audio

data imported from CD-DA will be placed. Specify

the track number in the “TR” numerical box, and

the virtual track in the “V” numerical box. (You

can also select a virtual track that is not currently

assigned to the track.) The NAME area will show

the name of the selected track.

Since the CD-DA audio data is imported in stereo, the

track number will always be selected as an odd-num-

bered/even-numbered pair.

D Point setting

Specify the starting location on the track at which

the imported CD-DA audio data will be placed.

Tip!

The units by which this point is speciﬁed will depend

on the counter display method (hours/time code/mea-

sures) selected in the SONG screen/Setting page. If

measure display is selected, you can specify the loca-

tion in “beat” or “measure” units.

E TYPE

Specify whether the imported CD-DA audio data

will be inserted into the track (Insert) or overwrit-

ten (OverWrite). If you select “Insert,” the data fol-

lowing the speciﬁed point (4) in the import

destination track will move later in time propor-

tionately to the length of the inserted data.

F EXTRACT POINT

Specify the range that will be imported from the

track selected in the track list (2). Move the cursor

to the START (starting location) and END (ending

location) numerical boxes, and use the [DATA/

JOG] dial to input the “minutes:seconds.frames (1/

75 second)” units.

G EXECUTE button

This button executes the CD-DA import operation.

For details on operation, refer to page 174.

• The CD Import page can be used only if the current

song has a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. If the

current song has a sampling frequency of 48 kHz, a

message of “Current Song is 48 (kHz) Fs Type” will

be displayed, and this page will not be available.

• The keys of the transport section will have no effect

while the CD Import page is displayed.

• If the CD/DAT DIGITAL REC setting is set to “DIS-

ABLE” in the UTILITY screen/Prefer.2 page, it will

not be possible to import tracks from an audio CD

that prohibits digital copying (

→

P.266).

EDIT screen

334

Reference section

Tip!

If you are using a CD-RW drive with a variable reading

speed, the reading speed at which the CD-DA audio

data will be imported can be changed in the FILE

screen/Disk Util. page (

→

P.248).

■ Additional functions in the CD

Import page

In the CD Import page you can press the [SHIFT] key

to assign the following additional functions to the

[F1]–[F2] keys.

• [F1] (CD LOAD) key

Close the tray of the CD-RW drive.

• [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key

Open the tray of the CD-RW drive.

335

Reference section

WavImport page

Import a WAV ﬁle to the desired track

Function

Import WAV format audio ﬁles from the

internal CD-RW drive or an external

SCSI device (e.g., MO drive), and assign

them to a track.

Key operation

• [EDIT] key → [F4] (WavImport) key

• Repeatedly press the [EDIT] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A DRIVE

Select the internal CD-RW or an external SCSI

device (e.g., MO drive). Move the cursor to this

area, turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

desired drive, and press the [ENTER] key to con-

ﬁrm your selection.

You can also import WAV ﬁles from a CD-ROM (ISO-

9660) or a mixed-mode CD-ROM (ISO-9660 data

tracks). However, the AW2816 does not support CD-R/

RW media that was recorded by packet writing, or CD-

ROMs of the Macintosh native ﬁle system (HFS).

B File list

This area lists the WAV ﬁles stored in the drive you

selected in (1). The row enclosed by the dotted

line indicates the WAV ﬁle currently selected for

importing.

The columns of the list display the following infor-

mation.

• FILE

This is the ﬁle name or directory name. “” icons

indicate WAV ﬁles, and “” icons indicate direc-

tories. You can move to the desired directory by

selecting the “” icon and pressing the [ENTER]

key.

• TOTAL

This indicates the playback time of the WAV ﬁle in

hours/minutes/milliseconds.

• TYPE

The “” symbol indicates a stereo WAV ﬁle, and

the “” symbol indicates a monaural WAV ﬁle.

The number at the right indicates the quantization

(bit number) of the WAV ﬁle.

The AW2816 can recognize only WAV ﬁles that have

the same sampling frequency as the current song, and

have a ﬁlename extension of “.WAV” following their

name. Other ﬁles will not be displayed in the list (

Tip!

When you have moved downward into another direc-

tory from the top directory (which is called the “root

directory”), the “ ” symbol indicates the current

directory, and the “ ” symbol indicates the next

higher directory. To go back upward in the directory

structure, move the cursor to the “ ” symbol

and press the [ENTER] key.

C DIR

This area displays “/” symbols and directory names

to indicate the current location of the directory

selected in the ﬁle list (2). For example if you are

in the root directory this area will show “/”, and if

you are in the next lowest directory named WAV,

this area will show “/WAV/”.

D PASTE TO

Here you can specify the track into which the

imported WAV ﬁle will be placed. Select the track

number in the “TR” numerical box, and the virtual

track number in the “V” numerical box. (You can

also select a virtual track that is not currently

assigned to a track.) The NAME area will show the

track name of the selected track.

If a stereo WAV ﬁle is selected in the ﬁle list (2),

two adjacent odd-numbered → even-numbered

tracks will be displayed.

EDIT screen

336

Reference section

E Point setting

Specify the location on the track at which the

imported WAV ﬁle will be placed.

Tip!

The units by which this point is speciﬁed will depend

on the counter display method (hours/time code/mea-

sures) selected in the SONG screen/Setting page. If

measure display is selected, you can specify the loca-

tion in “beat” or “measure” units.

F TYPE

Specify whether the imported WAV ﬁle will be

inserted into the track (Insert) or overwritten (Over-

Write). If you select “Insert,” the data following the

speciﬁed point (5) in the import destination track

will move later in time proportionately to the

length of the inserted WAV ﬁle.

G EXECUTE button

This button executes the WAV ﬁle import opera-

tion. For details on operation, refer to page 172.

The keys of the transport section are disabled while

the WavImport page is displayed.

■ Additional functions in the Wav

Import page

In the WavImport page you can press the [SHIFT] key

to assign the following additional functions to the

[F1]–[F2] keys.

• [F1] (CD LOAD) key

Close the tray of the CD-RW drive.

• [F2] (CD UNLOAD) key

Open the tray of the CD-RW drive.

337

Reference section

TR Import page

Import a track from an existing song

Function

Import a track from a song on the inter-

nal hard disk into the desired track of

the current song.

Key operation

• [EDIT] key → [F5] (TR Import) key

• Repeatedly press the [EDIT] key until

the screen shown at the right appears.

Screen functions

A Song list

This area displays a list of the songs saved in the

internal hard disk. The highlighted row indicates

the current song, and the row enclosed by a dotted

line is the song selected as the import source. To

select the import source song, move the cursor

into the song list and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial.

The song list displays the following information.

• DEST. SONG NAME

Song name (only the ﬁrst 16

characters)

• SAVED AT............ Date and time at which the

song was last saved

• SIZE..................... Song data size

• BIT/FS ................. Song quantization and sam-

pling rate

• PRT...................... Song protect on/off (→P.238)

• Only a song with the same quantization and sam-

pling rate as the current song can be selected as the

import source.

• The current song cannot be selected.

B SOURCE TRACK

From the song selected in the song list (1), select

the track number (1–16) and virtual track number

(1–8) of the track that you wish to import. The

name of the selected track is displayed at the right.

• This parameter will be valid only after you have used

the LOAD button (

) to load the track information

for the selected song.

• The track name is not included in the data that is

imported.

C DEST. TRACK (destination track)

Specify the track number (1–16) and virtual track

number (1–8) for the import destination track. The

name of the selected track is displayed at the right.

This display will appear only after you have used the

TRACK CLIP button (

) to register the desired track

from the import source song.

D LOAD button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, track information for the

song selected in the track list will be loaded.

E TRACK CLIP button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the track selected in

SOURCE TRACK (2) will be registered as the

import source.

This button will be valid only after you have used the

LOAD button (

) to load the track information for the

song.

F EXECUTE

This button executes the Track Import operation.

For details on the procedure, refer to page 156.

• This button will be valid only after you have used the

TRACK CLIP button (

) to register the import source

track.

• The keys of the transport section will have no effect

in the TR Import page.

EDIT screen

338

Reference section

AUTOMIX screen

Main page

Make basic automix settings

Function

Make basic settings for recording and

playing automix.

Key operation

• [AUTOMIX] key → [F1] (Main) key

• Repeatedly press the [AUTOMIX] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A AUTOMIX

Here you can switch automix on (ENABLE) or off

(DISABLE). If this button is set to “DISABLE,” auto-

mix cannot be recorded or played back.

When the song is in the initial state, no current auto-

mix exists, and therefore it will not be possible to

switch the above button to “ENABLE.” When you want

to record automix for the ﬁrst time, you must use the

NEW MIX button (

) to create a new automix.

B FADER EDIT OUT

Use the following two buttons to specify how the

fader positions and parameter values will change

when you stop recording automix.

• END button

If this button is on, the fader positions and parame-

ter values at the moment you stop recording auto-

mix will remain valid until the end of automix.

• RET button

If this button is on, the faders will return to the pre-

viously-recorded positions when fader editing

(operations that re-record previously-recorded

fader movements) is ended. The time over which

the faders return to their previous positions can be

set in the Fader Edit page.

If this button is off, the fader positions at the time

that recording ended will be maintained until the

fader is moved.

Tip!

Even when you are editing the faders, the AW2816

remembers the previously-recorded fader movements.

If you leave the RET button turned on, the faders will

return to the previously-recorded positions when you

stop editing, which is convenient when you are editing

just a portion of the fader events.

The on/off setting of the RET button does not affect

parameters other than the faders.

C FADER EDIT mode

Use the following two buttons to select how the

faders recorded in the automix will be edited.

• ABSOLUTE button

When this button is on, the previously-recorded

fader movements will be erased as the new move-

ments are recorded. Normally you will select this

setting.

• RELATIVE button

When this button is on, the previously-recorded

fader movements will be combined with the new

fader movements as they are recorded. Use this

setting when you want to move the faders up or

down relative to the previously-recorded fader

movements.

If the RELATIVE button is on and the RET button is on,

switching the END button on/off will have no effect.

339

Reference section

D AUTOMIX TRANSPORT

Use the following ﬁve buttons to control automix

recording and playback.

• ABORT button

This button stops recording automix and discards

the changes that occurred. If you move the cursor

to this button and press the [ENTER] key while

recording automix, a popup window will ask you

whether you want to discard the contents of the

recorded automix. If you use this button while

automix is playing, automix will stop.

• STOP button

This button stops recording/playback of automix. If

you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key while recording automix, a popup

window will ask you whether you want to update

the recorded contents. Even if you use this button

to stop the automix, the song will not stop.

• PLAY button

This button indicates the on/off status for automix

start/stop. (Operating this button will not cause

automix to begin.) If the AUTOMIX button (1) is

set to “ENABLE” and automix has already been

recorded, automix playback will begin when you

press the [PLAY] key of the transport section, and

the PLAY button will turn on (will light).

When automix is in record-ready mode, moving the

cursor to the PLAY button during playback and press-

ing the [ENTER] key will cause automix recording to

begin.

• REC (Record) button

When automix is stopped, moving the cursor to

this button and pressing the [ENTER] key will

cause the REC button to blink, and automix will be

in record-ready mode. If you start the recorder

running in this state, automix recording will begin.

When recording ends, the REC button will also

automatically turn off (will go dark). While auto-

mix is playing back, you can use this button in

conjunction with the PLAY button to punch-in.

• AUTO REC button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the AUTO REC button will

light, and automix will be in record-ready mode. If

you start the recorder running in this state, auto-

mix recording will begin automatically. However

unlike the REC button, the AUTO REC button will

not turn off (will not go dark) even when automix

recording ends. To return to the Off state, move the

cursor to this button once again and press the

[ENTER] key.

Tip!

For details on automix operation, refer to page 133.

E FREE

This displays the amount of remaining automix

memory in kilobytes and as a percentage.

F SIZE

This indicates the size in kilobytes of the current

automix (the automix that is currently operating)

and of the undo buffer (dedicated memory for

automix undo).

Tip!

The undo buffer preserves the previously-recorded

automix data. If you want to discard the most recently

recorded automix and return to the previous state, use

the UNDO button (

G OVERWRITE

Use the following four buttons to select the param-

eters that will be recorded in the automix.

• FADER button

If this button is on, fader and AUX send fader oper-

ations of each channel will be recorded.

• CH ON (Channel on) button

If this button is on, [ON] key operations of each

channel will be recorded.

FADER EDIT MODE = ABSOLUTE

END =

off

END =

RET = off

Previously-recorded

fader movement

Previously-recorded

fader movement

Newly-recorded

fader movement

Newly-recorded

fader movement

RET = on

Start recording Stop recording

FADER EDIT MODE = RELATIVE

END =

off

END =

RET = off RET = on

Start recording Stop recording

AUTOMIX screen

340

Reference section

• PAN button

If this button is on, pan/balance operations of each

channel will be recorded.

• EQ button

If this button is on, EQ operations of each channel

will be recorded.

Tip!

• In addition to the above parameters, automix can

also record library recall operations and scene recall

operations. These recall operations will be recorded

in automix regardless of the OVERWRITE (

) set-

tings.

• If you want the [ON] key and fader operations in the

REMOTE screen to be recorded in automix, turn on

the FADER button and CH ON button in the OVER-

WRITE area.

H NEW MIX button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the current automix will be

erased and a new automix will be created.

I CLR. BUF (Clear buffer) button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the undo buffer will be

cleared.

When the undo buffer is cleared, it will no longer be

possible to use the UNDO button (

) to return to the

previous state.

Tip!

If you are unable to record into the current automix

because of insufﬁcient automix memory, you may be

able to increase the amount of free space by clearing

the undo buffer.

J UNDO button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the automix will return to

the previous state (the state prior to the most

recent recording) (“Undo”). At this time, the last-

recorded automix data will be saved in the undo

buffer. If you execute Undo once again, the last-

recorded automix data will return (“Redo”).

Automix undo/redo cannot be executed using the

[UNDO]/[REDO] panel key.

■ Additional functions in the Main

page

In the Main page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F5] keys.

• [F1] (ABORT) key

Stops automix recording and discards the changes.

This is the same function as the ABORT button in

the AUTOMIX TRANSPORT area (4).

• [F2] (STOP) key

Stops automix recording/playback. This is the

same function as the STOP button in the AUTO-

MIX TRANSPORT area (4).

• [F3] (PLAY) key

Begins automix recording. This is the same func-

tion as the PLAY button in the AUTOMIX TRANS-

PORT area (4).

• [F4] (REC) key

Enters automix record-ready mode. This is the

same function as the REC button in the AUTOMIX

TRANSPORT area (4).

• [F5] (AUTOREC) key

Performs automatic automix recording. This is the

same function as the AUTO REC button in AUTO-

MIX TRANSPORT area (4).

341

Reference section

Memory page

Store/recall an automix

Function

Store automix data into memory, or

recall a stored automix.

Key operation

• [AUTOMIX] key → [F2] (Memory) key

• Repeatedly press the [AUTOMIX] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A TITLE EDIT button

This button edits the name (memory title) of an

automix that has been stored in memory. When

you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, a TITLE EDIT popup window will

appear, allowing you to edit the memory title.

The memory title cannot be edited for a memory num-

ber in which no automix has been stored (displayed as

“No Data!”).

B RECALL button

Recall the currently selected automix from the list.

Memory numbers in which no automix has been

stored (displayed as “No Data!” ) cannot be recalled.

C STORE button

This button stores the current automix into the

number that is selected in the memory list. If you

store into a number in which an automix has

already been stored, the previous automix will be

erased and overwritten by the new automix.

D Memory list

This area lists the stored automixes. The line

enclosed by the dotted frame is the memory num-

ber currently selected by the [DATA/JOG] dial.

This list displays the following information.

• NO...................... The memory number 1–16.

• MEMORY TITLE

... The memory title. If no data

has been stored, this will

indicate “No Data!”

• SIZE..................... This displays the size of each

automix in kilobytes.

Tip!

In this page, you can turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to

select the memory number regardless of where the

cursor is located.

E NEW MIX button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the current automix will be

erased, and a new automix will be created.

F CLEAR button

Erase the automix data that is currently selected in

the memory list.

G SIZE

This shows the free area of automix memory in

kilobytes.

AUTOMIX screen

342

Reference section

H AUTOMIX

I EDIT OUT

J AUTOMIX TRANSPORT

K OVERWRITE

L UNDO button

M CLR BUF (Clear buffer) button

These are the same functions as described in the Main

page. Refer to the explanation on page 338 to 340.

■ Additional functions in the Memory

page

In the Memory page you can press the [SHIFT] key to

assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys.

• [F1] (TITLE EDIT) key

Use this to edit the name (memory title) of automix

data saved in memory. This is the same function as

the TITLE EDIT button (1).

• [F2] (RECALL) key

Recall the automix that is currently selected by the

cursor in the list. This is the same function as the

RECALL button (2).

• [F3] (STORE) key

Store the current automix data. This is the same

function as the STORE button (3).

343

Reference section

Fader Edit page

View fader movements as a bar graph

Function

Fader movements recorded in the auto-

mix are displayed as a bar graph. This is

convenient when you want to re-record

fader operations while you watch previ-

ously-recorded fader movements.

Key operation

• [AUTOMIX] key → [F3] (Fader Edit)

key

• Repeatedly press the [AUTOMIX] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A Bar graph

This area shows the fader position of each channel

as a bar graph. (Use the keys of the MIXING

LAYER section to select the channels that are dis-

played.) For the fader being edited, both the previ-

ously-recorded position and the edited position

are displayed, as shown in the following diagram.

At this time, the arrow displayed beside the bar

graph indicates the direction in which you can

move the fader to return it to the previous position.

B FADER EDIT OUT

The END button and RET button in this area have

the same function as the END/RET buttons in the

Main page. Please refer to the explanation on

page 338. If the RET button is on, the knob located

at the right sets the time over which the faders will

return to their original values after fader editing is

ended.

C FADER EDIT MODE

D AUTOMIX TRANSPORT

These are the same functions as in the Main page.

Refer to the explanation on page 338 to 340.

■ Additional functions in the Fader

Edit page

In the Fader Edit page you can press the [SHIFT] key

to assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F5] keys.

• [F1] (ABORT) key

• [F2] (STOP) key

• [F3] (PLAY) key

• [F4] (REC) key

• [F5] (AUTOREC) key

These are identical to the additional functions of the

Main page.

Previously-recorded

fader position

If you lower the fader

from the previously-

recorded position

If you raise the fader

from the previously-

recorded position

New fader position Previously-recorded

fader position

New fader position

AUTOMIX screen

344

Reference section

Event List page

Edit individual events of the recorded automix data

Function

Edit individual events recorded in the

automix, such as scene/library recall

events or operations of the channel

[ON] keys, faders, or EQ.

Key operation

• [AUTOMIX] key → [F4] (Event List)

key

• Repeatedly press the [AUTOMIX] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A Event select buttons

Use the following four buttons to select the type of

recorded automix events that will be displayed in

the event list (2).

• SCENE/LIB (Scene/Library) button

Scene memory and library recall operations will

be displayed.

• CH ON (Channel on) button

[ON] key operations of each channel will be dis-

played.

• PAN button

Pan operations of each channel will be displayed.

• FADER button

Fader operations of each channel will be dis-

played.

B Event list

This area lists the events selected by the event

select buttons (1). The line enclosed by the dotted

frame is the event currently selected for edited.

The columns of the event list display the following

information.

• TIME

This column shows the location at which the event

is recorded, in units of hours/minutes/seconds/mil-

liseconds (the minimum step is 25 milliseconds).

You can move the cursor to the numerical box for

each unit and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to modify

the location of the selected event.

• EVENT

This column shows the type of recorded event. You

can move the cursor to this area and turn the

[DATA/JOG] dial to change the type of event. The

displayed abbreviations and their meanings are as

follows.

■ Scene/Library events

SCENE xx ........... Scene memory (number xx)

recall operation

EQ.Lib.xxx.......... EQ library (number xxx)

recall operation

DY.Lib.xxx .......... Dynamics library (number

xxx) recall operation

EF.Lib.xxx ........... Effect library (number xxx)

recall operation

CH.Lib.xx ........... Channel library (number xx)

recall operation

■ Channel On events

ON/OFF ............. [ON] key on/off operation

■ Pan events

L16–C–R16......... Pan position (far left – center

– far right)

■ Fader events

–∞/x.x–6.0/x.x .... Fader position (dB)/time

length of the change from

that position to the next posi-

tion (x.x seconds)

345

Reference section

■ CHANNEL

This column shows the channel of each event.

(This information is not displayed for scene num-

ber events.) You can move the cursor to this area

and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to change the chan-

nel. The displayed abbreviations and their mean-

ings are as follows.

ST OUT ............... Stereo output channel

CH 1–CH 8 ......... Input channel 1–8

MON 1–MON16. Monitor channel 1–16

RTN 1/RTN 2....... Return channel 1/2

• Events are automatically sorted in order of time from

the beginning of the song. Thus, the displayed order

of the events may change if you edit the TIME ﬁeld.

• The time (x.x) seconds shown for a fader event indi-

cates the time over which the fader moves (from the

location at which fader recording ended) back to its

original position, when recording was performed

with the FADER EDIT OUT “RET” button turned on.

(In normal operation, this will be recorded as 0.0

seconds. Alternatively, if the Fader Edit page FADER

EDIT OUT “RET” button is on, and a time has been

speciﬁed for the fader to return to its original posi-

tion, that time will be recorded.) To edit this value,

move the cursor to the event display area, and hold

down the [ENTER] key while you turn the [DATA/

JOG] dial.

C Event selection cursor

Move the cursor to this location and turn the

[DATA/JOG] dial to select the event that you want

to edit.

D SELECTED CH ONLY (Selected channel

only) button

If this button is on, the event list will display only

events of the channel selected by its [SEL] key.

E REMOTE button

If this button is on, REMOTE screen operations

([ON] key and fader operations) recorded in auto-

mix will be displayed as events. The type of events

that are displayed can be selected by the CH ON

button and FADER button in the event select but-

ton area (1).

When the REMOTE button is on, the EVENT/

CHANNEL column of the event list will display the

following contents.

• EVENT

ON/OFF .............. [ON] key on/off

00–7F .................. Fader position (hexadecimal

value corresponding to 0–

127)

• CHANNEL

A - 1–8 ................ Remote A page channels 1–8

B - 1–8 ................ Remote B page channels 1–8

C - 1–8 ................ Remote C page channels 1–8

D - 1–8................ Remote D page channels 1–8

• The REMOTE screen operations recorded in automix

consist only of the operations of the [ON] keys and

the faders. Automix does not record the MIDI mes-

sages that are transmitted. If, after recording [ON]

key and fader operations in the REMOTE screen, you

change the MIDI messages that are assigned to the

[ON] keys or faders, the new MIDI messages will be

used.

• When the REMOTE button (

) is on, the SELECTED

CH ONLY button (

), SCENE/LIB button, and PAN

button will have no effect.

F DUPLICATE button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the event selected in the

event list will be copied to the same location.

G DELETE button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the event selected in the

event list will be deleted.

AUTOMIX screen

346

Reference section

SCENE screen

Scene Mem page

Recall or store a scene

Function

The current settings of the AW2816 can

be stored into memory as a scene, and

a stored scene can be recalled.

Key operations

• [SCENE] key → [F1] (Scene Mem) key

• Repeatedly press the [SCENE] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A TITLE EDIT button

This button edits the name (scene name) of a

stored scene. Move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, and a TITLE EDIT popup

window will appear, allowing you to edit the

scene name.

It is not possible to edit the scene name of scene num-

ber 0, scene numbers for which PROTECTION is

turned on, or scene numbers in which no scene has

been stored (displayed as “No Data!”).

B RECALL button

This button recalls the scene that is currently

selected in the library list. This is the same function

as the [RECALL] key in the SCENE MEMORY sec-

tion.

Scene numbers in which no scene has been stored (dis-

played as “No Data!”) cannot be recalled.

Tip!

If the AUTO SCENE NAME DISPLAY button has been

turned on in the UTILITY screen/Prefer.1 page, the

scene name will be displayed for a time in the upper

right of the screen after the scene is recalled. (The

length of time that the name is displayed can be set by

the SCENE NAME DISPLAY TIME setting in the same

page.)

C STORE button

This button stores the current scene into the num-

ber selected in the library list. If you select a scene

number that has already been stored, executing

the Store operation will cause the previous scene

to be overwritten by the new scene. This is the

same function as the [STORE] key in the SCENE

MEMORY section.

The following parameters are stored as a scene.

• Mix parameters

- Fader positions of all channels (input channels

1–8, monitor channels 1–16, return channels

1/2, stereo output channel)

- Send levels sent from all channels to AUX

buses 1–6

- Bus (BUS 1–8, AUX buses 1–16) master levels

- [ON] key settings of all channels

- Attenuation settings of all channels

- Phase settings of all channels

- EQ settings of all channels

- Pan/balance settings of all channels

- Routing settings of all channels

- Fader group settings of all channels

- Mute group settings of all channels

- Pairing settings of all channels

- Dynamics processor settings of all channels

- Delay settings of all channels

347

Reference section

SCENE screen

• Effect parameters

- Parameter settings for effects 1/2

• Other

- Scene name

- Fader recall fade time

- Input/output patch and insert settings

It is not possible to store to scene number 0, or to a

scene for which memory protect has been turned on.

D Library list

This area lists the stored scenes. The line enclosed

by the dotted border is the scene currently

selected by the [DATA/JOG] dial, and the high-

lighted line is the last-recalled scene. The columns

of this list show the following information.

• NO...................... The scene number 0–96.

• LIBRARY TITLE .... The scene name. If no scene

has been stored, this will

indicate “No Data!”

• PRT...................... Recall-only scene are indi-

cated by the “” symbol,

and scene for which memory

protect has been set are indi-

cated by the “” symbol.

Tip!

In this page, you can turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to

select a scene regardless of where the cursor is

located. You can also use the [ ]/[ ] keys of the

SCENE MEMORY section to select a scene.

E PROTECTION

This button sets/cancels memory protection for the

currently selected scene. Scene numbers for which

memory protection has been set cannot be modi-

ﬁed by Store operations, nor can their scene name

be edited.

It is not possible to set memory protection for a scene

in which nothing has been stored.

F PROTECTION ON/OFF GLOBAL

Turn memory protect on/off for all scene numbers

1–50/51–96.

■ Additional functions in the Scene

Mem page

In the Scene Mem page you can press the [SHIFT] key

to assign the following functions to the [F1]–[F3] keys.

• [F1] (TITLE EDIT) key

Edits the name (scene name) of a stored scene.

This is the same function as the TITLE EDIT button

(1).

• [F2] (RECALL) key

Recalls the scene that is selected in the library list.

This is the same function as the RECALL button

(2) and the [RECALL] key of the SCENE MEMORY

section.

• [F3] (STORE) key

Stores the current scene. This is the same function

as the STORE button (3) and the [STORE] key of

the SCENE MEMORY section.

SCENE screen

348

Reference section

Fade Time page

Specify the fade time

Function

Specify the time over which the faders

will reach their new locations when a

scene is recalled.

Key operation

• [SCENE] key → [F2] (Fade Time) key

• Repeatedly press the [SCENE] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A FADE TIME SETTING

This speciﬁes the time over which the faders of

each channel will move to their new locations

(fade time) when a scene is recalled. The fade time

can be set in 0.1 second steps over a range of 0.0–

25.0 seconds. Fade time can be speciﬁed for the

following channels.

• Input channels 1–8

• Monitor channels 1–16

• Return channels 1/2

• Stereo output channel

• The fade time is memorized for each scene. After set-

ting the fade time, you must be sure to store the

scene.

• The fade time must be set for the recall destination

scene. Even if the fade time has been speciﬁed for

the current scene, there will be no effect if the set-

ting of the recalled scene is 0.0 seconds.

■ Additional functions in the Fade

Time page

In the Fade Time page you can press the [SHIFT] key

to assign the following additional function to the [F5]

key.

• [F5] (COPY TO ALL) key

Copy the fade time setting selected by the cursor

to all other channels.

349

Reference section

RCL. Safe page

Fader Recall Safe settings

Function

Exclude the faders of speciﬁc channels

from recall operations when a scene is

recalled.

Key operation

• [SCENE] key → [F3] (RCL. Safe) key

• Repeatedly press the [SCENE] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A RECALL SAFE CHANNEL

By turning on buttons in this area, you can set the

corresponding channels to Recall Safe. The faders

of channels set to Recall Safe will maintain their

current position even when a scene is recalled.

The following channels can be set to Fader Recall

Safe.

• Input channels 1–8

• Monitor channels 1–16

• Effect return channels 1/2

• Stereo output channel

Tip!

• Fader Recall Safe will take effect if the ENABLE area

button is set to “ENABLE.”

• Fader Recall Safe settings are common to all scenes.

• Recall Safe settings are not linked for paired chan-

nels. This means that if one channel of a pair is set to

Recall Safe, the faders of the pair may be in different

positions immediately after a scene is recalled. How-

ever even in this case, moving one of the faders will

cause the other fader to follow immediately.

• Only the fader of the channel will be excluded from

recall operations. Other mix parameters such as pan,

EQ, and dynamics processor settings will change

according to the scene that is recalled.

B ENABLE

Move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key to specify whether the Fader Recall

Safe function will be enabled (ENABLE) or not

(DISABLE).

1 2

SCENE screen

350

Reference section

Sort page

Change the order of scenes

Function

Here you can change the order of the

stored scenes. This is convenient when

you want to arrange scenes in the order

in which they will be recalled.

Key operation

• [SCENE] key → [F4] (Sort) key

• Repeatedly press the [SCENE] key

until the screen shown at the right

appears.

Screen functions

A SOURCE

The list in this area shows the current state of the

scene memories. To select the move source scene,

move the cursor to this area and turn the [DATA/

JOG] dial.

Scene number 0 cannot be moved.

Tip!

Scenes in which nothing has been stored (displayed as

“No Data!”) and memory-protected scenes can also be

selected as the move source scene.

B DESTINATION

In this area you can select the position to which

you want to move the scene that is selected as the

move source in the SOURCE list. Move the cursor

to this area, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to spec-

ify the destination (the row displayed as “INSER-

TION POINT”).

C EXECUTE button

When you move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key, the scene will be moved to

the speciﬁed position in the list. When the move is

executed, the lists in the SOURCE area (1) and

DESTINATION area (2) will be updated automati-

cally.

1 2

351

Reference section

METER screen

Meter 1 page

Monitor the input/output levels of tracks 1–16 (1)

Function

Here you can monitor the input/output

levels of tracks 1–16 and the output

level of the stereo output channel. In

this page you can also select recording

tracks and make input monitor settings.

Key operations

• [METER] key → [F1] (Meter 1)

• Repeatedly press the [METER] key

until the desired screen appears.

Screen functions

A WORD CLOCK

This indicates the word clock source (INTERNAL/

EXTERNAL) and sampling frequency (48k/44.1k)

on which the AW2816 is currently operating.

Immediately below this, the display will indicate

“LOCK” if the AW2816 is locked to the word

clock source, and “VARI” if vari-pitch (SETUP

screen/D.in Setup page) is enabled.

B BIT

This indicates the number of quantization bits (16/

24) of the current song.

C TEMPO

This displays the current tempo and time signa-

ture. The tempo and time signature (tempo map) of

the song can be speciﬁed in the SONG screen/

Tempo Map page.

D MTC

This indicates whether the AW2816 is currently set

as the MTC master (MASTER) or MTC slave

(SLAVE). The MTC master/slave setting is made in

the MIDI screen/MIDI Setup 1 page.

E Level meters

This area displays the input/output levels of tracks

1–16, and the output level of the stereo output

channel (L/R).

Tip!

• Whether the track 1–16 level meters will display

input or output levels will depend on the settings of

the INPUT MONITOR area (

), the state of the

READY buttons (

), and on the current running

mode.

• The stereo output channel level meters will always

display the post-fader output level.

• You can use the FINE button (

) to select one of two

ranges for the level meter display: –48 to 0 dB or –18

to 0 dB.

F READY buttons

These buttons set/cancel record-ready mode for

tracks 1–16, and have the same function as the

TRACK REC SELECT [1]–[16]/[ST] keys.

When the transport is stopped, you can move the

cursor to one of these buttons and press the

[ENTER] key to switch the button display between

“” and “ .” This indicates that the correspond-

ing track is in record-ready mode. If you then

begin recording, the button display will change to

“”.

G INPUT buttons

These buttons indicate the type of signal that can

be monitored for tracks 1–16. When the button is

displayed as “ ,” the track playback sound can be

monitored. When the button is displayed as “ ,”

the signal sent to the input of the track (the input

source) can be monitored. Which of these two sig-

nals will be monitored for each track will depend

on the settings of the INPUT MONITOR area (9),

1 2 3 4

METER screen

352

Reference section

the state of the REC TRACK SELECT [1]–[16] keys

and READY buttons (6), and on the current run-

ning mode.

Tip!

When the INDI. button of the INPUT MONITOR area

(

) is on, you can move the cursor to these buttons

and press the [ENTER] key to select for each track the

type of signal that will be monitored.

H MUTE buttons

These buttons indicate the mute on/off status of

tracks 1–16 as “” or “” symbols respectively.

You can move the cursor to this area and press the

[ENTER] key to switch muting on/off. Track mute

on/off settings do not affect the [ON] keys of the

monitor channels.

• On the AW2816, the number of tracks that can play

back simultaneously may be limited depending on

the number of tracks that are set to record-ready

mode. In this case, muting will forcibly be turned on

for tracks that cannot play back.

• If you want to defeat muting for a track that was

forcibly muted, you must ﬁrst mute another track. If

you attempt to defeat muting without increasing the

number of muted tracks, a message of “CANNOT

CHANGE MUTE” will appear, and the operation will

not occur.

• By pressing the [ALL SAFE] key, you can defeat

record-ready mode and muting for all tracks.

I INPUT MONITOR

Use the following three buttons to select the input

monitor mode (the way in which input monitoring

will be switched for each track).

• AUTO button

When this button is on, the monitored signal for

record-ready tracks will change automatically

depending on the running mode, as shown in the

following table (Auto Input Monitor). Use this

method for normal recording or for punch-in/out

recording.

• INDI. (Individual) button

When this button is on, the input monitor setting

can be changed for each track individually, regard-

less of the running mode or the record-ready state

(Individual Input Monitor). Move the cursor to an

INPUT button (7) and press the [ENTER] key to

switch the input monitor setting of the correspond-

ing track.

• ALL button

When this button is on, the input source will be

monitored for all tracks, regardless of the running

mode or the state of the REC TRACK SELECT [1]–

[16] keys (All Input Monitor).

When the AUTO button/ALL button are on, it will not

be possible to manually change the setting of the

INPUT buttons.

J FINE button

When this button is on, the level meter (5) display

range will switch from –48–0 dB to –18–0 dB. This

setting is convenient when you want to make

detailed level adjustments in the range near 0 dB.

Tip!

The FINE button setting affects only the level meters in

the Meter 1/Meter 2 pages.

K PEAK HOLD button

This button sets/cancels the peak hold function of

the level meters. When this button is turned on,

peak hold will be enabled, and a “” symbol

indicating the peak level will be maintained in the

level meter.

Tip!

The peak hold setting affects the level meters displayed

in pages other than the EQ/ATT/GRP screen and the

DYN/DLY screen.

■ Additional functions in the Meter 1

page

In the Meter 1 page, holding down the [SHIFT] key

will assign the following additional function to the

[F1] key.

• [F1] (PEAK HOLD) key

Sets/cancels peak hold. This is the same function

as the PEAK HOLD button (K).

Running mode Monitored signal

Stopped Track input source

Playing Track playback

Recording Track input source

Input monitor

Recorder section Mixer section

Track 1 Monitor channel 1

Track 2 Monitor channel 2

353

Reference section

Meter 2 page

Monitor the input/output levels of tracks 1–16 (2)

Function

As in the Meter 1 page, you can moni-

tor the input/output levels of tracks 1–

16 and the output level of the stereo

output channel. In this page you can

also select the counter display units

(time/time code/measures), and switch

between absolute time display (ABS) or

relative time display (REL).

Key operations

• [METER] key → [F2] (Meter 2)

• Repeatedly press the [METER] key

until the desired screen appears.

Screen functions

A Counter select

Use the following three buttons to select the

counter display units.

• SEC button

The counter will be displayed in time units (hours/

minutes/seconds/milliseconds).

• T.C button

The counter will be displayed in timecode units

(hours/minutes/seconds/frames/sub-frames).

• MES button

The counter will be displayed in measure units

(measures/beats/ticks).

Tip!

• These buttons are independent of the SECOND/

TIME/MEASURE buttons in the DISPLAY area of the

SONG screen/Setting page. You can select a display

method that is different than the counter displayed at

the top of the screen.

• When you switch the counter to Measure display, the

ABS/REL buttons (

) will be grayed. Even when the

ABS/REL buttons are grayed you will still be able to

switch them, but the measure display will not be

affected. However, since the start point and end

point displayed in the TRACK screen/Mark Adj. page

are always displayed in time code units, they will be

affected by the setting of the ABS/REL buttons.

B ABS/REL buttons

When time or time code are selected as the

counter display units, these buttons let you select

either absolute time or relative time. Absolute time

display is selected when the ABS button is on, and

relative time display is selected when the REL but-

ton is on.

Tip!

If you want to set a desired location of the song to be

“relative zero,” locate to the desired location, and then

hold down the [SET] key and press the [RTZ] key. The

REL button will automatically be turned on, and the

counter will switch to relative time display.

C Counter

This counter indicates the current location in the

song. This is the same function as the counter dis-

played in the top line of the screen.

D REMAIN (Remaining time)

This indicates the amount of time remaining for

recording (hours: minutes). This time will change

according to the number of tracks that are in

record-ready mode.

1 2 3 4

METER screen

354

Reference section

E Level meters

F READY buttons

G INPUT buttons

H MUTE buttons

I INPUT MONITOR

J FINE button

K PEAK HOLD button

These are the same functions as in the Meter 1 page.

For details refer to page 351 to 352.

■ Additional functions in the Meter 2

page

In the Meter 2 page, holding down the [SHIFT] key

will assign the following additional function to the

[F1] key.

• [F1] (PEAK HOLD) key

Sets/cancels peak hold. This is the same function

as the PEAK HOLD button (J).

355

Appendix

Preset EQ Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . 356

Preset Effects Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Effects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Dynamics Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Preset Dynamics Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Preset Dynamics Program Parameters . . . . 382

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Display message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Popup messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Speciﬁcations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

General Speciﬁcations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Mixer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Recorder section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Control I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

MIDI data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

MIDI Implementation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Block diagram

Appendix

Preset EQ Program Parameters

356

Appendix

Preset EQ Program Parameters

No Name

Parameter

Description

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

001 Bass Drum 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Emphasizes the low range

of the bass drum and the

attack created by the

beater.

Q 1.2 10 0.9

F 99Hz 265Hz 1.05kHz 5.33kHz

G +3.5dB –3.5dB 0.0dB +4.0dB

002 Bass Drum 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF Creates a peak around

80Hz, producing a tight,

stiff sound.

Q 1.4 4.5 2.2

F 79Hz 397Hz 2.52kHz 12.6kHz

G +8.0dB –7.0dB +6.0dB ON

003 Snare Drum 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Emphasizes snapping

and rimshot sounds.

Q 1.2 4.5 0.11

F 132Hz 1.00kHz 3.17kHz 5.04kHz

G –0.5dB 0.0dB +3.0dB +4.5dB

004 Snare Drum 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Emphasizes the ranges of

that classic rock snare

drum sound.

Q 10 0.7 0.1

F 177Hz 334Hz 2.37kHz 4.00kHz

G +1.5dB –8.5dB +2.5dB +4.0dB

005 Tom-tom 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Emphasizes the attack of

tom-toms, and creates a

long, “leathery” decay.

Q 1.4 10 1.2 0.28

F 210Hz 667Hz 4.49kHz 6.35kHz

G +2.0dB –7.5dB +2.0dB +1.0dB

006 Cymbal

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Emphasizes the attack of

crash cymbals, extending

the “sparkling” decay.

Q 8 0.9

F 105Hz 420Hz 1.05kHz 13.4kHz

G –2.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB +3.0dB

007 High Hat

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Use on a tight high-hat,

emphasizing the mid to

high range.

Q 0.5 1

F 94Hz 420Hz 2.82kHz 7.55kHz

G –4.0dB –2.5dB +1.0dB +0.5dB

008 Percussion

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Emphasizes the attack

and clarifies the high-

range of instruments,

such as shakers,

cabasas, and congas.

Q 4.5 0.56

F 99Hz 397Hz 2.82kHz 16.9kHz

G –4.5dB 0.0dB +2.0dB 0.0dB

009 E.Bass 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Makes a tight electric bass

sound by cutting very low

frequencies.

Q 5 4.5

F 35Hz 111Hz 2.00kHz 4.00kHz

G –7.5dB +4.5dB +2.5dB 0.0dB

010 E.Bass 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Unlike program 009, this

emphasizes the low range

of the electric bass.

Q 0.1 5 6.3

F 111Hz 111Hz 2.24kHz 4.00kHz

G +3.0dB 0.0dB +2.5dB +0.5dB

011 Syn.Bass 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Use on a synth bass with

emphasized low range.

Q 0.1 8 4.5

F 83Hz 944Hz 4.00kHz 12.6kHz

G +3.5dB +8.5dB 0.0dB 0.0dB

357

Appendix

012 Syn.Bass 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Emphasizes the attack

that is peculiar to a synth

bass.

Q 1.6 8 2.2

F 125Hz 177Hz 1.12kHz 12.6kHz

G +2.5dB 0.0dB +1.5dB 0.0dB

013 Piano 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF This is used to make a

piano sound brighter.

Q 8 0.9

F 94Hz 944Hz 3.17kHz 7.55kHz

G –6.0dB 0.0dB +2.0dB +4.0dB

014 Piano 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Emphasize the attack and

low range of the piano

sound by using a

compressor.

Q 5.6 10 0.7

F 223Hz 595Hz 3.17kHz 5.33kHz

G +3.5dB –8.5dB +1.5dB +3.0dB

015 E.G.Clean

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Use for line-recording an

electric guitar or semi-

acoustic guitar to get a

slightly hard sound.

Q 0.18 10 6.3

F 265Hz 397Hz 1.33kHz 4.49kHz

G +2.0dB –5.5dB +0.5dB +2.5dB

016 E.G.Crunch 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Adjusts the tonal quality of

a slightly distorted guitar

sound.

Q 8 4.5 0.63 9

F 140Hz 1.00kHz 1.88kHz 5.65kHz

G +4.5dB 0.0dB +4.0dB +2.0dB

017 E.G.Crunch 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF This is a variation on

program 016.

Q 8 0.4 0.16

F 125Hz 445Hz 3.36kHz 19.0kHz

G +2.5dB +1.5dB +2.5dB 0.0dB

018 E.G.Distortion 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Makes a heavily distorted

guitar sound clearer.

Q 910

F 354Hz 944Hz 3.36kHz 12.6kHz

G +5.0dB 0.0dB +3.5dB 0.0dB

019 E.G.Distortion 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF This is a variation on

program 018.

Q 10 4

F 315Hz 1.05kHz 4.23kHz 12.6kHz

G +6.0dB –8.5dB +4.5dB +4.0dB

020 A.G.Stroke 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Emphasizes the bright

tones of an acoustic

guitar.

Q 0.9 4.5 3.5

F 105Hz 1.00kHz 1.88kHz 5.33kHz

G –2.0dB 0.0dB +1.0dB +4.0dB

021 A.G.Stroke 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF This is a variation on

program 020. You can

also use it for the electric

gut guitar.

Q 9 4.5

F 297Hz 749Hz 2.00kHz 3.56kHz

G –3.5dB –2.0dB 0.0dB +2.0dB

022 A.G.Arpeggio 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Corrects arpeggio

technique of an acoustic

guitar.

Q 4.5 4.5 0.12

F 223Hz 1.00kHz 4.00kHz 6.72kHz

G –0.5dB 0.0dB 0.0dB +2.0dB

No Name

Parameter

Description

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

Preset EQ Program Parameters

358

Appendix

023 A.G.Arpeggio 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF This is a variation on

program 022.

Q 7 4.5

F 177Hz 354Hz 4.00kHz 4.23kHz

G 0.0dB –5.5dB 0.0dB +4.0dB

024 Brass Section

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Use with trumpets,

trombones, or sax. With

one instrument, adjust the

HIGH or H-MID

frequency.

Q 2.8 2 0.7 7

F 88Hz 841Hz 2.11kHz 4.49kHz

G –2.0dB +1.0dB +1.5dB +3.0dB

025 Male Vocal 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Use as a template for

male vocal. Adjust the

HIGH or H-MID setting

according to the voice

quality.

Q 0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11

F 187Hz 1.00kHz 2.00kHz 6.72kHz

G –0.5dB 0.0dB +2.0dB +3.5dB

026 Male Vocal 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF This is a variation on

program 025.

Q 0.11 10 5.6

F 167Hz 236Hz 2.67kHz 6.72kHz

G +2.0dB –5.0dB +2.5dB +4.0dB

027 Female Vocal 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Use as a template for

female vocal. Adjust the

HIGH or H-MID setting

according to the voice

quality.

Q 0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14

F 118Hz 397Hz 2.67kHz 5.99kHz

G –1.0dB +1.0dB +1.5dB +2.0dB

028 Female Vocal 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF This is a variation on

program 027.

Q 0.16 0.2

F 111Hz 334Hz 2.00kHz 6.72kHz

G –7.0dB +1.5dB +1.5dB +2.5dB

029 Chorus & Harmony

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Use as a template for a

chorus. It makes the entire

chorus much brighter.

Q 2.8 2 0.7 7

F 88Hz 841Hz 2.11kHz 4.49kHz

G –2.0dB +1.0dB +1.5dB +3.0dB

030 Total EQ 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Use on the STEREO bus

during mixdown. For more

effect, try it with a

compressor.

Q 7 2.2 5.6

F 94Hz 944Hz 2.11kHz 16.0kHz

G –0.5dB 0.0dB +3.0dB +6.5dB

031 Total EQ 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF This is a variation on

program 030.

Q 7 2.8 5.6

F 94Hz 749Hz 1.78kHz 17.9kHz

G +4.0dB +1.5dB +2.0dB +6.0dB

032 Total EQ 3

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF This is a variation on

program 030. Also use

these programs for stereo

inputs or external effect

returns.

Q 0.28 0.7

F 66Hz 841Hz 1.88kHz 15.1kHz

G +1.5dB +0.5dB +2.0dB +4.0dB

033 Bass Drum 3

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING This is a variation on

program 001. The low and

mid range is removed.

Q 2 10 0.4 0.4

F 118Hz 315Hz 4.23kHz 20.1kHz

G +3.5dB –10.0dB +3.5dB 0.0dB

No Name

Parameter

Description

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

359

Appendix

Note

The EQ programs were programmed for recording

acoustic musical instruments. If you are using them for

a sampler, synthesizer, or rhythm machine, adjust the

parameters accordingly.

034 Snare Drum 3

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING This is a variation on

program 003. It creates

rather thick sound.

Q 4.5 2.8 0.1

F 223Hz 561Hz 4.23kHz 4.00kHz

G 0.0dB +2.0dB +3.5dB 0.0dB

035 Tom-tom 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF This is a variation on

program 005. Emphasizes

the mid and high range.

Q 4.5 1.2

F 88Hz 210Hz 5.33kHz 16.9kHz

G –9.0dB +1.5dB +2.0dB 0.0dB

036 Piano 3

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF This is a variation on

program 013.

Q 8109

F 99Hz 472Hz 2.37kHz 10.0kHz

G +4.5dB –13.0dB +4.5dB +2.5dB

037 Piano Low

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Use for the low range of

the piano sound when it is

recorded in stereo. Use

with program 038.

Q 10 6.3 2.2

F 187Hz 397Hz 6.72kHz 12.6kHz

G –5.5dB +1.5dB +6.0dB 0.0dB

038 Piano High

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Use for the high range of

the piano sound when it is

recorded in stereo. Use

with program 037.

Q 10 6.3 2.2 0.1

F 187Hz 397Hz 6.72kHz 5.65kHz

G –5.5dB +1.5dB +5.0dB +3.0dB

039 Fine-EQ(Cass)

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Use for recording to or

from cassette tape to

make the sound clearer.

Q 4.5 1.8

F 74Hz 1.00kHz 4.00kHz 12.6kHz

G –1.5dB 0.0dB +1.0dB +3.0dB

040 Narrator

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF Use for recording a voice

reading a text.

Q 4 7 0.63

F 105Hz 707Hz 2.52kHz 10.0kHz

G –4.0dB –1.0dB +2.0dB 0.0dB

No Name

Parameter

Description

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

Preset Effects Programs

360

Appendix

Preset Effects Programs

The following table lists the preset effects programs. See “Effects Parame-

ters” on page 362 for detailed parameter information. Effects programs that

use the HQ. PITCH effect can be used only with Effect 2.

Reverb-type Effects

Delays

Modulation-type Effects

# Title Type Description

Reverb Hall REVERB HALL Reverb simulating a large space such as a concert hall.

Reverb Room REVERB ROOM

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a smaller space (room) than REVERB

HALL.

Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE Reverb designed with vocals in mind.

Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE

Simulation of a metal-plate reverb unit, producing a feeling of hard-

edged reverberation.

Early Ref. EARLY REF.

An effect which isolates only the early reﬂection (ER) component from

reverberation. A ﬂashier effect than reverb is produced.

Gate Reverb GATE REVERB A type of ER designed for use as gated reverb.

Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE A reverse-playback type ER.

# Title Type Description

Mono Delay MONO DELAY

Mono delay with simple operation. Use when you don't need to use

complex parameter settings.

Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Stereo delay with independent left and right.

Mod.delay MOD.DELAY Mono delay with modulation.

Delay LCR DELAY LCR Three-tap delay (L, C, R).

Echo ECHO

Stereo delay with additional parameters for more detailed control. The

signal can be fed back from left to right, and right to left.

# Title Type Description

Chorus CHORUS Three-phase stereo chorus.

Flange FLANGE The well-known ﬂanging effect.

Symphonic SYMPHONIC

A Yamaha proprietary effect that produces a richer and more complex

modulation than chorus.

Phaser PHASER Stereo phaser with 2–16 stages of phase shift.

Auto Pan AUTO PAN An effect which cyclically moves the sound between left and right.

Tremolo TREMOLO Tremolo

HQ.Pitch

HQ.PITCH

(Effect 2 only)

Only one note is pitch-shifted, but a stable effect is produced.

Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shift with left and right pitches set independently.

Rotary ROTARY Simulation of a rotary speaker.

Ring Mod. RING MOD.

An effect that modiﬁes the pitch by applying amplitude modulation to

the frequency of the input. On the AW2816, even the modulation fre-

quency can be controlled by modulation.

Mod.Filter MOD.FILTER An effect which uses an LFO to modulate the frequency of the ﬁlter.

361

Appendix

Distortion-type Effects

Dynamic Effects

Combined Effects

Other Effects

# Title Type Description

Distortion DISTORTION Distortion

Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar Amp Simulator

# Title Type Description

Dyna.Filter DYNA.FILTER

Dynamically controlled ﬁlter. Responds to MIDI Note On velocity

when SOURCE set to MIDI.

Dyna.Flange DYNA.FLANGE

Dynamically controlled ﬂanger. Responds to MIDI Note On velocity

when SOURCE set to MIDI.

Dyna.Phaser DYNA.PHASER

Dynamically controlled phase shifter. Responds to MIDI Note On

velocity when SOURCE set to MIDI.

# Title Type Description

Rev+Chorus REV+CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel

Rev->Chorus REV->CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series

Rev+Flange REV+FLANGE Reverb and ﬂanger in parallel

Rev->Flange REV->FLANGE Reverb and ﬂanger in series

Rev+Sympho. REV+SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in parallel

Rev->Sympho. REV->SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in series

Rev->Pan REV->PAN Reverb and auto-pan in parallel

Delay+ER. DELAY+ER. Delay and early reﬂections in parallel

Delay->ER. DELAY->ER. Delay and early reﬂections in series

Delay+Rev DELAY+REV Delay and reverb in parallel

Delay->Rev DELAY->REV Delay and reverb in series

Dist->Delay DIST->DELAY Distortion and delay in series

# Title Type Description

Multi.Filter MULTI.FILTER Three-band parallel ﬁlter (24 dB/octave).

Effects Parameters

362

Appendix

Effects Parameters

REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE

Hall, room, stage, and plate simulations, all with gates.

EARLY REF.

Early reﬂections.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO.RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

E/R DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Delay between early reﬂections and reverb

E/R BAL. 0–100% Balance of early reﬂections and reverb (0% = ER, 100% = reverb)

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

GATE LVL OFF, –60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in

ATTACK 0–120 ms Gate opening speed

HOLD

*1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz)

Gate open time

DECAY

*2. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Gate closing speed

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,

Reverse, Plate, Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

363

Appendix

GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE

Early reﬂections with gate, and early reﬂections with reverse gate.

MONO DELAY

Basic repeat delay.

STEREO DELAY

Basic stereo delay.

Parameter Range Description

TYPE Type-A, Type-B Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

DELAY 0.0–2730.0 ms Delay time

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values

for reverse-phase feedback)

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time

FB.G L –99 to +99%

Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB.G R –99 to +99%

Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Effects Parameters

364

Appendix

MOD.DELAY

Basic repeat delay with modulation.

DELAY LCR

Three-tap delay (left, center, right).

ECHO

Stereo delay with crossed feedback loop.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values

for reverse-phase feedback)

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–2730.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY C 0.0–2730.0 ms Center channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–2730.0 ms Right channel delay time

LEVEL L –100 to +100% Left channel delay level

LEVEL C –100 to +100% Center channel delay level

LEVEL R –100 to +100% Right channel delay level

FB.DLY 0.0–2730.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values

for reverse-phase feedback)

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time

FB.DLY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time

FB.G L –99 to +99%

Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB.DLY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel feedback delay time

FB.G R –99 to +99%

Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

L->R FBG –99 to +99%

Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

R->L FBG –99 to +99%

Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

365

Appendix

CHORUS

Chorus effect.

FLANGE

Flange effect.

SYMPHONIC

Symphonic efect.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

PM DEP. 0–100% Pitch modulation depth

AM DEP. 0–100% Amp modulation depth

MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2–8.00 k [Hz] Low-shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12 to +12 [dB] Low-shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100–8.00 k [Hz] Parametric equalizer center frequency

EQ G –12 to +12 [dB] Parametric equalizer gain

EQ Q 10–0.10 Parametric equalizer band width

HSH F 50.0–16.0 k [Hz] High-shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12 to +12 [dB] High-shelving ﬁlter gain

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values

for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2–8.00 k [Hz] Low-shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12 to +12 [dB] Low-shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100–8.00 k [Hz] Parametric equalizer center frequency

EQ G –12 to +12 [dB] Parametric equalizer gain

EQ Q 10–0.10 Parametric equalizer band width

HSH F 50.0–16.0 k [Hz] High-shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12 to +12 [dB] High-shelving ﬁlter gain

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2–8.00 k [Hz] Low-shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12 to +12 [dB] Low-shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100–8.00 k [Hz] Parametric equalizer center frequency

EQ G –12 to +12 [dB] Parametric equalizer gain

EQ Q 10–0.10 Parametric equalizer band width

HSH F 50.0–16.0 k [Hz] High-shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12 to +12 [dB] High-shelving ﬁlter gain

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Effects Parameters

366

Appendix

PHASER

16-stage phaser.

AUTOPAN

Auto-panner.

TREMOLO

Tremolo effect.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values

for reverse-phase feedback)

OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset

STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages

LSH F 21.2–8.00 k [Hz] Low-shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12 to +12 [dB] Low-shelving ﬁlter gain

HSH F 50.0–16.0 k [Hz] High-shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12 to +12 [dB] High-shelving ﬁlter gain

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

DIR.

*1. L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L, Turn R

Panning direction

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2–8.00 k [Hz] Low-shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12 to +12 [dB] Low-shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100–8.00 k [Hz] Parametric equalizer center frequency

EQ G –12 to +12 [dB] Parametric equalizer gain

EQ Q 10–0.10 Parametric equalizer band width

HSH F 50.0–16.0 k [Hz] High-shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12 to +12 [dB] High-shelving ﬁlter gain

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2–8.00 k [Hz] Low-shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12 to +12 [dB] Low-shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100–8.00 k [Hz] Parametric equalizer center frequency

EQ G –12 to +12 [dB] Parametric equalizer gain

EQ Q 10–0.10 Parametric equalizer band width

HSH F 50.0–16.0 k [Hz] High-shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12 to +12 [dB] High-shelving ﬁlter gain

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

367

Appendix

HQ.PITCH (Effect 2 only)

High-quality pitch shifter.

DUAL PITCH

Twin-voice pitch shifter.

ROTARY

Rotary speaker simulator.

Parameter Range Description

PITCH –12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift

FINE –50 to +50 cents Pitch shift ﬁne

DELAY 0.0–1000.0 ms Delay time

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values

for reverse-phase feedback)

MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

PITCH 1 –24 to +24 semitones Channel 1 pitch shift

FINE 1 –50 to +50 cents Channel 1 pitch shift ﬁne

PAN 1 L16–1, C, R1–16 Channel 1 panpot

DELAY 1 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel 1 delay time

FB.G 1 –99 to +99%

Channel 1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

LEVEL 1 –100 to +100%

Channel 1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for

reverse phase)

PITCH 2 –24 to +24 semitones Channel 2 pitch shift

FINE 2 –50 to +50 cents Channel 2 pitch shift ﬁne

PAN 2 L16–1, C, R1–16 Channel 2 panpot

DELAY 2 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel 2 delay time

FB.G 2 –99 to +99%

Channel 2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

LEVEL 2 –100 to +100%

Channel 2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for

reverse phase)

MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

ROTATE STOP, START Rotation stop, start

SPEED SLOW, FAST Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters)

DRIVE 0–100 Overdrive level

ACCEL 0–10 Accelation at speed changes

LOW 0–100 Low-frequency ﬁlter

HIGH 0–100 High-frequency ﬁlter

SLOW 0.05–10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed

FAST 0.05–10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Effects Parameters

368

Appendix

RING MOD.

Ring modulator.

MOD.FILTER

LFO modulation-type ﬁlter.

DISTORTION

Distortion effect.

AMP SIMULATE

Guitar Amp Simulator.

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE OSC, SELF Modulation source: oscillator or input signal

OSC FREQ 0.0–5000.0 Hz Oscillator frequency

FM FREQ 0.05–40.00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed

FM DEPTH 0–100% Oscillator frequency modulation depth

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass

OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset

RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance

PHASE 0.00–354.38°

Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase differ-

ence

LEVEL 0–100 Output level

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,

OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0–100 Master volume

TONE –10 to +10 Tone

N.GATE 0–20 Noise reduction

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

AMP TYPE

*1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT

Guitar amp simulation type

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,

OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

N.GATE 0–20 Noise reduction

DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0–100 Master volume

CAB DEP 0–100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth

BASS 0–100 Bass tone control

MIDDLE 0–100 Middle tone control

TREBLE 0–100 High tone control

EQ F 99–8.0 kHz Parametric equalizer frequency

EQ G –12 to +12 dB Parametric equalizer gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 Parametric equalizer bandwidth

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

369

Appendix

DYNA.FILTER

Dynamically controlled ﬁlter.

DYNA.FLANGE

Dynamically controlled ﬂanger.

DYNA.PHASER

Dynamically controlled phaser.

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI note on velocity

SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity

TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type

OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset

RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance

DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

DECAY

*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Filter frequency change decay speed

LEVEL 0–100 Output Level

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI note on velocity

SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values

for reverse-phase feedback)

OFFSET 0–100 Delay time offset

DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

DECAY

*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Decay speed

LSH F 21.2–8.00 k [Hz] Low-shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12 to +12 [dB] Low-shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100–8.00 k [Hz] Parametric equalizer center frequency

EQ G –12 to +12 [dB] Parametric equalizer gain

EQ Q 10–0.10 Parametric equalizer band width

HSH F 50.0–16.0 k [Hz] High-shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12 to +12 [dB] High-shelving ﬁlter gain

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI note on velocity

SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values

for reverse-phase feedback)

OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset

STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages

DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

DECAY

*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48kHz)

Decay speed

LSH F 21.2–8.00 k [Hz] Low-shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12 to +12 [dB] Low-shelving ﬁlter gain

HSH F 50.0–16.0 k [Hz] High-shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12 to +12 [dB] High-shelving ﬁlter gain

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Effects Parameters

370

Appendix

REV+CHORUS

Reverb and chorus effects in parallel.

REV->CHORUS

Reverb and chorus effects in series.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time

INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

PM DEP. 0–100% Pitch modulation depth

AM DEP. 0–100% Amp modulation depth

MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

REV/CHO 0–100% Reverb and chorus balance (0% = chorus, 100% = reverb)

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time

INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

PM DEP. 0–100% Pitch modulation depth

AM DEP. 0–100% Amp modulation depth

MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

REV.BAL 0–100%

Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = chorused reverb, 100% =

reverb)

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

371

Appendix

REV+FLANGE

Reverb and ﬂanger effects in parallel.

REV->FLANGE

Reverb and ﬂanger effects in series.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time

INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values

for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

REV/FLG 0–100% Reverb and ﬂange balance (0% = ﬂange, 100% = reverb)

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time

INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values

for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

REV.BAL 0–100%

Reverb and ﬂanged reverb balance (0% = ﬂanged reverb, 100% =

reverb)

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Effects Parameters

372

Appendix

REV+SYMPHO.

Reverb and symphonic effects in parallel.

REV->SYMPHO.

Reverb and symphonic effects in series.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time

INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

REV/SYM 0–100% Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = symphonic, 100% = reverb)

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time

INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

REV.BAL 0–100%

Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = symphonic reverb,

100% = reverb)

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

373

Appendix

REV->PAN

Reverb and auto-pan effects in parallel.

DELAY+ER.

Delay and early reﬂections effects in parallel.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time

INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

DIR.

*1. L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L, Turn R

Panning direction

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

REV BAL. 0–100%

Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = panned reverb, 100% =

reverb)

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB.DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values

for reverse-phase feedback)

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,

Revers, Plate, Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY/ER 0–100%

Delay and early reﬂections balance (0% = early reﬂections, 100% =

delay)

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Effects Parameters

374

Appendix

DELAY->ER.

Delay and early reﬂections effects in series.

DELAY+REV

Delay and reverb effects in parallel.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB.DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values

for reverse-phase feedback)

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,

Revers, Plate, Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY.BAL 0–100%

Delay and early reﬂected delay balance (0% = early reﬂected delay,

100% = delay)

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB.DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values

for reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio

REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time

INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY/REV 0–100% Delay and reverb balance (0% = reverb, 100% = delay)

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

375

Appendix

DELAY->REV

Delay and reverb effects in series.

DIST->DELAY

Distortion and delay effects in series.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB.DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values

for reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio

REV TIME 0.3–99.9 s Reverb time

INI.DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spreed)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF Thru, 21.2 Hz–8.0 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50 Hz–16.0 kHz, Thru Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY.BAL 0–100%

Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = delayed reverb, 100% =

delay)

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

Parameter Range Description

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,

OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0–100 Master volume

TONE –10 to +10 Tone control

N.GATE 0–20 Noise reduction

DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values

for reverse-phase feedback)

HI.RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

DLY BAL 0–100%

Distortion and delay balance (0% = distortion, 100% = delayed dis-

tortion)

Effects Parameters

376

Appendix

MULTI FILTER

Three-band parallel ﬁlter (24 dB/octave)

Parameter Range Description

TYPE 1 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 1 type: low pass, high pass, band pass

TYPE 2 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 2 type: low pass, high pass, band pass

TYPE 3 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 3 type: low pass, high pass, band pass

FREQ. 1 28 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency

FREQ. 2 28 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency

FREQ. 3 28 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency

LEVEL 1 0–100 Filter 1 level

LEVEL 2 0–100 Filter 2 level

LEVEL 3 0–100 Filter 3 level

RESO. 1 0–20 Filter 1 resonance

RESO. 2 0–20 Filter 2 resonance

RESO. 3 0–20 Filter 3 resonance

MIX BAL. 0–100 [%] Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds

377

Appendix

Dynamics Processors

Dynamics processors are generally used to correct or control signal levels.

However, you can also use them creatively to shape the volume envelope

of a sound. The AW2816 features comprehensive dynamics processors for

all the input channels, tape returns, and the bus and stereo outputs. These

processors allow you to compress, expand, compress-expand (compand),

gate, or duck the signals passing through the mixer, giving you unparal-

leled sonic quality and ﬂexibility.

Preset Dynamics Programs

These are the preset dynamics programs.

No Program Name No Program Name

001 A.Dr.BD "CMP 021 BrassSection "CMP

002 A.Dr.BD "EXP 022 Syn.Pad "CMP

003 A.Dr.BD "GAT 023 SamplingPerc "CPS

004 A.Dr.BD "CPH 024 Sampling BD "CMP

005 A.Dr.SN "CMP 025 Sampling SN "CMP

006 A.Dr.SN "EXP 026 Hip Comp "CPS

007 A.Dr.SN "GAT 027 Solo Vocal1 "CMP

008 A.Dr.SN "CPS 028 Solo Vocal2 "CMP

009 A.Dr.Tom "EXP 029 Chorus "CMP

010 A.Dr.OverTop "CPS 030 Compander(H) "CPH

011 E.B.finger "CMP 031 Compander(S) "CPS

012 E.B.slap "CMP 032 Click Erase "EXP

013 Syn.Bass "CMP 033 Announcer "CPH

014 Piano1 "CMP 034 Easy Gate "GAT

015 Piano2 "CMP 035 BGM Ducking "DUK

016 E.Guitar "CMP 036 Limiter1 "CPS

017 A.Guitar "CMP 037 Limiter2 "CMP

018 Strings1 "CMP 038 Total Comp1 "CMP

019 Strings2 "CMP 039 Total Comp2 "CMP

020 Strings3 "CMP 040 Total Comp3 "CMP

Dynamics Processors

378

Appendix

Compressor

A compressor provides a form of automatic level control. By attenuating high

levels, thus effectively reducing the dynamic range, the compressor makes it

much easier to control signals and set appropriate fader levels. Reducing the

dynamic range also means that recording levels can be set higher, therefore

improving the signal-to-noise performance.

Compressor (CMP) parameters:

Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compres-

sor. Signals at a level below the threshold pass through unaffected. Signals at

and above the threshold level are compressed by the amount speciﬁed using

the Ratio parameter. The trigger signal is determined using the KEY IN parame-

ter.

Ratio controls the amount of compression—the change in output signal level

relative to change in input signal level. With a 2:1 ratio, for example, a 10 dB

change in input level (above the threshold) results in a 5 dB change in output

level. For a 5:1 ratio, a 10 dB change in input level (above the threshold) results

in a 2 dB change in output level.

Attack controls how soon the signal is compressed once the compressor has

been triggered. With a fast attack time, the signal is compressed almost immedi-

ately. With a slow attack time, the initial transient of a sound passes through

unaffected.

Out Gain sets the compressor’s output signal level. Compression tends to

reduce the average signal level. Out Gain can be used to counter this level

reduction and set an appropriate level for the next stage in the audio path.

Knee sets the transition of the signal at the threshold. With a hard knee, the tran-

sition between uncompressed and compressed signal is immediate. With the

softest knee, knee5, the transition starts before the signal reaches the threshold

and gradually ends above the threshold.

Release determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once

the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. If the release time is too short,

the gain will recover too quickly causing level pumping—noticeable gain ﬂuc-

tuations. If it is set too long, the compressor may not have time to recover before

the next high level signal appears, and it will be compressed incorrectly.

Parameter Value

Threshold (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points)

Ratio 1.0, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 8.0,

10, 20, ∞ (16 points)

Attack (ms) 0 to 120 (121 points)

Outgain (dB) 0 to +18 (36 points)

Knee hard,1,2,3,4,5 (6 points)

Release (ms) 5 ms to 42.3 sec

, 6 ms to 46.0 sec

, 8 ms to 63.4 sec

(160 points)

*1. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 48 kHz.

*2. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz.

*3. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz

-70

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

+10

+20

-70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20

Input Level

Output Level

Knee = hard

Threshold = -20dB

Compression ratio = 2:1

379

Appendix

Expander

An expander is another form of automatic level control. By attenuating the sig-

nal below the threshold, the expander reduces low-level noise and effectively

increases the dynamic range of the recorded material.

Expander (EXP) parameters:

Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander.

Signals above the threshold pass through unaffected. Signals at and below the

threshold level are attenuated by the amount speciﬁed using the Ratio parame-

ter. The trigger signal is determined using the KEY IN parameter.

Ratio controls the amount of expansion—the change in output signal level rela-

tive to change in input signal level. With a 1:2 ratio, for example, a 5 dB change

in input level (below the threshold) results in a 10 dB change in output level.

For a 1:5 ratio, a 2 dB change in input level (below the threshold) results in a

10 dB change in output level.

Attack controls how soon the signal is expanded once the expander has been

triggered. With a fast attack time, the signal is expanded almost immediately.

With a slow attack time, the initial transient of a sound passes through unaf-

fected.

Out Gain sets the expander’s output signal level.

Knee sets the transition of the signal at the threshold. With a hard knee, the tran-

sition between unexpanded and expanded signal is immediate. With the softest

knee, knee5, the transition starts before the signal reaches the threshold and

gradually ends above the threshold.

Release determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the

trigger signal level drops below the threshold.

Parameter Value

Threshold (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points)

Ratio 1.0, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 8.0,

10, 20, ∞ (16 points)

Attack (ms) 0 to 120 (121 points)

Outgain (dB) 0 to +18 (36 points)

Knee hard,1,2,3,4,5 (6 points)

Release (ms) 5 ms to 42.3 sec

, 6 ms to 46.0 sec

, 8 ms to 63.4 sec

(160 points)

*1. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 48kHz.

*2. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz.

*3. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz

-70

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

+10

+20

-70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20

Input Level

Output Level

Threshold = -10dB

Knee = hard

Expansion ratio = 2:1

-70

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

+10

+20

-70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20

Input Level

Output Level

Threshold = -20dB

Knee = knee5

Expansion ratio = 2:1

Dynamics Processors

380

Appendix

Compander

A compander is a compressor-expander—a combination of signal compression

and expansion. The compander attenuates the input signal above the threshold

as well as the level below the width. For very dynamic material, this program

allows you to retain the dynamic range without having to be concerned with

excessive output signal levels and clipping.

CompanderH (CPH) and CompanderS (CPS) parameters:

Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the com-

pander. Signals above the threshold pass through unaffected. Signals at and

below the threshold level are attenuated by the amount speciﬁed using the

Ratio parameter. The trigger signal is determined using the KEY IN parameter.

Ratio controls the amount of companding—the change in output signal level

relative to change in input signal level. With a 2:1 ratio, for example, a 10 dB

change in input level (above the threshold) results in a 5 dB change in output

level. The hard compander (CPH) has a ﬁxed ratio of 5:1 for expansion and the

soft compander (CPS) has a ﬁxed ratio of 1.5:1 for expansion.

Attack controls how soon the signal is companded once the compander has

been triggered. With a fast attack time, the signal is companded almost immedi-

ately. With a slow attack time, the initial transient of a sound passes through

unaffected.

Out Gain sets the compander’s output signal level.

Width is used to determine the distance, in decibels, between the expander and

the compressor. With a width of 90 dB, the expander is effectively switched off

and the compander is simply a compressor-limiter. With a smaller width (30dB)

and a high threshold (0dB), the compander is an expander-compressor-limiter.

Release determines how soon the compander returns to its normal gain once

the trigger signal level drops below the threshold.

Parameter Value

Threshold (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points)

Ratio 1.0, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 8.0,

10, 20 (15 points)

Attack (ms) 0 to 120 (121 points)

Outgain (dB) –18 to 0 (36 points)

Width (dB) 1 to 90 (90 points)

Release (ms) 5 ms to 42.3 sec

, 6 ms to 46.0 sec

, 8 ms to 63.4 sec

(160 points)

*1. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 48kHz.

*2. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz.

*3. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz

-70

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

+10

+20

-70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20

Input Level

Output Level

Threshold

Width

381

Appendix

Gate and Ducking

A gate, or noise gate is an audio switch used to mute signals below a set thresh-

old level. It can be used to suppress background noise and hiss from valve

(tube) amps, effects pedals, and microphones.

Ducking is used to automatically reduce the levels of one signal when the level

of a source signal exceeds a speciﬁed threshold. It is used for voice-over appli-

cations where, for example, level of background music is automatically

reduced, allowing an announcer to be heard clearly.

Gate (GAT) and Ducking (DUK) parameters:

Threshold sets the level at which the gate closes, cutting off the signal. Signals

above the threshold level pass through unaffected. Signals at or below the

threshold cause the gate to close.

For ducking, trigger signal levels at and above the threshold level activate duck-

ing, and the signal level is reduced to a level set by the Range parameter.

The trigger signal is determined using the KEY IN parameter.

Range controls the level to which the gate closes. It can be used to reduce the

signal level rather than cut it completely. At a setting of –70 dB, the gate closes

completely when the input signal falls below the threshold. At a setting of –

30 dB, the gate only closes so far allowing an attenuated signal through. At a

setting of 0 dB, the gate has no effect. When signals are gated abruptly, the sud-

den cutoff can sound odd.

For ducking, a setting of –70 dB causes the signal to be virtually cutoff. At a set-

ting of –30 dB the signal is ducked by 30 dB. At a setting of 0 dB, the duck has

no effect.

Attack determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the thresh-

old level. Slow attack times can be used to remove the initial transient edge of

percussive sounds. Too slow an attack time makes some signals sound back-

wards.

For ducking, this controls how soon the signal is ducked once the duck has

been triggered. With a fast attack time, the signal is ducked almost immediately.

With a slow attack time, ducking fades the signal. Too fast an attack time may

sound abrupt.

Hold sets how long the gate stays open or the ducking remains active once the

trigger signal has fallen below the threshold level.

Decay controls how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired. A

longer decay time produces a more natural gating effect, allowing the natural

decay of an instrument to pass through.

For ducking, this determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain

after the hold time has expired.

Parameter Value

Threshold (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points)

Range (dB) –70 to 0 (71 points)

Attack (ms) 0 to 120 (121 points)

Hold (ms) 0.02 ms to 1.96s

, 0.02 ms to 2.13 sec

, 0.03 ms to

2.94 sec

(216 points)

*1. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 48kHz.

*2. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz.

*3. These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz

Decay (ms) 5ms to 42.3s *1., 6 ms to 46.0 sec*2., 8 ms to 63.4 sec *3.

(160 points)

-70

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

+10

+20

-70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20

Input Level

Output Level

Threshold = -10dB

Range = -30dB

Range = -70dB

-70

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

+10

+20

-70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20

Input Level

Output Level

Range = -30dB

Threshold = -20dB

Preset Dynamics Program Parameters

382

Appendix

Preset Dynamics Program Parameters

The “Release”, “Hold”, and “Decay” values shown in the following table

are valid when the AW2816 is set at a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

No. Name Type Parameter Value Description

001 A.Dr.BD "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –24 Compressor that gives the best

results with an acoustic bass drum.

Ratio ( :1) 3

Attack (ms) 9

Outgain (dB) 5.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 58

002 A.Dr.BD "EXP Expander

Threshold (dB) –23 Expander for the same purpose as

program 001.

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 1

Outgain (dB) 3.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 70

003 A.Dr.BD "GAT Gate

Threshold (dB) –11 Gate for the same purpose as

program 001.

Range (dB) –53

Attack (ms) 0

Hold (ms) 1.93

Decay (ms) 400

004 A.Dr.BD "CPH CompanderH

Threshold (dB) –11 Hard compander for the same

purpose as program 001.

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 1

Outgain (dB) –1.5

Width (dB) 7

Release (ms) 192

005 A.Dr.SN "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –17 Compressor that gives the best

results with an acoustic snare

drum.

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 8

Outgain (dB) 3.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 12

006 A.Dr.SN "EXP Expander

Threshold (dB) –23 Expander for the same purpose as

program 005.

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 0

Outgain (dB) 0.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 151

007 A.Dr.SN "GAT Gate

Threshold (dB) –8 Gate for the same purpose as

program 005.

Range (dB) –23

Attack (ms) 1

Hold (ms) 0.63

Decay (ms) 238

383

Appendix

008 A.Dr.SN "CPS CompanderS

Threshold (dB) –8 Soft compander for the same

purpose as program 005.

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 11

Outgain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 10

Release (ms) 128

009 A.Dr.Tom "EXP Expander

Threshold (dB) –20 Expander for acoustic toms

automatically reduces the volume

when the toms are not played,

helping to differentiate the bass and

snare drums clearly.

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 2

Outgain (dB) 5.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 749

010 A.Dr.OverTop "CPS CompanderS

Threshold (dB) –24 Soft compander to emphasize the

attack and ambience of cymbals

using overhead microphones. It

automatically reduces the volume

when the cymbals are not played,

helping differentiate the bass and

snare drums clearly.

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 38

Outgain (dB) –3.5

Width (dB) 54

Release (ms) 842

011 E.B.finger "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –12 Compressor to equalize the attack

and volume level of a finger-picked

electric bass guitar.

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 15

Outgain (dB) 4.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 470

012 E.B.slap "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –12 Compressor to equalize the attack

and volume level of a slap electric

bass guitar

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 6

Outgain (dB) 4.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 133

013 Syn.Bass "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –10 Compressor to adjust and/or

emphasize the level of a synth

bass.

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 9

Outgain (dB) 3.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 250

014 Piano1 "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –9 Compressor to brighten the tonal

color of a piano.

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 17

Outgain (dB) 1.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 238

015 Piano2 "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –18 A variation on program 014,

adjusting the attack and entire level

using a deeper threshold.

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 7

Outgain (dB) 6.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 174

No. Name Type Parameter Value Description

Preset Dynamics Program Parameters

384

Appendix

016 E.Guitar "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –8 Compressor for backing

performances, such as electric

rhythm guitar playing chords or

arpeggios.

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 7

Outgain (dB) 2.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 261

017 A.Guitar "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –10 A variation on program 016,

intended for acoustic guitar playing

rhythm chords or arpeggios.

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 5

Outgain (dB) 1.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 238

018 Strings1 "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –11 Compressor for string instruments.

This program was intended for

violins.

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 33

Outgain (dB) 1.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 749

019 Strings2 "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –12 A variation on program 018,

intended for violas or cellos.

Ratio ( :1) 1.5

Attack (ms) 93

Outgain (dB) 1.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 1.35 S

020 Strings3 "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –17 A variation on program 018,

intended for string instruments with

a very low range, such as cellos or

contrabass.

Ratio ( :1) 1.5

Attack (ms) 76

Outgain (dB) 2.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 186

021 BrassSection "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –18 Compressor intended for brass

sounds with fast and strong attack.

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 18

Outgain (dB) 4.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 226

022 Syn.Pad "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –13 Compressor for synth pad,

intended to prevent diffusion of the

sound.

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 58

Outgain (dB) 2.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 238

023 SamplingPerc "CPS CompanderS

Threshold (dB) –18 Compressor for sampled sounds to

boost them to be as powerful and

clear as the acoustic sounds. This

program is for percussion sounds.

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 8

Outgain (dB) –2.5

Width (dB) 18

Release (ms) 238

No. Name Type Parameter Value Description

385

Appendix

024 Sampling BD "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –14 A variation on program 023,

intended for sampled bass drum

sounds.

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 2

Outgain (dB) 3.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 35

025 Sampling SN "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –18 A variation on program 023,

intended for sampled snare drum

sounds.

Ratio ( :1) 4

Attack (ms) 8

Outgain (dB) 8.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 354

026 Hip Comp "CPS CompanderS

Threshold (dB) –23 A variation on program 023,

intended for sampled sounds for

loops.

Ratio ( :1) 20

Attack (ms) 15

Outgain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 15

Release (ms) 163

027 Solo Vocal1 "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –20 Compressor suited for a solo vocal

source.

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 31

Outgain (dB) 2.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 342

028 Solo Vocal2 "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –8 A variation on program 027.

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 26

Outgain (dB) 1.5

Knee 3

Release (ms) 331

029 Chorus "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –9 A variation on program 027,

intended for chorus vocals.

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 39

Outgain (dB) 2.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 226

030 Compander(H) "CPH CompanderH

Threshold (dB) –10 A template for the hard knee

compander program.

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 1

Outgain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 6

Release (ms) 250

031 Compander(S) "CPS CompanderS

Threshold (dB) –8 A template for the soft knee

compander program.

Ratio ( :1) 4

Attack (ms) 25

Outgain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 24

Release (ms) 180

No. Name Type Parameter Value Description

Preset Dynamics Program Parameters

386

Appendix

032 Click Erase "EXP Expander

Threshold (dB) –33 Expander to remove click track

sounds that may bleed out of the

monitor headphones the musicians

are using.

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 1

Outgain (dB) 2.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 284

033 Announcer "CPH CompanderH

Threshold (dB) –14 Hard compander reduces the level

during the interval between the

words, making the voice sound

even.

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 1

Outgain (dB) –2.5

Width (dB) 18

Release (ms) 180

034 Easy Gate "GAT Gate

Threshold (dB) –26 A template for the gate program.

Range (dB) –56

Attack (ms) 0

Hold (ms) 2.56

Decay (ms) 331

035 BGM Ducking "DUK Ducking

Threshold (dB) –19 Ducking background music for

voiceovers, typically keyed from the

announcer’s channel.

Range (dB) –22

Attack (ms) 93

Hold (ms) 1.20 S

Decay (ms) 6.32 S

036 Limiter1 "CMP CompanderS

Threshold (dB) –8 A template for a limiter using the

soft compander program. This

program has a slow release.

Ratio ( :1) 4

Attack (ms) 25

Outgain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 24

Release (ms) 180

037 Limiter2 "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) 0 A template for a limiter using the

compressor program. This program

is a PEAK STOP type.

Ratio ( :1) ∞

Attack (ms) 0

Outgain (dB) 0.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 319

038 Total Comp1 "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –8 Compressor intended to reduce the

overall volume level. Use for the

stereo out during mixdown. It is also

interesting on stereo input signals.

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 60

Outgain (dB) 0.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 1.12 S

No. Name Type Parameter Value Description

387

Appendix

039 Total Comp2 "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –18 A variation of program 038. It has a

harder compression ratio.

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 94

Outgain (dB) 2.5

Knee hard

Release (ms) 447

040 Total Comp3 "CMP Compressor

Threshold (dB) –16 A variation of program 038. It has

an extreme compression ratio,

almost a limiter in effect.

Ratio ( :1) 6

Attack (ms) 11

Outgain (dB) 6.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 180

No. Name Type Parameter Value Description

Troubleshooting

388

Appendix

Troubleshooting

If the AW2816 does not operate as you expect, or if you suspect a prob-

lem, please refer to the following points and take the appropriate action.

■Power does not turn on

• Is the power cable connected to an AC outlet of the

correct voltage?

• Is the POWER switch turned ON?

• If the power still does not turn on, please contact

your Yamaha dealer.

■Internal hard disk is not detected

• Is the internal hard disk connected correctly?

• The pins of the internal hard disk may have been

deformed.

• Has the internal hard disk been formatted appropri-

ately? *

* If an unformatted hard disk is installed, a message

will appear when the power is turned on, asking

you whether you wish to format the hard disk.

■LCD display is dim or dark

• Use the contrast knob located at the lower right of

the screen to adjust the contrast.

■Input sound is not output

• Are speakers or headphones connected correctly?

• Is your amp and other external devices turned on?

• Is the signal from the external device being input?

• The connection cable from the external device may

be broken.

• Is the [GAIN] control set to an appropriate level?

• Is the fader of the input channel or monitor channel

raised?

• Is the [ON] key of the input channel or monitor

channel lit?

• Is the fader of the stereo output channel raised?

• Is the [ON] key of the stereo output channel lit?

• Is the option card installed correctly?

• Is the input/output patching set correctly?

• Is the word clock set correctly?

• The jack being used for input may have been

assigned as an EFFECT INSERT return.

• Is the attenuator raised in the EQ screen or VIEW

screen?

■Recorded sound is not output

• Has audio data been recorded on the recorder?

• Muting may be enabled in the TRACK screen TR

View page.

• The input monitor mode may be set to INPUT.

• Is the virtual track set to the track that was recorded?

• A region shorter than the speciﬁed region fade time

cannot be played.

■Can’t hear the signal from the INPUT 1/2 jacks

• An external effect unit may be connected to the

INSERT jack, and turned off.

■Signal from the INPUT 8 jack is too loud

• A conventional line-level signal may be connected

to the Hi-Z jack.

■Sound is too soft

• Are the speakers or headphones connected cor-

rectly?

• Is the volume of your amp or external equipment

raised?

• Is the [GAIN] control set correctly?

• Is the fader of the input channel or monitor channel

raised?

• Is the fader of the stereo output channel raised?

• The EQ gain may be set to an extremely low value.

• The dynamics processor may be set to an extreme

threshold or ratio.

• If you are connecting an electric guitar, is it con-

nected to the Hi-Z jack?

• Check the level in the HOME screen. For details

refer to page 318 “HOME screen.”

• Is the attenuator of the EQ screen or VIEW screen

raised?

■Sound is distorted

• Is the [GAIN] control set correctly?

• The connection cable from the external device may

be broken.

• The fader of the input channel or monitor channel

may be raised excessively.

• The stereo output channel fader may be raised

excessively.

• The stereo output channel attenuator may be raised

excessively.

• The EQ gain may be excessively high.

• Did you record at an appropriate level?

• Is the word clock setting correct for both the

AW2816 and the external device(s)?

• An effect such as Distortion or Amp Simulate may

be in use.

■Can’t record

• Is the internal hard disk connected?

• Is there sufﬁcient free space on the internal hard

disk?

• The song may be protected.

• Is the [REC TRACK SELECT] key lit?

• The stereo track may be in playback mode.

389

Appendix

• Is the input signal routed appropriately to the

recorder? *

* If the signal is being input appropriately to the

recorder, pressing the [REC TRACK SELECT] key will

cause the meter to react.

* If the signal is being input appropriately to the

recorder, pressing the [REC TRACK SELECT] key will

cause the meter in the METER screen to react.

• When a ﬁle input/output page such as the SONG

screen Song List page is displayed, recording and

playback are not possible.

• CD/DAT DIGITAL REC in the UTILITY screen Pre-

fer.2 page may be set to DISABLE.

• Please read and understand the copyright warning

(→P.174) before using digital input signals.

■Can’t record on the STEREO track

• It is not possible to record on the STEREO track

while recording on other tracks.

■Can’t play back the STEREO track

• Muting may be selected in the TRACK screen Stereo

page.

• Are monitor channels 1 and 2 raised? *

* For STEREO track playback mode, the signal is out-

put from monitor channels 1 and 2.

■Not all tracks will play back

• There are limitations on the number of tracks that

can be simultaneously recorded or played. Refer to

Operation section “Audio tracks”.

■The volume of a particular channel increases or

decreases

• Are the dynamics processor settings appropriate?

• Automix may have been recorded.

■Faders move to the lowest position on their own

• Automix may have been recorded.

■Meters move even though the faders are lowered

• The direct out setting may be PRE EQ or PRE

FADER.

• The meter display may be set to PRE FADER.

■Can’t store a scene

• Is the scene memory protected?

• A scene cannot be stored in scene number 00.

■Can’t reproduce a scene

• One or more channels may be set to Recall Safe.

■Can’t recall a scene during recording

• The AW2816 may be set to record the digital input

signal.

• Make sure that CD/DAT DIGITAL REC is set to

ENABLE.

■Can’t change input patches during recording

• The AW2816 may be set to record the digital input

signal.

• Make sure that CD/DAT DIGITAL REC in the UTIL-

ITY screen Prefer.2 page is set to ENABLE.

■Can’t save to a library

• It is not possible to save to the factory-preset librar-

ies.

■Can’t recall a channel library to the stereo output

channel

• Channel libraries saved from other channels cannot

be recalled to the stereo output channel.

■Can’t exchange MIDI data

• Are the MIDI cables connected correctly?

• A MIDI cable may be broken.

• Is the power turned on for the transmitting and

receiving devices?

• Do the channel settings match for the transmitted

and receiving devices?

• Are the MIDI screen/MIDI Setup page settings set

appropriately?

• Is a scene assigned to the program change number

being transmitted?

■MIDI messages are looped

• In the MIDI screen MIDI Setup page, ECHO may be

turned ON.

• Also check the settings of the connected external

MIDI devices.

■MTC messages are not transmitted

• Is the MIDI cable correctly connected to the MTC

OUT connector?

• If the cable is connected to the MIDI OUT connec-

tor, is the MTC ON/OFF setting turned ON?

• Is SYNC OUT set correctly?

• Is MTC SYNC set to MASTER?

■The AW2816 does not synchronize to incoming

MTC messages

• Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI IN con-

nector?

• In the MIDI screen MIDI Sync page, is MTC Sync

set to SLAVE?

■MTC messages are received, but synchronization

drifts

• Is a large amount of MIDI data (notes etc.) being

received together with the MTC messages?

■MTC synchronization drifts

• Does the frame rate match between the AW2816

and the external device?

• SYNC OFFSET may have been set.

• If jumps occur in the synchronized time, change the

SYNC AVE. setting in the MIDI screen MIDI Sync

page, and try again.

■Something happens to the sound when the [DATA/

JOG] dial, [SHUTTLE] dial, [FF] key, or [REW] key

are operated

• Differences in the number of simultaneously played

tracks will affect the way in which the sound is

heard when these controls are operated.

Troubleshooting

390

Appendix

■MMC messages is not transmitted

• Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI OUT con-

nector?

• MMC messages are not transmitted from the MTC

OUT connector.

■Can’t receive MMC messages

• Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI IN con-

nector?

• MMC messages cannot be received if the AW2816

is functioning as the MTC slave.

■MIDI data is not exchanged via the TO HOST con-

nector

• Is the cable correctly connected to the TO HOST

connector?

• PORT SELECT may be set to MIDI.

• Is the PORT SELECT setting appropriate for your

computer? *

* For details on this setting, refer to page 272 “MIDI

screen.”

• A computer application other than your sequencer

may be using the port.

■Metronome cannot be heard

• The metronome sound is normally sent only to the

MONITOR OUT and headphones. *

* Settings can also be made in the SETUP screen

Patch IN page to assign the metronome to an out-

put channel.

■Moving a fader does not change the level

• Is the appropriate fader mode and mixing layer

selected?

• The fader may be set to PRE FADE in AUX.

■The ON key and SEL key select the wrong channel

• Is the appropriate mixing layer selected?

■Noise is present in the recorded signal

• Does the word clock setting match for the AW2816

and the external device(s)?

• Is an unsynchronized signal being input?

• Is the dither setting appropriate?

• The oscillator may be functioning.

• If the speed of your internal hard disk is slow, prob-

lems may occur during recording and playback.

Please use only the recommended internal hard

disks.

■Sound recorded via the digital input sounds grainy

• Is the dither setting appropriate?

■Pairing was speciﬁed, but the signal is monaural

• Is the odd-numbered channel panned far left and

the even-numbered channel panned far right?

■Pairing was speciﬁed, but the signal phase does not

match

• Even when channels are paired, the phase setting is

not linked.

■Signal is delayed

• Is the channel delay set correctly?

■Automix cannot be recorded

• Is automix set to ENABLE?

• In the AUTOMIX screen, is the REC or AUTO REC

button turned ON?

• Is the [SEL] key lit for the channel you are operat-

ing?

• Is OVERWRITE turned ON for the control (e.g.,

fader or EQ) you are operating?

■Can’t use the internal effects

• Effect BYPASS may be turned ON.

• Are the level of EFF.RTN 1, 2 faders raised?

• In the SETUP screen Patch IN page, EFFECT PATCH

may be set to INSERT.

• It is not possible to insert one effect into multiple

channels.

• 019. HQ. Pitch can be used only with EFFECT 2.

■Can’t use SOLO

• The channel may be set to Solo Safe.

• Is the SETUP screen Solo Setup page set appropri-

ately? *

* For details on the settings, refer to “SETUP screen.”

■Can’t edit a recorded track

• Have you selected the virtual track that you

recorded?

■Fader groups and mute groups don’t work

• In the EQ screen Fader Group page and Mute

Group page, check that grouping is set to ENABLE.

■Editing results are not heard in the sound

• Have you selected the virtual track that you

recorded?

• Are you using the appropriate editing command? *

* For details on editing commands, refer to “EDIT

screen.”

■Playback pitch is wrong

• VARI may be selected.

• Is the AW2816 operating on the same sampling fre-

quency as the synchronized external device?

• Is the master device operating in a stable way?

• You may have executed the EDIT screen PITCH

command.

• Is an effect such as HQ.Pitch or Dual Pitch selected

for a monitor channel?

■Counter display is not 0 when you return to the

beginning of the song

• The display mode may be set to REMAIN (remaining

recording time).

• If the display mode is set to REL (relative time), the

start point may be speciﬁed.

• The SONG screen Setting page may be set to MEA-

SURE. *

* For details on this setting, refer to “SONG screen.”

391

Appendix

■Can’t save a ﬁle

• Is there sufﬁcient space on the internal hard disk?

• Did you perform the correct shut-down procedure

when you last turned off the power? *

* If you turn off the power without performing the

shut-down, data may be lost or the hard disk may

be damaged.

■Song ﬁle size is unnaturally large

• Even after you use recorder editing to erase a track

etc., that sound ﬁle will be saved on the disk as an

unused ﬁle. Execute the optimize operation in the

SONG screen Song Edit page.

■File date is not recorded correctly

• Is the internal clock set to the correct date and time? *

* If the date and time of the internal clock has

drifted, the internal battery may have run down.

Please contact your Yamaha dealer.

■A device connected to the SCSI connector is not

recognized

• The power of the SCSI device may have been turned

on after the AW2816.

• Is the SCSI cable connected correctly?

• The pins of the SCSI cable may have been bent.

• Is the ID of the SCSI device set correctly?

• Is termination speciﬁed correctly for the SCSI

device?

■Can’t save ﬁles on a SCSI device

• Is there sufﬁcient free space on the save destination

media?

• Has the save destination media been formatted

appropriately?

■Can’t load ﬁles from a SCSI device

• Is there sufﬁcient free space on the internal hard

disk?

■CD-RW drive is not recognized

• Is the CD-RW drive connected correctly?

■Can’t create an audio CD

• Is CD-R media inserted?

• The inserted CD-R may have already been ﬁnalized.

• Is a signal recorded on the stereo track?

• The stereo track must be at least four seconds long.

• Have you saved a song in which a stereo track has

been recorded?

• It is not possible to create an audio CD from a song

whose Fs (sampling frequency) setting is 48 kHz.

• Does the display indicate DISK FULL?

• Create sufﬁcient space on the hard disk.

• Erase unneeded tracks and then execute Optimize

to increase the available space.

■An audio CD you created does not play back on a

conventional player

• An audio CD you created you not play back on a

conventional player unless the disc has been ﬁnal-

ized.

■Audio recorded on CD-RW media does not play

back on some players

• In order for audio data recorded on CD-RW media

to be played back, the player must support CD-RW.

Contact the manufacturer of the player regarding

CD-RW support.

■The sound skips while playing an audio CD that

you created

• There may be differences in the quality of the com-

pleted CD depending on the type of CD-R media

you use. If this occurs, try using single speed (nor-

mal speed) recording rather than double-speed or

faster recording.

■Can’t use the [DATA/JOG] dial to control on-

screen parameters

• The [NUM LOCATE] key may be on.

• The [JOG ON] key may be on.

■The display indicates MEMORY FULL or DISK

FULL, and recording or editing is not possible

• Erase unneeded tracks and then execute Optimize

to increase the available space.

■The display indicates DISK BUSY during playback

• It is possible that the reading speed of the internal

hard disk is not fast enough, or that the reading

speed has slowed down because the recorded data

has become fragmented. Try deleting small regions

and re-recording. Alternatively, backup the data,

and try using one of the recommended hard disks.

Display message list

392

Appendix

Display message list

Messages

AUTOMIX DISABLED.

Automix is not enabled, and cannot be recorded.

AUTOMIX MEMORY FULL!

Automix memory has no free area.

AUTOMIX NOT RUNNING.

Automix has been stopped, so recording is not possible. Pause the

recorder, and then playback.

AUTOMIX REC ABORTED.

Automix recording was stopped, and the data was discarded.

AUTOMIX RECORDING.

The operation cannot be executed since automix is being recorded.

AUTOMIX RUNNING.

The operation cannot be executed since automix is being recorded or

played.

BULK: BYTE COUNT MISMATCH!

The data length speciﬁed within the received system exclusive data

did not match the length of the data that was actually received.

BULK: CHECKSUM MISMATCH!

The check sum of the received system exclusive is incorrect.

BULK: MEMORY PROTECTED!

The scene memory you attempted to receive is protected.

CANNOT ASSIGN DIGITAL-ST-IN.

DIGITAL STEREO IN cannot be assigned to the stereo bus cascade.

CANNOT CHANGE THE MUTE

Muting cannot be defeated since this would exceed the number of

simultaneously playable tracks.

CANNOT PLAY THIS PAGE

Playback is not possible in this page.

CANNOT RECALL AUTOMIX

Recall is not possible, since automix data has not been stored.

CANNOT REDO

Redo (re-execution of an operation) is not possible.

CANNOT SET MARK

It is not possible to specify a mark at an already-speciﬁed position.

CANNOT UNDO

Undo (cancellation of an operation) is not possible.

CD PLAY MODE NOW.

Since the AW2816 is in CD Play mode, this operation is not possible.

DIFFERENT TC FRAME TYPE

MTC of a different frame type than the internal setting is being

received.

DIGITAL-ST-IN REC PROHIBIT.

Recording is prohibited for the signal being input from DIGITAL STE-

REO IN.

DIGITAL-ST-IN SYNC ERROR!

The signal being input from DIGITAL STEREO IN is not synchronized

to the word clock master.

DIN TO STEREO BUS REFUSE.

Since the signal was interrupted, cascading from DIGITAL STEREO IN

to the stereo bus has been defeated.

DISK BUSY

The reading speed of the internal hard disk is not fast enough, or the

reading speed has slowed down because the recorded data has

become fragmented.

DRIVE NOT READY

The drive is not ready.

EFF1 INSERT RELEASED

Effect 1 has been released from insertion because a patch library was

recalled.

EFF2 INSERT RELEASED

Effect 2 has been released from insertion because a patch library was

recalled.

FOR EFFECT2 ONLY.

The selected effect program can be used only with effect 2.

IN/OUT POINTS TOO CLOSE

The auto punch-in/out interval is too short. It cannot be set less than

approximately 100 msec.

INT.EFF NOW SELECTED AUX.

The internal effect is connected to the AUX send, and cannot be

inserted.

LOW BATTERY!!

The internal battery is running down.

393

Appendix

MAKE NEW MIX.

There are no events to be edited. Please create a new mix.

MARK ERASED

The mark has been erased.

MARK SET

The mark has been set.

MEMORY FULL!!

The song has no more free space. One song can use a maximum of

6.4 GB.

MIDI BULK RECEIVED

A bulk data dump was received.

MIDI IN: DATA FRAMING ERROR!

Invalid data may have been received at the MIDI IN connector.

MIDI IN: DATA OVERRUN!

Invalid data may have been received at the MIDI IN connector.

MIDI: RX BUFFER FULL!

Receiving more MIDI data than it can handle.

MIDI: TX BUFFER FULL!

Attempting to transmit more MIDI data than it can handle.

NO CURRENT AUTOMIX.

There is no valid automix data. Please create a new mix.

NO DATA TO PATCH

No Quick Rec patch has been speciﬁed.

NO DATA TO RECALL.

Since data has not been stored, it cannot be recalled.

NO MARK LEFT

The allowable number of marks has been exceeded.

NO MEDIA!!

Media has not been inserted.

NO PATCH CORD LEFT

You attempted to patch in excess of what is allowed by Quick Rec.

PLAY TRACK MUTE IS ON

Playback tracks were muted because the allowable number of simul-

taneously recorded/played tracks was exceeded.

RECORDER BUSY

The operation cannot be executed because the recorder is operating.

RECORDER RUNNING

The operation cannot be executed because the recorder is recording

or playing.

REDO COMPLETE

Redo (re-execution of the previous operation) has been completed.

REPEAT POINTS TOO CLOSE

The repeat interval is too short. It cannot be set to less than one sec-

ond.

SELECTED ALL TRACKS

Since all tracks are selected, it is not possible to export to CD-R/RW

media, or to edit the track name.

SELECTED AREA HAS NO DATA.

The selected area contains no trigger data.

SELECTED AREA HAS NO REGION.

The selected area contains no region.

SELECTED CH IS NONE.

The selected channel cannot be selected since it does not exist.

SELECTED CH ONLY MODE.

The channel cannot be changed, since the display mode is set to

SELECTED CH ONLY.

SELECTED SONG HAS NO REGION.

The selected song does not contain a region.

SELECTED TRACK HAS NO REGION.

The selected track does not contain a region.

SELECTED TRACK NOT RECORDED.

The selected track does not contain recorded data.

SLOT INPUT SYNC ERROR!

The signal being input to the input jack of a card installed in OPTION

I/O slot is not synchronized to the word clock master.

SOLO READY.

The Solo function is ready. Use the [SEL] keys to select the solo chan-

nel.

SOLO SLAVE.

The Solo status cannot be changed when the AW2816 is functioning

as a cascade slave. Press the Solo key on the master console.

SONG NUMBER FULL.

The maximum number of songs has been reached.

SONG TOP/END OUT OF RANGE

You located outside the top/end range of the song.

STEREO PAIRED.

You are attempting to defeat ST LINK for the dynamics of paired chan-

nels.

STEREO TRACK MUTE IS OFF

Since muting is off for the stereo track, track muting cannot be turned

off.

Display message list

394

Appendix

Popup messages

THIS SONG IS PROTECTED.

This song is protected, and cannot be edited or recorded.

TO HOST: DATA FRAMING ERROR!

Invalid data may have been received at the TO HOST connector.

TO HOST: DATA OVERRUN!

Invalid data may have been received at the TO HOST connector.

TO HOST: DATA PARITY ERROR!

Invalid data may have been received at the TO HOST connector.

TO HOST: RX BUFFER FULL!

Excessive amounts of data may have been received at the TO HOST

connector.

TO HOST: TX BUFFER FULL!

The AW2816 may be attempting to transmit excessive amounts of

data from the TO HOST connector.

UNDO COMPLETE

Undo (cancellation of the previous operation) has been executed.

WRONG WORD CLOCK!!

The word clock from a connected device selected for synchronization

is not appropriate.

CD Access Error!

A error occurred when accessing the CD.

CD Size Full!

Data exceeding the recordable length of the CD cannot be added.

CD Track Over!

The maximum number of tracks has been reached, and further addi-

tion is not possible.

Can’t Copy This Parameter!

This parameter cannot be copied.

Can’t Create Image File!

Since the disk is full, a CD image ﬁle cannot be created.

Can’t Delete Current Song!

The currently loaded song cannot be deleted.

Can’t Delete Protected Song!

A protected song cannot be deleted.

Can’t Edit Multiple Songs!

This editing operation cannot be executed on multiple songs simulta-

neously.

Can’t Optimize Protected Song!

Optimize cannot be executed on a protected song.

Can’t REDO

Redo is not possible.

Can’t Select Current Song!

The currently loaded song cannot be edited.

Can’t UNDO

Undo is not possible.

Can’t Write CD-RW by Track At Once!

A CD-RW cannot be written using Track At Once.

Change Media, Invalid Order.

Please exchange the media. The order of media volumes is incorrect.

Change Media, Not 1st Media

Please exchange the media. This is not the ﬁrst media volume.

Change Media, Not TYPE 1 Backup.

Please exchange the media. This media was not backed up as TYPE 1.

Change Media, Not TYPE 2 Backup.

Please exchange the media. This media was not backed up as TYPE 2.

Change Media, Please

The media is an incorrect type. Please exchange it.

Device Error!

A problem has occurred with the SCSI device.

Directory Name Too Long!

The directory name is too long and cannot be displayed.

Directory Not Found!

The speciﬁed directory cannot be found.

Disk Full!

The disk has no free capacity.

File System Error!

An error has occurred in the ﬁle system of the internal hard disk.

Finalized Media!

The media has already been ﬁnalized.

Invalid Parameter!

The parameter setting exceeds the allowable range.

Media Error!

A problem has occurred on the media.

Media Full!

The media has no free space.

Media Protected!

The media is write-protected.

395

Appendix

Messages at power-on

No Song to Backup!

There is no song to backup.

No Song to Edit!

There is no song has been selected for editing.

No Song to Load!

There is no song to load.

No Song to Restore!

There is no song to restore.

No Song to Save!

There is no song to save.

No Song to Write!

No songs to write to the CD have been selected.

No Song!

No songs can be found.

No Stereo Track!

There is no stereo track.

No Track to Open Wave Display!

There is no track data for waveform display.

Not WAV Drive!

The selected drive contains no WAV ﬁles.

Not WAV File!

The ﬁle is not a WAV ﬁle.

Partition Not Found!

The speciﬁed partition was not found.

Recall Channel Data Conﬂict!

The speciﬁed channel library cannot be loaded into this channel.

SCSI Error!

An error has occurred in the SCSI connection.

Selected Drive is not CD Drive!

The selected drive is not a CD drive.

Selected Drive is not Connected!

The selected drive is not connected.

Selected Preset is Effect2 Only!

The selected preset can be used only by effect 2.

Selected Song Status Conﬂict!

The track cannot be imported, since it is from a song with a different

sampling frequency or quantization (bit length).

Selected Track is not Recorded!

The selected track is not recorded.

Too Many Regions!

There are too many regions.

Too Small Region!

Time compression/expansion cannot be executed since the region is

too small.

Unformatted HDD

The internal hard disk has not been formatted for the AW2816. This

message will be displayed if a new hard disk is installed.

Recognized AW4416-Formatted HDD

A hard disk formatted for the AW4416 is installed.

Can not ﬁnd HDD

No internal hard disk is installed, and the AW2816 cannot start up

correctly.

Illegal HDD!

A problem was found with the internal hard disk, and the AW2816

cannot start up correctly.

Format OK? [Y (Enter) /N (Any)]

If you want to format the internal hard disk for the AW2816, press the

[ENTER] key. If you want to exchange the internal hard disk without

formatting it for the AW2816, make sure that the access indicator is

dark, and turn off the power.

Specifications

396

Appendix

Speciﬁcations

General Speciﬁcations

Frequency Response 0 +1/–3 dB 20 Hz~20 kHz

(MIC/LINE IN – STEREO OUT)

Total harmonic distortion Less than 0.02% 1 kHz (LINE IN to STEREO OUT)

(Nominal input/Output level) Less than 0.2% 1 kHz (MIC IN to STEREO OUT)

20 kHz LPF

Dynamic range 109 dB typ. DA converter (STEREO OUT)

(Maximum level to Noise level) 103 dB min. DA converter (STEREO OUT)

20 kHz LPF, IHF-A 104 dB typ. AD + DA (LINE IN to STEREO OUT)

98 dB min. AD + DA (LINE IN to STEREO OUT)

AD converter 24-bit linear, 64-times oversampling

DA converter 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling

Internal processing 32-bit

Sampling frequency Internal 44.1 kHz (±6%)/48 kHz (±6%)

External 44.1 kHz (–6%) to 48 kHz (+6%)

Audio input section

MIC/LINE 8 channels

DIGITAL STEREO IN 2 channels (stereo × 1)

mini YGDAI card (option) max. 8 channels

Audio output section

STEREO OUT 2 channels (stereo × 1)

OMNI OUT 4 channels

MONITOR OUT 2 channels (stereo × 1)

PHONES 2 channels (stereo × 1)

DIGITAL STEREO OUT 2 channels (stereo × 1)

mini YGDAI card (option) max. 8 channels

Mixing layer section 28 channels

Input channel 8 channels

Internal effect return 4 channels (stereo × 2)

Playback 16 channels (16 track direct out playback), or stereo

2 channels (stereo track playback)

Internal effects section

Multi-effects × 2

Bus section 18 channels

Bus 8 channels

Aux 6 channels

Stereo 2 channels (stereo × 1)

Solo 2 channels (stereo × 1)

397

Appendix

Recorder section

Recording medium 2.5" IDE hard disk drive

Sound ﬁle format AW2816 original format

Recording resolution 16-bit, 24-bit

Sampling frequency 44.1 kHz/48 kHz

Tracks 130 tracks

(16 tracks × 8 virtual tracks plus stereo track)

Maximum recording time Approx. 230 min

(44.1 kHz, 16-bit, 16 tracks, 20 GB hard disk)

Power requirements U.S.A. & Canada 110–120 V 65 W, 50/60 Hz

Europe 220–240 V 65 W, 50 Hz

Dimensions (W × H × D) 480.0 × 141.0 × 428.9 mm

(18.9 × 5.5 × 16.9 inches)

Weight 9.5 kg (20.9 lbs)

Operating temperature range 5° to 35° C

Options 2.5" hard disk (HDD25-20G/DARA-212000), mini

YGDAI cards (MY8-AT, MY8-TD, MY8-AE, MY8-AD,

MY4-AD, MY4-DA, AP8-AD, AP8-DA), Footswitch

FC5

Mixer section

■ Input/output

MIC/LINE input Channel 1, 2 (balanced, XLR-type, TRS phone jack)

+48 V DC phantom powering

PEAK LED –3 dB (clipping level)

Input impedance 3 kΩ

Nominal input level –46 dB to +4 dB

Minimum input level –52 dB

Maximum input level +22 dB

MIC/LINE input channel 3–8 (balanced, TRS phone jack)

PEAK LED –3 dB (clipping level)

Input impedance 3 kΩ

Nominal input level –46 dB to +4 dB

Minimum input level –52 dB

Maximum input level +22 dB

MIC/LINE input (Hi-Z) channel 8 (unbalanced, phone jack)

Input impedance 500 kΩ

Nominal input level –46 dB to +4 dB

Minimum input level –52 dB

Maximum input level +20 dB

STEREO OUT L, R (unbalanced, phono)

Output impedance 1 kΩ

Nominal load impedance 10 kΩ

Nominal output level –10 dBV

Maximum output level +8 dBV

Specifications

398

Appendix

MONITOR OUT L, R (balanced, TRS phone jack)

Output impedance 150Ω

Nominal load impedance 10 kΩ

Nominal output level +4 dB

Maximum output level +22 dB

OMNI OUT 1–4 (unbalanced, phone jack)

Output impedance 1 kΩ

Nominal load impedance 10 kΩ

Nominal output level 0 dB

Maximum output level +18 dB

PHONES (unbalanced, TRS phone jack)

Nominal load impedance 8–40Ω

Maximum output level 100 mW + 100 mW (40 Ω load)

DIGITAL STEREO I/O Coaxial (phono)

Option card slot Slot × 1

Digital I/O MY8-AT (Adat)

MY8-TD (Tascam)

MY8-AE (AES/EBU)

Analog input MY8-AD (TRS phone jack × 8)

MY4-AD (XLR-type × 4)

AP8-AD (Apogee)

Analog output MY4-DA (XLR-type × 4)

AP8-DA (Apogee)

* 0 dB= 0.775 Vrms, 0 dBV= 1.0 Vrms

■ Digital mixer

Input channel (channel 1–8, playback 1–16)

Attenuator, Phase (normal, reverse), EQ (4-band

PEQ), Dynamics, Delay, On/Off, Fader (60 mm

motorized), Pan, Bus assign (stereo, bus, aux, solo,

direct out)

Internal effects return

Attenuator, Phase (normal, reverse), EQ (4-band

PEQ), Delay, On/Off, Fader (60 mm motorized), Pan,

Bus assign (stereo, bus, aux, solo)

Bus

Stereo L, R Attenuator, EQ (4-band PEQ), Dynamics, On/Off,

Fader (60 mm motorized), Balance

Bus 1–8 Attenuator

Aux 1–6 Attenuator

Solo L, R

Fader 60 mm motorized × 9

399

Appendix

Recorder section

■ General

Recording resolution 16-bit, 24-bit (set per song)

Sampling frequency 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (set per song)

Maximum track of recording/ 16 Bit: 8 Tracks, Recording & 16 Tracks, Playback

Playback simultaneously 24 Bit: 16 Tracks, Recording + Playback

Tracks 130 tracks (16 tracks × 8 virtual tracks plus stereo

track)

■ Format

File system AW2816 original format

Internal hard disk drive 2.5" IDE

Max. hard disk capacity 64 GB/6.4 GB per 1 song

Max. songs per hard disk Approx. 30,000 songs

■ Edit

Song edit Name, Comment, Delete, Copy, Optimize, Protect,

Fade In/Out, Import

Track edit Name, Erase, Copy, Exchange, Slip, Time Compres-

sion/Expansion, Pitch Change, Import, Append,

Export

Part edit Erase, Delete, Copy, Move, Insert, Time Compres-

sion/Expansion, Pitch Change, Export, Append

Region edit Name, Erase, Delete, Copy, Move, Divide, Trim In/

Out, Time Compression/Expansion, Pitch Change,

Import, Export

■ Others

Locate Direct locate: data entry search (time, measure)

Quick locate: Start, End, RTZ, A/B, Last REC In/

Out, Roll Back

Punch I/O Manual Punch I/O, Auto Punch I/O

Specifications

400

Appendix

Controls

Analog section

Input (channel 1–8) Gain (variable)

Input (channel 1, 2) +48 V (phantom switch)

Output Phones level, monitor out level

Mixer section

WORK NAVIGATE buttons SONG, FILE, CD, QUICK REC

UNIT buttons SETUP, UTILITY, MIDI, PATCH

MIXER buttons VIEW, PAN, EQ, DYN

FADER MODE buttons AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4, AUX5, AUX6, REMOTE,

HOME

MIXING LAYER buttons 1–8 (INPUT), 1–8 (RECORDER), 9–16 (RECORDER)

ON & SEL buttons, Faders INPUT 1–8, RECORDER 1–8, RECORDER 9–16,

STEREO

ON & SEL buttons, Encoder RTN1, RTN2

SOLO buttons

Function buttons SHIFT, F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, CTRL

Recorder section

TRACK CUE button

METER button

REC TRACK SELECT buttons 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, ST,

ALL SAFE

RECORDER buttons TRACK, EDIT

Locate buttons NUM LOCATE, , , MARK, AUTO PUNCH, IN,

OUT, SET, REPEAT, A, B, ROLL BACK, , RTZ,

, CANCEL

Transport buttons REW, FF, STOP, PLAY, REC

Others

AUTOMATION button AUTOMIX, SCENE

SCENE MEMORY button STORE, –, +, RECALL

UNDO button

REDO button

JOG ON button

CURSOR button , , ,

DATA ENTRY button JOG/SHUTTLE dial

ENTER button

Display 320 × 240 dots graphical LCD (with contrast control)

Control I/O

MIDI IN 5-pin DIN

MIDI OUT/THRU 5-pin DIN

MTC OUT 5-pin DIN

TO HOST 8-pin mini DIN

SCSI 50-pin half pitch D-Sub

Foot switch Phone jack

401

Appendix

Dimensions

Speciﬁcations and external appearance subject to change without notice.

For European Model

Purchaser/User Information speciﬁed in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2.

Inrush Current: 26A

Conformed Environment: E1, E2, E3 and E4

480

428.9

141

7.6

Unit: mm

MIDI data format

402

Appendix

MIDI data format

1. Functions

1.1 MIDI setup

There are two types of serial connector: the MIDI con-

nectors and the TO HOST connector. Each has the same

functionality, and you can select either of these to use,

depending on the type of device that will be connected.

Both types use the MIDI format for communication.

When using the TO HOST connector, you must select

one of the three transmission methods listed below.

Regardless of the type of connector you select, the MTC

OUT connector will output MTC.

Since the MTC transmitted from the MTC OUT connec-

tor is generated by hardware, its precision is very high.

The MIDI OUT/THRU connector can be used as either

THRU or OUT. If THRU is selected, the messages arriv-

ing at the MIDI IN connector will be re-transmitted with-

out change from the MIDI OUT/THRU connector.

Name Speed Applicable to

---------------+-------------+------------------------------------------

PC1 31.25k for NEC PC9800 series

PC2 38.4k for DOS/V,NEC PC9800 series

Mac 31.25k for Macintosh (CLOCK=1MHz)

1.2 Scene change

The settings of the [Program Change Assign Table] specify

the scene that is recalled when a Program Change mes-

sage is received.

The settings of the [Program Change Assign Table] specify

the program number that is transmitted when a scene is

recalled. If more than one program number has been

assigned to that scene memory number, the lowest-num-

bered program number will be transmitted. (If a memory

number is recalled for which there is setting in the [MIDI

Program Change Assign Table], the Parameter Change

(Function Call) listed later in this section will be transmit-

ted.)

1.3 MMC control

These messages allow basic recorder operations such as

STOP/PLAY/REC/LOCATE.

If you select the MIDI SETUP menu item MMC MASTER,

MMC commands will be transmitted according to the

operation of the transport. If you select MMC SLAVE, the

internal recorder will operate according to the received

MMC commands.

1.4 Effect control

Depending on the type of effect, note-on/off messages

can be used for control.

These settings are made for the parameters of each effect.

1.5 MIDI Clock transmission

If the MIDI SETUP menu item [MIDI CLK] is ON, MIDI

Clock messages will be transmitted during playback and

recording.

In MIDI Clock transmission mode, Song Position Pointer

and Start/Stop/Continue commands will also be issued,

and during playback or recording, MIDI Clock will be

transmitted according to the MIDI Tempo Map.

1.6 MTC master

If the MIDI SETUP menu item [MTC] is ON, MTC will be

transmitted during playback and recording.

MTC will always be transmitted from the MTC OUT con-

nector regardless of the [MTC] setting.

1.7 MTC slave synchronization

If the MIDI SETUP menu item [MTC SYNC] is set to

SLAVE, the internal recorder will operate in synchroniza-

tion to MTC messages received from the MIDI IN or TO

HOST connector.

1.8 Realtime control of parameters

The internal parameters can be input or output in real-

time using control changes or parameter changes.

1.9 Transmission of scene memories or library data

The bulk dump function can be used to send data to

another device, or copy settings from another device to

the AW2816.

1.10 MIDI Remote

MIDI data created by the user can be transmitted from

the AW2816 by operating its faders or ON keys.

2. AW2816 settings and operation

2.1 MIDI Setup

2.1.1 MIDI Channel

2.1.1.1 Transmit channel

This sets the MIDI channel that will normally be used.

However, transmission in response to a request will

occur on the Receive Channel, in order to specify the

desired that transmitted the request.

2.1.1.2 Receive channel

This sets the MIDI channel that will be used for recep-

tion. MIDI messages are normally received only if the

MIDI channel matches, but if OMNI is ON, they will be

received regardless of the channel.

2.1.2 ON/OFF

2.1.2.1 Program change

Enable/disable reception and transmission. If OMNI is

turned ON, reception will occur regardless of the MIDI

channel. If ECHO is ON, messages will be echoed

regardless of the channel.

2.1.2.2 Control change

Enable/disable reception and transmission. If OMNI is

turned ON, reception will occur regardless of the MIDI

channel. If ECHO is ON, messages will be echoed

regardless of the channel.

2.1.2.3 Parameter change

Enable/disable reception and transmission. If OMNI is

turned ON, reception will occur regardless of the MIDI

channel. If ECHO is ON, messages will be echoed

regardless of the channel.

2.1.2.4 Bulk

Enable/disable reception.

2.1.3 MMC Device ID

Specify the ID number used to transmit and receive

MMC commands.

403

Appendix

2.1.4 MIDI/HOST

Select whether the MIDI IN/OUT connectors of the TO

HOST connector will be used for serial transmission.

(MTC output data will always be transmitted from the

MTC OUT connector.)

2.1.5 OUT/THRU

Select whether the MIDI OUT/THRU connector will

function as OUT or as THRU.

If THRU is selected, messages received at the MIDI IN

connector will be re-transmitted without change from the

MIDI OUT/THRU connector.

Regardless of the MIDI/HOST setting, the connector will

function as a THRU connector if the THRU setting is

selected. If you want to use the connector as MIDI OUT,

the MIDI/HOST setting must be OUT.

2.1.6 TO HOST

If the TO HOST connector is selected, choose one of

three settings depending on the type of computer that is

connected.

2.1.7 MIDI Clock ON/OFF

Specify whether MIDI Clock will be used.

If this is ON, MIDI Clock will be transmitted from the

connector selected by MIDI/HOST.

2.1.8 MTC ON/OFF

Select whether MTC will be used.

If this is ON, MTC will be transmitted from the connector

selected by MIDI/HOST.

Regardless of this setting, MTC will always be transmitted

from the MTC OUT connector.

2.2 Program change assign table

This table allows you to freely specify the correspon-

dence between Program Change No. and Scene No.

This table is used for conversion for both transmission

and reception.

2.3 Control change assign table

This table allows you to freely specify the correspon-

dence between Control Change No. and Parameter

name.

This table is used for conversion for both transmission

and reception.

3. MIDI format list

3.1 CHANNEL MESSAGE

command rx/tx function

-----------------------+-----+-------------------------------------

8n NOTE OFF rx Control the internal effect

9n NOTE ON rx Control the internal effect

CONTROL CHANGE

rx/tx Edit parameters (use the Control

Change Assign Table)

PROGRAM CHANGE

rx/tx Switch scene memories (use the

Control Change Assign Table)

3.2 SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE

command rx/tx function

-----------------------+-----+-------------------------------------

MIDI TIME CODE

rx/tx MTC transmission (when MTC

Master), MTC reception (when

MTC slave)

SONG POSITION POINTER

tx SPP reception (when MIDI Clock

is used)

3.3 SYSTEM REAL TIME MESSAGE

command rx/tx function

-----------------------+-----+-------------------------------------

F8 TIMING CLOCK tx MIDI Clock transmission (when

MIDI Clock is used)

FA START tx Start command transmission

(when MIDI Clock is used)

FB CONTINUE tx Continue command transmission

(when MIDI Clock is used)

FC STOP tx Stop command transmit (when

MIDI Clock is used)

FE ACTIVE SENSINGrx Check MIDI cable connections

FF RESET rx Clear running status

3.4 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

3.4.1 Real Time System Exclusive

3.4.1.1 MMC

command rx/tx function

-----------------------+-----+-------------------------------------

01 STOP rx/tx Transport stop

02 PLAY rx

Transport play

03 DEFERRED PLAY rx/tx Transport play

04 FAST FOWARD rx/tx Transport fast-forward

05 REWIND rx/tx Transport rewind

RECORD STROBE

rx Transport punch-in record

07 RECORD EXIT rx Transport punch-out

0F RESET rx/tx MMC reset

40 WRITE rx Write data ﬁeld

44 LOCATE rx/tx Transport locate

3.4.2 Bulk Dump & Request

data

name rx/tx function

-----+-------+------------------------------------

'M' rx/tx Scene Memory & Request

'S' rx/tx Setup Memory & Request

'R' rx/tx Remote Memory & Request

'Q' rx/tx Equalizer Library & Request

'Y' rx/tx Dynamics Library & Request

'E' rx/tx Effect Library & Request

'T' rx/tx Patch Library & Request

'H' rx/tx Channel Library & Request

'A' rx/tx Automix Memory & Request

'P' rx/tx Program Change Assign Table & Request

'C' rx/tx Control Change Assign Table & Request

3.4.3 Parameter Change

Parameter

type rx/tx function

-----+-------+------------------------------------

0x00 rx/tx edit buffer (byte operation format)

0x01 rx system memory (byte operation format)

0x02 rx/tx function call (mem/lib recall,mem/lib

store)

0x10 rx/tx edit buffer (7bit operation format)

0x40 rx/tx edit buffer (bit operation format)

0x41 rx system memory (bit operation format)

0x43 rx controller (key remote) (bit opera-

tion format)

MIDI data format

404

Appendix

4. MIDI format details

4.1 NOTE OFF (8n)

< Reception >

Received when [Rx CH] matches.

Used to control effects. Refer below for details.

STATUS 1000nnnn 8n Note Off Message

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn Note No.

0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (ignored)

4.2 NOTE ON (9n)

< Reception >

Received when [Rx CH] matches.

Used to control effects. Refer below for details.

Velocity of 0x00 is equivalent to Note-Off.

STATUS 1001nnnn 9n Note On Message

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn Note No.

0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (1-127:On, 0:off)

* Effect control by Note

1: Dynamic Flange/Dynamic Phase/Dynamic Filter

When the SOURCE parameter is set to MIDI, the note

velocity (both note-on and note-off) is used to control the

Modulation frequency width.

4.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn)

< Reception >

This message is received when [Control Change RX] is

ON and the [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is

ON, this is received regardless of the channel.

This message is echoed if [Control Change ECHO] is

ON.

Parameters will be controlled according to the [Control

Change Assign Table] settings.

If a message is received while the [Control Change

Assign Table] is displayed, the cursor will move to that

control number.

< Transmission >

If [Control Change TX] is ON, this message is transmitted

on the [Tx CH] channel when a parameter speciﬁed in

the [Control Change Assign Table] is operated.

This message is echoed if [Control Change ECHO] is

ON.

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control Change

DATA 0ccccccc cc Control No. (0-95, 102-

119)

0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)

The control value is converted into a parameter value

according to the following equation.

C = 128 (byte parameter)

16384 (word parameter)

S = total number of variable steps for the parameter

C/S = X remainder Y

INT((Y+1)/2) = Z

If (MIDI data - Z) < 0, then → param = 0

If ((MIDI data - Z)/X) > MAX, then → param = MAX

Otherwise → param = INT((MIDI DATA -Z)/X)

4.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)

< Reception >

This message is received if [Program Change RX] is ON

and [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, this

message is received regardless of the channel.

This message is echoed if [Control Change ECHO] is

ON.

A scene memory will be recalled according to the [Pro-

gram Change Assign Table] settings.

< Transmission >

If [Program Change TX] is ON, performing a Recall oper-

ation on the AW2816 will cause this message to be trans-

mitted on the [Tx CH] according to the [Program Change

Assign Table] settings. If the recalled memory number

has been assigned to more than one program number,

the lowest-numbered program number will be transmit-

ted.

(If a memory number not speciﬁed in the [Program

Change Assign Table] is recalled, the Parameter Change

(Function Call) described below will be transmitted.)

This message is echoed if [Control Change ECHO] is

ON.

STATUS 1100nnnn Cn Program Change

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn Program No. (0-127)

4.5 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER FRAME(F1)

< Transmission >

When the recorder is in Play or Record status, Quarter

Frame messages are transmitted from the MIDI OUT con-

nector (if [MTC] is ON) and from the MTC OUT connec-

tor.

< Reception >

This message is received if [MTC SYNC] is set to SLAVE.

Quarter Frame messages received in realtime are inter-

nally assembled into time code that controls the

recorder.

STATUS 11110001 F1 Quarter Frame Message

DATA 0nnndddd dd nnn = message type (0-7)

dddd = data

4.6 SONG POTISION POINTER(F2)

< Transmission >

If [MIDI CLK] is ON, this message is transmitted when

the recorder Stops or Locates, to indicate the song posi-

tion at which the next Start/Continue will begin.

STATUS 11110010 F2 Song Position Pointer

DATA 0ddddddd dd0 data( H) high 7 bits of 14

bits data

0ddddddd dd1 data( L) low 7 bits of 14

bits data

4.7 TIMING CLOCK(F8)

< Transmission >

If [MIDI CLK] is ON, this message is transmitted accord-

ing to the MIDI Tempo Map from when the recorder

begins playing or recording, until it stops.

STATUS 11111000 F8 Timing Clock

4.8 START(FA)

< Transmission >

If [MIDI CLK] is ON, this message is transmitted when

the recorder begins playing or recording at the ﬁrst mea-

sure.

STATUS 11111010 FA Start

4.9 CONTINUE(FB)

< Transmission >

If [MIDI CLK] is ON, this message is transmitted when

the recorder begins playing or recording at a location

other than the ﬁrst measure.

STATUS 11111011 FB Continue

4.10 STOP(FC)

< Transmission >

If [MIDI CLK] is ON, this message is transmitted when

the recorder stops.

STATUS 11111100 FC Stop

405

Appendix

4.11 ACTIVE SENSING (FE)

< Reception >

Once this message is received, subsequent failure to

receive any message for a period of 300 ms will cause

Running Status to be cleared, and MIDI communications

to be initialized.

STATUS 11111110 FE Active Sensing

4.12 RESET

< Reception >

When a Reset message is received, MIDI communica-

tions will be initialized by clearing Running Status etc.

STATUS 11111111 FF Reset

4.13 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE (F0-F7)

4.13.1 MMC

4.13.1.1 MMC STOP

< Transmission>

When the STOP key is pressed, this message is transmit-

ted with a device number of 7F.

< Reception >

If the AW2816 is operating as an MMC Slave, the trans-

port will stop when this message is received with a

matching device number or a device number of 7F.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all

call)

Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Com-

mand(mcc) sub-id

00000001 01 Stop(MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.1.2 MMC PLAY

< Reception >

If the AW2816 is operating as an MMC Slave, the trans-

port will begin playback when this message is received

with a matching device number or a device number of

7F.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all

call)

Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Com-

mand(mcc) sub-id

00000010 02 Play(MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.1.3 MMC DEFERRED PLAY

< Transmission >

This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F

when the PLAY key is pressed.

< Reception >

If the AW2816 is operating as an MMC Slave, the trans-

port will begin playback when this message is received

with a matching device number or a device number of

7F.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all

call)

Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Com-

mand(mcc) sub-id

00000011 03 Deferred play(MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.1.4 MMC FAST FORWARD

< Transmission >

This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F

when the FF key is pressed or when the Shuttle is rotated

toward the right to enter Cue mode.

< Reception >

If the AW2816 is operating as an MMC Slave, the trans-

port will begin fast-forward when this message is

received with a matching device number or a device

number of 7F.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all

call)

Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Com-

mand(mcc) sub-id

00000110 04 Fast Forward(MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.1.5 MMC REWIND

< Transmission >

This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F

when the REWIND key is pressed or when the Shuttle is

rotated toward the left to enter Review mode.

< Reception >

If the AW2816 is operating as an MMC Slave, the trans-

port will begin rewind when this message is received

with a matching device number or a device number of

7F.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all

call)

Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Com-

mand(mcc) sub-id

00000101 05 Rewind(MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.1.6 MMC RECORD STROBE

< Reception >

This message is received if the AW2816 is operating as

an MMC Slave and the device number matches or is 7F.

If the transport is stopped, then recording will begin. If

the transport is playing, then punch-in will occur.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all

call)

Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Com-

mand(mcc) sub-id

00000110 06 Record strobe

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.1.7 MMC RECORD EXIT

< Reception >

This message is received if the AW2816 is operating as

an MMC Slave and the device number matches or is 7F.

If the transport is recording, then punch-out will occur.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all

call)

Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Com-

mand(mcc) sub-id

00000111 07 Record Exit

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.1.8 MMC RESET

< Transmission >

This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F

when song loading is ﬁnished.

MIDI data format

406

Appendix

< Reception >

This message is received if the AW2816 is operating as

an MMC Slave and the device number matches or is 7F.

MMC-related internal settings will be reset to the power-

on state.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all

call)

Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Com-

mand(mcc) sub-id

00001101 0D Reset

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.1.9 MMC WRITE

< Reception >

This message is received if the AW2816 is operating as

an MMC Slave and the device number matches or is 7F.

Data will be written into the speciﬁed information ﬁeld.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all

call)

Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Com-

mand(mcc) sub-id

01000000 40 Write

0ccccccc cc Byte Count

0nnnnnnn nn Writeable Information

Field name

0ddddddd dd Format defined by the

Information Filed name

: :

0nnnnnnn nn More nn dd... pairs as

required..

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.1.9.1 MMC INFORMATION FIELD - TRACK

RECORD READY

< Reception >

This message is received if the AW2816 is operating as

an MMC Slave and the device number matches. REC

SELECT will be switched on/off for the recorder tracks as

speciﬁed by the Standard Track Bitmap data.

01001111 4F Track Record Ready (Infor-

mation Field name)

0nnnnnnn nn Data Length (0:all track

off, 3:record track on)

0aaaaaaa aa 1-2tr rec track On(Stan-

dard Track Bitmap)

0bbbbbbb bb 3-9tr rec track On

0ccccccc cc 10-16tr rec track On

4.13.1.10 MMC LOCATE(TARGET)

< Transmission >

This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F

when a locate-related key such as MARK SEARCH/IN/

OUT is pressed, a FF/REW/shuttle operation is per-

formed, when the transport returns to the auto-punch

pre-roll point, or when repeating.

< Reception >

This message is received if the AW2816 is operating as

an MMC Slave and the device number matches. The

transport will locate to the time code position speciﬁed

within the command data.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all

call)

Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Com-

mand(mcc) sub-id

01000100 44 Locate

00000110 06 byte count

00000001 01 "target" sub command

0hhhhhhh hh hour (Standard Time Code)

0mmmmmmm mm minute

0sssssss ss second

0fffffff ff frame

0sssssss ss sub-frame

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.2 Bulk Dump & Request

This message inputs/outputs the contents of various inter-

nal memories.

The unique header is used to distinguish whether the

data belongs to the AW2816.

The check sum is calculated by adding the bytes starting

after BYTE COUNT (LOW) and ending before CHECK

SUM, then inverting the bits and adding 1 (binary com-

plement), and setting bit 7 to 0.

CHECK SUM = ( -sum) & 0x7F

< Reception >

This message is received if [Bulk RX] is on, and the [Rx

CH] matches the MIDI channel included in the Sub Sta-

tus.

When a bulk dump is received, it is immediately written

into the speciﬁed memory.

When a bulk dump request is received, a bulk dump will

be transmitted immediately.

< Transmission >

Bulk Dump messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH] in

response to key operations in the [MIDI BULK] screen.

Bulk Dump messages are transmitted on the [Rx CH] in

response to Bulk Dump Request messages.

4.13.2.1 Scene Memory Bulk Dump Format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

BYTE COUNT

(HIGH) 00010110 16 2837(2827+10)bytes

BYTE COUNT

(LOW) 00010101 15

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01001101 4D 'M'

0mmmmmmm mm m=0-96,127(Scene Memory

No.0-96, edit buffer)

Receive is effective No.1-

96,127

DATA 0ddddddd ds Scene Memory(33+(1361*2)

bytes)

: :

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds

+...+de)+1) AND 7Fh

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

The ﬁrst 33 bytes are ID + Protect + Title, and are 7 bit.

The subsequent 1363 bytes are all divided into 4 bit

units.

407

Appendix

4.13.2.2 Scene Memory Bulk Dump Request For-

mat

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01001101 4D 'M'

0mmmmmmm mm m=0-97,127(Scene Memory

No.0-97, edit buffer)

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.2.3 Setup Memory Bulk Dump Format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

BYTE COUNT

(HIGH) 00000100 04 522(512+10)bytes

BYTE COUNT

(LOW) 00001010 0A

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01010011 53 'S'

00100000 20 ' '

DATA 0ddddddd ds Setup Memory(256*2bytes)

: :

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds

+...+de)+1) AND 7Fh

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

All data is divided into 4 bit units.

4.13.2.4 Setup Memory Bulk Dump Request For-

mat

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01010011 53 'S'

00100000 20 ' '

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.2.5 Remote Memory Bulk Dump Format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

BYTE COUNT

(HIGH) 00001010 0A 1294(1284+10)bytes

BYTE COUNT

(LOW) 00001110 0E

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01010010 52 'R'

0bbbbbbb bb b = 0-3(bank no.A-D)

DATA 0ddddddd ds Remote(Internal Parame-

ter) Memory(642*2bytes)

: :

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds

+...+de)+1) AND 7Fh

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

All data is divided into 4 bit units.

4.13.2.6 Remote Memory Bulk Dump Request For-

mat

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01010010 52 'R'

0bbbbbbb bb b = 0-3(bank no.A-D)

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.2.7 Equalizer Library Bulk Dump Format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

BYTE COUNT

(HIGH) 00000000 00 58(48+10)bytes

BYTE COUNT

(LOW) 00111010 3A

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01010001 51 'Q'

0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-127 (Equalizer

Library No.1-128)

Receive is effective

No.41-128

DATA 0ddddddd ds Equalizer Library Mem-

ory(16+(16*2)bytes)

: :

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds

+...+de)+1) AND 7Fh

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

The ﬁrst 16 bytes are the title, and are 7 bit. The subse-

quent 17 bytes are all divided into 4 bit units.

MIDI data format

408

Appendix

4.13.2.8 Equalizer Library Bulk Dump Request

Format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01010001 51 'Q'

0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-127 (Equalizer

Library No.1-128)

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.2.9 Dynamics Library Bulk Dump Format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

BYTE COUNT

(HIGH) 00000000 00 40(30+10)bytes

BYTE COUNT

(LOW) 00101000 28

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01011001 59 'Y'

0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-127 (Dynamics Library

No.1-128)

Receive is effective

No.41-128

DATA 0ddddddd ds Dynamics Library Mem-

ory(16+(7*2)bytes)

: :

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds

+...+de)+1) AND 7Fh

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

The ﬁrst 16 bytes are the title, and are 7 bit. The subse-

quent 7 bytes are all divided into 4 bit units.

4.13.2.10 Dynamics Library Bulk Dump Request

Format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01011001 59 'Y'

0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-127 (Dynamics Library

No.1-128)

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.2.11 Effect Library Bulk Dump Format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

BYTE COUNT

(HIGH) 00000000 00 112(102+10)bytes

BYTE COUNT

(LOW) 01110000 70

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01000101 45 'E'

0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-127 (Effect Library

No.1-128)

Receive is effective 42-

128

DATA 0ddddddd ds Effect Library Mem-

ory(16+(43*2)bytes)

: :

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds

+...+de)+1) AND 7Fh

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

The ﬁrst 12 bytes are the title, and are 7 bit. The subse-

quent 41 bytes are all divided into 4 bit units.

4.13.2.12 Effect Library Bulk Dump Request For-

mat

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01000101 45 'E'

0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-127 (Effect Library

No.1-128)

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.2.13 Patch Library Bulk Dump Format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

BYTE COUNT

(HIGH) 00000000 00 110(100+10)bytes

BYTE COUNT

(LOW) 01101110 6E

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01010100 54 'T'

0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-20 (Patch Library

No.0-20)

Receive is effective No.1-

409

Appendix

DATA 0ddddddd ds Effect Library Mem-

ory(16+(42*2)bytes)

: :

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds

+...+de)+1) AND 7Fh

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

The ﬁrst 12 bytes are the title, and are 7 bit. The subse-

quent 41 bytes are all divided into 4 bit units.

4.13.2.14 Patch Library Bulk Dump Request For-

mat

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01010100 54 'T'

0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-20 (Patch Library

No.0-20)

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.2.15 Channel Library Bulk Dump Format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

BYTE COUNT

(HIGH) 00000000 00 112(102+10)bytes

BYTE COUNT

(LOW) 01110000 70

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01001000 48 'H'

0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-64 (Channel Library

No.0-64)

Receive is effective No.2-

DATA 0ddddddd ds Effect Library Mem-

ory(16+(43*2)bytes)

: :

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds

+...+de)+1) AND 7Fh

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

The ﬁrst 12 bytes are the title, and are 7 bit. The subse-

quent 41 bytes are all divided into 4 bit units.

4.13.2.16 Channel Library Bulk Dump Request

Format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01001000 48 'H'

0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-64 (Channel Library

No.0-64)

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.2.17 Automix Bulk Dump Format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

BYTE COUNT

(HIGH) 00010000 10 2078(1024*2+20+10)bytes

BYTE COUNT

(LOW) 00011110 1E

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01000001 41 'A'

0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-16 (Channel Library

No.1-16, current buffer)

DATA 0xxxxxxx xx block count (high)

0xxxxxxx xx block count (low) [0 -

(size-1)]

0xxxxxxx xx total block count (high)

0xxxxxxx xx total block count (low)

[size-1]

0ttttttt tt title1

: :

0ttttttt tt title16

0ddddddd ds Automix Memory(1024*2

bytes)

: :

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds

+...+de)+1) AND 7Fh

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.2.18 Automix Bulk Dump Request Format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01000001 41 'A'

0mmmmmmm mm m= 0-16 (Channel Library

No.1-16, current buffer)

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

MIDI data format

410

Appendix

4.13.2.19 Program Change Assign Table Bulk

Dump Format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

BYTE COUNT

(HIGH) 00000001 01 138(128+10)bytes

BYTE COUNT

(LOW) 00001010 0A

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01010000 50 'P'

00100000 20 ' '

DATA 0ddddddd ds Program Change

Table(128bytes)

: :

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds

+...+de)+1) AND 7Fh

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

All data is 7 bit.

4.13.2.20 Program Change Assign Table Bulk

Dump Request Format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01010000 50 'P'

00100000 20 ' '

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

4.13.2.21 Control Change Assign Table Bulk Dump

Format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

BYTE COUNT

(HIGH) 00000010 02 352(342+10)bytes

BYTE COUNT

(LOW) 01100000 60

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01000011 43 'C'

00100000 20 ' '

DATA 0ddddddd ds Control Change

Table(114*3bytes)

: :

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(INVERT('L'+'M'+...+ds

+...+de)+1) AND 7Fh

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

All data is 7 bit.

4.13.2.22 Control Change Assign Table Bulk Dump

Request Format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15(MIDI Channel No.1-

16)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump

01001100 4C 'L'

01001101 4D 'M'

00100000 20 ' '

00111000 38 '8'

01000011 43 'C'

00110011 33 '3'

00110110 36 '6'

DATA NAME 01000011 43 'C'

00100000 20 ' '

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

411

Appendix

4.13.3 Parameter Change

4.13.3.1 Basic format

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0pppnnnn pn p=mode (1:parameter change

or response for request

3:parameter request)

n=0-15(Rx Channel No.1-16)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODEL ID(Digital Mixer)

MODEL ID 00000111 07 Device Code(AW2816)

PARAM TYPE 0ttttttt tt Parameter type

DATA 0ddddddd dd0 data 0

: :

0ddddddd ddn data n

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

Parameter

type rx/tx function

------+------+-----------------------------------

0x00 rx/tx edit buffer (byte operation format)

0x01 rx/tx setup memory (byte operation format)

0x02 rx/tx function call (mem/lib recall,mem/lib

store)

0x10 rx/tx edit buffer (7bit operation format)

0x40 rx/tx edit buffer (bit operation format)

0x41 rx/tx setup memory (bit operation format)

0x43 rx/tx controller (key remote) (bit opera-

tion format)

4.13.3.2 Parameter Change (byte operation for

type 0x00:edit buffer)

4.13.3.2

< Reception >

This message is received if [Parameter Change RX] is ON

and the [Rx CH] matches the MIDI channel included in

the Sub Status.

This message will be echoed if [Parameter Change

ECHO] is ON.

When this message is received, the speciﬁed parameter

will be controlled.

< Transmission >

If [Parameter Change TX] is ON, this message will be

transmitted on the [Tx CH] MIDI channel when a param-

eter not speciﬁed in the [Control Change Assign Table] is

edited.

This message will be echoed if [Parameter Change

ECHO] is ON.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change or

response n=0-15(MIDI

Channel No.1-16)

GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID(digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000111 07 Device code (AW2816)

PARAM TYPE 00000000 00 byte operation for edit

buffer (type)

DATA 0aaaaaaa dd1 address( H) high 7 bits of

14 bits address

0aaaaaaa dd2 address( L) low 7 bits of

14 bits address

0000dddd dd3 data( H) high 4 bits of 8

bits data

0000dddd dd4 data( L) low 4 bits of 8

bits data

: : continuous address datas

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

The range of valid addresses is 0x0000 - 0x0595.

4.13.3.3 Parameter Change (7bit operation for

type 0x10:edit buffer)

< Reception >

This message is received if [Parameter Change RX] is ON

and the [Rx CH] matches the MIDI channel included in

the Sub Status.

This message will be echoed if [Parameter Change

ECHO] is ON.

When this message is received, the speciﬁed parameter

will be controlled.

< Transmission >

If [Parameter Change TX] is ON, this message will be trans-

mitted on the [Tx CH] MIDI channel when a parameter not

speciﬁed in the [Control Change Assign Table] is edited.

This message will be echoed if [Parameter Change

ECHO] is ON.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change n=0-

15(MIDI Channel No.1-16)

GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID(digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000111 07 Device code (AW2816)

PARAM TYPE 00010000 10 7bit operation for edit

buffer (type)

DATA 0aaaaaaa dd0 address( H) high 7 bits of

14 bits address

0aaaaaaa dd1 address( L) low 7 bits of

14 bits address

0ddddddd dd2 data 7bit

: :

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

The range of valid addresses is 0x0000 - 0x0595.

4.13.3.4 Parameter Change (bit operation for type

0x40:edit buffer)

< Reception >

This message is received if [Parameter Change RX] is ON

and the [Rx CH] matches the MIDI channel included in

the Sub Status.

This message will be echoed if [Parameter Change

ECHO] is ON.

When this message is received, the speciﬁed parameter

will be controlled.

< Transmission >

If [Parameter Change TX] is ON, this message will be trans-

mitted on the [Tx CH] MIDI channel when a parameter not

speciﬁed in the [Control Change Assign Table] is edited.

This message will be echoed if [Parameter Change

ECHO] is ON.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change n=0-

15(MIDI Channel No.1-16)

GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID(digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000111 07 Device code (AW2816)

PARAM TYPE 01000000 40 bit operation for edit

buffer (type)

DATA 0aaaaaaa dd0 address( H) high 7 bits of

14 bits address

0aaaaaaa dd1 address( L) low 7 bits of

14 bits address

0ddddddd dd2 data(bit0-2:change bit

no.0-7, bit3:0=reset

1=set)

: :

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

The range of valid addresses is 0x0000 - 0x0595.

MIDI data format

412

Appendix

4.13.3.5 Parameter Change (byte operation for

type 0x01:setup memory)

< Reception >

This message is received if [Parameter Change RX] is ON

and the [Rx CH] matches the MIDI channel included in

the Sub Status.

This message will be echoed if [Parameter Change

ECHO] is ON.

When this message is received, the speciﬁed parameter

will be controlled.

< Transmission >

This message will be echoed if [Parameter Change

ECHO] is ON.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change or

response n=0-15(MIDI

Channel No.1-16)

GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID(digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000111 07 Device code (AW2816)

PARAM TYPE 00000001 01 byte operation for system

memory (type)

DATA 0aaaaaaa dd0 address( H) high 7 bits of

14 bits address

0aaaaaaa dd1 address( L) low 7 bits of

14 bits address

0000dddd dd2 data( H) high 4 bits of 8

bits data

0000dddd dd3 data( L) low 4 bits of 8

bits data

: : continuous address datas

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

The range of valid addresses is 0x0000 - 0x00ff.

4.13.3.6 Parameter Change (bit operation for type

0x41:setup memory)

< Reception >

This message is received if [Parameter Change RX] is ON

and the [Rx CH] matches the MIDI channel included in

the Sub Status.

This message will be echoed if [Parameter Change

ECHO] is ON.

When this message is received, the speciﬁed parameter

will be controlled.

< Transmission >

This message will be echoed if [Parameter Change

ECHO] is ON.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change or

response n=0-15(MIDI

Channel No.1-16)

GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID(digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000111 07 Device code (AW2816)

PARAM TYPE 01000001 41 bit operation for system

memory (type)

DATA 0aaaaaaa dd0 address( H) high 7 bits of

14 bits address

0aaaaaaa dd1 address( L) low 7 bits of

14 bits address

0ddddddd dd2 data(bit0-2:change bit

no.0-7, bit3:0=reset

1=set)

: :

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

The range of valid addresses is 0x0000 - 0x00ff.

4.13.3.7 Parameter Value Request(type 0x00:edit

buffer, 0x01:setup memory)

< Reception >

This message is received if [Parameter Change RX] is ON

and the [Rx CH] matches the MIDI channel included in

the Sub Status.

This message will be echoed if [Parameter Change

ECHO] is ON and this AW2816 unit did not receive the

message.

When this message is received, the value of the speciﬁed

parameter will be transmitted as a Parameter Change

Message.

< Transmission >

This message will be echoed if [Parameter Change

ECHO] is ON and this AW2816 unit did not receive the

message.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n parameter request n=0-

15(MIDI Channel No.1-16)

GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID(digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000111 07 Device code (AW2816)

PARAM TYPE 00tttttt tt 00:edit buffer, 01:system

memory (type)

DATA 0aaaaaaa dd0 address( H) high 7 bits of

14 bits address

0aaaaaaa dd1 address( L) low 7 bits of

14 bits address

0ddddddd dd count

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

The range of valid addresses is edit buffer 0x0000 -

0x0595 and setup memory 0x0000 - 0x00ff.

4.13.3.8 Parameter Change (type 0x02:function

call)

< Reception >

This message is received if [Parameter Change RX] is ON

and the [Rx CH] matches the MIDI channel included in

the Sub Status.

This message will be echoed if [Parameter Change

ECHO] is ON.

When this message is received, the corresponding mem-

ory or library will be recalled or stored.

< Transmission >

This message will be echoed if [Parameter Change

ECHO] is ON.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change n=0-

15(MIDI Channel No.1-16)

GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID(digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000111 07 Device code (AW2816)

PARAM TYPE 00000010 02 function call

DATA 0ddddddd dd0 function

0ddddddd dd1 number

0ddddddd dd2 channel

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

413

Appendix

function number channel Tx/Rx

-----------------------+------------------------+---------+---------

0x00 scene recall 0-96(memory 0-96) 0x00 Tx* /Rx

0x01 eq lib recall 0-127(library 1-128) 0-26 Tx/Rx

0x02 dyn lib recall 0-127(library 1-128) 0-23,26 Tx/Rx

0x03 eff lib recall 0-127(library 1-128) 24,25 Tx/Rx

0x04 ch lib recall 0-64(library 0-64) 0-26 Tx/Rx

0x05 patch lib recall 0-20(library 0-20) 0 Tx/Rx

0x10 scene store 1-96(memory 1-99) 0x00 Rx only

0x11 eq lib store 40-127(library 41-128) 0-26 Rx only

0x12 dyn lib store 40-127(library 41-128) 0-23,26 Rx only

0x13 eff lib store 41-127(library 42-128) 24,25 Rx only

0x13 ch lib store 2-64(library 2-64) 0-26 Rx only

0x13 patch lib store 1-20(library 1-20) 0 Rx only

Channel 0-7(INPUT 1-8), 8-23(MONITOR 1-16), 24,25(RTN 1-2/EFF 1-2), 26(st mas)

* [0x00: scene recall] is transmitted only when you recall

a program that has not been assigned in the [Program

change table]. Normally a program change will be trans-

mitted.

4.13.3.9 Parameter Change (type 0x43:control-

ler(key remote))

< Reception >

This message is received if [Parameter Change RX] is ON

and the [Rx CH] matches the MIDI channel included in

the Sub Status.

This message will be echoed if [Parameter Change

ECHO] is ON.

When this message is received, the same processing will

be performed as when the speciﬁed key (see table below)

is pressed (released)

< Transmission >

This message will be echoed if [Parameter Change

ECHO] is ON.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacturer's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change n=0-

15(MIDI Channel No.1-16)

GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID(digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000111 07 Device code (AW2816)

PARAM TYPE 01000011 43 controller

DATA 00000000 00 control no.(0:key remote)

0ddddddd dd No. 0-13(key 1-14)

0000dddd dd data(bit0-2:change bit

no.0-7, bit3:0=reset

1=set)

: :

EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive

KEY

key no.

rx/tx bit0 bit1 bit2 bit3 bit4 bit5 bit6 bit7

------+-----+-----+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------

key1 0 rx SONG PATCH AUX3 MON9-16 CTRL SEL7 ON3 ONRTN1

key2 1 rx CUE REC6 REC13 AUTOMIX REDO NUM SET END

key3 2 rx FILE VIEW AUX4 SHIFT SEL1 SEL8 ON4 ONRTN2

key4 3 rx METER REC7 REC14 SCENE JOGON MARK< REPEAT CANCEL

key5 4 rx CD PAN AUX5 F1 SEL2 SELST ON5 SOLO

key6 5 rx REC1 REC8 REC15 STORE UP MAEK> A REW

key7 6 rx QUICK EQ AUX6 F2 SEL8 RELRTN1 ON6 REMOTE

key8 7 rx REC2 REC9 REC16 SCENE- DOWN MARK B FF

key9 8 rx SETUP DYN HOME F3 SEL4 SELRTN2 ON7 SAFE

key10 9 rx REC3 REC10 RECST SCENE+ LEFT PUNCH ROLL STOP

key11 10 rx UTILITY AUX1 INPUT F4 SEL5 ON1 ON8 --------

key12 11 rx REC4 REC11 TRACK RECALL RIGHT IN TOP PLAY

key13 12 rx MIDI AUX2 MONI1-8 F5 SEL6 ON2 ONST FOOT SW

key14 13 rx REC5 REC12 EDIT UNDO ENTER OUT RTZ REC

You must transmit Reset (bit 3=0) after transmitting Set

(bit 3=1).

YAMAHA [PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION] Date: Mar 29, 2001

Model: AW2816

MIDI Implementation Chart

Version: 1.0

Function... Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

Default

Changed

1–16

Memorized

Mode

Default

Messages

Altered

**************

OMNI off/OMNI on

Memorized

Note

Number :True Voice

**************

0–127

Velocity

Note On

Note Off

After

Touch

Key’s

Ch’s

Pitch Bend X X

Control

Change

0-95,102-119 O O Assignable

Prog

Change :True#

0–127

**************

0–127

0–96

Assignable

System Exclusive O O *1

System

Common

:Song Pos

:Song Sel

:Tune

System

Real Time

:Clock

:Commands

Aux

Messages

:Local ON/OFF

:All Notes OFF

:Active Sense

:Reset

Notes

MTC quarter frame message is transmitted.(When MTC Sync mode)

MTC quarter frame message is recognized.(When MTC Sync mode)

*1: MMC

*2: When MCLK Sync mode

For MIDI remote, ACC messages canbe transmitted.

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO

O: Yes

X: No

415

Index

A point 328

A/B points 99, 102

A-B Repeat 99

Analog input/output sec-

tion 13

Apple Macintosh comput-

er 190

Attenuation 296

Audio tracks 33

AUTOMATION section

Automix 133

Basic settings 338

Creating 134

Editing individual

events 143

Event list 344

Play back 136

Punch-in/out 139

Recalling 146

Recording 135

Re-recording fader op-

erations 141

Store/recall 341

Storing 145

AUX buses 1–6 31

AUX send 307

B point 328

Backup

Backing up songs 162

Restoring backup data

164

BATTERY 268

Beat map 194

BULK 273

Bulk Dump 212, 281

Buses 1–8 31

Buttons 35, 36

Cascade 256

CATEGORY 258

CD Play 177, 252

CD-DA 174, 333

CD-R 179

CD-RW 179

Erasing media 161, 249

CD-RW drive 26, 179

Channel library 218, 291

Character palette 37

Connections 41

CONTROL CHANGE

272

Control change 202

Control change numbers

277

Copy

Attenuator 224

Delay time/phase 225

Fade time 226

Pan 226

Counter 34

Current song 148

Cursor 34

CURSOR/JOG&SHUTTLE

section 19

Defrag 166, 248

Delay 306

Device ID 196

Digital cascade connec-

tion 30

Disc At Once 180, 250

Display 17, 34

Display message list 392

Display section 17

Dithering 227, 259, 260

Dynamics

Dynamics Processors

377

Preset Dynamics Pro-

gram Parameters

382

Preset Dynamics Pro-

grams 377

Dynamics library 222,

304

Dynamics processor 55,

302

Editing commands 118

Effect

Effects Parameters 362

External effect 78

Internal effects 83

Preset Effects Programs

360

Effect library 84, 311

Effect parameters 92, 309

Effect program 93

Effect send 313

EFFECT TYPE 309

EMPHASIS 258

End point 102, 327

EQ 296

Preset EQ Program Pa-

rameters 356

EQ library 220, 298

Equalizer 54

External effect 78

Fade time 348

Fader 35, 36

Fader groups 67, 300

Fader mode 38

FADER MODE section 15

Fader Recall Safe 349

Fader section 16

Finalize 185, 250

Format 159, 160, 248

Frame rate 192, 238

Function keys 215

GANG 293

Hard disk

Checking the free space

on the internal

hard disk 181

Defrag 166

Formatting an external

hard disk 160

Formatting the internal

hard disk 159

Headphone output 32

I/O card

MY4-AD 10

MY4-DA 10

MY8-AD 10

MY8-AE 10

MY8-AT 10

MY8-TD 10

IBM/PC compatible com-

puter 190

In point 64, 102, 327

INDIVIDUAL 293

Input channels 1–8 28

Input level 46

Input patch 27, 71

Inputting text 37

Installing a CD-RW drive

Installing an internal

CD-RW drive 4

Installing I/O card

Installing 10

Internal clock

Setting 11

Internal effects 59, 83

AUX send/return 83,

Effect parameters 92

Effect program 93

Inserting 83, 88

Post-fader 86

Pre-fader 86

Return level 87

Send level 87

Internal effects 1/2 32,

309

Internal hard disk

Defrag 248

Format 248

Installing an internal

hard disk 2

INTERVAL 282

INVERTED GANG 293

KEY IN SOURCE 302

Knob 35, 36

LAST SOLO 69, 261

LATCH 315

LEARN 315

Locate 100

Locate point 100, 102,

327

Deleting 106

Editing the location

104

LOCATE section 20

Marker 103, 327

Deleting 106

Editing the location

104

Mastering 179, 250

Mastering mode 181

Metronome 229

MIDI

Bulk Dump 212, 281

Connect 189

Control change 202,

272

Control change num-

bers 277

Data format 402

Implementation Chart

414

MIDI clock 194

MIDI Remote 206

MMC 196

MMC DEVICE 274

MMC MODE 274

MTC 192

MTC SYNC 273

Parameter change 202,

204, 273

Program change 200,

272

Program change num-

bers 276

SYNC OFFSET 273

Synchronize 192, 194

System exclusive 202

MIDI clock 194

ON/OFF 275

Index

416

Index

MIDI IN connector 188

MIDI OUT/THRU connec-

tor 188

MIDI remote 206, 314

MIX SOLO 69, 261

Mixdown 58

MIXDOWN SOLO 69,

261

Mixer data 155

MIXER section 14, 25

MIXING LAYER section

MMC 196

MMC DEVICE 274

MMC MODE 274

MO drive

Formatting 160

Monitor channels 1–16

Monitor level 50

Monitor output 32

MTC 192

ON/OFF 275

SYNC AVERAGE 273

MTC OUT connector 188

MTC SYNC 273

Mute 322

Mute groups 68, 301

MY4-AD 10

MY4-DA 10

MY8-AD 10

MY8-AE 10

MY8-AT 10

MY8-TD 10

Nudge function 96

Nudge time 96, 267

Numerical box 35, 36

Optimize 154, 240

Oscillator 30, 228, 263

Out point 64, 102, 327

Output patch 32, 74

Overdubbing 52

Pages 36

Pair 295, 324

Pairing channels 47

Pairing tracks 66

Pan 293

Parameter change 202,

204, 273

Part 108

Editing 113

PART menu 121, 329

Patch library 286

Patching 71

PERFECTLY 161

Phase 306

Pingpong-recording 232

Play mode 96, 266

Plug-in 287

Post-fader 307, 313

POSTROLL 266

Power

Turning the power off

Turning the power on

PRE/POST 307, 313

Pre-fader 307, 313

PREROLL 266

Program change 200,

272

Program change num-

bers 276

Punch-in/out

Auto Punch-in/out 64

Manual Punch-in/out

Quick Rec 80, 254

Rear panel 22

REC TRACK SELECT sec-

tion 18

RECALL SAFE 349

Recorder input patch 29,

RECORDER section 18,

RECORDING SOLO 69,

261

Region 108

Naming 109

Region Fade Time 239

REGION menu 125, 329

Relative time zero loca-

tion 101

Restored 246

Return channels 1/2 29

Rollback 98, 266

Routing 293

Scene

Change the order 350

Changing the order

132

Editing the name 130

Protecting 131

Recall/store 346

Recalling 129

Remotely switching

200

Storing 128

Scene memory 127

Parameters 127

SCENE MEMORY sec-

tion 19

Scene numbers 127

Screens 36

SCSI device

Attaching an external

SCSI device 8

SCSI errors 9

Selecting a channel 38

Shut down 243

Shuttle function 95

SIMPLY 161

Solo 69, 261

SOLO SAFE 262

Song 147

Back up 162, 244

Copy 240

Create 237

Creating a new song 42

Delete 153, 240

Duplicating 152

Editing the name/com-

ment 150

Importing mixer data

155

Importing tracks 156

Load 149, 237

Optimize 154, 240

Protecting 151

Recording time 147

Restored 246

Save 62, 148, 237

Settings 238

Structure 147

Specifications 396

ST LINK 302

Start point 102, 105, 327

Stereo link 302

Stereo output channel 31

Stereo track 325

SYNC AVERAGE 273

SYNC OFFSET 273

System exclusive 202

Tabs 35

Tempo map 194, 241

Terminators 9

Text input box 37

The stereo track 33

Time code 105

Time Code Top 105, 239

TO HOST connector 188

Making connections

190

Top panel 13

Track 108, 322

Editing 107, 111

Exporting to WAV files

168

Import 337

Naming 109

Track At Once 180, 250

TRACK menu 118, 329

Transport key 95

Transport protection pad

Transport section 21

UNIT section 14

UNLATCH 315

Vari-pitch 217, 257

Virtual track 33, 66, 324

Editing 107, 116

Exporting to WAV files

171

WAV file 167, 172

Export 167

Import 172, 335

WAVE DISPLAY popup

window 97

Waveform view 97

Word clock 256

Settings 44

Word clock master 44

Word clock slaves 44

Word length 259, 260

WORK NAVIGATE sec-

tion 14

Writing speed 250

STEREO

+48V

OMNI OUT

DIGITAL STEREO OUT

SLOT IN

EFFECT1

EFFECT2

DIGITAL STEREO IN

ATT

INSERT

SELECTED INSERT RETURNS

EFFECT

X 2

EFFECT

EFFECT1~2

SELECT

AUX5(EFF1),

AUX6(EFF2)

INSERT SEND

INPUT 1(...8)

RETURN 1(...2)

BUS 1

BUS 2

BUS 3

BUS 4

BUS 5

BUS 6

BUS 7

BUS 8

STEREO L

STEREO R

SOLO L

SOLO R

AUX 1

AUX 4

AUX 5(EFF1)

AUX 6(EFF2)

INPUT

DELAY

PAN

SOLO

PAN

SOLO

RETURN1 can not be assigned to AUX5(EFF1)

RETURN2 can not be assigned to AUX6(EFF2)

OSCILLATOR

RECORDER INPUT

1(...16)

SOLO

AUX

PAN

LEVEL

PRE/POST ON

Mono in X 8

SOLO

AUX

PAN

LEVEL

PRE/POST ON

Mono in X 16

ATT

CH DIRECT OUT

RECORDER INPUT1-16

INPUT

MONITOR

CH DIRECT OUT1~8

BUS 1~8

STEREO

Hi-z

INPUT 8 ONLY

RECORDER MONI 1(...16)

DITHER

Stereo in X 2

RECORDER

REPRO1-16

RECORDER DIRECT OUT

1~16

CH DIRECT OUT1~8

STEREO

BUS1~8

AUX1~6

INSERT SEND

STEREO OUT

–10dBV

RECORDER DIRECT OUT

1~16

CH DIRECT OUT1~8

STEREO

BUS1~8

AUX1~6

INSERT SEND

RECORDER DIRECT OUT

1~16

CH DIRECT OUT1~8

STEREO

BUS1~8

AUX1~6

INSERT SEND

X 4

0dB

RECORDER DIRECT OUT

1~16

CH DIRECT OUT1~8

STEREO

BUS1~8

AUX1~6

INSERT SEND

PREFADER LISTEN/

AFTER PAN

PREFADER LISTEN/

AFTER PAN

METRONOME

INPUT SELECT

PREFADER LISTEN/

AFTER PAN

MIC/LINE INPUT

OPTION I/O SLOT

DIGITAL STEREO IN R

DIGITAL STEREO IN L

ATT

ENABLE

(BUS CASCADE)

RECORDER

RECORER INPUT 1~16

SELECTSELECT SELECT SELECT

4BAND EQ

LEVELON

4BAND EQ

(Gain Reduction)

(EQ)

RECORDER

ST Trk L/R

INPUT SELECT

(1,2 only)

CD PLAY mode

CD-RW DRIVE

LEVEL

BUS 1(...8)

CD PlayBack

ON BAL

SOLO R

MIXER

SOLO Logic

RECORDER

TRACK CUE

Logic

SOLO L

RECORDER DIRECT

OUT 1

RECORDER DIRECT

OUT 16

+4dB

MONITOR OUT

MONITOR

PHONES

METRONOME

ATTON

STEREO L

STEREO R

INSERT

METER

ATT

OPTION I/O SLOT

METER

RECORDER

DIRECT OUT

RECORDER ST Trk

DIRECT OUT L

RECORDER ST Trk

DIRECT OUT R

INPUT

1-2

INPUT

3-8

PEAK

RECORDER ST Trk

DIRECT OUT

(to BUS CASCADE)

PRE/POST ON AUX

(EEF)

PHANTOM

LINE MIC

COAXIAL

AUX1(...6)

SOLO

LEVEL

METER

METER METER

METERMETER

METER

INPUT

DELAY

INPUT

DELAY

DY-

NAMICS

DY-

NAMICS

INPUT

DELAY

(Gain Reduction)

DY-

NAMICS

DY-

NAMICS

(EQ)

(Gain Reduction)

DITHER

SELECT

INSERT

SLOT OUT

YAMAHA CORPORATION

V766750 R1 1 IP 430 Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

P.O. Box 3, Hamamatsu, 430-8651, Japan

01 08 3500 AP Printed in Japan

Yamaha T-960II, AW2816 El manual del propietario

Artículos relacionados

Otros documentos